150/175/200

150/175/200 EFI
Electronic
Fuel Injection

Starting Model Year 2002

Starting S/N 0T409000
Starting Model Year 2002
Starting Serial Number 0T409000

©2001, Mercury Marine. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. 90-883728 MAY 2001
Notice
Throughout this publication, “Dangers”, “Warnings” and “Cautions” (accompanied by the In-
ternational HAZARD Symbol ) are used to alert the mechanic to special instructions con-
cerning a particular service or operation that may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or
carelessly. OBSERVE THEM CAREFULLY!
These “Safety Alerts” alone cannot eliminate the hazards that they signal. Strict compliance
to these special instructions when performing the service, plus “Common Sense” operation,
are major accident prevention measures.

DANGER
DANGER - Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.

WARNING
WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD result in severe personal in-
jury or death.

CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product
or property damage.

Notice to Users of This Manual

This service manual has been written and published by the Service Department of Mercury
Marine to aid our dealers’ mechanics and company service personnel when servicing the
products described herein.
It is assumed that these personnel are familiar with the servicing procedures of these prod-
ucts, or like or similar products manufactured and marketed by Mercury Marine, that they
have been trained in the recommended servicing procedures of these products which in-
cludes the use of mechanics’ common hand tools and the special Mercury Marine or recom-
mended tools from other suppliers.
We could not possibly know of and advise the service trade of all conceivable procedures
by which a service might be performed and of the possible hazards and/or results of each
method. We have not undertaken any such wide evaluation. Therefore, anyone who uses
a service procedure and/or tool, which is not recommended by the manufacturer, first must
completely satisfy himself that neither his nor the products safety will be endangered by the
service procedure selected.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the
latest product information available at the time of publication. As required, revisions to this
manual will be sent to all dealers contracted by us to sell and/or service these products.
It should be kept in mind, while working on the product, that the electrical system and ignition
system are capable of violent and damaging short circuits or severe electrical shocks. When
performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded or touched by
the mechanic, the battery cables should be disconnected at the battery.
Any time the intake or exhaust openings are exposed during service they should be covered
to protect against accidental entrance of foreign material which could enter the cylinders and
cause extensive internal damage when the engine is started.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page i

 It is important to note, during any maintenance procedure replacement fasteners must have
the same measurements and strength as those removed. Numbers on the heads of the met-
ric bolts and on the surfaces of metric nuts indicate their strength. American bolts use radial
lines for this purpose, while most American nuts do not have strength markings. Mis-
matched or incorrect fasteners can result in damage or malfunction, or possibly personal
injury. Therefore, fasteners removed should be saved for reuse in the same locations when-
ever possible. Where the fasteners are not satisfactory for re-use, care should be taken to
select a replacement that matches the original.

Cleanliness and Care of Outboard Motor

A marine power product is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped
surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the ten thousands of an inch/mm. When any
product component is serviced, care and cleanliness are important. Throughout this manu-
al, it should be understood that proper cleaning, and protection of machined surfaces and
friction areas is a part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice
even if not specifically stated.
Whenever components are removed for service, they should be retained in order. At the
time of installation, they should be installed in the same locations and with the same mating
surfaces as when removed.
Personnel should not work on or under an outboard which is suspended. Outboards should
be attached to work stands, or lowered to ground as soon as possible.
We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without prior notification.
Refer to dealer service bulletins for other pertinent information concerning the products de-
scribed in this manual.

Page Numbering
Two number groups appear at the bottom of each page. The example below is self-explana-
tory.

EXAMPLE:

90-878079R1 OCTOBER 2000 LOWER UNIT - 6A-7

Revision No. 1 Section Description

Month of Printing Section Number

Year of Printing Part of Section Letter

Page Number
Page ii 90-883728 JULY 2001
Service Manual Outline
Section 1 - General Information & Specifications
General Information
& Specifications 1
A - Specifications
B - Maintenance
C - General Information
D - Outboard Installation
Ignition System
2
Section 2 - Electrical
A - Ignition
B - Charging & Starting System
C - Timing, Synchronizing & Adjusting
Fuel System
3
D - Wiring Diagrams
Section 3 - Fuel System
A - Fuel Pump
B - Fuel Injection
Powerhead
4
C - Oil Injection
D - Emissions
Section 4 - Powerhead
A - Powerhead
Mid-Section
5
B - Cooling
Section 5 - Mid-Section
A - Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Drive Shaft Housing
Gear Housing
6
B - Power Trim
Section 6 - Gear Housing
A - Right Hand Non-Ratcheting
B - Left Hand Non-Ratcheting
Attachment/Control Linkage
7
Section 7 - Attachments/Control Linkage
Section 8 - Color Diagrams Color Diagrams
8

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page iii

 SPECIFICATIONS

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1A - Specifications A
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1A-1 Mercury/Quicksilver Lubricants & Sealants . . . 1A-4

Specifications

Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI
HORSEPOWER Model 150XRI 150 (111.8)
(KW) Model 175XRI 175 (130.5)
Model 200XRI 200 (149.1)
Full Throttle RPM (150/175/200) 5250 – 5750
Idle RPM (In Gear) (150/175/200) 650 ± 50
RPM Limiter
All Models Refer to System Information in the
Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) for
latest information
OUTBOARD Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI
WEIGHT Long Shaft 425.0 lb (192.8 kg)
X-Long Shaft 434.0 lb. (196.8 kg)
CYLINDER Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI
BLOCK Type V–6 Cylinder, Two Cycle, Loop
Charged
Displacement 153.0 cu. in. (2507cc)
Thermostat 143°F (61.7°C)
STROKE Length (All Models) 2.650 in. (67.31 mm)
CYLINDER Diameter (Std)
BORE Models 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 3.501 in. (88.925 mm)
Taper/Out of Round/Maximum Wear 0.003 in. (0.076 mm)
Bore Type Cast Iron
CRANKSHAFT Maximum Runout 0.006 (0.152 mm)
PISTON Piston Type Aluminum
Models 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI
Standard 3.494 in. ± 0.001 in.
(88.748 mm ± 0.025 mm)
0.015 in. (0.381 mm) Oversize 3.509 in. ± 0.001 in.
(89.129 mm ± 0.025 mm)
COMPRESSION All Models – Using a fully charged bat- 110 – 135 psi
tery, throttle shutters wide open and (753.3 – 924.5 kPa)
cylinder block warm Variance between cylinders should not
exceed 15 psi (102.7 kPa)
REEDS Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI
Reed Type Steel
Reed Stand 0pen (Max.) 0.020 in. (0.50 mm)
Reed Stop (Max.) Not Adjustable

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1A-1

SPECIFICATIONS

MID Power Trim (Total Tilt Range) 75°

SECTION Power Trim (Tilt Range) 20°
Maximum Allowable Leak down in 24
hrs. 1 in. (25.4 mm)
Tilt Pin Adjustment Positions 5
Steering Pivot Range 60°
Allowable Transom Thickness 2-3/8 in. (6.03 cm) Maximum
FUEL Fuel Gasoline w/Oil Injection
SYSTEM Recommended Gasoline Unleaded 87 Octane Minimum
Recommended Oil Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubri-
cants NMMA/BIA Certified TC-W3
2 Cycle Outboard Oil
Gasoline/Oil Ratio 50:1 (25:1 Break-In) ECM Controlled –
no premix
STARTING Electric Start – All Models
SYSTEM Centrifugal Bendix
Starter Draw (Under Load) 165 Amperes
Starter Load (No Load) 30 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length 0.25 in. (25.4 mm)
Solenoid Driven Bendix
Starter Draw (Under Load) 175 Amperes
Starter Load (No Load) 60 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length 0.25 in. (25.4 mm)
Battery Rating Min. 630 Marine Cranking Amps
(MCA) or 490 Cold Cranking Amps
(CCA)
IGNITION Type Digital Inductive
SYSTEM Spark Plug Type NGK BPZ8HS-10
Spark Plug Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6
Idle Timing Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM
Maximum Timing Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM
Throttle Position Sensor Not Adjustable; Controlled by ECM
CHARGING Alternator Output (Regulated) 42 – 48 Amperes @ 2000 rpm @ Bat-
SYSTEM tery
52 – 60 Amperes @ 2000 rpm @ Al-
ternator
Brush Length Std. Exposed Length: 0.413 in. (10.5
mm)
Min. Exposed Length: 0.059 in. (1.5
mm)
Voltage Output 13.5 to 15.1 Volts
Regulator Current Draw 0.15 mA (Ign, Switch Off)
30.0 mA (Ign. Switch On)

Page 1A-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 SPECIFICATIONS

GEAR Gear Ratio

HOUSING – Models 150XRI 2.00:1 (14/28 teeth)
– Models 175XRI/200XRI 1.87:1 (15/28 teeth)
Gear Ratio – High Altitude
– Models 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 2.00:1 (14/28 teeth)
Gearcase Capacity
– 1.87:1/2.00:1 22.5 fl oz (665.4 ml)
Pinion Height
– All Models 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
Forward Gear Backlash
– 1.87:1 Ratio 0.018 in. – 0.027 in.
(0.460 mm – 0.686 mm)
– 2.00:1 Ratio 0.015 in. – 0.022 in.
(0.381 mm – 0.558 mm)
Water Pressure @ rpm 12 psi Minimum @ 5500 rpm
OIL Recommended Oil Quicksilver or Mercury Precision Lubri-
INJECTION cants NMMA/BIA Certified TC-W3
2 Cycle Outboard Oil
Oil Tank Capacity 3 gal. (11.4 Liter)
Approx. Time
– Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 6.6 hrs. Approx.
Reserve Capacity/Approx. Time 0.74 qt. (0.70 Liter) 20 – 25 min.

Oil Pump Output

– Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 26cc during auto prime time period
FUEL Idle RPM
INJECTION – All Models 625 ± 50
Wide Open Throttle (WOT) RPM
– Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 5250 – 5750
Float Adjustment (Vapor Separator)
Float Level Preset @ Factory
Injectors
– All Models (Quantity) 6
– Injectors are Crank Angle
Driven by ECM
– #1 Cylinder RED + BRN Leads
– #2 Cylinder RED + WHT Leads
– #3 Cylinder RED + ORG Leads
– #4 Cylinder RED + YEL Leads
– #5 Cylinder RED + LT BLUE Leads
– #6 Cylinder RED + PUR Leads
Line Pressure @ Injectors 41 psi – 45 psi (283 kPa – 310 kPa)
Injector Resistance 12.3 ohms ± 0.5 ohms
Electric Fuel Pump Resistance 0.7 ± 0.3 ohms
Electric Fuel Pump Amperage Draw 4 amperes ± 0.5 amperes

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1A-3

SPECIFICATIONS

Mercury/Quicksilver Lubricants and Sealants

Description Mercury Part Number Quicksilver Part Number

Needle Bearing Assy. Lubricant

92-802868A1 N/A
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)] tube

Dielectric Grease
92-823506-1 92-823506-1
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)] can

Loctite 271 – Thread Locker

92-809819 92-809819
(10 ml) tube

Loctite 567 PST Pipe Sealant

92-809822 92-809822
(50 ml) tube

Loctite Master Gasket Kit 92-12564-2 92-12564-2

2 Cycle Premium Outboard Oil

92-802815A1 92-802815Q1
[1 Gallon (3.7 liter)]

Perfect Seal
92-34227-1 92-34227-1
[16 oz. (0.45 kg)] can

Liquid Neoprene
92-25711-3 92-25711-3
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)] can

Cyanacrylate Adhesive Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Bellows Adhesive N/A 92-86166Q1

Loctite 680 Retaining Compound

92-809833 92-809833
(10 ml) tube

Loctite 222 Thread Locker

92-809818 92-809818
(10 ml) tube

3M Permabond #3M08155 Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Loctite 242 Thread Locker

92-809821 92-809821
(10 ml) tube

Loctite 609 Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Loctite 405 Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Page 1A-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 SPECIFICATIONS

Description Mercury Part Number Quicksilver Part Number

RTV 587 Silcone Sealer

92-809825 92-809825
[3 oz. (85.05 grams)]

Loctite 262 Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Premium Gear Lubricant

92-802846A1 92-802846Q1
[1 Quart (0.94 liter)]

Loctite 7649 Primer

92-809824 92-809824
[4.5 oz (127.57 grams)]

Anti-Corrosion Grease
92-802867A1 92-802867Q1
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)] tube

2-4-C with Teflon

92-802859A1 92-802859Q1
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)] tube

Loctite Quick Tite Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Isopropyl Alcohol Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Hot Glue Obtain Locally Obtain Locally

Special Lubricant 101

92-802865A1 92-802865Q1
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)] tube

4 Stroke 10W30 Outboard Oil

92-802833A1 92-802833Q1
[1 Quart (0.94 liter)]

4 Cycle 25W40 Engine Oil

92-802837A1 92-802837Q1
[1 Quart (0.94 liter)]

Power Trim & Steering Fluid

92-802880A1 92-802880Q1
[8 oz. (226.8 grams)]

Engine Coupler Spline Grease

92-802869A1 92-802869Q1
[14 oz. (0.39 kg)] cartridge

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1A-5

 MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1B - Maintenance B
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5
Gear Case Lubricant Capacity . . . . . . . . . 1B-1 Fuel Line Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-5
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-2 Water Separating Fuel Filter – EFI Models 1B-5
Mercury/Quicksilver Lubricants and Sealants 1B-2 Corrosion Control Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-6
Inspection and Maintenance Schedule . . . . . 1B-3 Spark Plug Inspection and Replacement . . . 1B-6
Before Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-3 Battery Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
After Each Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-3 Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-7
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once Yearly, Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-8
Whichever Occurs First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-3 Checking Power Trim Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-9
Flushing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4 Gear Case Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-10
Flushing Cooling System – Storage Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-11
Using Cowl Flush Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B-4
Flushing Cooling System –
Using Flushing Attachment 44357A2 . . . . 1B-4

Specifications
Gear Case Lubricant Capacity
Gear Case Ratio Capacity
1.87:1 22.5 fl. oz. (717 ml)
2.00:1 22.5 fl. oz. (717 ml)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1B-1

MAINTENANCE

Special Tools
1. Grease Gun 91-37299A1

2. Flushing Attachment 44357A2

Mercury/Quicksilver Lubricants and Sealants

NOTE: See section 1A for lubricants and sealants chart.

Page 1B-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 MAINTENANCE

Inspection and Maintenance Schedule

Before Each Use
1. Check that lanyard stop switch stops the engine.
2. Visually inspect the fuel system for deterioration or leaks.
3. Check outboard for tightness on transom.
4. Check steering system for binding or loose components.
5. Visually check steering link rod fasteners for proper tightness.
6. Check propeller blades for damage.
After Each Use
1. Flush out the outboard cooling system if operating in salt or polluted water.
2. Wash off all salt deposits and flush out the exhaust outlet of the propeller and gear
case with fresh water if operating in salt water.
Every 100 Hours of Use or Once Yearly, Whichever Occurs First
1. Lubricate all lubrication points. Lubricate more frequently when used in salt water.
2. Inspect and clean spark plugs.
3. Replace water separating fuel filter – EFI models.
4. Check corrosion control anodes. Check more frequently when used in salt water.
5. Drain and replace gear case lubricant.
6. Lubricate splines on the drive shaft and shift shaft.∗
7. Check power trim fluid.
8. Inspect battery.
9. Check control cable adjustments.∗
10. Check tightness of bolts, nuts, and other fasteners.
11. Replace water pump impeller (more often if overheating occurs or reduced water
pressure is noted).∗
∗ These items should be serviced by an authorized dealer.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1B-3

MAINTENANCE

Flushing Engine
Flushing Cooling System – Using Cowl Flush Plug
Flush the internal water passages of the outboard with fresh water after each use in salt,
polluted or muddy water. This will help prevent a buildup of deposits from clogging the
internal water passages.
NOTE: Engine can be stopped or running at idle speed when flushing the cooling system.
Do not flush engine using a water system that exceeds 45 psi.
1. Remove the plug from fitting in the bottom cowl.

2. Attach a water hose to the fitting. Turn water on and flush for 3 to 5 minutes.
Flushing Cooling System – Using Flushing Attachment 44357A2
WARNING
When flushing, verify that area in vicinity of propeller is clear and that no person
is standing nearby – to avoid possible injury. It is recommended to remove pro-
peller as a precautionary measure.
1. Install Quicksilver Flushing Attachment 44357A2 (or equivalent tool) on the gear
housing from the FRONT side, positioning the rubber cups over the water intake
openings.
2. Connect hose [1/2 in. (12.7 mm) I.D. or larger] between flushing attachment and water
tap.
IMPORTANT: To prevent water pump damage, do not start or run engine unless
cooling water is flowing.
3. With the outboard in the normal operating position (vertical), partially open water tap
(IT IS NOT NECESSARY to use full water pressure) and adjust water flow so that
there is a significant water loss around the rubber cups.
4. Start engine and idle in NEUTRAL. Increase engine speed, not to exceed 2500 RPM.
5. Flush or service engine as required. Verify adequate cooling water is provided.
6. Water must be discharged thru “tell tale.”
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine overheating. If water flow is insufficient, stop engine
and determine cause before continuing.
7. Flush until discharge water is clear. In saltwater areas, run outboard 3 to 5 min-
utes.
8. Stop engine before turning off water.
9. Stop engine, turn water off and remove flushing attachment from gear housing.
IMPORTANT: While and after flushing, keep outboard in upright position until all
water has drained from drive shaft housing to prevent water from entering the pow-
erhead via drive shaft housing and exhaust ports.

Page 1B-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 MAINTENANCE

Fuel System
WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from gasoline fire or explosion. Carefully follow all
fuel system service instructions. Always stop the engine and DO NOT smoke or
allow open flames or sparks in the area while servicing any part of the fuel sys-
tem.
Before servicing any part of the fuel system, stop engine and disconnect the battery. Drain
the fuel system completely. Use an approved container to collect and store fuel. Wipe up
any spillage immediately. Material used to contain spillage must be disposed of in an ap-
proved receptacle. Any fuel system service must be performed in a well ventilated area.
Inspect any completed service work for sign of fuel leakage.
Fuel Line Inspection
Visually inspect the fuel line and primer bulb for cracks, swelling, leaks, hardness, or other
signs of deterioration or damage. If any of these conditions is found, the fuel line or primer
bulb must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: Visually inspect for fuel leakage from the filter connections by
squeezing the primer bulb until firm, forcing fuel into the filter.
Water Separating Fuel Filter – EFI Models
NOTE: The warning system will turn on when water in the fuel filter reaches the full level.
1. This filter removes moisture and also debris from the fuel. If the filter becomes filled
with water, the water can be removed. If the filter becomes plugged with debris, the
filter must be replaced with a new filter.

58800
a - Fuel/Water Separator Filter

Remove and replace filter as follows:

2. Turn ignition key switch to OFF position.
3. Disconnect wire at bottom of filter.
4. Remove filter by turning the filter in the direction of the arrow (clockwise). Tip the
filter to drain fluid in a suitable container.
5. Lubricate the sealing ring on the filter with oil. Thread on the filter and tighten se-
curely by hand. Reconnect the wire to the filter.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1B-5

MAINTENANCE

Corrosion Control Anode

The gear case has two corrosion control anodes (a). Another anode (b) is installed on the
bottom of the transom bracket assembly. An anode helps protect the outboard against
galvanic corrosion by sacrificing its metal to be slowly eroded instead of the outboard
metals.

b
Each anode requires periodic inspection especially in salt water which will accelerate the
erosion. To maintain this corrosion protection, always replace the anode before it is com-
pletely eroded. Never paint or apply a protective coating on the anode as this will reduce
effectiveness of the anode.

Spark Plug Inspection and Replacement

Inspect spark plugs at the recommended intervals.

WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from fire or explosion caused by damaged spark
plug boots. Damaged spark plug boots can emit sparks. Sparks can ignite fuel
vapors under the engine cowl. To avoid damaging spark plug boots, do not use
any sharp object or metal tool such as pliers, screwdriver, etc. to remove spark
plug boots.
1. Remove the spark plug leads by twisting the rubber boots slightly and pulling off.
2. Remove the spark plugs to inspect and clean. Replace spark plug if electrode is worn
or the insulator is rough, cracked, broken, blistered or fouled.

3. Set the spark plug gap. See Specification Chart.

4. Before reinstalling spark plugs, clean away dirt on the spark plug seats. Install plugs
finger tight, and tighten 1/4 turn or torque to 20 lb-ft (27 Nm).

Page 1B-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 MAINTENANCE

Battery Inspection
The battery should be inspected at periodic intervals to ensure proper engine starting
capability.
IMPORTANT: Read the safety and maintenance instructions which accompany
your battery.
1. Turn off the engine before servicing the battery.
2. Add water as necessary to keep the battery full.
3. Make sure the battery is secure against movement.
4. Battery cable terminals should be clean, tight, and correctly installed. Positive to posi-
tive and negative to negative.
5. Make sure the battery is equipped with a nonconductive shield to prevent accidental
shorting of battery terminals.

Fuse Replacement
IMPORTANT: Always carry spare SFE 15 and 20 AMP fuses.
The electrical wiring circuits on the outboard are protected from overload by fuses in the
wiring. If a fuse is blown, try to locate and correct the cause of the overload. If the cause
is not found, the fuse may blow again.
1. Open the fuse holder and look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If band is
broken, replace the fuse. Replace fuse with a new fuse with the same rating.
2. The fuses and circuits are identified as follows:
1. Smart Craft Data Bus Circuit – SFE 15 Ampere Fuse
2. Fuel Injector Harness, Electric Fuel Pump and Oil Pump
3. Main Power Relay, Remote Control Harness and Power Trim
4. Ignition Coils

1 3

2 4
58802

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1B-7

MAINTENANCE

Lubrication Points
Lubricate Point 1 with Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101.
1. Trim Rod Ball Ends – Turn the ball ends to work the lubricant into the ball sockets.

1
1
Lubricate Point 2 with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon.
2. Propeller Shaft – Refer to Propeller Replacement for removal and installation of the
propeller. Coat the entire propeller shaft with lubricant to prevent the propeller hub
from corroding and seizing to the shaft.
2

Lubricate Points 3 thru 6 with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant with Teflon or Special
Lubricate 101.
3. Swivel Bracket – Lubricate through fitting.
4. Tilt Support Lever – Lubricate through fitting.

4
5. Tilt Tube – Lubricate through fitting.

5 57834

Page 1B-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 MAINTENANCE

6. Steering Cable Grease Fitting (If Equipped) – Rotate steering wheel to fully retract the
steering cable end (a) into the outboard tilt tube. Lubricate through fitting (b).

WARNING
The end of the steering cable must be fully retracted into the outboard tilt tube
before adding lubricant. Adding lubricant to steering cable when fully extended
could cause steering cable to become hydraulically locked. An hydraulically
locked steering cable will cause loss of steering control, possibly resulting in se-
rious injury or death.
Lubricate Points 7 With Light Weight Oil.
7. Steering Link Rod Pivot Points – Lubricate pivot points.
6-b 6-a

Checking Power Trim Fluid

8. Tilt outboard to the full up position and engage the tilt support lock.

9. Remove fill cap and check fluid level. The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole. Add Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering Fluid. If not available, use auto-
motive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1B-9

MAINTENANCE

Gear Case Lubrication

When adding or changing gear case lubricant, visually check for the presence of water
in the lubricant. If water is present, it may have settled to the bottom and will drain out prior
to the lubricant, or it may be mixed with the lubricant, giving it a milky colored appearance.
If water is noticed, have the gear case checked by your dealer.Water in the lubricant may
result in premature bearing failure or, in freezing temperatures, will turn to ice and damage
the gear case.
DRAINING GEAR CASE
NOTE: Some models may have the vent and fill/drain plugs on the opposite side.
1. Place outboard in a vertical operating position.
2. Place drain pan below outboard.
3. Remove vent plug and fill/drain plug and drain lubricant.

2 1

GEAR CASE LUBRICANT CAPACITY

Gear case lubricant capacity is approximately 22.5 fl. oz. (665 ml).
CHECKING GEAR CASE LUBRICANT LEVEL AND REFILLING GEAR CASE
NOTE: Some models may have the vent and fill/drain plugs on the opposite side.
1. Place outboard in a vertical operating position.
2. Remove vent plug (a).
3. Place lubricant tube (b) into the fill hole and add lubricant until it appears at the vent
hole (c).
IMPORTANT: Replace sealing washers if damaged.
4. Stop adding lubricant. Install the vent plug and sealing washer (a) before removing
the lubricant tube.
5. Remove lubricant tube and reinstall cleaned fill/drain plug and sealing washer (d).

a
c
d
1-5 b

Page 1B-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 MAINTENANCE

Storage Preparation
The major consideration in preparing your outboard for storage is to protect it from rust,
corrosion, and damage caused by freezing of trapped water.
The following storage procedures should be followed to prepare your outboard for out of
season storage or prolonged storage (two months or longer).

CAUTION
Never start or run your outboard (even momentarily) without water circulating
through all the cooling water intake holes in the gear case to prevent damage to
the water pump (running dry) or overheating of the engine.
FUEL SYSTEM
IMPORTANT: Gasoline containing alcohol (ethanol or methanol) can cause a for-
mation of acid during storage and can damage the fuel system. If the gasoline be-
ing used contains alcohol, It is advisable to drain as much of the remaining gaso-
line as possible from the fuel tank, remote fuel line, and engine fuel system.
Fill the fuel system (tank, hoses, fuel pumps, and fuel injection systems) with treated (sta-
bilized) fuel to help prevent formation of varnish and gum. Proceed with following instruc-
tions.
1. Portable Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline Stabilizer (fol-
low instructions on container) into fuel tank. Tip fuel tank back and forth to mix stabiliz-
er with the fuel.
2. Permanently Installed Fuel Tank – Pour the required amount of Quicksilver Gasoline
Stabilizer (follow instructions on container) into a separate container and mix with ap-
proximately one quart (one liter) of gasoline. Pour this mixture into fuel tank.
3. Place the outboard in water or connect flushing attachment for circulating cooling
water. Run the engine at 2000 rpm for 10 minutes to allow treated fuel to fill the fuel
system.
PROTECTING INTERNAL ENGINE COMPONENTS
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) Models
NOTE: Make sure the fuel system has been prepared for storage.
1. Remove the spark plugs and add approximately one ounce (30ml) of engine oil into
each spark plug hole. Rotate the flywheel manually several times to distribute the oil
in the cylinders. Reinstall spark plugs.
2. Remove the water separating fuel filter and empty contents into a suitable container.
Refer to Maintenance Section for removal and installation of filter. Replace fuel filter
annually, or every 100 Hours of operation, or if large amount of fuel contamination is
present.
PROTECTING EXTERNAL OUTBOARD COMPONENTS
1. Lubricate all outboard components listed in the Inspection and Maintenance Sched-
ule.
2. Touch up any paint nicks. See your dealer for touch-up paint.
3. Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on external metal surfaces (except corrosion con-
trol anodes).
GEAR CASE
Drain and refill the gear case lubricant (refer to maintenance procedure).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1B-11

MAINTENANCE

POSITIONING OUTBOARD FOR STORAGE

Store outboard in an upright (vertical) position to allow water to drain out of outboard.

CAUTION
If outboard is stored tilted up in freezing temperature, trapped cooling water or
rain water that may have entered the propeller exhaust outlet in the gear case
could freeze and cause damage to the outboard.
BATTERY STORAGE
1. Follow the battery manufacturers instructions for storage and recharging.
2. Remove the battery from the boat and check water level. Recharge if necessary.
3. Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
4. Periodically check the water level and recharge the battery during storage.

Page 1B-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1C - General Information C
Table of Contents
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-1 Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead
Conditions Affecting Performance . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Port View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-10
Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-2 Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead
Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3 Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-11
Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-3 Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-5 Aft View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-12
Engine Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-5 Painting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-13
Following Complete Submersion . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Color Impregnated Top Cowls . . . . . . . . . . 1C-13
Salt Water Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers
Submerged While Running . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-6 & Gear Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-13
Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Decal Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-8 Decal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-15
Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Instructions for “Wet” Application . . . . . . . 1C-15
Starboard View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C-9

Serial Number Location

The engine serial number is located on the top of the engine block. A serial number is also
located on the starboard side of the swivel bracket.
a OGXXXXXX
19XX
b
XXXX
c

e
d
XX

a - Serial Number
b - Model Year
c - Model Description
d - Year Manufactured
e - Certified Europe Insignia

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

Conditions Affecting Performance

Weather

Weather conditions exert a profound effect on power output of internal combustion en-
gines. Established horsepower ratings refer to the power that the engine will produce at
its rated RPM under a specific combination of weather conditions.
Corporations internationally have settled on adoption of I.S.O. (International Standards
Organization) engine test standards, as set forth in I.S.O. 3046 standardizing the compu-
tation of horsepower from data obtained on the dynamometer. All values are corrected
to the power that the engine will produce at sea level, at 30% relative humidity, at 77° F
(25°C) temperature and a barometric pressure of 29.61 inches of mercury.
Summer conditions of high temperature, low barometric pressure and high humidity all
combine to reduce engine power. This is reflected in decreased boat speeds – as much
as 2 or 3 mph. Nothing will regain this speed for the boater but the coming of cool, dry
weather.
In pointing out the consequences of weather effects, an engine – running on a hot, humid
summer day – may loose as much as 14% of the horsepower it would produce on a dry,
brisk spring or fall day. The horsepower that any internal combustion engine produces
depends upon the density of the air that it consumes, and this density is dependent upon
the temperature of the air, its barometric pressure and water vapor (or humidity) content.
Accompanying this weather-inspired loss of power is a second but more subtle loss. At
rigging time in early spring, the engine was equipped with a propeller that allowed the en-
gine to run within its recommended RPM range at full throttle. With the coming of the sum-
mer weather and the consequent drop in available horsepower, this propeller will, in ef-
fect, become too large. Consequently, the engine operates at less than its recommended
RPM.
Due to the horsepower/RPM characteristics of an engine, this will result in further loss of
horsepower at the propeller with another decrease in boat speed. This secondary loss
can be regained by switching to a smaller pitch propeller that allows the engine to run
again at recommended RPM.
To obtain optimum engine performance under changing weather conditions, the engine
MUST be propped to allow it to operate at or near the top end of the recommended maxi-
mum RPM range at wide-open-throttle with a normal boat load.
This will allow the engine to develop full power while operating in an RPM range that dis-
courages damaging detonation.

Page 1C-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

Boat
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION
1. Proper positioning of the weight inside the boat (persons and gear) has a significant
effect on the boat’s performance, for example:
a. Shifting weight to the rear (stern)
(1.) Generally increases top speed.
(2.) If in excess, can cause the boat to porpoise.
(3.) Can make the bow bounce excessively in choppy water.
(4.) Will increase the danger of the following wave splashing into the boat when
coming off plane.
b. Shifting weight to the front (bow)
(1.) Improves ease of planing off.
(2.) Generally improves rough water ride.
(3.) If excessive, can make the boat veer back-and-forth (bow steer).
BOTTOM
1. Boat Bottom: For maximum speed, a boat bottom should be nearly a flat plane where
it contacts the water and particularly straight and smooth in fore-and-aft direction.
a. Hook: Exists when bottom is concave in fore-and -aft direction when viewed from
the side. When boat is planing, “hook” causes more lift on bottom near transom
and allows bow to drop, thus greatly increasing wetted surface and reducing boat
speed. “Hook” frequently is caused by supporting boat too far ahead of transom
while hauling on a trailer or during storage.
b. Rocker: The reverse of hook and much less common. “Rocker” exists if bottom
is convex in fore-and-aft direction when viewed from the side, and boat has strong
tendency to porpoise.
c. Surface Roughness: Moss, barnacles, etc., on boat or corrosion of motor’s gear
housing increase skin friction and cause speed loss. Clean surfaces when neces-
sary.
d. Gear Housing: If unit is left in the water, marine vegetation may accumulate over
a period of time. This growth MUST be removed from unit before operation, as it
may clog the water inlet holes in the gear housing and cause the engine to over-
heat.
Trim
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “OUT” (“UP”)

WARNING
Excessive trim “out” also may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To
correct instability at high speed, reduce the power GRADUALLY and trim the out-
board “in” slightly before resuming high speed operation. (Rapid reduction in
power will cause a sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional
momentary boat instability.)
1. Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
2. Transfers steering torque harder to left on single outboard installations below 23 in.
(584mm) transom height.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-3

GENERAL INFORMATION

3. Increases clearance over submerged objects.

4. In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
5. If trimmed out beyond the water pickup, reduced water supply can cause overheating
resulting in engine damage.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “IN” (“DOWN”) CHARACTERISTICS

WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “in” may cause undesirable and/or unsafe
steering conditions. Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after
any adjustment is made to the angle (trim adjustment bolt relocation.)
1. Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
2. Usually improves ride in choppy water.
3. In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right (bow steer).
4. Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to the left) on single outboard installa-
tions.
5. Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving trim adjustment bolt one hole closer
to transom).
WATER ABSORPTION
It is imperative that all through hull fasteners be coated with a quality marine sealer at time
of installation. Water intrusion into the transom core and/or inner hull will result in addition-
al boat weight (reduced boat performance), hull decay and eventual structural failure.
CAVITATION
Cavitation is caused by water vapor bubbles forming either from a sharp edge or angle
on the gear case or from an irregularity in the propeller blade itself. These vapor bubbles
flow back and collapse when striking the surface of the propeller blade resulting in the ero-
sion of the propeller blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual blade failure (break-
age) will occur.
VENTILATION
Ventilation occurs when air is drawn from the water’s surface (excessive trim out angle)
or from the engine exhaust flow (wrong propeller/propeller hardware installed or gear
case labyrinth seal worn) into the propeller blades. These air bubbles strike the propeller
blade surface and cause erosion of the blade surface. If allowed to continue, eventual
blade failure (breakage) will occur.

Page 1C-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

Engine
DETONATION
Detonation in a 2-cycle engine resembles the “pinging” heard in an automobile engine.
It can be otherwise described as a tin-like “rattling” or “plinking” sound.
Detonation is an explosion of an unburned portion of the fuel/air charge after the spark
plug has fired. Detonation creates severe shock waves in the engine, and these shock
waves often find or create a weakness: The dome of a piston, cylinder head/gasket, piston
rings or piston ring lands, piston pin and roller bearings.
A few of the most common causes of detonation in a marine 2-cycle application are as
follows:
• Over-advanced ignition timing.
• Use of low octane gasoline.
• Propeller pitch too high (engine RPM below recommended maximum range).
• Lean fuel mixture at or near wide-open-throttle.
• Spark plugs (heat range too hot – incorrect reach – cross-firing).
• Inadequate engine cooling (deteriorated cooling system).
Detonation usually can be prevented if:
1. The engine is correctly set up.
2. Diligent maintenance is applied to combat the detonation causes.

51115

Engine Compression
Engine compression should be checked with engine block warm, throttle shutter wide
open, all spark plugs removed and using a fully charged battery. Normal compression for
all cylinders should be 110 to 130 psi (758.5 to 896.4 kPa). Cylinders should not vary more
than 15 psi (103.4 kPa) between one another. A variance of more than 15 psi would indi-
cate the need for a power head inspection/disassembly.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-5

GENERAL INFORMATION

Following Complete Submersion

Salt Water Submersion
Due to the corrosive effect of salt water on internal engine components, complete disas-
sembly is necessary before any attempt is made to start the engine.
Submerged While Running
When an engine is submerged while running, the possibility of internal engine damage
is greatly increased. If, after engine is recovered and with spark plugs removed, engine
fails to turn over freely when turning flywheel, the possibility of internal damage (bent con-
necting rod and/or bent crankshaft) exists. If this is the case, the powerhead must be dis-
assembled.
SUBMERGED ENGINE (FRESH WATER)
IMPORTANT: Engine should be run within 2 hours after recovery, or serious inter-
nal damage may occur. If unable to start engine in this period, disassemble engine
and clean all parts. Apply oil as soon as possible.
NOTE: If sand has entered the air intake on the engine, do not attempt to the start the
engine. Sand will cause internal engine damage. Disassembly is required to clean all in-
ternal engine components of sand.
1. Recover engine from water as quickly as possible.
2. Remove cowling.
3. Clean the exterior of the outboard with fresh water.
4. Dry all wiring and electrical components using compressed air.
5. Drain water from fuel system as follows:
a. Disconnect remote fuel hose from engine.
b. EFI Models – Remove drain plug from vapor separator and drain fuel/water. Rein-
stall plug after draining.
c. EFI Models – Remove the water separating fuel filter and empty contents.
6. Remove spark plugs and get as much water as possible out of powerhead. Most water
can be eliminated by placing engine in a horizontal position (with spark plug holes
down) and rotating flywheel.
7. Pour alcohol into intake through air plenum (alcohol will absorbed water). Again rotate
flywheel.
8. Turn engine over (place spark plug openings down) and pour engine oil into throat of
carburetors while rotating flywheel to distribute oil throughout crankcase.
9. Again turn engine over and pour approximately one teaspoon of engine oil into each
spark plug opening. Again rotate flywheel to distribute oil in cylinders.
10. Remove and clean fuel pump assembly.
11. Dry all wiring and electrical components using compressed air.
12. Disassemble the engine starter motor and dry the brush contacts, armature and other
corrodible parts.
13. Reinstall spark plugs and fuel pump.
14. Drain water from the oil injection system as follows:

Page 1C-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

a. Remove remote oil hose (black without blue stripe) from pulse fitting on starboard
side of engine.
b. Drain any water from hose and reconnect.
c. If water was present in hose, check for water in the remote oil tank. Drain tank if
water is present.
15. Attempt to start engine, using a fresh fuel source. If engine starts, it should be run for
at least one hour to eliminate any water in engine.
16. If engine fails to start, determine cause (fuel, electrical or mechanical). Engine should
be run within 2 hours after recovery of outboard from water, or serious internal dam-
age may occur. If unable to start engine in this period, disassemble engine and clean
all parts. Apply oil as soon as possible.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-7

GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Front View

3
2

5
4

15 16

6
14

7
9

13 8
12

11
10

58794

1 - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor 9 - Electric Fuel Pump Harness Connector
Connector 10 - Air Plenum
2 - Throttle Plate Assembly 11 - Cowl Trim Connector
3 - Vapor Separator Tank (VST) Vent Hose to 12 - Fuel Injector Harness Connector
Flywheel Cover 13 - Oil Pump
4 - Fuel Pressure Test Point 14 - Starter Motor
5 - Fuel Hose [43 psi ± 2 psi (296 kPa ± 14 kPa)] 15 - Fuel Regulator Vacuum Hose
to Fuel Rail 16 - Engine Harness Connector
6 - Electric Fuel Pump (inside VST)
7 - Vapor Separator Tank (VST)
8 - VST Drain Plug

Page 1C-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Starboard View

28
27
1

26 19 18

3
17 4

16
25
20

15

24 14
6
21
23 9
8

22
12 11 10

13
7
58778

1 - Starter Motor 15 - Starter Solenoid

2 - Throttle Plate Assembly 16 - 20 Ampere Fuses (3); 15 Ampere Fuse (1)
3 - Fuel Regulator Vacuum Hose 17 - Electronic Control Module (ECM)
4 - Engine Harness Connector 18 - Digital Diagnostic Connector
5 - Oil Pump 19 - Temperature Sensor (Engine Overheat)
6 - Fuel Injector Harness Connector 20 - Detonation Sensor (200 EFI Only)
7 - Cowl Trim Connector 21 - Detonation Sensor Connector (200 EFI Only)
8 - Oil Pump Harness Connector 22 - Water Pressure Gauge Hose
9 - Negative Battery Cable 23 - Tell-Tale Hose
10 - Trim DOWN Relay 24 - #5 Cylinder
11 - Trim UP Relay 25 - #3 Cylinder
12 - Main Power Relay 26 - #1 Cylinder
13 - Trim Motor Bullet Connectors 27 - Starboard Thermostat [143°F (61.7°C)]
14 - Positive Battery Cable 28 - Crank Position Sensor Connector

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-9

GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Port View

6
5
7 8
3

28
31
1 16
10
30 9
11
17
27

18 12
26

29 13
15

19 14
25 23
24
20

22
21

58780

1 - Fuel Pressure Test Point 17 - Pulse Fuel Pump

2 - Fuel Out to Fuel Rail 18 - Pulse Pump Vacuum Hose
3 - Throttle Plate Assembly 19 - Idle Stop Screw
4 - Vapor Separator Vent Hose 20 - 4 psi (27 kPa) Check Valve
5 - Air Temperature Sensor 21 - Shift Interrupt Switch
6 - 60 Ampere Alternator 22 - Filter
7 - Port Thermostat [143°F (61.7°C)] 23 - Wide Open Throttle Stop Screw
8 - Speedometer Sensor (BLACK) 24 - Water Sensor
9 - Temperature Sensor (Port Head) 25 - Fuel/Water Separator
10 - #2 Cylinder 26 - Fuel Inlet Hose to Pulse Pump
11 - Temperature Sender (Analog Gauge) 27 - Throttle Position Sensor
12 - #4 Cylinder 28 - Fuel Outlet to Fuel /Water Separator
13 - Detonation Sensor (200 EFI Only) 29 - Vapor Separator Tank (VST)
14 - #6 Cylinder 30 - Electric Fuel Pump (inside Vapor Separator)
15 - Oil Reservoir [0.74 qt. (0.70 Liter)] 31 - Fuel Pressure Regulator
16 - Low Oil Sensor

Page 1C-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Top View

18 2

17

3
4
16

15

14

10
6

13
11 7
12 8 58771
1 - Thermostat By-Pass Hose 10 - Manifold Air Pressure (MAP) Sensor
2 - Port Thermostat [143°F (61.7°C)] 11 - Throttle Plate Adjustment Screw (Sealed at
3 - Belt Tensioner Grease Fitting Factory)
4 - Belt Tensioner 12 - Throttle Plate Assembly
5 - 60 Ampere Alternator 13 - Pressure Regulator Vacuum Hose
6 - Vapor Separator Vent Hose 14 - Starter Motor
7 - Fuel Regulator 15 - Digital Diagnostic Tool (DDT) Connector
8 - Fuel Hose to Fuel Rail [43 psi ± 2 psi 16 - Crank Position Sensor
(296 kPa ± 14 kPa)] 17 - Water By-Pass Hose
9 - Air Temperature Sensor 18 - Starboard Thermostat (143°F (61.7°C)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-11

GENERAL INFORMATION

Model 150 XRI/175 XRI/200 XRI Powerhead Aft View

4

1 3
2
6

24
5

14
7

23
15
8
13

9
22 16
21 12

17
11
18
10

20

19 58773

1 - Port Thermostat [143°F (61.7°C)] 13 - #3 Ignition Coil

2 - Speedometer Sensor (BLACK) 14 - #1 Ignition Coil
3 - Water Pressure Sensor 15 - #2 Ignition Coil
4 - Starboard Thermostat [143°F (61.7°C)] 16 - #4 Ignition Coil
5 - Temperature Sensor (Engine Overheat) 17 - #6 Ignition Coil
6 - #1 Cylinder 18 - Cylinder Block Flush Hose
7 - #3 Cylinder 19 - Flush Adaptor Plug
8 - Starboard Detonation Sensor (200 EFI Only) 20 - Thermostat Outlet Hose to Adaptor Plate
9 - #5 Cylinder 21 - #6 Cylinder
10 - Tell–Tale Hose 22 - Port Detonation Sensor (200 EFI Only)
11 - Water Pressure Gauge Hose 23 - #4 Cylinder
12 - #5 Ignition Coil 24 - #2 Cylinder

Page 1C-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

Painting Procedures
Color Impregnated Top Cowls
The Model Year 2002 3 Liter V-6 EFI, 2.5 Liter Optimax and 3 Liter Optimax top cowls are
constructed of a new material in which the exterior color is impregnated to a depth of
approximately 1/16 in. (1.58 mm).
MAINTENANCE
The cowl can be cleaned using a mild non-abrasive soap. The surface luster can be pre-
served by using a non-abrasive automotive polish (polish designed for clear coat finishes)
and buffing with a terry cloth type towel. Abrasive type polishes or cleaners should not
be used as they will damage the cowl finish.
REPAIR
Light scratches should be removed by using a non-abrasive automotive polish (polish de-
signed for clear coat finishes) and buffing with a terry cloth type towel. Abrasive type pol-
ishes should not be used as they will damage the cowl finish.
Medium scratches can be removed by using 600 to 1000 grit sandpaper. The surface lus-
ter can then be restored by using a non-abrasive automotive polish (polish designed for
clear coat finishes) and buffing with a terry cloth type towel. Abrasive type polishes should
not be used as they will damage the cowl finish.
For deep scratches or for those that penetrate through the exterior finish, automotive body
filler can be used to fill the damaged area. 600 to 1000 grit sand paper should be used
to smooth the surface area. It is then recommended that the entire cowl then be painted,
to achieve an even luster, using normal Mercury Marine approved paint and procedures.

Cleaning & Painting Aluminum Propellers & Gear Housings

WARNING
Avoid serious injury from flying debris. Avoid serious injury from airborne par-
ticles. Use eye and breathing protection with proper ventilation.
PROPELLERS
1. Sand the entire area to be painted with 3M 120 Regalite Polycut or coarse Scotch-
Brite, disc or belts.
2. Feather edges of all broken paint edges. Try not to sand through the primer.
3. Clean the surface to be painted using PPG Industries DX330 Wax and Grease Re-
mover or equivalent (Xylene or M.E.K.).
4. If bare metal has been exposed, use Quicksilver’s Light Gray Primer.
5. Allow a minimum of 1 hour dry time and no more than 1 week before applying the finish
coat.
6. Apply the finish coat using Quicksilver’s EDP Propeller Black.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-13

GENERAL INFORMATION

GEAR HOUSINGS
The following procedures should be used in refinishing gear housings. This procedure will
provide the most durable paint system available in the field. The materials recommended
are of high quality and approximate marine requirements. The following procedure will
provide a repaint job that compares with a properly applied factory paint finish. It is recom-
mended that the listed materials be purchased from a local Ditzler Automotive Finish Sup-
ply Outlet. The minimum package quantity of each material shown following is sufficient
to refinish several gear housings.
Procedure:
1. Wash gear housing with a muriatic acid base cleaner to remove any type of marine
growth, and rinse with water, if necessary.
2. Wash gear housing with soap and water, then rinse.
3. Sand blistered area with 3M 180 grit sandpaper or P180 Gold Film Disc to remove
paint blisters only. Feather edge all broken paint edges.
4. Clean gear housing thoroughly with (DX-330) wax and grease remover.
5. Spot repair surfaces where bare metal is exposed with (DX-503) alodine treatment.
IMPORTANT: Do not use any type of aerosol spray paints as the paint will not prop-
erly adhere to the surface nor will the coating be sufficiently thick to resist future
paint blistering.
6. Mix epoxy chromate primer (DP-40) with equal part catalyst (DP-401) per manufac-
turers instructions, allowing proper induction period for permeation of the epoxy prim-
er and catalyst.
7. Allow a minimum of one hour drying time and no more than one week before top coat-
ing assemblies.
8. Use Ditzler Urethane DU9000 for Mercury Black, DU34334 for Mariner Grey, and
DU35466 for Force Charcoal, and DU33414M for Sea Ray White. Catalyze all four
colors with Ditzler DU5 catalyst mixed 1:1 ratio. Reduce with solvents per Ditzler label.

CAUTION
Be sure to comply with instructions on the label for ventilation and respirators.
Using a spray gun, apply one half to one mil even film thickness. Let dry, flash off
for five minutes and apply another even coat of one half to one mil film thickness.
This urethane paint will dry to the touch in a matter of hours, but will remain sensi-
tive to scratches and abrasions for a few days.
9. The type of spray gun used will determine the proper reduction ratio of the paint.
IMPORTANT: Do not paint sacrificial zinc trim tab or zinc anode.
10. Cut out a cardboard “plug” for trim tab pocket to keep paint off of mating surface to
maintain good continuity circuitry between trim tab and gear housing.

Page 1C-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 GENERAL INFORMATION

Decal Application
Decal Removal
1. Mark decal location before removal to assure proper alignment of new decal.
2. Carefully soften decal and decal adhesive with a heat gun or heat blower while remov-
ing old decal.
3. Clean decal contact area with a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water.
4. Thoroughly dry decal contact area and check for a completely cleaned surface.
Instructions for “Wet” Application
NOTE: The following decal installation instructions are provided for a “Wet” installation.
All decals should be applied wet.
TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Plastic Squeegee*
2. Stick Pin
3. Dish Washing Liquid/Detergent without ammonia.** “Joy” and “Drift” are known to
be compatible for this process.
** Automotive Body Filler Squeegee
** Do not use a soap that contains petroleum based solvents.
SERVICE TIP: Placement of decals using the “Wet” application will allow time to
position decal. Read entire installation instructions on this technique before pro-
ceeding.
TEMPERATURE
IMPORTANT: Installation of vinyl decals should not be attempted while in direct
sunlight. Air and surface temperature should be between 60°F (15°C) and 100°F
(38°C) for best application.
SURFACE PREPARATION
IMPORTANT: Do not use a soap or any petroleum based solvents to clean applica-
tion surface.
Clean entire application surface with mild dish washing liquid and water. Rinse surface
thoroughly with clean water.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1C-15

GENERAL INFORMATION

DECAL APPLICATION
1. Mix 1/2 ounce (16 ml) of dish washing liquid in one gallon (4 l) of cool water to use as
wetting solution.
NOTE: Leave protective masking, if present, on the face of decal until final steps of decal
installation. This will ensure that the vinyl decal keeps it’s shape during installation.
2. Place the decal face down on a clean work surface and remove the paper backing
from “adhesive side” of decal.
3. Using a spray bottle, flood the entire “adhesive side” of the decal with the pre-mixed
wetting solution.
4. Flood area where the decal will be positioned with wetting solution.
5. Position pre-wetted decal on wetted surface and slide into position.
6. Starting at the center of the decal, “lightly” squeegee out the air bubbles and wetting
solution with overlapping strokes to the outer edge of the decal. Continue going over
the decal surface until all wrinkles are gone and adhesive bonds to the cowl surface.
7. Wipe decal surface with soft paper towel or cloth.
8. Wait 10 - 15 minutes.
9. Starting at one corner, “carefully and slowly” pull the masking off the decal surface at
a 180° angle.
NOTE: To remove any remaining bubbles, pierce the decal at one end of the bubble with
stick pin and press out the entrapped air or wetting solution with your thumb (moving to-
ward the puncture).

Page 1C-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION 1
Section 1D - Outboard Motor Installation D
Table of Contents
Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Water Pressure Tubing Connection . . . . . 1D-8
Lifting Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-1 Shift Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-9
Installing Outboard to Boat Transom . . . . . . . 1D-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-10
Determining Recommended Outboard Throttle Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-12
Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-2 Front Clamp Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-13
Installing Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-3 Oil Injection Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14
Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes . . . . . . . 1D-3 Installing Remote Oil Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-14
Securing Outboard To Boat Transom . . . . 1D-4 Installing Oil Hoses To Engine . . . . . . . . . . 1D-15
Steering Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-4 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-16
Steering Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-5 Priming the Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-17
Electrical, Hoses and Control Cables . . . . . . 1D-6 Priming Procedure – Method 1 . . . . . . . . . 1D-18
Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Purging Air From the Engine Oil
Remote Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-6 Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-19
Battery Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-7 Trim In Stop Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-19
Fuel Hose Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-20
Oil Hose Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-8 Models Without Power Steering . . . . . . . . 1D-20
Speedometer Tubing Connection . . . . . . . 1D-8 Models With Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . 1D-20

Installation Specifications
a
a
b

a – Transom Opening – Minimum

Single Engine – 33-3/8 in. (848 mm)
Dual Engines – 59-3/4 in. (1518 mm)
b – Engine Center Line For Dual Engine
26 in. (660mm) Minimum

Lifting Outboard
Electric Start Models – Remove plastic cap from flywheel hub. Thread lifting ring into
flywheel a minimum of 5 turns. Replace plastic cap after installation.

50048

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-1

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Installing Outboard to Boat Transom

Determining Recommended Outboard Mounting Height
26 in.
(660mm)

25 in. b
(635mm)

24 in.
(609mm)
e
Outboard 23 in.
Mounting
(584mm) c
Height (See
NOTE Below) 22 in. b
(560mm)
e
21 in.
(533mm) a
20 in. d
(508mm)

19 in.
(482mm)

NOTE: Add 5 in. (127mm) for XL mod- 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

els and 10 in. (254mm) for XXL models Maximum Boat Speed Anticipated
to listed outboard mounting height.
NOTICE TO INSTALLER:
1. The outboard should be mounted high enough on the transom so that the exhaust re-
lief hole will stay at least 1 in. (25.4 mm) above the water line when the engine is run-
ning at idle speed. This will prevent exhaust restriction.
2. The mounting height (e) of the outboard must not exceed 25 in. (635 mm) for L mod-
els, 30 in. (762 mm) for XL models and 35 in. (889 mm) for XXL models. Mounting the
outboard higher may cause damage to the gear case components.
a. This solid line is recommended to determine the outboard mounting height. In-
creasing the height of outboard generally will provide the following: 1) Less steer-
ing torque, 2) more top speed, 3) greater boat stability, but, 4) will cause more prop
“break loose” which may be particularly noticeable when planing off or with heavy
load.
b. These broken lines represent the extremes of known successful outboard mount-
ing height dimensions.
c. This line may be preferred to determine outboard mounting height dimension, if
maximum speed is the only objective.
d. This line may be preferred to determine outboard mounting height dimension for
dual outboard installation.
e. Outboard mounting height (height of outboard transom brackets from bottom of
boat transom). For heights over 22 in. (560mm), a propeller, that is designed for
surfacing operation is usually preferred.

Page 1D-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Installing Outboard
Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes
1. Attach (tape) engine mounting template (located with the installation manual) to boat
transom.

IMPORTANT: If using “Transom Drilling Fixture” (91-98234A2), use drill guide holes
marked “A” when drilling outboard mounting holes.

a - Centerline of Transom
b - Transom Drilling Fixture (91-98234A2)

2. Mark and drill four 17/32 in. (13.5mm) mounting holes.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-3

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Securing Outboard To Boat Transom

1. Refer to “Determining Recommended Outboard Motor Mounting Height”, preceding
and install outboard to the nearest recommended mounting height.
2. Fasten outboard with provided mounting hardware shown.

d
b

a - 1/2 in. Diameter Bolts d - Flat Washers(4)

(4) e - Marine Sealer - Apply to
b - Flat Washers(4) Shanks of Bolts, Not
c - Locknuts (4) Threads

Steering Cable
STARBOARD SIDE ROUTED CABLE
1. Lubricate O-ring seal and entire cable end.

95

95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 1D-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

2. Insert steering cable into tilt tube.

57832

3. Torque nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m).

57833

Steering Link Rod

1. Install steering link rod per illustration.

b 57834
a - Special Bolt (10-90041) Torque to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Torque to 20 lb-ft (27 N·m)
c - Flat Washer (2)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut (11-34863) Tighten Locknut Until it Seats, Then Back
Nut Off 1/4 Turn

IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine
must be fastened using special washer head bolt (“a” – Part Number 10-14000) and
self locking nuts (“b” & “c” – Part Number 11-34863). These locknuts must never
be replaced with common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate
off freeing the link rod to disengage

WARNING
Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden,
sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown
overboard exposing them to serious injury or death.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-5

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Electrical, Hoses and Control Cables

IMPORTANT: Warning Horn Requirement – The remote control or key switch as-
sembly must be wired with a warning horn. This warning horn is used with the en-
gine warning system.
Installation Note
Open the front clamp assembly.

57841

Remote Wiring Harness

1. Connect wiring. Place harness into the holder.

BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
GRN/WHT GRN/WHT a
TAN
BRN/WHT

58804

a - Power Trim Connections

Page 1D-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Battery Cables
SINGLE OUTBOARD

(+)

b
c
(–)

a - RED Sleeve (Positive)

b - BLACK Sleeve (Negative)
c - Starting Battery

DUAL OUTBOARD
Connect a common ground cable (wire size same as engine battery cables) between
NEGATIVE (–) terminals on starting batteries.

(–)

(–)

d - Common Ground Cable

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-7

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Fuel Hose Connection

Fuel Hose Size – Minimum fuel line inside diameter (I.D.) is 5/16 in. (8mm), with separate
fuel line/fuel tank pickup for each engine.
Fasten remote fuel hose to fitting with hose clamp.
Oil Hose Connections
Connect the remote oil hoses to the engine hose connections as shown. Fasten hose con-
nections with sta-straps.
Speedometer Tubing Connection
This outboard has a speedometer water pick-up located in the leading edge of the gear
case. If you want to use this water pickup for the speedometer, connect the water tubing
as shown.
Water Pressure Tubing Connection
If the boat is equipped with a water pressure gauge, make the water connection to this
tubing as shown.

h c
d e
f
g

i
j

l k b a

a - Remote Fuel Hose

b - Hose Clamp – Secure Remote Fuel Hose
c - Oil Hoses with Blue Stripe - Secure With Sta-Strap
d - Oil Hoses without Blue Stripe - Secure With Sta-Strap
e - Sta-Strap (2) - Secure Oil Hoses
f - Speedometer Water Pickup Tubing (Black Color)
g - Water Pressure Tubing (Gray Color)
h - Coupler – Push In on End of Coupler to Disconnect Plug or Tubing
i - Plug – Remove when Making Coupler Connection
j - Barb Hose Fitting (2) Provided with Outboard – Install this fitting into Coupler, if
a Rubber Hose Connection is Required
k - Speedometer Hose – Insert the barb hose fitting (j) into Coupler and Connect
Hose
l - Water Pressure Tube – Insert into coupler, pull on tube to verify that it is locked

Page 1D-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Shift Cable
Install cables into the remote control following the instructions provided with the remote
control.
NOTE: Install the shift cable to the engine first. The shift cable is the first cable to move
when the remote control handle is moved out of neutral.
COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS
Counter rotating (left hand) gear cases can be identified by a “L” stamped into the end of
the propeller shaft.
The Quicksilver Dual Engine Console Mount Control, P/N 88688A22 or 88688A52, is re-
quired to shift the counter rotation outboard. The installation instructions shipped with the
control explain the procedure required to connect this control to a counter rotation out-
board.
IMPORTANT: If the counter rotation outboard is rigged similar to a standard rota-
tion outboard OR if a standard rotation outboard is rigged similar to a counter rota-
tion outboard, the reverse gear and bearing in the gear case must function as for-
ward gear. THE REVERSE GEAR/BEARING ARE NOT DESIGNED TO CARRY THE
SUSTAINED LOADS THAT ARE GENERATED WHEN RUNNING UNDER CONSTANT
HIGH RPM AND THRUST CONDITIONS.
OUTBOARD SHIFTING DIRECTION
On counter rotation outboards, the shift linkage moves in the opposite direction compared
to a standard rotation outboard.
STANDARD ROTATION GEAR OUTBOARDS
Forward Gear Reverse Gear

COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS

Reverse Gear Forward Gear

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-9

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Installation
IMPORTANT: Step 1 must be followed for proper adjustment of the shift cable.
1. Locate the center point of the slack or lost motion that exists in the shift cable as fol-
lows:
a. Move the remote control handle from neutral into forward and advance the handle
to full speed position. Slowly return the handle back to the neutral. Place a mark
(a) on the cable against the cable end guide.
b. Move the remote control handle from neutral into reverse and advance the handle
to full speed position. Slowly return the handle back to the neutral. Place a mark
(b) on the cable against the cable end guide.
c. Make a center mark (c), midway between marks (“a” and “b”). Align the cable end
guide against this center mark when installing cable to the engine.
STANDARD ROTATION OUTBOARDS
a

COUNTER ROTATION OUTBOARDS

a

Page 1D-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

2. Position remote control and outboard into neutral.

N

3. Slide the shift cable retainer forward until resistance is felt, then slide cable anchor
toward rear until resistance is felt. Center the anchor pin between resistance points.
a

a - Shift Cable Retainer

b - Anchor Pin

4. Align the shift cable end guide with the center mark as instructed in Step 1.

5. Place shift cable on anchor pin. Adjust cable barrel so it slips freely into the barrel
holder.
6. Secure shift cable with shift cable retainer.
b

a
a - Cable Barrel
b - Shift Cable Retainer

7. Check shift cable adjustments as follows:

a. With remote control in forward, the propshaft should lock solidly in gear. If it does
not, adjust cable barrel closer to cable end guide.
b. Shift remote control into neutral. The propshaft should turn freely without drag. If
not, adjust barrel away from cable end guide. Repeat steps a and b.
c. Shift remote control into reverse while turning propeller. The propshaft should
lock solidly in gear. If not, adjust barrel away from cable end guide. Repeat steps
a thru c.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-11

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

d. Return remote control handle to neutral. The propeller should turn freely without
drag. If not, adjust barrel closer to cable end guide. Repeat steps a thru d.

Throttle Cable
INSTALLATION
1. Position remote control into neutral.
N

2. Attach throttle cable to the throttle lever. Secure with washer and locknut.

57838
a - Washer and Locknut

3. Adjust the cable barrel so that the installed throttle cable will hold the idle stop screw
against the stop.

a b

57838
a - Cable Barrel – Adjust To Hold Idle Stop Screw Against Stop
b - Idle Stop Screw

4. Check throttle cable adjustment as follows:

a. Shift outboard into gear a few times to activate the throttle linkage. Make sure to
rotate the propeller shaft while shifting into reverse.
F N R

Page 1D-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

b. Return remote control to neutral. Place a thin piece of paper between idle adjust-
ment screw and idle stop. Adjustment is correct when the paper can be removed
without tearing, but has some drag on it. Readjust cable barrel if necessary.
IMPORTANT: The idle stop screw must be touching the stop.

57839

a - Idle Stop Screw

b - Idle Stop
5. Lock the barrel holder in place with the cable latch.

Front Clamp Reassembly

IMPORTANT: Sufficient slack must exist in engine wiring harness, battery cables,
fuel hose, and oil hoses routed between clamp and engine attachment point, to re-
lieve stress and prevent hoses from being kinked or pinched.
1. Place the neoprene wrap over the wiring, hoses, and control cables as shown.
2. Fasten clamp together with two screws.
b

a - Neoprene Wrap
b - Screw (2)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-13

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Oil Injection Set-Up

CAUTION
Be careful not to get dirt or other contamination in tanks, hoses or other compo-
nents of the oil injection system during installation.

Installing Remote Oil Tank

1. The remote oil tank should be installed in an area in the boat where there is access
for refilling.
The tank should be restrained to keep it from moving around, causing possible damage.
An acceptable means of restraining the tank would be the use of eye bolts and an elastic
retaining strap about the mid-section of the tank taking care that any metal hooks do not
puncture the tank.
Keep in mind, when installing in tight areas, that this tank will be under pressure when the
engine is operating and will expand slightly.
2. Oil hoses when routed thru engine well, must be able to extend to the hose fittings on
engine.
3. Oil hoses must be arranged so they cannot become pinched, kinked, sharply bent or
stretched during operation of the engine.

Page 1D-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Installing Oil Hoses To Engine

NOTE: Oil hose with BLUE stripe contains a directional filter which is designed to trap any
debris in the oil before the oil reaches the engine oil reservoir. The filter is marked with
an arrow denoting direction of flow of oil and should be installed accordingly. Should en-
gine oil reservoir oil level drop while remote oil tank oil level is normal, oil flow through
inline filter has been reduced by debris and filter must be replaced.
Route remote oil tank pulse hoses to starboard side of engine. Route hose with BLUE
stripe to port side of engine.
4. Remove (and discard) the shipping cap from hose fitting (a).
5. Connect oil hose from remote oil tank (hose with blue stripe) to fitting (a). Secure with
sta-strap.
NOTE: Fitting barb (b) is a vent and does not get connected to a hose.
6. Remove (and discard) shipping cap from pulse fitting (c).
7. Connect the second oil hose from remote oil tank to pulse fitting. Secure with sta-
strap.

58875
d 58800

a - Hose Fitting (Hose c - Pulse Fitting

with BLUE Stripe) d - Filter
b - Vent

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-15

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Filling
Mercury Marine recommends the use of “Mercury Precision Premium Plus ”or “Quicksilver Pre-
mium Plus” 2-Cycle Oil NMMA Certified TC-W3.
The Premium Plus Oil is specially formulated and tested to not only maintain a high level
of performance but also increase the durability of the engine. This special blend, developed
by Mercury Marine, contains more than twice the additives used in standard blends and
ensures the greatest protection for your engine.
Periodically consult with your dealer to get the latest gasoline and oil recommendations.
If “Mercury Precision Premium Plus” or “Quicksilver Premium Plus” Outboard Oil is not
available, you may substitute another brand of 2-Cycle outboard oil that is NMMA Certified
TC-W3. Nationally recognized brands are recommended. Continued use of inferior 2-Cycle
outboard oil can dramatically reduce engine life. Damage from use of inferior oils that are
not NMMA Certified TC-W3 will not be covered under the limited warranty.
1. Fill remote oil tank with the recommended oil listed in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Tighten fill cap.

a - Remote Oil Tank b - Fill Cap

2. Remove cap and fill engine oil reservoir with oil. Reinstall the fill cap.
b

a - Engine Oil Reservoir b - Fill Cap

Page 1D-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Priming the Oil Pump

IMPORTANT: Before starting engine for the first time, prime the oil injection pump.
Priming will remove any air that may be in the pump, oil supply hose, or internal passages.
NOTE: If a new powerhead is being installed or oil hoses/oil pump has been removed,
it is recommended all air be purged from oil pump/oil lines using gearcase leakage tester
(FT-8950). Connect the leakage tester to the inlet t-fitting on the onboard oil reservoir.
While clamping off the inlet hose, manually pressurize the reservoir to 10 psi. Using the
Digital Diagnostic Terminal 91-823686A2, activate the oil pump prime sequence. Main-
tain the 10 psi pressure throughout the auto prime sequence. When the auto prime is
completed, remove the leakage tester and refill the onboard oil reservoir.

58889
Priming the oil pump (filling pump and hoses using pressure) is required on new or rebuilt
power heads and any time maintenance is performed on the oiling system that allows air
into the oil system.
There are three methods for priming the oil pump:
METHOD 1 – SHIFT SWITCH ACTIVATION PRIME
This method does three things:
a. Fills the oil pump, oil supply hose feeding pump and oil hoses going to the crank-
case and air compressor.
b. Activates break-in oil ratio.
c. Initiates a new 120 minute engine break-in cycle.
Refer to priming procedure following.
METHOD 2 – (DDT) DIGITAL DIAGNOSTIC TERMINAL – RESET BREAK-IN
This method is the same as Method 1, except the run history and fault history are erased
from the ECM.
Refer to procedure in the Technician Reference Manual provided with the Digital Diagnos-
tic Software Cartridge Part. No. 91-880118A1.
METHOD 3 – (DDT) DIGITAL DIAGNOSTIC TERMINAL – OIL PUMP PRIME
This method fills the oil pump, oil supply hose feeding pump, and oil hose going to vapor
separator.
Refer to procedure in the Technician Reference Manual provided with the Digital Diagnos-
tic Software Cartridge Part. No. 91-880118A1.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-17

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Conditions Requiring Priming the Oil Pump

Condition Priming Procedure
New engine Use Method 1 or 2
Rebuilt Powerhead Use Method 1 or 2
New Powerhead Use Method 1 or 2
Oil system ran out of oil Use Method 3
Oil drained from oil supply hose feeding pump Use Method 3
Oil pump removed Use Method 3
Oil injection hoses drained Use Method 3

Priming Procedure – Method 1

METHOD 1 – SHIFT SWITCH ACTIVATION PRIME PROCEDURE
Before starting engine for the first time, prime the oil pump. Priming will remove any
air that may be in the pump, oil supply hose, or internal passages.

a
b

58778
a - Oil Injection Pump b - Oil Supply Hose

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the fuel pump, fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Other-
wise the fuel pump will run without fuel during the priming process.
Prime the oil injection pump as follows:
1. Fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Connect fuel hose and squeeze primer bulb until
it feels firm.
2. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position.
3. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the remote
control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automatically start
the priming process.
N
F

NOTE: It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process.

Page 1D-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir

1. Loosen the fill cap on the engine oil reservoir.
2. Start the engine. Run the engine until all the air has been vented out of the reservoir
and oil starts to flow out of the reservoir. Re-tighten fill cap.
a

a - Fill Cap

Trim In Stop Adjustment

Some outboard boats, particularly some bass boats, are built with a greater than normal
transom angle which will allow the outboard to be trimmed further “in” or “under”. This
greater trim “under” capability improves acceleration, reduces the angle and time spend
in a bow high boat attitude during planing off, and in some cases, may be necessary to
plane off a boat with aft live wells (given the variety of available propellers and height
range of engine installations).
However, once on plane, the engine should be trimmed to a more intermediate position
to avoid a bow-down planing condition called “plowing”. Plowing can cause “bow steering”
or “over steering” and inefficiently consumes horsepower. In this condition, if attempting
a turn or encountering a diagonal, moderate wake, a more abrupt turn than intended may
result.
In rare circumstances, the owner may decide to limit the trim under. This can be accom-
plished by purchasing a stainless steel tilt pin (P/N 17-49930A1) and inserting it through
whatever pin hole is desired. The non-stainless steel shipping bolt should not be used in
this application other than on a temporary basis.

WARNING
Avoid possible serious injury or death. Adjust outboard to an intermediate trim
position as soon as boat is on plane to avoid possible ejection due to boat spin-
out. Do not attempt to turn boat when engine is trimmed extremely under or in.

a - Tilt Pin

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 1D-19

OUTBOARD MOTOR INSTALLATION

Trim Tab Adjustment

Propeller steering torque may cause your boat to pull in one direction. This steering torque
results from your outboard not being trimmed so the propeller shaft is parallel to the water
surface. The trim tab can help compensate for this steering torque and can be adjusted
within limits to reduce any unequal steering effort.
Models Without Power Steering
Operate your boat at normal cruising speed, trimmed to desired position. Turn your boat
left and right and note the direction the boat turns more easily.
If adjustment is necessary, loosen trim tab bolt until trim tab moves freely (does not rub
against locking ridges). DO NOT strike tab to make adjustments. Make small adjustments
at a time. If the boat turns more easily to the left, move the trailing edge of trim tab to the
left. If the boat turns more easily to the right move the trailing edge of trim tab to the right.
Position trim tab in one of the locating grooves BEFORE tightening bolt to prevent dam-
age to holding mechanism. Torque bolt to 40 lb-ft (54 Nm) and retest.
Models With Power Steering
Trim tab adjustment is not required. The trailing edge of the trim tab should be set straight
back.

Page 1D-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

ELECTRICAL
Section 2A - Ignition
Table of Contents 2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2 RPM-Limit Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-26
A
Ignition Coil Ohms Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2 EFI Detonation Control System
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) (200 Model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-27
Sensor Ohms Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3 Detonation Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-27
Port and Starboard Temperature Sensors; Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-28
Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4 Troubleshooting Without Digital Diagnostic
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-5 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-28
Coil Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8 Troubleshooting with the Digital Diagnostic
Electrical Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-29
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-12 Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-30
Ignition Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13 DDT Functions – EFI Models . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-31
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13 Ignition Component Removal and Installation 2A-33
Charging System Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-14 Flywheel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-33
Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-14 Flywheel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-34
Electronic Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-15 Ignition Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-34
Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-16 Ignition Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-35
Crank Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-16 Electronic Control Module Removal . . . . . 2A-35
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) . . . . . . . . . 2A-17 Electronic Control Module Installation . . . 2A-35
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Temperature Sensor Removal . . . . . . . . . 2A-36
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-17 Engine Head Temperature Sensor
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor . . . . . 2A-18 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-36
Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-18 Air Temperature Sensor Removal . . . . . . 2A-37
Port and Starboard Temperature Sensors; Air Temperature Sensor Installation . . . . . 2A-37
Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-19 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-37
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-20 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Ignition Troubleshooting and Fault Chart . . . 2A-21 Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-37
Ignition Coil Ohms Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-25 Crank Position Sensor Removal . . . . . . . . 2A-38
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Crank Position Sensor Installation . . . . . . 2A-38
Sensor Ohms Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-26
Idle Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-26

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-1

IGNITION

Specifications
IGNITION Type Digital Inductive
SYSTEM Spark Plug Type NGK BPZ8HS-10
Spark Plug Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)

Ignition Coil Ohms Test

58903

BLACK METER LEAD

Secondary EST EST Low Secondary Primary Battery +
Tower PIN A PIN B Low Ground Pin E
Pin C Pin D
Secondary X No No 850 – 1200 No No
Tower Continuity Continuity ohm Continuity Continuity
EST No X 8500 – No 29000 – 11000 –
PIN A Continuity 12000 Continuity 39000 21000
ohm ohm ohm
EST Low No 8500 – X No 39000 – 21000 –
RED PIN B Continuity 12000 Continuity 49000 31000
METER ohm ohm ohm
LEAD Secondary 850 – 1200 No No X No No
Low ohm Continuity Continuity Continuity Continuity
Pin C
Primary No 20000 – 31000 – No X 13000 –
Ground Continuity 30000 41000 Continuity 23000
Pin D ohm ohm ohm
Battery + No 11000 – 21000 – No 13000 – X
Pin E Continuity 21000 31000 Continuity 23000
ohm ohm ohm

EST = Electronic Spark Trigger

EST Low = Return ground path for the trigger signal to the ECM

Page 2A-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ohms Test

58904

BLACK METER LEAD

BLK/ORG YEL PPL/YEL
PIN A PIN B PIN C
BLK/ORG X 95000 – 105000 3900 – 4100
PIN A ohm ohm
RED METER
LEAD YEL 95000 – 105000 X 95000 – 105000
PIN B ohm ohm
PPL/YEL 3900 – 4100 95000 – 105000 X
PIN C ohm ohm

Crank Position Sensor Resistance Test

Between 2 pins of Crank Position Sensor 300 – 350 ohms
Connector

Throttle Position Sensor Specifications

Idle 0.19 – 1.0 VDC
Wide Open Throttle 3.45 – 4.63 VDC

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-3

IGNITION

Port and Starboard Temperature Sensors; Air Temperature Sensor

An ohms test of the temperature sensors would be as follows:
Disconnect temperature sensor harness and check continuity with digital or analog ohm-
meter test leads between both connector pins. With engine at temperature (F°) indicated,
ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%. There should be no continuity between each
connector pin and ground.

Temperature Sensor Specifications

Fahrenheit Centigrade OHMS
257 125 340
248 120 390
239 115 450
230 110 517
221 105 592
212 100 680
203 95 787
194 90 915
185 85 1070
176 80 1255
167 75 1480
158 70 1752
149 65 2083
140 60 2488
131 55 2986
122 50 3603
113 45 4370
104 40 5327
95 35 6530
86 30 8056
77 25 10000
68 20 12493
59 15 15714
50 10 19903
41 5 25396
32 0 32654
14 –10 55319
5 –15 72940

Page 2A-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Special Tools
1. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter 91-854009A1

2. Cylinder Timing Decal 91-853883-1

NOTE: Decal can be used to help troubleshoot ignition timing by determining the timing
of individual cylinders.

3. Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) 91-823686A2

4. Software Cartridge 91-880118--1

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-5

IGNITION

5. DDT Reference Manual 90-881204--1

6. Adaptor Harness 84-822560A5

7. Spark Gap Tester 91-850439

55117

8. Timing Light 91-99379

9. Crank Shaft Protector Cap 91-24161

Page 2A-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

10. Flywheel Puller 91-849154T1

55117

11. Flywheel Holder 91-52344

12. Heat Lamp 91-63209

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-7

IGNITION

Coil Plate Assembly

Page 2A-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Coil Plate Assembly

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 COIL PLATE
2 4 BUSHING
3 4 GROMMET
4 4 WASHER
5 2 CABLE
6 2 WASHER
7 4 SCREW (.312-18 x 1-1/4) 20 27
8 3 WASHER
9 3 SCREW (M6 x 10) 60 7
10 6 IGNITION COIL
11 12 SCREW (M6 x 25) 100 11.3
12 2 SCREW (M6 x 10) 35 4
13 6 WASHER
14 6 SPARK PLUG (NGK#BPZ8HS10) 20 27
15 6 HI-TENSION CABLE
16 2 CLIP
17 1 SENSOR-BLOCK PRESSURE [0-50 psi (0-345 kPa)]
18 1 SENSOR-SPEEDO [0-100 psi (0-689 kPa)]
19 1 COIL HARNESS

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-9

IGNITION

Electrical Plate Assembly

Page 2A-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Electrical Plate Assembly

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 SOLENOID MOUNTING PLATE
2 3 SCREW (M6 x 10) 100 11.3
3 1 CLIP
4 3 RELAY
5 3 DECAL-TRIM RELAY
6 3 BRACKET
7 3 BUSHING
8 3 GROMMET
9 5 SCREW (M6 x 25) 35 4
10 1 BUSHING
11 1 TRIM HARNESS
12 1 CABLE (YELLOW/BLACK)
13 1 GROUND WIRE (BLACK)
14 2 BOOT (YELLOW)
15 1 INSULATOR BOOT (RED)
16 1 SOLENOID
17 2 GROMMET
18 2 BUSHING
19 1 CAP NUT
20 2 NUT (10-32)(BRASS) 8 0.9
21 2 LOCKWASHER
22 2 NUT (5/16-18) 50 5.5
23 1 WASHER
24 1 SCREW (M6 x 35) 35 4
25 1 ENGINE HARNESS
26 1 FUSE COVER
27 2 CLIP
28 1 HARNESS (FUEL INJECTOR)
29 1 HARNESS (TPS)
30 FUSE (4 – 20 AMP) (1 – 15 AMP)
31 AR STA-STRAP
32 3 SCREW (M6 x 12) 30 3.5
33 1 ECM
34 3 SCREW (M6 x 25) 70 8
35 3 BUSHING
36 3 GROMMET
37 3 WASHER
38 2 CLIP
39 2 SCREW (M6 x 14)
40 1 PLUG (MALE)
41 1 HARNESS-KNOCK SENSOR (200)
42 1 HARNESS-SMARTCRAFT

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-11

IGNITION

Theory of Operation
When the ignition key switch is turned to the “RUN” position, battery voltage is applied to
both the Electronic Control Module (ECM) through the purple wire and the main power
relay through the red/purple wire. As the ECM receives the “RUN” signal, it internally com-
pletes the ground circuit of the main relay, for a short period of time, energizing the fuel
pump for start-up. As the engine is cranked with the starter motor, the ECM receives the
run signal from the Crank Position Sensor (CPS) and completes the ground circuit to the
main relay for engine operation. With the main relay closed (completed circuit), D.C. cur-
rent from the battery/charging system is transferred through the 20 ampere main relay
fuse to the positive terminal of all ignition coil primary windings. The negative terminals
of the ignition coil primaries are connected to engine ground through the coils’ internal
driver, which is triggered by the ECM. With the coil drivers closed, a electric magnetic field
is allowed to build up within the ignition coil. As the flywheel rotates, the CPS senses the
location of the 54 teeth on the flywheel and supplies the trigger signal information to the
ECM. The ECM utilizes the CPS information and determines when to remove the trigger
signal from the coil driver of each ignition coil. The coil driver then opens the coil primary
ground circuit, allowing it’s magnetic field to rapidly collapse across the coil secondary
winding, which induces a high voltage charge (50,000 volts) that fires the spark plug.

Page 2A-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Ignition Component Description

Fuses
The electrical wiring circuits on the outboard are protected from overload by fuses in the
wiring. If a fuse is blown, try to locate and correct the cause of the overload. If the cause
is not found, the fuse may blow again.
1. Open the fuse holder and look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If band is
broken, replace the fuse. Replace fuse with a new fuse with the same rating.
2. The fuses and circuits are identified as follows:
a. Smart Craft Data Bus Circuit – SFE 15 Ampere Fuse
b. Fuel Injector Harness, Electric Fuel Pump and Oil Pump
c. Main Power Relay, Remote Control Harness and Power Trim
d. Ignition Coils

1 3

2 4
58802

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-13

IGNITION

Charging System Alternator

Battery charging system is contained within the belt driven alternator, including the regu-
lator. At cranking speeds, electrical power for the engine is provided by the boat battery
– minimum recommended size is 750 CCA, 1,000 MCA, cold cranking amperes or 105
(Minimum) Ampere Hours. Above 550 RPM, all electrical power is provided by the alter-
nator. Should engine rpm drop below 550 RPM, the alternator is not capable of providing
sufficient output and the battery becomes the primary source of electrical power.
Alternator output (when hot) to the battery @ 2000 RPM is approximately 35 - 41 am-
peres.
a

58782
a - Alternator
Ignition Coil
Each module contains an ignition coil and amplifier circuitry which produces approximate-
ly 50,000 volts at the spark plugs.

Page 2A-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Electronic Control Module

The ECM requires 8 VDC minimum to operate. If the ECM should fail, the engine will stop
running.
The inputs to the ECM can be monitored and tested by the Digital Diagnostic Terminal
91-823686A2 using adaptor harness 84-822560A5.
The ECM performs the following functions:
• Calculates the precise fuel and ignition timing requirements based on engine speed,
throttle position, manifold pressure and coolant temperature.
• Controls fuel injectors for each cylinder and ignition for each cylinder.
• Controls all alarm horn functions.
• Supplies tachometer signal to gauge.
• Controls RPM limit function.
• Contains detonation control circuitry (200 Model only)
• Records engine running information.

58778

a - Electronic Control Module (ECM)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-15

IGNITION

Flywheel
Flywheel has 54 teeth under the flywheel ring gear which the crank position sensor uses
to provide engine rpm and crankshaft position information the ECM.

58775

a - Flywheel b - Crank Position Sensor

Crank Position Sensor
Monitors 54 teeth on flywheel thus determining crankshaft position and sends crankshaft
position angle and engine speed signals to ECM. If crank position sensor should fail, en-
gine will stop running.

b 58775

a - Crank Position Sensor b - Crank Position Sensor Connector

Crank Position Sensor Resistance Test
Between 2 pins of Crank Position Sensor 300 – 350 ohms
Connector

Page 2A-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

The TPS transmits throttle angle information to the ECM which varies the injector pulse
width accordingly. Should the sensor fail, the warning horn will sound. RPM will be re-
duced by the ECM. TPS settings are not adjustable. TPS settings can be monitored with
the Digital Diagnostic Terminal through the ECM. Voltage change should be smooth from
idle to wide open throttle. If voltage change is erratic, TPS is defective.

58899

a - Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) c - Roller

b - Throttle Stop Screw d - Pocket

Throttle Position Sensor Specifications

Idle 0.19 – 1.0 VDC
Wide Open Throttle 3.45 – 4.63 VDC

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Troubleshooting

If the throttle position sensor is out of the intended operating range when the engine is
started, the Electronic Control Module (ECM) will sense that the Throttle Position Sensor
(TPS) has failed. The warning horn will sound, check engine light will illuminate, DDT will
indicate failed TPS and the engine will go into RPM reduction. When the engine is started,
the throttle arm on the engine must be against the throttle stop screw. Do not move throttle
or fast idle control lever forward.
• Check throttle cable adjustment. The throttle stop screw on the throttle arm must be
against the throttle stop on the cylinder block when the engine is started. Pre-load the
throttle cable barrel 1 or 2 turns if necessary.
• Verify driver is not pushing on throttle (if foot throttle is used) or advancing the throttle
only on the control box.
• Check throttle cam to roller adjustment. If the roller is not down in the pocket/valley
area on the cam, there is a tendency for the roller to ride up or down on the cam which
causes the TPS link arm to push/pull on the TPS lever resulting in changing values.
90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-17
IGNITION

Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor

Two (2) temperature sensors are used to provide temperature information to the ECM.
One sensor is mounted in each cylinder head.
The ECM uses this information to increase injector pulse width for cold starts and to retard
timing in the event of an over-heat condition. Should a temperature sensor fail, the ECM
will default to a temperature value of 32 ° F (0 ° C).

58893
a - Cylinder Temperature Sensor (PORT)
b - Cylinder Temperature Sensor (STARBOARD)
Air Temperature Sensor
The air temperature sensor is mounted on top of the air plenum. The ECM regulates fuel
flow, in part, based on manifold air temperature. As air temperature increases, the ECM
decreases fuel flow. Should the air temperature sensor fail, the ECM will default to a tem-
perature value of 32 ° F (0 ° C).

58898
a - Air Temperature Sensor

Page 2A-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Port and Starboard Temperature Sensors; Air Temperature Sensor

An ohms test of the temperature sensors would be as follows:
Disconnect temperature sensor harness and check continuity with digital or analog ohm-
meter test leads between both connector pins. With engine at temperature (F°) indicated,
ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%. There should be no continuity between each
connector pin and ground.

Temperature Sensor Specifications

Fahrenheit Centigrade OHMS
257 125 340
248 120 390
239 115 450
230 110 517
221 105 592
212 100 680
203 95 787
194 90 915
185 85 1070
176 80 1255
167 75 1480
158 70 1752
149 65 2083
140 60 2488
131 55 2986
122 50 3603
113 45 4370
104 40 5327
95 35 6530
86 30 8056
77 25 10000
68 20 12493
59 15 15714
50 10 19903
41 5 25396
32 0 32654
14 –10 55319
5 –15 72940

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-19

IGNITION

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor is located on top of the air plenum. The ECM regulates fuel flow, in part,
based on manifold absolute pressure. The MAP sensor becomes more critical in engine
running quality as the engine is operated at higher altitudes (i.e. mountain lakes). Should
the MAP sensor fail, the ECM will default to a value of approximately 14.7 psi.
The Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) can be used to determined whether the MAP sen-
sor is functioning properly. As throttle is advanced, numerical value on DDT display
should increase. As throttle is retarded, numerical value should decrease indicating MAP
sensor is functioning. If numerical value does not change as throttle setting varies, MAP
sensor is defective.
NOTE: If MAP sensor is not functioning, #4 LED indicator light on DDT will be illuminated.

58898
a - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

Page 2A-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Ignition Troubleshooting and Fault Chart

CAUTION
To protect against meter and/or component damage, observe the following pre-
cautions:
• DO NOT reverse battery cable connections. The battery negative cable is (–)
ground.
• DO NOT “spark” battery terminals with battery cable connections to check po-
larity.
• DO NOT disconnect battery cables while engine is running.
Before troubleshooting the ignition system, check the following:
1. Make sure that electrical harness and ignition switch are not the source of the prob-
lem.
2. Check that plug-in connectors are fully engaged and terminals are free of corrosion.
3. Make sure that wire connections are tight and free of corrosion.
4. Check all electrical components, that are grounded directly to engine, and all ground
wires to see that they are grounded to engine.
5. Check for disconnected wires and short and open circuits.

Symptom Cause Action

1. Engine cranks but won’t 1.0 Lanyard stop switch in Reset lanyard stop switch.
start wrong position.
1.1 Weak battery or bad starter Replace/charge battery.
motor, battery voltage drops Inspect condition of starter motor.
below 8 volts while cranking Check condition of battery termi-
(ECM cuts out below 8volts) nals and cables.
(Fuel pump requires 9volts)
1.2 No fuel Check that primer bulb is firm. Key-
on engine to verify that fuel pump
runs for 2 seconds and then turn off.
Measure fuel pressure
1.3 Flywheel misaligned during Remove flywheel and inspect.
installation
1.4 Blown fuse Replace fuse. Inspect engine har-
ness and electrical components.
1.5 Main Power Relay not Listen for relay to “click” when the
functioning key switch is turned on.
1.6 Spark Plugs Remove spark plugs from each
cylinder.
Connect spark plug leads to Spark
Gap Tester 91-830230T.
Crank engine or use DDT output
load test for each ignition coil and
observe spark. If no spark is pres-
ent, replace appropriate ignition
coil. If spark is present, replace
spark plugs.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-21

IGNITION

Symptom Cause Action

1. Engine cranks but will 1.7 ECM not functioning Check for proper operation by
not start (continued) using Inductive Timing Light
91-99379.
Check battery voltage
(RED/YEL Lead) @ ignition
coils.
Check for blown fuse (C15).
Check battery voltage to fuse
from main power relay
(PURPLE Lead).
Check for shorted stop wire
(BLK/YEL).
Check crank position sensor
setting [0.025 in. – 0.040 in.
(0.64 mm – 1.02 mm)] from
flywheel or for defective crank
position sensor.
Defective ECM.

Power Supply:
Clean and inspect remote control
male and female harness connec-
tors.

1.8 Crank Position Sensor not – Sensor faulty.

functioning – Bad connection
– Air gap incorrect
2. Engine cranks, starts 2.0 Abnormally high friction in Check for scuffed piston or other
and stalls engine sources of high friction.

2.1 Air in fuel system/lines Crank and start engine several

times to purge.
2.2 TPS malfunction Check motion of throttle arm. Stop
nuts should contact block at idle
and WOT. Check TPS set-up. Must
connect DDT with adapter harness
(84-822560A5) to ECM.
2.3 Remote control to engine Clean and inspect male and fe-
harness connection is poor male connectors.

Page 2A-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Symptom Cause Action

3. Engine idle is rough 3.1 Fouled spark plug Replace spark plug: if carbon
bridges electrode gap or if it is
completely black. If it is not firing
and is wet with fuel.
Note: If spark plug is grey or com-
pletely black with aluminum specs,
this indicates a scuffed piston.
3.2 Failed fuel injector Refer to specifications for ohm
test.

3.3 Bad coil/weak spark Refer to specifications for ohm

test.
3.4 Flywheel misaligned during Remove flywheel and inspect.
installation
4. Engine idles fast (rpm 4.1 Fuel leak Check for fuel entering induction
>700) or surges manifold.
Fuel pump diaphragm leaking and/
or Vapor Separator flooding over.
4.2 Improper set-up Check throttle cable & cam roller
adjustment.
5. Engine runs rough below 5.1 Fouled spark plug See 3.1
3000 rpm
5.2 Throttle misadjusted Check throttle cam setup on induc-
tion manifold. Inspect linkage and
roller.
If throttle plate stop screws have
been tampered with, contact Mer-
cury Marine Service Department
for correct adjustment procedures.
5.3 Bad coil/weak spark See 3.3
5.4 TPS malfunction See 2.2
6. Engine runs rough above 6.1 Fouled spark plug See 3.1
3000 rpm
6.2 Speed Reduction See 7

6.4 TPS malfunction See 2.2

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-23

IGNITION

Symptom Cause Action

7. Speed Reduction (RPM 7.1 Low battery voltage Check battery and/or alternator.
reduced) ECM requires 8 volts mini- Check electrical connections.
mum
Fuel Pump requires 9 volts
7.2 Overheat condition Check water pump impeller/cooling
system.
7.3 Oil pump electrical failure Check electrical connection.
7.4 TPS failure See 2.2
If TPS fails, rpm is reduced
to idle
8. Engine RPM reduced to 8.1 TPS failed See 2.2
idle only 8.2 Battery voltage below 9.5 Use DDT to monitor system
volts
9. Loss of spark on 1 cylin- 9.1 Loose wire or pin in connec- Check connectors.
der tors between ECM and coil pri-
mary. Replace coil.
9.2 Faulty ignition coil. Replace spark plug.
9.3 Faulty spark plug. Replace spark plug wire.
9.4 Faulty spark plug wire
Note: If spark plug is partially
fouled or the plug gap is too
small, the DDT may indicate the
incorrect cylinder as having an
ignition fault. Example: If the
DDT indicates an ignition fault
on cylinder #4, the problem may
be on the prior cylinder in the
firing order – I.E. cylinder num-
ber #3.

Page 2A-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Ignition Coil Ohms Test

58903

BLACK METER LEAD

Secondary EST EST Low Secondary Primary Battery +
Tower PIN A PIN B Low Ground Pin E
Pin C Pin D
Secondary X No No 850 – 1200 No No
Tower Continuity Continuity ohm Continuity Continuity
EST No X 8500 – No 29000 – 11000 –
PIN A Continuity 12000 Continuity 39000 21000
ohm ohm ohm
EST Low No 8500 – X No 39000 – 21000 –
RED PIN B Continuity 12000 Continuity 49000 31000
METER ohm ohm ohm
LEAD Secondary 850 – 1200 No No X No No
Low ohm Continuity Continuity Continuity Continuity
Pin C
Primary No 20000 – 31000 – No X 13000 –
Ground Continuity 30000 41000 Continuity 23000
Pin D ohm ohm ohm
Battery + No 11000 – 21000 – No 13000 – X
Pin E Continuity 21000 31000 Continuity 23000
ohm ohm ohm

EST = Electronic Spark Trigger

EST Low = Return ground path for the trigger signal to the ECM

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-25

IGNITION

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Ohms Test

58904

BLACK METER LEAD

BLK/ORG YEL PPL/YEL
PIN A PIN B PIN C
BLK/ORG X 95000 – 105000 3900 – 4100
PIN A ohm ohm
RED METER
LEAD YEL 95000 – 105000 X 95000 – 105000
PIN B ohm ohm
PPL/YEL 3900 – 4100 95000 – 105000 X
PIN C ohm ohm

Idle Speed Control

The ECM varies the timing and the fuel flow based on the throttle opening to maintain an
idle speed of 650 rpm ± 50 rpm.
RPM-Limit Circuit
The rpm limit circuitry is contained within the ECM. When the rpm limit point is reached
(this point will vary between engine models), a warning horn will sound. If the rpm contin-
ues to increase, ignition spark will be cut to cylinders #1, #3 and #5. If the rpm still contin-
ues to rise, fuel and ignition spark will be cut to all cylinders.

Page 2A-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

EFI Detonation Control System (200 Model only)

The detonation control circuit is located in the ECM. This circuit monitors 2 detonation
(knock) sensors; 1 each located in each cylinder head. When detonation is initially de-
tected, timing is retarded. If detonation continues, fuel mixture is richened.
Use DDT to monitor Knock Volts (Press Keys 1, 3, 1)

a
a

a - Detonation Sensor (hidden) (1 per cylinder head)

Detonation Circuit Test
1. Turn key switch to RUN position (do not start engine). With Digital Diagnostic Terminal
connected to engine, DDT should indicate over 6 volts for knock voltage output.
2. Start engine and run at idle. DDT indicated knock voltage output should drop below
1.0 volt. If voltage does not drop below 1.0 volt, knock circuit within ECM is defective.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-27

IGNITION

Troubleshooting
The ECM is designed such that if a sensor fails, the ECM will compensate so that the en-
gine does not go into an over-rich condition.
Disconnecting a sensor for troubleshooting purposes may have no noticeable effect.

Troubleshooting Without Digital Diagnostic Terminal

Troubleshooting without the DDT is limited to checking resistance on some of the sen-
sors.
Typical failures usually do not involve the ECM. Connectors, set-up, and mechanical wear
are most likely at fault.
• Verify spark plug wires are securely installed (pushed in) into the coil tower.
• The engine may not run or may not run above idle with the wrong spark plugs installed.
• Swap ignition coils to see if the problem follows the coil or stays with the particular
cylinder.
NOTE: ECMs are capable of performing a cylinder misfire test to isolate problem cylin-
ders. Once a suspect cylinder is located, an output load test on the ignition coil, fuel injec-
tor and direct injector may be initiated through use of the DDT.
• Any sensor or connection can be disconnected and reconnected while the engine is
operating without damaging the ECM. Disconnecting the crank position sensor will
stop the engine.
IMPORTANT: Any sensor that is disconnected while the engine is running will be
recorded as a Fault in the ECM Fault History. Use the DDT to view and clear the fault
history when troubleshooting/repair is completed.
• If all cylinders exhibit similar symptoms, the problem is with a sensor or harness input
to the ECM.
• If problem is speed related or intermittent, it is probably connector or contact related.
Inspect connectors for corrosion, loose wires or loose pins. Secure connector seating;
use dielectric compound 92-823506-1.
• Inspect the harness for obvious damage: pinched wires, chaffing.
• Secure grounds and all connections involving ring terminals (coat with Liquid Neo-
prene 92-25711--3).
• Check fuel pump connections and fuel pump pressure.

Page 2A-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Troubleshooting with the Digital Diagnostic Terminal

a
c d
b

a - Digital Diagnostic Terminal (91-823686A2)

b - Software Cartridge (91-880118-2)
c - DDT Reference Manual (90-881204)
d - Adapter Harness (84-822560A5)

The Quicksilver Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) has been developed specifically to
help technicians diagnose and repair Mercury Marine 2 and 4 cycle engines.
Attach the diagnostic cable to the ECM diagnostic connector and plug in the software car-
tridge. You will be able to monitor sensors and ECM data values including status switches.
The ECM program can help diagnose intermittent engine problems. It will record the state
of the engine sensors and switches for a period of time and then can be played back to
review the recorded information.
Refer to the Digital Diagnostic Terminal Reference Manual for complete diagnostic proce-
dures.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-29

IGNITION

Notes:

Page 2A-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

DDT Functions – EFI Models

Software Version 1.2 (P/N 880118A2) 02MY EFI
ECM #
CODE
Any fault will turn on fault light. Refer to
IGN PRI .38-.78 ohm Fault Status to identify fault
SEC 8.1-8.9 Kohm
DINJ 1.0-1.6 ohm
FINJ 1.7-1.9 ohm
TYPICAL TPI RANGE FAULT LIGHTS FAULT LIGHTS
SmartCraft Monitor
TPI 1 0.19-1.0v IDLE
1 – Mercury Marine 3.45-4.63v WOT
2 – Tool Setup TGAP 0.025-.04in IGNITION 1 5 SWITCHES
PWR RLY 81-99 ohm
RPM LIMIT 5850 INJECTOR 2
PROP RPM 5250-5750
6 MISCELLANEOUS
AIR COMPRESSOR
ENGINE RPM PUMP 3 7 RPM LIMIT
1Kohm @ 77F/25C
THIS ENGINE IS A TPI 1 VOLTS
BATTERY VOLTS AIRTEMP/COOLANT
xx MY xxx x.xL xxx 10 Kohm @ 77F/25C SENSORS 4 8 BREAK–IN
PWR 1 VOLTS
PRESS 1 to CONTINUE COOL TMP STB °F BATV 12.6-15.0
COOL TMP PRT °F MAP 7-15 psi
MAP PSI FUEL AIR +10 psi
AIR TMP °F AIR 77-82 psi
BLOCK PSI OIL PUMP COIL
OIL INJ CNT 1.8-2.0 ohms
Select Function: Select Auto Test: TPI % 1 FUSE-INJ/OIL PUMP
1 - AUTO SELF TEST
1 – STATIC TEST AIR COM TMP °F 2 FUSE-FUEL PUMP
OIl LEVEL 3 FUSE-ACCESSORY
2 - MANUAL TEST FUEL LEVEL
AVAILABLE PWR % 4 FUSE-IGNITION
SHIFT OVERTEMP/BLOCK
TRIM
PRESSURE LIMITS ARE
PITOT
PADDLE WHEEL CONTROLLED BY
LAKE/SEA TMP °F ENGINE GUARDIAN
SEE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR GUARDIAN INFO Fault Status List

ACT INPUT HI or LO Air compessor temperature sensor input is high or low

Select Function: AT INPUT HI or LO Air temperatrure (engine) sensor input is high or low
1 - DATA MONITOR BATT VOLT HI or LOW Battery voltage is high or low
2 - FAULT STATUS BLOCK PRESS LOW Block pressure is low
3 - SYSTEM INFO BPSI INPUT HI or LO Block Pressure Sensor input is high or low
4 - HISTORY BREAK-IN Engine Break-In In Progess
5 - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS COMP OVERHEAT Compressor overheat
CTP INPUT HI or LO Coolant temp port sensor input is high or low
Select Fault Hist: CTS INPUT HI or LO Coolant temp starboard sensor input is high or low
Select Function:
1 - FAULT HISTORY 1 – FREEZE FRAME DINJ 1 thru 6 SHORT or OPEN Direct injector (1 thru 6) is short or open circuit
2 - RUN HISTORY EST 1 thru 6 SHORT or OPEN Electronic spark trigger signal (1 thru 6) is short or open circuit
2 – FAULT SECONDS
3 - CLEAR FAULT HIST FINJ 1 thru 6 SHORT or OPEN Fuel injector (1 thru 6) is short or open circuit
4 - CLEAR RUN HIST FUEL LVL IN HI or LO Fuel level sensor input is high or low
FREEZE FRAME BUFFERS
0-BREAK-IN GUARDIAN Guardian system activated
BARO PSI H2O IN FUEL Water in fuel
BATT VOLTS MAP INPUT HI or LO MAP sensor input high or low
FAULT SECONDS BLOCK PSI
BATT VOLT HIGH MPRLY BACKFEED Main Power Relay is Receiving a Current Back feed
BOAT SPEED
BATT VOLT LOW MPRLY OUTPUT Main Power Relay Output
Select Function: AIR TMP °F
1 - OIL PUMP PRIME BLOCK PRESS LOW COOL TMP °F OIL LVL IN HI or LO Oil level sensor input is high or low
2 - CYLINDER MISFIRE COMP OVERHEAT DEMAND % OIL PUMP Oil pump electrical failure
3 - OUTPUT LOAD TEST ETC MOTOR OPEN ENGINE RPM
RUN TIME HR. ETC MOTOR SHORT OIL RESERVE STR Oil reserve strategy is active
4 - RESET BREAK-IN OIL RPM 0 – 749 ENGINE STATE OVERSPEED Overspeed is activated
5 - CHANGE FUEL OFFSET FUEL P INPUT HI FPC TOTAL
RPM 750 – 1499 FUEL P INPUT LO PITOT INPUT HI or LO Pilot Pressure Sensor input is high or low
6 - ENGINE LOCATION RPM 1500 – 2999 FREQ COUNTER
GUARDIAN FUEL LEVEL % PORT OVERHEAT Port cylinder head overheat
RPM 3000 – 3999 KNOCK SENS1 SHIFT SEA TMP IN HI or LO Sea or lake temperature sensor input is high or low
RPM 4000 – 4499 KNOCK SENS2
RPM 4500 – 4999 LAKE/SEA TMP °F STAR OVERHEAT Starboard cylinder head overheat
OIL PSI STR LOAD%
RPM 5000– 5499 OIL REMOTE STR TPI1 INPUT HI or LO TPI #1 sensor input is high or low
RPM 5500 – 6249 MPRLY REQ
OIL RESERVE STR MAP PSI TPI1 NO ADAPT ECM is unable to adapt to the current position of the TPI
Select Load Test: RPM 6250 + MAP INPUT HI
1 - IGNITION BREAK-IN LEFT OIL LEVEL % TPI1 RANGE HI or LO TPI #1 is above or below the allowable range
MAP INPUT LO PORT TAB POS
2 - FUEL INJECTOR RPM LIMIT Sec MAP IDLE CHECK TRIM INPUT HI or LO Trim sensor input is high or low
3 - DIRECT INJECTOR GRD LIMIT Sec AVAILABLE PWR %
OIL PUMP WARNING HORN Warning horn fault
4 - OIL PUMP ACT TEMP Sec RUN TIME
OVERSPEED STAR TAB POS KNOCK SENSOR 1 Knock Sensor #1
5 - FUEL PUMP BLOCK PSI Sec PORT OVERHEAT KNOCK SENSOR 2
TPI % Knock Sensor #2
6 - HORN CTS TMP Sec STAR OVERHEAT
7 - RESERVE CTP TEMP Sec TRIM POSITION
WARNING HORN COOL TMP STB °F
8 - TACHOMETER LOW OIL Sec H2O IN FUEL
9 - MAIN POWER RELAY OIL PMP Sec COOL TMP PRT °F

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-31

 IGNITION

Ignition Component Removal and Installation

Flywheel Removal
1. Remove flywheel cover off engine.
2. Remove alternator belt.
3. While holding flywheel with Flywheel Holder (91-52344), remove flywheel nut and
washer.
b

58777
a - Flywheel Holder (91-52344)
b - Flywheel

4. Install Flywheel Puller (91-849154T1) into flywheel.

CAUTION
Do not hammer on end of puller center bolt to remove flywheel, or damage may
result to crankshaft or bearings. Do not use heat to aid flywheel removal as fly-
wheel and electrical components under flywheel may be damaged.

58775

a - Flywheel
b - Flywheel Puller (91-849154T1)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-33

IGNITION

Flywheel Installation
IMPORTANT: Clean flywheel/crankshaft taper with solvent and assemble dry.
1. Reinstall flywheel on crankshaft. Secure flywheel with flat washer and locknut. While
holding flywheel with Flywheel Holder (91-52344), torque flywheel nut to 120 Ib. ft.
(163.0 N m).
b

58776
a - Flywheel Holder (91-52344) b - Torque Nut to 120 lb. ft. (163 Nm)

2. Reinstall flywheel cover on engine.

Ignition Coil Removal
WARNING
Avoid serious injury or death from fire or explosion caused by damaged spark plug boots. Dam-
aged spark plug boots can emit sparks. Sparks can ignite fuel vapors under the engine cowl. To
avoid damaging spark plug boots, do not use any sharp object or metal tool such as pliers, screw-
driver, etc. to remove spark plug boots.
1. Disconnect spark plug lead from spark plug.
2. Disconnect coil harness connector.
3. Remove 2 bolts securing ignition coil and remove coil.

58893
a - Spark Plug Lead c - Bolts
b - Harness Connector

Page 2A-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Ignition Coil Installation

1. Secure coil with 2 bolts. Torque bolts to 70 lb. in. (8 Nm).
2. Reconnect coil harness.
3. Reconnect spark plug lead to spark plug.
Electronic Control Module Removal
1. Disconnect 3 Control Module harness connectors.
2. Remove 3 bolts securing module and remove module.

58778
a - Harness Connectors c - Control Module
b - Bolts (3)

Electronic Control Module Installation

1. Secure module with 3 bolts. Torque bolts to 70 lb. in. (8 Nm).
2. Reconnect 3 module harness connectors.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-35

IGNITION

Temperature Sensor Removal

ANALOG TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove screw and retaining plate.
2. Disconnect bullet connector and remove sensor.
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Disconnect wire harness for PORT and STARBOARD sensors.
2. Unscrew sensor from cylinder head.

f g

e
b
a

d c

58893
a - Bullet Connector e - Digital Temperature
b - Analog Temperature Sensor
Sensor f - Port Sensor Harness
c - Retainer g - Starboard Sensor Har-
d - Retainer Screw ness
Engine Head Temperature Sensor Installation
ANALOG TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Install sensor into pocket.
2. Secure sensor with retainer and screw. Ground (BLACK) lead of sensor is secured
with retainer screw. Torque retainer screw to 16.5 lb. ft. (22.4 Nm).
3. Reconnect sensor bullet connector.
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Install sensors into cylinder heads. Torque sensors to 14 lb. in. (1.6 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness connectors.

Page 2A-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 IGNITION

Air Temperature Sensor Removal

1. Disconnect sensor harness connector.
2. Unscrew sensor from air plenum.

a
b

58898
a - Air Temperature Sensor
b - Harness Connector
Air Temperature Sensor Installation
1. Install sensor into air plenum. Torque sensor to 14 lb. in. (1.6 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal
1. Disconnect MAP harness.
2. Remove bolt securing MAP retainer.
3. Remove MAP sensor.

c
a

58898
a - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
b - Bolt
c - Harness Connector
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Installation
1. Install sensor into air plenum.
2. Secure sensor with retainer and bolt. Torque bolt to 35 lb. in. (3.9 Nm).
3. Reconnect MAP harness.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2A-37

IGNITION

Crank Position Sensor Removal

1. Disconnect sensor harness.
2. Remove screws securing sensor to engine.

b 58775

a - Crank Position Sensor b - Harness Connector

Crank Position Sensor Installation
1. Secure sensor to engine with 2 screws. Torque screws to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness.

Page 2A-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL
Section 2B – Charging & Starting System
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2 Alternator Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . 2B-20
2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3 Starter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21 B
Battery Cable Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Starter Motor Amperes Draw . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Starter System Components . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21
Recommended Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-21
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 Starter Motor (Centrifugal Bendix) . . . . . . . . . 2B-22
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 Troubleshooting the Starter Circuit
Charging a Discharged Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5 (Centrifugal Bendix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-24
Winter Storage of Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-6 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow
Flywheel Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . 2B-7 Chart(Centrifugal Bendix) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-7 Flow Chart (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-26
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-8 Starter Removal (Centrifugal Bendix) . . . . . . 2B-27
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-9 Starter Installation (Centrifugal Bendix) . . . . . 2B-27
Flywheel/Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10 Starter Disassembly (Centrifugal Bendix) . . . 2B-28
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Starter Cleaning, Inspection and Testing . 2B-30
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-12 Starter Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-33
Alternator Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-13 Starter Motor (Solenoid Driven Bendix) . . . . . 2B-38
Diagnosis of Alternator System on Engine . . 2B-13 Troubleshooting the Solenoid Driven Bendix
Alternator System Circuitry Test . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14 Starter Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-40
Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14 Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow
Sensing Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15 Chart (Solenoid Driven Bendix) . . . . . . . . . 2B-41
Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-16 Starter Removal (Solenoid Driven Bendix) . . 2B-43
Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-17 Starter Installation (Solenoid Driven Bendix) 2B-44
Current Output Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . 2B-18 Disassembly (Solenoid Driven Bendix) . . . . . 2B-45
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-48
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18 Reassembly (Solenoid Driven Bendix) . . . . . 2B-49
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-19 Commander 2000 Key Switch Test . . . . . . . . 2B-53

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-1

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Specifications

CHARGING Alternator Output (Regulated) 35 - 41 Amperes @ 2000 RPM @ Battery

SYSTEM 36 - 44 Amperes @ 2000 RPM @
Alternator
Brush Length Std Exposed Length: 0.413 in. (10.5 mm)
Min. Exposed Length: 0.059 in. (1.5 mm)
Voltage Output 13.5 to 15.1 Volts
Regulator Current Draw 0.15 mA (Ign. Switch Off)
30.0 mA (Ign. Switch On)
STARTING Electric Start – All Models
SYSTEM Centrifugal Bendix
Starter Draw (Under Load) 165 Amperes
Starter Draw (No Load) 30 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length 0.25 in. (25.4 mm)
Solenoid Driven Bendix
Starter Draw (Under Load)
175 Amperes
Starter Draw (No Load)
60 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length
Battery Rating 0.25 in. (25.4 mm)
Min. 630 Marine Cranking Amps (MCA) or
490 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)

Page 2B-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Special Tools
1. Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1 or DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter
91-854009A1

a b

a - Volt/Ohm Meter 91-99750A1

b - DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter 91-854009A1

2. Ammeter (60 Ampere minimum) (Obtain locally)

3. Flywheel Holder 91-52344

54964
4. Protector Cap 91-24161 (Used with Puller 91-73687A1)

5. Flywheel Puller 91-73687A1 or 91-849154T1

a - Puller 91-73687A1
b - Puller 91-849154T1

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-3

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Battery Cable Size

If standard (original) battery cables are replaced with longer cables, the wire gauge size must increase. See
chart below for correct wire gauge size.

ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Wire Gage Size

Battery Cable Length

Battery Cable Wire Gage Size
Mercury/Mariner Outboards
Battery Cable Length
8 ft. 9 ft. 10ft. 11ft. 12ft. 13ft. 14ft. 15ft. 16ft. 17ft. 18ft. 19ft. 20ft. 21ft. 22ft. 23ft. 24ft.
2.4m 2.7m 3.0m 3.4m 3.7m 4.0m 4.3m 4.6m 4.9m 5.2m 5.5m 5.8m 6.1m 6.4m 6.7m 7.0m 7.3m

Models Wire Gage Size No. SAE

6-25 Hp #8* #8 #6 #6 #6 #6 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2
30-115 #6* #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #0 #0 #0
Hp
125-250 #6* #6 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
Hp (ex-
cept
DFI)
DFI #4* #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #0 #0 #0
Models

* = Standard (original) Cable Length and wire gage size.

Replacement Parts
WARNING
Electrical, ignition and fuel system components on your Mercury Outboard are
designed and manufactured to comply with U. S. Coast Guard Rules and Regula-
tions to minimize risks of fire and explosions. Use of replacement electrical, igni-
tion or fuel system components, which do not comply with these rules and regu-
lations, could result in a fire or explosion hazard and should be avoided.

Recommended Battery
A 12 volt marine battery with a minimum Cold Cranking amperage rating of 490 amperes
or 630 (minimum) Marine Cranking amperes should be used.

Page 2B-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Battery
Precautions
CAUTION
If battery acid comes in contact with skin or eyes, wash skin immediately with a
mild soap. Flush eyes with water immediately and see a doctor.
When charging batteries, an explosive gas mixture forms in each cell. Part of this gas es-
capes through holes in vent plugs and may form an explosive atmosphere around battery
if ventilation is poor. This explosive gas may remain in or around battery for several hours
after it has been charged. Sparks or flames can ignite this gas and cause an internal ex-
plosion which may shatter the battery.
The following precautions should be observed to prevent an explosion.
1. DO NOT smoke near batteries being charged or which have been charged very re-
cently.
2. DO NOT break live circuits at terminals of batteries because a spark usually occurs
at the point where a live circuit is broken. Always be careful when connecting or dis-
connecting cable clamps on chargers. Poor connections are a common cause of elec-
trical arcs which cause explosions.
3. DO NOT reverse polarity of battery terminal to cable connections.

Charging a Discharged Battery

WARNING
Hydrogen and oxygen gases are produced during normal battery operation or
charging. Sparks or flame can cause this mixture to ignite and explode, if they are
brought near the vent openings. Sulphuric acid in battery can cause serious
burns, if spilled on skin or in eyes. Flush or wash away immediately with clear
water.
The following basic rule applies to any battery charging situation:
1. Any battery may be charged at any rate (in amperes) or as long as spewing of electro-
lyte (from violent gassing) does not occur and for as long as electrolyte temperature
does not exceed 125 °F (52 °C). If spewing of electrolyte occurs, or if electrolyte tem-
perature exceeds 125 °F, charging rate (in amperes) must be reduced or temporarily
halted to avoid damage to the battery.
2. Battery is fully charged when, over a 2-hour period at a low charging rate (in amperes),
all cells are gassing freely (not spewing liquid electrolyte), and no change in specific
gravity occurs. Full charge specific gravity is 1.260-1.275, corrected for electrolyte
temperature with electrolyte level at 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) over plate, unless electrolyte
loss has occurred (from age or over-filling) in which case specific gravity reading will
be lower. For most satisfactory charging, lower charging rates in amperes are recom-
mended.
3. If, after prolonged charging, specific gravity of at least 1.230 on all cells cannot be
reached, battery is not in optimum condition and will not provide optimum perform-
ance; however, it may continue to provide additional service, if it has performed satis-
factorily in the past.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-5

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

4. To check battery voltage while cranking engine with electric starting motor, place RED
(+) lead of tester on POSITIVE (+) battery terminal and BLACK (–) lead of tester on
NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal. If the voltage drops below 9-1/2 volts while cranking,
the battery is weak and should be recharged or replaced.

Winter Storage of Batteries

Battery companies are not responsible for battery damage either in winter storage or in
dealer stock if the following instructions are not observed:
1. Remove battery from its installation as soon as possible and remove all grease, sul-
fate and dirt from top surface by running water over top of battery. Be sure, however,
that vent caps are tight beforehand, and blow off all excess water thoroughly with com-
pressed air. Check water level, making sure that plates are covered.
2. When adding distilled water to battery, be extremely careful not to fill more than 3/16
in. (4.8 mm) above perforated baffles inside battery. Battery solution or electrolyte ex-
pands from heat caused by charging. Overfilling battery will cause electrolyte to over-
flow (if filled beyond 3/16″ above baffles).
3. Grease terminal bolts well with 2-4-C Marine Lubricant and store battery in a COOL-
DRY place. Remove battery from storage every 30-45 days, check water level and
put on charge for 5 or 6 hours at 6 amperes. DO NOT FAST CHARGE.
4. If specific gravity drops below 1.240, check battery for reason and recharge. When
gravity reaches 1.260, discontinue charging. To check specific gravity, use a hydrom-
eter, which can be purchased locally.
5. Repeat preceding charging procedure every 30-45 days, as long as battery is in stor-
age, for best possible maintenance during inactive periods to ensure a good service-
able battery in spring. When ready to place battery back in service, remove excess
grease from terminals (a small amount is desirable on terminals at all times), recharge
again as necessary and reinstall battery.

Page 2B-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Flywheel Removal and Installation

Removal
1. Remove flywheel cover from engine.

WARNING
Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel during removal and installa-
tion; therefore, disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs to pre-
vent engine from starting.
2. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs.
3. While holding flywheel with flywheel holder (91-52344), remove flywheel nut and
washer.

58777
a - Flywheel Holder (91-25344)

4. Install a crankshaft Protector Cap (91-24161) on end of crankshaft, then install Fly-
wheel Puller (91-849154T1) into flywheel.
5. Hold flywheel tool with wrench while tightening bolt down on protector cap. Tighten
bolt until flywheel comes free.

58775

a - Flywheel Puller (91-849154T1)

NOTE: Neither heat or hammer should be used on flywheel to aid in removal as damage
to flywheel or electrical components under flywheel may result.
6. Remove flywheel. Inspect flywheel for cracks or damage.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-7

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Installation
IMPORTANT: Clean flywheel/crankshaft taper with solvent and assemble dry.
1. Install flywheel.
2. Install flywheel washer and nut.
3. Hold flywheel with Flywheel Holder (91-52344). Torque nut to 125 lb-ft (169.5 Nm).

58776

a - Flywheel Holder (91-52344)

Page 2B-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-9

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Flywheel/Alternator
22
18
21
23 17

20

19
95
20
27

16
25 95

15
26

24
3

2
4

10
6

29 5

11
7

1
12
7
30

13 7 28
5
5

14 4

9
4
95 2-4-C With Teflon 14 9

Page 2B-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Flywheel/Alternator
TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft. Nm
1 1 ALTERNATOR
2 1 SCREW (M10 x 100) 40 54
3 1 SCREW (M10 x120) 40 54
4 3 WASHER
5 3 MOUNT
6 1 BRACKET
7 3 WASHER
8 1 BRACKET
9 2 NUT 40 54
10 1 SCREW (M10 x 55) 40 54
11 1 CABLE
12 1 PIN
13 1 BRACKET
14 3 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1 IN.) 15.5 21
15 1 SPRING
16 1 BELT TENSIONER ARM ASSY
17 1 STUD (M10 x 85)
18 1 NUT 15 20
19 1 BUSHING
20 2 WASHER
21 1 PULLEY
22 1 SCREW (M10 x 35) 25 34
23 1 BELT
24 1 FLYWHEEL
25 1 NUT (M16X1.5) 125 170
26 1 WASHER
27 1 PLUG
28 1 NUT 110 9 12
29 1 WASHER
30 1 J CLAMP

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-11

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

System Components
The battery charging system consists of the alternator, battery, ignition switch, starter so-
lenoid and the wiring which connects these components.
c
BLK

BLK

YEL/RED
aa

d
RED
RED

RED
RED

RED
BLK RED
RED
BLK

RED PPL
RED RED
RED RED

bb
58911
a - Alternator
b - Battery
c - 20 Ampere Fuse
d - Starter Solenoid

Precautions
The following precautions must be observed when working on the alternator system. Fail-
ure to observe these precautions may result in serious damage to the alternator system.
1. Do not attempt to polarize the alternator.
2. Do not short across or ground any of the terminals on the alternator, except as specifi-
cally instructed.
3. Never disconnect the alternator output lead, regulator harness or battery cables when
the alternator is being driven by the engine.
4. Always remove NEGATIVE (–) battery cable from battery before working on alternator
system.
5. When installing battery, be sure to connect the NEGATIVE (–) (GROUNDED) battery
cable to NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal and the POSITIVE (+) battery cable to POSI-
TIVE (+) battery terminal.
6. When using a charger or booster battery, connect it in parallel with existing battery
(POSITIVE to POSITIVE; NEGATIVE to NEGATIVE).

Page 2B-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Alternator Description
The alternator employs a rotor, which is supported in 2 end frames by ball bearings, and
is driven at 2.5 times engine speed. The rotor contains a field winding enclosed between
2 multiple-finger pole pieces. The ends of the field winding are connected to 2 brushes
which make continuous sliding contact with the slip rings. The current (flowing through
the field winding) creates a magnetic field that causes the adjacent fingers of the pole
pieces to become alternate north and south magnetic poles.
A 3-phase stator is mounted directly over the rotor pole pieces and between the 2 end
frames. It consists of 3 windings wound 120° electrically out-of-phase on the inside of a
laminated core. The windings are connected together on one end, while the other ends
are connected to a full-wave rectifier bridge.
The rectifier bridge contains 8 diodes which allows current to flow from ground, through
the stator and to the output terminal, but not in the opposite direction.
When current is supplied to the rotor field winding, and the rotor is turned, the movement
of the magnetic fields created induces an alternating current into the stator windings. The
rectifier bridge changes this alternating current to direct current which appears at the out-
put terminal. A diode trio is connected to the stator windings to supply current to the regu-
lator and the rotor field during operation.
Voltage output of the alternator is controlled by a transistorized voltage regulator that
senses the voltage at the battery and regulates the field current to maintain alternator volt-
age for properly charging the battery. Current output of the alternator does not require reg-
ulation, as maximum current output is self-limited by the design of the alternator. As long
as the voltage is regulated within the prescribed limits, the alternator cannot produce ex-
cessive current. A cutout relay in the voltage regulator also is not required, as the rectifier
diodes prevent the battery from discharging back through the stator.
A small amount of current is supplied by the excitation circuit in the regulator to the rotor
field to initially start the alternator charging. Once the alternator begins to produce output,
field current is supplied solely by the diode trio.
The alternator is equipped with 2 fans which induce air flow through the alternator to re-
move heat created by the rectifier and stator.

Diagnosis of Alternator System on Engine

1. If problem is an undercharged battery, verify condition has not been caused by exces-
sive accessory current draw or by accessories which have accidentally been left on.
2. Check physical condition and state of charge of battery. Battery must be at least 75%
(1.230 specific gravity) of fully charged to obtain valid results in the following tests. If
not, charge battery before testing system.
3. Inspect entire alternator system wiring for defects. Check all connections for tightness
and cleanliness, particularly battery cable clamps and battery terminals.
IMPORTANT: RED output lead from alternator must be tight. A darkened RED
sleeve indicates lead was loose and becoming hot.
4. Check alternator drive belt for cracks and fraying. Replace if necessary. Check belt
tension.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-13

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Alternator System Circuitry Test

Using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, perform the following tests:
Output Circuit
1. Connect POSITIVE (+) voltmeter lead to alternator terminal B (output terminal). Con-
nect NEGATIVE (–) lead to case ground on alternator.
2. Shake alternator wiring harness. Meter should indicate battery voltage and should not
vary. If proper reading is not obtained, check for loose or dirty connections or dam-
aged wiring.

58883
a - Terminal B

Page 2B-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Sensing Circuit
1. Unplug RED and PURPLE lead connector from alternator.
2. Connect POSITIVE (+) voltmeter lead to RED lead and NEGATIVE (–) voltmeter lead
to ground.
3. Voltmeter should indicate battery voltage. If correct voltage is not present, check
sensing circuit (RED lead) for loose or dirty connections or damaged wiring.

58726
a - Sense Lead (RED)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-15

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Voltage Output
1. Using a 0-20 volt DC voltmeter, connect POSITIVE (+) lead of voltmeter to TERMINAL
B of alternator and NEGATIVE (–) lead of voltmeter to engine ground.
2. Start engine and allow to warm up. Increase engine RPM from idle to 2000. Normal
voltage output should be 14.1 – 15.0 volts.
NOTE: If alternator is under-charging, check connections. If alternator is over-charging,
replace alternator.

58884
a - Terminal B

Page 2B-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Current Output
NOTE: Before conducting current output test, assure that all boat electrical accessories
are turned OFF.
1. With engine shut off, install ammeter with clamp-on current probe (capable of reading
60+ amperes) onto alternator charging conductor (10 AWG Red Wire).
2. Start engine and allow to warm up.
3. Battery voltage should be between 14.2 and 15.0 VDC for all engine RPMs.
Alternator output current should correspond with graph below.
c b

58882
a - Ammeter (DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter 91-854009A1)
b - Clamp-On Current Probe (91-802650)
c - Alternator Charging Conductor (10 AWG Red Wire)
NOTE: Alternator amperage output can vary by as much as 10% due to heat buildup from
the numbers listed below. Alternator output listed below was with a battery loaded at 12.6
volts.

RPM AMPS @ ALTERNATOR AMPS @ BATTERY ENGINE DRAW AMPS

600 21 16 5
1000 37 31 6
1500 44 36 8
2000 48 39 9
2500 50 40 10
3000 51 41 10
3500 51 41 10
4000 52 42 10
4500 52 42 10
5000 52 42 10
5500 52 42 10
5750 52 42 10

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-17

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Current Output Troubleshooting

Current Output is Low Battery Cables are loose or corroded
Defective Battery (Open Circuit)
Defective Alternator
Current Output is High Accessories turned on
Defective Battery (Internal Short)
Defective Alternator

Repair
Removal
1. Remove top cowling.
2. Disconnect battery cables from battery.
3. Disconnect wiring harness from alternator.
4. Remove belt from alternator.
5. Remove attaching bolts.

58782
a - Attaching Bolt b - Harnesses

Page 2B-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Installation
1. Secure alternator to engine block with attaching bolts. Torque top bolt to 40 lb-ft (54
Nm). Torque bottom nut to 35 lb-ft (47.5 Nm).
2. Rotate belt tensioner and install alternator belt in groove of flywheel and alternator
pulley.

58771

a - Belt Tensioner (Rotate Counterclockwise)

3. Reconnect electrical harness to alternator.

a a

c
58782
a - Top Bolt [Torque to 40 lb-ft (54 Nm)]
b - Bottom Nut [Torque to 35 lb-ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Harnesses

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-19

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Alternator Belt Tension Adjustment

Correct alternator belt tension is maintained by a belt tensioner assembly.

58771
a - Belt Tensioner Assembly

Page 2B-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter System
NOTE: Early production engines will be equipped with centrifugal bendix type starter mo-
tors. Later production engines will be equipped with solenoid driven bendix type starter
motors.
Starter Motor Amperes Draw
STARTING Electric Start – All Models
SYSTEM Centrifugal Bendix
Starter Draw (Under Load) 165 Amperes
Starter Load (No Load) 30 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length 0.25 in. (25.4 mm)
Solenoid Driven Bendix
Starter Draw (Under Load) 175 Amperes
Starter Load (No Load) 60 Amperes
Minimum Brush Length 0.25 in. (25.4 mm)
Battery Rating Min. 630 Marine Cranking Amps
(MCA) or 490 Cold Cranking Amps
(CCA)

Starter System Components

Battery
Starter Solenoid
Neutral Start Switch
Starter Motor
Ignition Switch
Description
Purpose – to crank the engine. The battery supplies electricity to activate the starter mo-
tor. When the ignition switch is turned to the “START” position, the starter solenoid is ener-
gized and completes the starter circuit between the battery and starter.
The neutral start switch opens the starter circuit when the shift control lever is not in neu-
tral thus preventing accidental starting when the engine is in gear.

CAUTION
The starter motor may be damaged if operated continuously. DO NOT operate
continuously for more than 30 seconds. Allow a 2 minute cooling period between
starting attempts.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-21

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Motor (Centrifugal Bendix)

25

25

95

25

25 Liquid Neoprene
95 2-4-C With Teflon

Page 2B-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

(Centrifugal Bendix) Starter Motor

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 STARTER MOTOR
2 1 DRIVE KIT
3 1 DRIVE
4 1 DRIVE END PLATE
5 2 THRU BOLT 70 8
6 1 WASHER
7 1 ARMATURE
8 1 BRUSH SET
9 2 BRUSH HOLDER
10 2 SCREW
11 1 END CAP
12 2 COLLAR
13 2 RUBBER STOP
14 1 SCREW (1/4-20 x 5/8)
15 1 WIRE ASSEMBLY (BLACK)
16 1 LOCKWASHER
17 1 NUT
18 1 BATTERY CABLE (POSITIVE)
19 1 DECAL-Warning-High Voltage

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-23

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Troubleshooting the Starter Circuit (Centrifugal Bendix)

Before beginning the troubleshooting flow chart, verify the following conditions:
1. Battery is fully charged.
2. Control lever is in “NEUTRAL” position.
3. Check terminals for corrosion and loose connections.
4. Check cables and wiring for frayed and worn insulation.
5. Check 20 amp fuse.
NOTE: Location of test points (called out in flow chart) are numbered below.

b
2 7
6 1

a
3

e
4

d
5

58064
a - Starter Solenoid d - Ignition Switch
b - Starter e - 20 Ampere Fuse
c - Neutral Start Switch f - Battery

Page 2B-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart (Centrifugal Bendix)

Starter Motor Does Not Turn

SAFETY WARNING: Disconnect YELLOW (starter motor)

cable from starter solenoid test point 1 BEFORE making
tests 1-thru-7 to prevent unexpected engine cranking.

TEST 1
Use an ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) and connect meter leads
between NEGATIVE (-) battery post and common pow-
erhead ground.

No Continuity Indicated - There is an open circuit in the Continuity Indicated

BLACK NEGATIVE (-) battery cable between the NEGATIVE (-) Proceed to TEST 2
battery post and the powerhead.
• Check cable for loose or corroded connections.
• Check cable for open.

Test 2
a. Disconnect BLACK ground wire(s) from Test Point 2.
No voltage reading: b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2.
proceed to TEST 3. c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

TEST 3 12 Volt Reading*

a. Reconnect BLACK ground wire. Check BLACK ground wire for poor connection
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 3. or open circuit.
Reconnect ground wire to starter solenoid.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. Proceed to TEST 7.

No voltage reading: 12 Volt Reading

Proceed to TEST 4 Defective starter solenoid

TEST 4
a. Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
No voltage reading: engine ground and Test Point 4. Neutral start switch is open or YELLOW/RED
Proceed to TEST 5 b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. wire is open between Test Points 4 and 3.

TEST 5
No voltage reading: Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
Proceed to Test 6. engine ground and Test Point 5 Defective ignition switch.

TEST 6
Check for voltage between common engine ground and Test Point 6.

No voltage reading: 12 Volt Reading*

Check RED wire between battery (+) Check fuse in RED wire between Test Points
POSITIVE terminal and Test Point 6.
5 and 6.
Check for open RED wire between Test Points
5 and 6.

*Battery Voltage

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-25

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Flow Chart (continued)

TEST 7
a. Connect voltmeter between common engine and Test Point 1.
b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

No voltage reading: 12 Volt Reading*

Defective starter solenoid Should hear solenoid click: proceed to TEST 8

TEST 8
a. Reconnect BLACK cable (with YELLOW sleeve) to starter solenoid Test
Point 1.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

No voltage reading:
12 Volt Reading*
Check BLACK cable (with YELLOW
sleeve) for poor connection or open circuit. If starter motor does not turn, check starter motor.

*Battery Voltage

Page 2B-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Removal (Centrifugal Bendix)

CAUTION
Disconnect battery leads from battery before removing starter.
1. Disconnect BLACK ground cable from starter.
2. Disconnect BLACK (with YELLOW sleeve) cable from starter.
3. Remove 4 bolts and upper and lower starter clamps. Lift starter from engine.

a
e

d
f

58803
a - BLACK ground cable d - Lower Mount Bolts
b - BLACK (with YELLOW e - Upper Clamp
sleeve) + 12 volt cable f - Lower Clamp
c - Upper Mount Bolts

Starter Installation (Centrifugal Bendix)

1. Slide rubber collars on starter.
2. If the removed starter was equipped with a spacer replace spacer on upper collar.
a a

b
11645
a - Rubber Collar b - Spacer (If Equipped)

3. Install starter to engine with starter clamps. Make sure that BLACK ground cable is
fastened, along with lower mounting bolts. Torque bolts to 210 lb. in. (23.5 N·m).
4. Reconnect yellow cable to positive (+) terminal on starter.
5. Reconnect BLACK ground cable to terminal on starter.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-27

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Disassembly (Centrifugal Bendix)

1. Remove starter as outlined in Starter Removal.
2. Remove 2 through bolts from starter.
a

b
11646
a - Through Bolts
b - Commutator End Cap

3. Tap commutator end cap to loosen and remove from frame. Do not lose brush springs.
4. Brush replacement is recommended if brushes are pitted, chipped or worn to less than
0.25 in. (6.4 mm). If necessary, remove brushes as follows:
a. Remove hex nut and washers from POSITIVE (+) terminal and remove POSITIVE
brushes and terminal as an assembly.
b. Remove 2 bolts securing NEGATIVE (–) brushes and brush holder to end cap.

b a c

e
e
c
b

d
11656
a - Brush Holder
b - Positive Brushes
c - Negative Brushes
d - Positive Terminal
e - Bolts (fasten negative brushes and holder)

Page 2B-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

5. Remove armature (with drive end cap) from starter frame.

6. Remove locknut and remove drive assembly from armature shaft.

a - Hold armature shaft with wrench on hex portion of drive assembly

7. Remove parts from shaft.
e f g

a b c d 11658
a - Locknut
b - Spacer
c - Spring
d - Drive Assembly
e - Drive End Cap
f - Armature Shaft
g - Washer

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-29

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Cleaning, Inspection and Testing

CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean all starter motor parts.
2. Check pinion teeth for chips, cracks or excessive wear.
3. Replace the drive clutch spring and/or collar if tension is not adequate or if wear is
excessive.
4. Inspect brush holder for damage or for failure to hold brushes against commutator.
5. Replace brushes that are pitted or worn to less than 1/4 in. (6.4mm) in length.
6. Inspect the armature conductor (commutator bar junction) for a tight connection. A
loose connection (excessive heat from prolonged cranking melts solder joints) results
in a burned commutator bar.
7. Resurface and undercut a rough commutator as follows:

CAUTION
Do not turn down the commutator excessively.
a. Resurface the commutator and undercut the insulation between the commutator
bars 1/32 in. (0.8mm) to the full width of the insulation and so that the undercut
is flat.
b. Clean the commutator slots after undercutting.
c. Sand the commutator lightly with No. 00 sandpaper to remove burrs, then clean
the commutator.
d. Recheck the armature on a growler for shorts as specified in the following proce-
dure (“Testing”).
8. Open-circuited armatures often can be repaired. The most likely place for an open cir-
cuit is at the commutator bars, as a result of long cranking periods. Long cranking peri-
ods overheat the starter motor so that solder in the connections melts and is thrown
out. The resulting poor connections then cause arcing and burning of the commutator
bars.
9. Repair bars, that are not excessively burned, by resoldering the leads in bars (using
rosin flux solder) and turning down the commutator in a lathe to remove burned mate-
rial, then undercut the mica.
10. Clean out the copper or brush dust from slots between the commutator bars.
11. Check the armature for ground. See the following procedure (“Testing”).

Page 2B-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

TESTING
Armature Test for Shorts
Check armature for short circuits by placing on growler and holding hack saw blade over
armature core while armature is rotated. If saw blade vibrates, armature is shorted. Re-
check after cleaning between commutator bars. If saw blade still vibrates, replace arma-
ture.

11669
Armature Test for Ground
1. Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on armature core or shaft
and other lead on commutator.
2. If meter indicates continuity, armature is grounded and must be replaced.

11675

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-31

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Checking Positive Brushes and Terminal

Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Connect meter leads between POSITIVE brushes. Meter
must indicate full continuity or zero resistance. If resistance is indicated, inspect lead to
brush and lead to POSITIVE terminal solder connection. If connection cannot be repaired,
brushes must be replaced.

11673
a - Positive (+) Brushes

Testing Negative Brushes for Ground

Set ohmmeter to (R x1 scale). Place one lead of the ohmmeter on the NEGATIVE brush
and the other lead on the end cap (bare metal). If the meter indicates NO continuity, re-
place the NEGATIVE brush. Repeat this procedure on the other NEGATIVE brush.

11674
a - Negative (–) Brushes
b - End Cap

Page 2B-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Reassembly
1. If brushes were removed, replace as follows:
a. Install POSITIVE brushes (along with POSITIVE terminal) into commutator end
cap.

b
i

h
d

f c
g

11660
a - End Cap
b - Positive Brushes
c - Positive Terminal
d - Insulating Bushing
e - Washer
f - Split Washer
g - Hex Nut
h - Long Brush Lead
i - Push Lead into Slot

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-33

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

b. Install NEGATIVE brushes (along with brush holder).

c
b
a

d
d
b
a

11656
a - Positive (+) Brushes
b - Negative (–) Brushes
c - Brush Holder
d - Bolts (fasten negative brushes and holder)

2. If removed, reinstall parts on armature shaft. Use a new locknut and tighten securely
on end of shaft.
e f g

a b c d 11658
a - Locknut
b - Spacer
c - Spring
d - Drive Assembly
e - Drive End Cap
f - Armature Shaft
g - Washer

3. Lubricate helix threads on armature shaft with a drop of SAE 10W oil.
4. Lubricate bushing in drive end plate with a drop of SAE 10W oil.
5. Position armature into starter frame.

Page 2B-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

6. To prevent damage to brushes and springs when installing commutator end cap, it is
recommended that a brush retaining tool be made as shown:

18-Gauge Sheet Metal METRIC SCALE

3” = 76.2mm
2” = 50.8mm
1-3/4” = 44.5mm
1-11/16” = 42.9mm
3/4” = 19.1mm
1/2” = 12.7mm

7. Lubricate bushing (located in commutator end cap) with one drop of SAE 10W oil. DO
NOT over lubricate.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-35

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

8. Place springs and brushes into brush holder and hold in place with brush retainer tool.

11661
a - Bushing Retainer Tool
b - Bushing (do not over lubricate)

9. Install armature into starter frame and align match marks (a). Install commutator end
cap onto starter frame and align match marks (b). Remove brush retainer tool. Install
through bolts (c) and torque to 70 lb. in. (8.0 N·m).

c c

11648
a - Alignment Marks
b - Alignment Marks
c - Bolts [Torque to 70 lb. in. (8 N m)]

Page 2B-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

STARTER SOLENOID TEST

1. Disconnect all wires from solenoid.
2. Use an ohmmeter (R x1 scale) and connect meter leads between solenoid terminals
1 and 2.
3. Connect a 12-volt power supply between solenoid terminals 3 and 4. Solenoid should
click and meter should read 0 ohms (full continuity).
4. If meter does not read 0 ohms (full continuity), replace solenoid.

b
1 3
a

a
b
2

51809
a - 12 Volt Supply
b - VOA Leads

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-37

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Motor (Solenoid Driven Bendix)

1
3
2

5
4

12 14

13
9

10
11

23 15
24
16 18

24
25
17

21 19
20

21

22
22 58430

Page 2B-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Motor (Solenoid Driven Bendix)

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 2 THRU BOLT 110 12.5
2 2 SCREWS 30 3.4
3 1 END CAP
4 1 BUSHING
5 1 BRUSH PLATE ASSEMBLY
6 1 ARMATURE
7 1 FIELD FRAME
8 1 SOLENOID
9 1 SHIELD
10 1 CUSHION
11 3 PLANETARY GEARS
12 1 PLUG
13 1 DISC
14 1 SHIFT FORK
15 1 GEAR/CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
16 1 BEARING
17 1 HOUSING
18 3 SCREW 40 4.5
19 1 DRIVE GEAR
20 1 SNAP RING
21 2 MOUNTING COLLAR
22 2 STOP
23 2 NUT 55 6.0
24 2 WASHER
25 1 NUT 20 2.3

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-39

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Troubleshooting the Solenoid Driven Bendix Starter Circuit

Before beginning the troubleshooting flow chart, verify the following conditions:
1. Confirm that battery is fully charged.
2. Check that control lever is in “NEUTRAL” position.
3. Check terminals for corrosion and loose connections.
4. Check cables and wiring for frayed and worn insulation.
5. Check 20 amp fuse.
Location of “Test Points” (called out in flow chart) are numbered below.

10
TO ALTERNATOR
9
8
1
STARTER
BATTERY
STARTER
SOLENOID

4
2

SLAVE SOLENOID

20 AMP FUSE 3
7

6 5

IGNITION SWITCH
NEUTRAL START SWITCH

(LOCATED IN CONTROL HOUSING)

58431
Solenoid Driven Bendix Starter Circuit

Page 2B-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart (Solenoid Driven Bendix)

Starter Motor Does Not Turn

TEST 1
With ignition key in START position, check for battery volt-
age at TEST POINT 1.

Voltage indicated and solenoid clicks No voltage indicated Voltage indicated and solenoid does not click

Go to TEST 2 Check for starter motor ground at Test Point 10

Voltage indicated at Test Point 9
is 9.5 volts or greater.

Good ground Bad ground – clean cable ends

Voltage indicated at Test Point 9 or replace ground cable
is less than 9.5 volts.

Defective starter solenoid

Defective starter motor Defective starter solenoid

SAFETY WARNING: Disconnect BLACK with RED sleeve (starter motor)

cable from slave solenoid test point 7 BEFORE making tests 1–thru–7 to
prevent unexpected engine cranking.

TEST 2
Use an ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) and connect meter leads
between NEGATIVE (–) battery post and common power-
head ground.

No Continuity Indicated – There is an open circuit in the Continuity Indicated

BLACK NEGATIVE (–) battery cable between the NEGATIVE (–) Proceed to TEST 3
battery post and the powerhead.
• Check cable for loose or corroded connections.
• Check cable for open.

Test 3
a. Disconnect BLACK ground wire(s) from Test Point 3.
No voltage reading: b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 3.
proceed to TEST 4. c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

TEST 4 12 Volt Reading*

a. Reconnect BLACK ground wire. Check BLACK ground wire for poor connection
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 4. or open circuit.
Reconnect ground wire to starter solenoid.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position. Proceed to TEST 8.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-41

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

No voltage reading: 12 Volt Reading

proceed to TEST 5 Defective starter solenoid

TEST 5
a. Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
engine ground and Test Point 5. Neutral start switch is open or YELLOW/RED
No voltage reading: wire is open between Test Points 5 and 4.
proceed to TEST 6 b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

TEST 6
Connect voltmeter between common 12 Volt Reading*
No voltage reading:
engine ground and Test Point 6 Defective ignition switch.
proceed to TEST 7

TEST 7
Check for voltage between common engine ground and Test Point 7.

No voltage reading: 12 Volt Reading*

Check BLACK cable with RED Check fuse in RED wire between Test Points
sleeve between battery(+) 6 and 7.
POSITIVE terminal and Test Point 8 Check for open RED wire between Test
and Test Point 7. Points 6 and 7.

TEST 8
a. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2.
b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

No voltage reading: 12 Volt Reading*

Defective slave solenoid Should hear solenoid click: proceed to TEST 9

TEST 9
a. Reconnect BLACK cable (with RED sleeve) to slave solenoid Test
Point 7.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.

No voltage reading:
Check BLACK cable (with RED sleeve) for
poor connection or open circuit.

*Battery Voltage

Page 2B-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Removal (Solenoid Driven Bendix)

CAUTION
Disconnect battery leads from battery before removing starter.
1. Disconnect battery cables from battery.
2. Disconnect wires from starter solenoid terminals.
3. Remove starter trunion mounting bolts and remove starter from engine.

b
a

58428

a - Starter Solenoid
b - Mounting Bolts

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-43

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Starter Installation (Solenoid Driven Bendix)

1. Secure starter to engine with 4 bolts. Use right top bolt to attach BLACK NEGATIVE.
Torque top attaching bolts to 23 lb-ft (31 Nm). Torque bottom attaching bolts to 21 lb-ft.
(28.5 Nm).
2. Secure BLACK cables (with RED sleeves) to POSITIVE (+) terminal on starter sole-
noid. Torque nut to 55 lb-in (6 Nm).

a
e
c

b d

58428
a - Top Bolts [Torque to 23 lb-ft (31 Nm)]
b - Bottom Bolts [Torque to 21 lb-ft (28.5 Nm)]
c - BLACK Cables (with RED sleeves)
d - Nut [Torque to 55 lb-in (6 Nm)]
e - Starter Solenoid

Page 2B-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Disassembly (Solenoid Driven Bendix Starter)

1. Remove brush lead from solenoid and through bolts from end frame.

e
b

a
c

58434
a - Brush Lead d - Brush Plate Screws
b - Through Bolts e - End Frame
c - Starter Solenoid
2. Remove armature and field frame from drive housing.
NOTE: Permanent magnets inside field frame will be holding armature in place.

d
e
58430
a - End Frame and Bearing
b - Screws (2) [Internal Torx – Snap On E6 Socket]
c - Brush Holder
d - Armature
e - Field Frame

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-45

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

3. Remove shield and cushion from drive housing.

58432

a - Shield
b - Cushion
c - Drive Housing
4. Remove 3 screws retaining starter solenoid. Remove solenoid from drive housing.
5. Remove snap ring and gear from starter shaft.

b
d

58436
a - Drive Housing d - Snap Ring
b - Starter Solenoid e - Pinion Gear
c - Screws (3) [ Internal
Torx– Snap On E6
Socket]

Page 2B-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

6. Remove planetary gear and clutch assembly from drive housing.

7. Remove solenoid arm, metal disc and plug from drive housing.

d
c

58437
a - Planetary Gear and d - Metal Disc
Clutch Assembly e - Solenoid Arm
b - Drive Housing
c - Plug
8. Inspect drive housing needle bearing for roughness. If bearing is worn or damaged,
bearing can be removed by using an appropriate mandrel to drive/press bearing from
drive housing.
NOTE: If bearing has spun in drive housing bore, drive housing must be replaced.

58439

a - Needle Bearing
b - Drive Housing

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-47

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Cleaning and Inspection

IMPORTANT: Do not use grease dissolving solvents to clean electrical compo-
nents, planetary gears or drive clutch. Solvent will damage insulation and wash the
lubricant out of the clutch drive and gears. Use clean rags and compressed air to
clean components.
1. Test over-running clutch action of drive. Pinion should turn freely in over-running di-
rection and must not slip in cranking direction.
2. Inspect pinion teeth for wear.
3. Inspect spring for tension and drive collar for wear.
4. Check that bearings roll freely. If any roughness is felt, replace bearing.
5. Inspect planetary gear assembly. Gears must mesh easily and roll freely with no bind-
ing.

Page 2B-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Reassembly (Solenoid Driven Bendix Starter)

1. Install solenoid arm with planetary gear and clutch assembly into drive housing.

b
58438

a - Solenoid Arm
b - Planetary Gear and Clutch Assembly
c - Drive Housing
2. Install metal disc and plug into drive housing.

a
b

58433
a - Metal Disc
b - Plug

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-49

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

3. Attach solenoid arm to starter solenoid. Install starter solenoid in drive housing and
secure with 3 screws. Torque screws to 40 lb-in (4.5 N.m).
4. Install drive gear and secure with snap ring.
5. Reinstall rubber bumpers on housing.

c
e
a

58436
a - Drive Housing d - Drive Gear
b - Starter Solenoid e - Snap Ring
c - Screw (3) [Torque to f - Bumpers
40 lb-in (4.5 N.m)
6. Install cushion and shield in drive housing.
c

58432
a - Shield
b - Cushion
c - Drive Housing

Page 2B-50 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

7. Install field frame over armature.

8. While holding brushes back, slide brush plate onto armature while aligning brush lead
grommet with slot in field frame.
9. Secure end plate to brush assembly with 2 screws. Torque screws to 30 lb-in (3.4 Nm)
NOTE: Prior to installing field frame assembly into drive housing, align slot in field frame
with plug in drive housing.

d
c

58435

a - Armature
b - Field Frame Grommet Slot
c - Brush Plate
d - Brush Lead Grommet
e - End Plate
f - Screws [Torque to 30 lb-in (3.4 Nm)]
g - Field Frame Plug Slot

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-51

CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

10. Install field frame and end frame in drive housing.

11. Install through bolts and brush lead. Torque through bolts to 110 lb-in (12.5 Nm).
Torque brush nut to 55 lb-in (6 Nm).

b
d c

f
a
58434
a - End Frame
b - Field Frame
c - Drive Housing
d - Through Bolts [Torque to 110 lb-in (12.5 Nm)]
e - Brush Lead
f - Brush Nut [Torque to 55 lb-in (6 Nm)]

Page 2B-52 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CHARGING & STARTING SYSTEM

Commander 2000 Key Switch Test

1. Disconnect remote control wiring harness and instrument panel connector.
2. Set ohmmeter on R x 1 scale for the following tests.
3. If meter readings are other than specified in the following tests, verify that switch and
not wiring is faulty. If wiring checks ok, replace switch.
IMPORTANT: Key switch must be positioned to “RUN” or “START” and key pushed
in to actuate choke for this test.

KEY CONTINUITY SHOULD BE INDICATED AT THE FOLLOWING POINTS:

POSITION BLK BLK/YEL RED YEL/RED PUR YEL/BLK

OFF

RUN

START

CHOKE*

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2B-53

 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING

ELECTRICAL
Section 2C - Timing, Synchronizing & Adjusting
Table of Contents
2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1 Maximum Throttle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4
C
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2 Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3 Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Throttle Cam Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3 Throttle Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-5
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4 Throttle Plate Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-6

Specifications
EFI MODELS Idle RPM
– All Models 650 ± 50
Wide Open Throttle (WOT) RPM
– All Models 5250 – 5750
Float Adjustment (Vapor Separator)
Float Level Preset @ Factory
IGNITION Type Digital Inductive
SYSTEM Spark Plug Type NGK BPZ8HS-10
Spark Plug Gap 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)
Firing Order 1-2-3-4-5-6
Throttle Position Sensor
@ Idle 0.19 – 1.0 vdc
@ W.O.T. 3.45 – 4.63 vdc
TIMING Idle Timing
– 150XRI/175/200 XRI Models 1° – 7° ATDC

– 175 XRI
@ WOT RPM 18° BTDC

– Model 150 XRI

@ WOT RPM 18° BTDC

– Model 200XRI
@ WOT RPM 20° BTDC

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2C-1

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING

Special Tools
1. Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) 91-823686A2

2. Software Cartridge 91-880118A2

3. DDT Reference Manual 90-881204-1

4. Adaptor Harness 84-822560A5 (use with DDT)

Page 2C-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING

Adjustments
IMPORTANT: All throttle linkage adjustments have been set at factory and appro-
priately secured to prevent unnececessary readjustment. These factory settings
enable this engine to meet federally mandated emission standards and should not
be tampered with. However, should certain components fail, it may be necessary
to reset throttle linkage to approximate factory settings.
Throttle Cam Adjustment
1. Loosen cam follower screw (a), using Snap-On Tool TTXR25E, allowing cam follower
to move freely.
2. Allow roller (b) to rest on throttle cam (c). Adjust idle stop screw (d) on throttle arm (e)
to align curved radius on throttle cam (c) with center of roller (b). Tighten jam nut (f).
3. While holding throttle arm against idle stop, move cam follower arm until a 0.005 in.
to 0.020 in. (0.13 mm to 0.51 mm) clearance exists between roller and throttle cam.
Tighten cam follower screw (a).

a
b

c
e

58899
a - Cam Follower Screw e - Throttle Arm
b - Roller f - Jam Nut
c - Throttle Cam
d - Idle Stop Screw

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2C-3

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING

Timing
All timing adjustments are controlled by the Electronic Control Module (ECM). No external
mechanical timing adjustments can be made.
Actual engine timing can be monitored by using a Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT).
Ignition timing at idle, whether in gear or in neutral, will vary.
The ECM will use ignition timing to maintain an rpm of approximately 700 in neutral and
625 in forward gear. An engine that is cold will require more timing advance than an engine
that is at normal operating temperature.
Engine timing at idle should be between 1° to 7° ATDC with the engine at normal operating
temperature.
Engine timing at 5000 rpm should be approximately 18° to 20° BTDC for all models.
Maximum Throttle Adjustment
1. Hold throttle arm (a) against full throttle stop screw (b). Adjust full throttle stop screw
to allow full throttle valve opening, while maintaining a clearance of 0.020 in. (0.50
mm) between arm (c) of throttle shaft and stop (d) on throttle assembly. Tighten lock-
nut (e).
2. Check for slight free play (roller lifter from cam) between roller and cam at full throttle
to prevent linkage from binding. Readjust full throttle stop screw, if necessary.

c
0.020 in.
(0.050 mm)

a
b

58900
a - Throttle Arm c - Throttle Shaft Arm
b - Full Throttle Stop d - Stop
Screw e - Locknut

Page 2C-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING

Throttle Position Sensor

The Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is not adjustable. The Throttle Position Sensor func-
tion can be monitored by using the DDT. All voltages should be within specifications listed.
Voltage progression from idle to wide open throttle should be smooth. If voltage is out of
specification or progression is erratic, TPS should be replaced.

IGNITION Throttle Position Sensor

SYSTEM @ Idle 0.19 – 1.0 vdc
@ W.O.T. 3.45 – 4.63 vdc

Idle Speed
The idle speed is not adjustable. Idle speed is controlled by the ECM by advancing or re-
tarding the ignition timing to maintain an idle rpm of approximately 700 in neutral and 625
in gear.
Throttle Cable Installation
1. With end of throttle cable connected to throttle lever, hold throttle lever (a) against idle
stop (b). Adjust throttle cable barrel to slip into barrel recess of control cable anchor
bracket, with a light preload of throttle lever against idle stop. Lock barrel in place.
IMPORTANT: Excessive preload on throttle cable will cause difficulty when shifting
from “FORWARD” to “NEUTRAL” (readjust throttle cable barrel, if necessary).

c d
b

57838

a - Throttle Lever c - Cable Barrel – Adjust

b - Idle Stop To Hold Idle Stop
Screw Against Stop
d - Idle Stop Screw

2. Check preload on throttle cable by placing a thin piece of paper between idle stop
screw (a) and idle stop (b). Preload is correct when paper can be removed without
tearing, but has some drag on it (readjust throttle barrel, if necessary).
b
a

57839
a - Idle Stop Screw b - Idle Stop

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2C-5

TIMING, SYNCHRONIZING & ADJUSTING

Throttle Plate Screw

IMPORTANT: Do not adjust throttle plate stop screw from factory setting. However,
should the throttle plate require adjustment, use the throttle plate stop screw to set
the total throttle plate clearance @ 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) or 0.020 in. (0.50 mm) each
side.

58898
a
a - 0.020 in. (0.50 mm) each side
b - Throttle Plate Stop Screw

Page 2C-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

ELECTRICAL
Section 2D – Wiring Diagrams
Table of Contents
2
Power Trim Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-2 Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-26
D
Instrument Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-3 Warning Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-27
Commander 3000 Classic Panel Remote CAL1 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-30
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-4 CAL2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-32
Commander 3000 Panel Remote Control . . . 2D-5 Master Reset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-35
4000 Series Mechanical Panel Control . . . . . 2D-6 System Tach & Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-36
Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Basic Operation and Features . . . . . . . . . 2D-36
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-7 Speedometer Display Screens . . . . . . . . . 2D-37
Oil Level Gauge Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 2D-8 Tachometer Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-38
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-9 Troll Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-39
Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-40
Diagram (Dual Outboard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-10 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-41
QSI Gauge Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-12 Auto-Detection Engine Function . . . . . . . . 2D-45
Tachometer Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-12 Master Reset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-45
Water Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-13 Tachometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-46
Oil Level Gauge Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-14 Speedometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-50
Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram . . . 2D-16 SmartCraft Gauge Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-52
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-17 Basic Operation and Features . . . . . . . . . 2D-52
Warning System Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-18 Speedometer Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . 2D-53
Guardian Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-19 Tachometer Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-54
Guardian System Operation with Gauges 2D-19 Troll Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-55
Guardian System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-19 Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-56
Analog Gauge Panel Mount Remote Control Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-57
Wiring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-21 Tachometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-61
System Monitor V2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-22 Speedometer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-64
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-22 SmartCraft Gauge Test Specifications . . . . . . 2D-66
Initial Power Up (Or After Master Reset) . 2D-22 Test Equipment Required: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-66
Standard Information Display Screens . . 2D-23 150/175/200 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-67
Display of Range and Depth Information 2D-25

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-1

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Power Trim Wiring Diagram

cc
bb
aa

dd

m
m

ll
ee

ff
gg

kk

hh
j i

a - Tach. Connector h - Trim Pump and Motor

b - Key Switch Assembly i - DOWN Solenoid
c - Trim Switch j - UP Solenoid
d - Trim Sender k - Bottom Cowl Switch
e - Start Solenoid l - 20 Ampere Fuse
f - To Battery m - Engine Harness
g - To Alternator n - Remote Control Harness

Page 2D-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Instrument Wiring Connections

Wire Color Where To
BLK = BLACK GROUND Speedometer Tachometer
TAN/WHT = TAN/WHITE OIL LIGHT
TAN/BLK = TAN/BLACK TEMPERATURE LIGHT
TAN = TAN TEMPERATURE GAUGE Temperature/Oil
PUR = PURPLE IGNITION 12 VOLT Volt Meter
GRY = GRAY TACHOMETER
BRN/WHT = BROWN/WHITE TRIM GAUGE
TAN/BLU = TAN/BLUE VISUAL WARNING KIT (OPT.)

aa bb
c

58912

Figure 1 – Without Light Switch

NOTE: ANY INSTRUMENT WIRING HARNESS LEADS NOT USED MUST BE TAPED
BACK TO THE HARNESS.
Speedometer Tachometer

Temperature/Oil
To 12V Volt Meter

aa bb
c

58913

Figure 2 – With Light Switch

a - Tachometer Receptacle - From Control Box or Ignition/Choke Switch
b - Tachometer Wiring Harness
c - Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit (Taped Back to Harness)
d - Light Switch

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-3

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Commander 3000 Classic Panel Remote Control

BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
RED = Red
Tan = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark

< F R >

RED

PURPLE

GREEN
aa

a - Neutral Interlock Switch

Page 2D-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Commander 3000 Panel Remote Control

BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark

RED

PURPLE

GREEN
aa

a - Neutral Interlock Switch

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-5

WIRING DIAGRAMS

4000 Series Mechanical Panel Control

BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark

d
RED/PURPLE

BLUE/WHITE

GREEN/WHITE aa

58629

a - Neutral Interlock Switch

b - Solder Connections covered with shrink tube
c - Emergency Stop Switch Harness
d - Trim Harness

Page 2D-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram

BLK=BLACK f
BLU=BLUE g
BRN=BROWN
GRN=GREEN
GRY=GRAY
PUR=PURPLE dd
RED=RED
TAN=TAN
WHT=WHITE ee
YEL=YELLOW

cc aa
bb

jj
kk
h
ii

jj

52204
a - Ignition/Choke Switch
b - Lanyard Stop Switch
c - Lead Not Used on Outboard Installations
d - Retainer
e - Tachometer
f - Trim Indicator Gauge (Optional)
g - Temperature Gauge
h - Remote Control
i - Power Trim Harness Connector
j - Connect Wires Together w/Screw and Nut (2 Places); Apply Liquid Neoprene
to Connections and Slide Rubber Sleeve over each Connection.
k - Lead to Optional Visual Warning Kit

IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back any
unused wiring harness leads.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-7

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Oil Level Gauge Wiring Diagram

ee

d ff

cc
gg

bb

aa

q
rr
pp ss hh

oo t

nn

jj

m
m l
k ii

a - To 12 Volt Source
b - PURPLE Wire (Connect to Trim Indicator Gauge “I” [or POSITIVE (+) 12 Volt
Source that is Turned “ON” and “OFF” with Ignition Switch])
c - Oil Level Gauge
d - BLACK Wire (Connects to NEGATIVE Ground)
e - To Ground
f - BLACK Wire (From Gauge to Oil Clip Connector)
g - LIGHT BLUE Sender Lead to Gauge
h - Wiring Harness (LT. BLU. and BLACK)
i - Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.)
j - Spring
k - Oil Clip Connector
l - Adaptor Housing
m - Screw (10-16 x 1/4 in.)
n - Spring
o - Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.)
p - BLACK Wire
q - Oil Level Sender Unit
r - Oil Pick-Up Tube
s - WHITE Lead (from Oil Level Sender)
t - Screw (10-16 x 5/8 in.)

Page 2D-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-9

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Instrument/Lanyard Stop Switch Wiring Diagram (Dual

Outboard)

d kk dd

cc b
gg
BLK=BLACK l
BATT GND
BLU=BLUE d
BRN=BROWN
GRN=GREEN SENDER

GRY=GRAY
PUR=PURPLE ee
RED=RED aa
TAN=TAN
WHT=WHITE
YEL=YELLOW

ff

nn

oo
hh nn

52205 PORT INSTALLATION

a - Ignition/Choke Switch
b - Lanyard Stop Switch
c - Lead not used on Outboard Installations
d - Retainer
e - Tachometer
f - Trim Indicator Gauge
g - Temperature Gauge
h - Remote Control

Page 2D-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

IMPORTANT: On installations where gauge options will not be used, tape back and
isolate unused wiring harness leads
gg

BATT GND

ii
SENDER

aa
ee

jj
ff

oo

m
m

STARBOARD INSTALLATION 52206

i - Synchronizer Gauge
j - Synchronizer Module
k - Lanyard Switch (Isolation) Diode
l - Y Harness
m - Power Trim Harness Connector
n - Connect Wires together with Screw and Nut (4 Places); Apply Liquid Neo-
prene to Connections and slide Rubber Sleeve over each Connection.
o - Lead to Visual Warning Kit

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-11

WIRING DIAGRAMS

QSI Gauge Wiring Diagrams

Tachometer Wiring Diagram
Tachometer dial on back side of case must be set to position number 4.
WIRING DIAGRAM A
Use this wiring diagram when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
b
c

a d

51106
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
c - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
d - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground

WIRING DIAGRAM B
Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.)
b
a
c

51106
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
c - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground

Page 2D-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Water Temperature Gauge

WIRING DIAGRAM A
Use this wiring diagram when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
b
c

d
a

SEND

e
a - Connect to + 12 Volt
b - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
c - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
d - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
e - Connect to TAN Lead located at the Tachometer Receptacle on Commander
Side Mount Remote Control or TAN Lead coming from Accessory Ignition/
Choke Assembly.

WIRING DIAGRAM B
Use this wiring diagram when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key is turned on.)
b
c
a

SEND

d 51105
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
c - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground
d - Connect to TAN Lead located at the Tachometer Receptacle on Commander
Side Mount Remote Control or TAN Lead coming from Accessory Ignition/
Choke Assembly

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-13

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Route TAN lead on starboard side of engine to engine/remote control harness. Connect
as shown.
IMPORTANT: Tape back and isolate any unused wiring harness leads.

28086
a - Lead from Temperature Sender
b - Engine/Remote Control Harness

Oil Level Gauge Wiring

LIGHT BULB POSITION A
Use this position when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
b

51109
a - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
b - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position

Page 2D-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

LIGHT BULB POSITION B

Use this position when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch. (In-
strument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.)
a

51112
a - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position
b - Sender
SENDER WIRING
a

51108
a - Connect to +12 Volt
b - Connect to NEGATIVE (–) Ground

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-15

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Engine Synchronizer Wiring Diagram

LIGHT BULB POSITION A
Use this position when using a separate light switch for instrument lighting.
b

SEND

51105
a - +12 Volt Light Switch Wire
b - Position Light Bulb to the Unswitched Position

LIGHT BULB POSITION B

Use this position when instrument lighting is wired directly to the ignition key switch.
(Instrument lights are on when ignition key switch is turned on.)
a

51106
a - Position Light Bulb to the Switched Position
b - Sender

Page 2D-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Synchronizer wiring can be accomplished two different ways as an option to the user.
Wiring Diagram – Gauge needle to point toward slow running engine
a cc
bb

GRY=GRAY
WHT=WHITE
BLK=BLACK dd
PUR=PURPLE
51107
a - Tachometer Starboard Engine
b - Synchronizer Gauge
c - Tachometer Port Engine
d - Synchronizer Module

Wiring Diagram – Gauge needle to point toward fast running engine

a cc
bb

GRY=GRAY
WHT=WHITE
BLK=BLACK d
PUR=PURPLE 51107
a - Tachometer Starboard Engine
b - Synchronizer Gauge
c - Tachometer Port Engine
d - Synchronizer Module

Maintenance
Clean gauge by washing with fresh water to remove sand and salt deposits. Wipe off with
a soft cloth moistened with water. The gauge may be scored or damaged if wiped with
abrasive material (sand, saline or detergent compounds, etc.) or washed with solvents
such as trichloroethylene, turpentine, etc.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-17

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Warning System Signals

NOTE: The warning system signals which includes audible and visual indicator involving
the horn and gauges will identify the potential problems listed in the chart

Problem Horn Monitor Display Guardian Acti- Engine Speed

vated Reduction Activated

Power Up/System Check Single Yes N/A No

Beep
Low Oil 4 Beep... 2 Yes No No
Minutes Off
Oil Pump Electrical Yes Yes Yes
Failure (See Guardian System)
Over Heat Continuous Yes Yes Yes
Beep (See Guardian System)
Water In Fuel 4 Beep... 2 Yes No
Minutes Off
Over Speed Continuous Yes Yes Yes
Beep (See Guardian System)
Coolant Sensor Failure No Yes No No
MAP Sensor Failure No Yes No No
Air Temperature Sensor Fail- No Yes No No
ure
Ignition Coil Failure No Yes No No
Injector Failure No Yes No No
Horn Failure N/A Yes No
Battery Voltage too high No Yes Yes Yes
(16V) or too low (11V) or (See Guardian System)
very low (9.5V)
Throttle Sensor Failure Continuous Yes Yes Yes
Intermittant (See Guardian System)
Beeping
Block Water Pressure Yes Yes Yes Yes
(See Guardian System)
Calculated Oil Level Critical Yes Yes Yes Yes

Page 2D-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Guardian Protection System

The guardian protection system monitors critical engine functions and will reduce engine
power accordingly in an attempt to keep the engine running within safe operating parameters.
IMPORTANT: The Guardian System cannot guarantee that powerhead damage will
not occur when adverse operating conditions are encountered. The Guardian Sys-
tem is designed to (1) warn the boat operator that the engine is operating under ad-
verse conditions and (2) reduce power by limiting maximum rpm in an attempt to
avoid or reduce the possibility of engine damage. The boat operator is ultimately
responsible for proper engine operation.
Guardian System Operation with Gauges
Smartcraft Gauge/Monitor System will sound warning horn and display the
warning message.

Guardian System Activation

Warning Horn
Function Sound Description
Cooling System Problem Continuous Engine Guardian System is activated. Power
limit will very with level of overheat. Shift out-
board into neutral and check for a steady stream
of water coming out of the water pump indicator
hole. If no water is coming out of the water pump
indicator hole or flow is intermittent, stop engine
and check water intake holes for obstruction. The
Guardian system must be RESET before engine
will operate at higher speeds. Moving throttle
lever back to idle resets the system.

Oil Level Is Critically Low Continuous Engine Guardian System is activated. Power
limit will limit engine speed. The oil level is criti-
cally low in the engine mounted oil reservoir
tank. Refill the engine mounted oil reservoir tank
along with the remote oil tank.

Oil Pump Failure Continuous Engine Guardian System is activated. Power

limit will limit engine speed. The warning horn is
activated if the oil pump should ever stop func-
tioning electrically. No lubricating oil is being
supplied to the engine.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-19

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Engine Overspeed Continuous The warning horn is activated any time engine
speed exceeds the maximum allowable RPM.
The system will limit the engine speed to within
the allowable range. If the overspeed condition
continues, the Engine Guardian System will
place the engine in power reduction. The Guard-
ian system must be RESET before engine can
resume full power. Moving throttle lever back to
idle resets the system. Engine overspeed indi-
cates a condition that should be corrected.
Overspeed could be caused by incorrect propel-
ler pitch, engine height, trim angle, etc.

Sensor out of Range Continuous Engine Guardian System is activated. Power

limit may activate at full throttle speed.

Intermittent Beep Engine Guardian System is activated. Power

limit may restrict engine speed to idle.

Page 2D-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Analog Gauge Panel Mount Remote Control Wiring

Installation
aa b
b
qr
f
25
ee
cc dd gg h
h

i
t

j sr
k n
o
m
n
op
l
st
p
q
BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
BRN = Brown
GRY = Gray
GRN = Green
ORN = Orange
PNK = Pink
PUR = Purple
RED = Red
TAN = Tan
WHT = White
YEL = Yellow
LIT = Light
DRK = Dark
25
Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--2)
a - (+) 12 Volt Terminal j - Multi-Function Adapter Har-
b - (–) Ground Terminal ness
c - Speedometer k - To Fuel Sender (Optional)
d - Tachometer l - To Oil Sender (Optional)
e - Tachometer Signal Terminal m - Two Wire Harness
f - Connect Wires Together with n - Ignition/Choke Switch
Screw and Hex Nut (3 o - Low Oil Sender Lead
Places); Apply Quicksilver Liq- p - Over Temperature Switch
uid Neoprene to Connections Lead
and Slide Rubber Sleeve q - Panel Mount Remote Control
Over Each Connection. r - To Engine
g - Power Trim Connector s - To Engine
h - Horn t - Neutral Safety Switch Lead
i - 8 Pin Harness Connector

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-21

WIRING DIAGRAMS

System Monitor V2.0

Basic Operation
The System Monitor is an LCD multi-function display gauge. A variety of displays can be
activated using the button.
Pressing the button scrolls the following displays: fuel used, tachometer (RPM), fuel
flow, power trim position, engine temp, water pressure, battery voltage, traveling range (if
calibrated), and water depth (if equipped with transducer).
The System Monitor will power up when the ignition is turned on.
The display includes a backlight which allows you to read it at night. The backlight bright-
ness is adjustable using button.

In the event of a warning alarm, the warning icon(s) will be displayed.

The System Monitor can be calibrated to display both the English or the Metric system. The
System Monitor can also be calibrated so that the trim position is displayed whenever the
propulsion unit is trimmed. Refer to Cal1 Calibration Section for details.
Initial Power Up (Or After Master Reset)
Unit will display software level then flash the word “SEt” in conjunction with engine icon.

Press the button.

The unit will begin it’s “Auto–detection” of engine type procedure. In this procedure System
Monitor checks with the engine control module (ECM) to see what type of engine you have
and presets the data monitoring screens accordingly, (e.g., If System Monitor detects an in-
board engine connected to the data network it will turn off all engine/drive TRIM functions as
these functions are not used in an inboard engine installation). The intention is to make initial
setup easier.
NOTE: If “2001” comes up during auto detect the gauge has detected that your engine
is a pre 2002 model. You will need to manually select your engine type. Use the
button to scroll through the choices. Stnd = Stern Drive, Inbd = Inboard, JEtd = Jet Drive,
Out2 = Outboard 2 Stroke, Out4 = Outboard 4 Stroke. Press to continue.

Page 2D-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

NOTE: If you see the flashing message, (A) “nonE” after the Auto–detection occurs, the
gauge can not find an engine. Please check wiring for correct connection. If you receive one
of the following other flashing messages: (B) “Stbd”or, (C) “noSt” refer to the “Set–Up Errors
Section”.

A)

B)

C)

Standard Information Display Screens

START UP SCREEN
At power up, a momentary (1 second) screen displays the current System Monitor software
version, followed by a 4 second display showing hours of engine use.

Hrs

NOTE: NOT ALL SCREENS MAY APPLY TO YOUR ENGINE TYPE.

NOTE: Screens can be turned on/off in Cal1. Refer to the Cal1 calibration section for details.
RPM SCREEN
Tachometer – Displays engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
RPM

FUEL USED SCREEN

The System Monitor displays approximate fuel used since the last reset.

Gal Gal

Fuel Used Reset will return display back to 0. You can preform a Fuel Used Reset any-
time by pressing and buttons together momentarily.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-23

WIRING DIAGRAMS

FUEL FLOW SCREEN

The System Monitor displays current estimated individual engine fuel consumption in Gallons
per hour (Gal/hr) or Liters per hour (Ltr/hr).

Gal/h

TRIM POSITION SCREEN

Displays trim position of the propulsion unit up to the maximum trim position, and then dis-
plays trailer position. 0 = down, 10 = maximum trim, and 25 = full trailer.
TRIM

NOTE: The System Monitor may be calibrated so that trim is displayed whenever the trim
switch is used. Refer to the Cal1 Calibrations Section for details.
ENGINE TEMPERATURE SCREEN
Displays the engine temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C).

NOTE: You can change the units of measure within Cal1. Refer to the Cal1 Calibration
Section for details.
WATER PRESSURE SCREEN
Displays cooling system water pressure of the engine in Psi or Bar.

Psi

OIL TEMPERATURE SCREEN

Displays the engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C).

Page 2D-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

OIL PRESSURE SCREEN

Displays engine oil pressure in Psi or Bar.

Psi

BATTERY VOLTAGE SCREEN

Displays voltage level (condition) of battery.

Volt

Display of Range and Depth Information

RANGE SCREEN
Displays estimated traveling range based on current fuel consumption and fuel remaining
in the tank that is connected to the system. The number displayed is an estimate of the dis-
tance you can travel on the remaining fuel at current boat speed.
Range

Miles

NOTE: To activate this screen, you must perform the fuel tank calibration in Cal2. Refer
to the Cal2 Calibration Section for details.
NOTE: You must have a speed input device connected to the system (paddle wheel or pitot
pressure transducer).
WATER DEPTH SCREEN
Displays the depth of water under the transducer if connected.
Depth

Ft

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-25

WIRING DIAGRAMS

SHALLOW WATER ALARM FEATURE

You can set an alarm to trigger whenever the boat moves into water shallower than the
alarm level.
Setting Shallow Water Alarm.
1. The water depth screen must be displayed. Be sure Depth is turned on in Cal2. Refer
to Cal2 Calibration Section for details.
2. Press both and buttons together for 3 seconds.
3. The alarm on or off menu will appear.
4. Press the button to toggle to ON.
Depth

5. Push button to save.

6. The depth number will be flashing. Press the button to set the flashing number
to desired alarm depth. 100 ft. maximum depth and 2 ft. minimum depth.
Depth

7. Push button to save.

Warning System
NOTE: Alarm warnings may vary depending on your engine type. Some warnings listed
may not apply to your engine. Please consult your engines owners manual for a complete
list of engine warnings.
The System Monitor warning system incorporates the display screen, the warning horn and
the Guardian Protection system. The warning horn is located inside the remote control or is
part of the ignition key switch wiring harness.
• Alarms Warnings – When a problem is detected, the warning horn sounds and the
offending icon appears on the display.
If problem can cause immediate engine damage – The horn will sound continuously
and the Engine Guardian System will respond to the problem by limiting engine power.
Immediately reduce throttle speed to idle and refer to the warning messages on the fol-
lowing pages that tell you what to do about it.
If problem will not cause immediate engine damage – The horn will sound but not con-
tinuously. Refer to the warning messages on the following pages that tell you what to
do about it.
• Engine Guardian System – Monitors the critical sensors on the engine for any early
indications of problems. The system will respond to a problem by reducing engine pow-
er in order to maintain a safe operating condition.
NOTE: If the mode button is pressed to a different screen, the flashing alarm signal will remain
flashing to indicate there still is a problem.

Page 2D-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Warning Display Screens

The engine has an “Engine Guardian System”. The ECM Engine control module monitors
the critical sensors on the engine for any early indications of problems. The Guardian System
will respond to a problem by reducing engine speed in order to maintain a safe operating condi-
tion. The System Monitor will display the alarm.
The warning system will alert the operator to the potential problems. Refer to the pages
following for explanation of the problem and the correct action to take.
ALARM – OVERHEAT
The Bell and Temperature icons are displayed and the warning horn begins sounding con-
tinuously to inform the driver that there is insufficient water pressure in the cooling system.
The Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.

If the engine overheats, immediately reduce throttle speed to idle. Shift into neutral. If out-
board: check for a steady stream of water coming out of the water pump indicator hole.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
If no water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole or flow is intermittent, stop engine
and check cooling water intake holes for obstruction. If no obstruction is found, this may indicate
a blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Operating the engine while over-
heated will cause engine damage.
If a steady stream of water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole and the warning
horn continues to sound, there still may be insufficient cooling water or an engine problem.
Stop engine. Operating the engine while overheated will cause engine damage.
The overheat problem must be corrected before you can resume normal operation.
NOTE: If you are in a stranded situation, stopping the engine and allowing it to cool back
down will usually allow some additional low speed (idle) running time before the engine starts
to overheat again.
ALARM – LOW WATER PRESSURE
The Bell and Water Pressure icons are displayed and the warning horn begins sounding contin-
uously to inform the driver that there is insufficient water pressure in the cooling system. The
Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.

Some causes of insufficient cooling water pressure are (1) obstructed cooling water intake
holes (2) blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Running the engine with
the cooling water intake holes out of the water.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
If the warning system is activated, immediately reduce throttle speed to idle. Shift engine into
neutral. and check for a steady stream of water coming out of the water pump indicator hole.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-27

WIRING DIAGRAMS

If no water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole, or flow is intermittent, stop engine
and check cooling water intake holes for obstruction. If no obstruction is found, this may indicate
a blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Have the outboard checked by
your dealer. Operating the engine without adequate cooling water pressure will overheat the
engine.
If the warning signals stop and a steady stream of water is coming out of the water pump indica-
tor hole, return engine to normal operation. If the warning system is activated repeatedly, have
the outboard checked by your dealer.
ALARM – LOW OIL RESERVE – OUTBOARD 2 STROKE
The bell and oil icons are displayed and the warning horn begins sounding a series of four
beeps every two minutes to inform the driver that the oil level is critically low in the engine
mounted oil reservoir tank. When the oil level gets close to empty, the horn begins sound-
ing continuously and the Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.

The engine mounted oil reservoir tank along with the remote oil tank will have to be refilled
(refer to Fuel & Oil Section).
ALARM – OIL PUMP FAULT
The Bell, Engine and oil icons are displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuous-
ly to inform the driver that the oil pump has stopped functioning electrically. No lubricating oil
is being supplied to the engine. Stop the engine as soon as possible. The Engine Guardian
system will start limiting the engine power. Consult your dealer for assistance.

ALARM – ENGINE OVERSPEED

The Bell icon is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to inform the
driver that the engine speed exceeded the maximum allowable RPM. The system will automat-
ically reduce the engine speed to within the allowable limit.

NOTE: Engine speed should never reach the maximum limit to activate the system unless the
propeller is ventilating, an incorrect propeller is being used, or the propeller is faulty.

Page 2D-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

ALARM – WATER IN FUEL

The Bell and Fuel Icon will appear and the warning horn will begin sounding a series of four
beeps every two minutes when water in the water-separating fuel filter reaches the full level.
On some engines water can be removed from the filter. Refer to Maintenance Section for filter
removal.

ALARM – LOW FUEL

The Bell and Fuel Icon will appear and the warning horn will sound a series of four beeps. This
alarm occurs when there is less than 1/8 of the total fuel capacity left. Once the four beeps have
sounded, this alarm will not reoccur unless the condition still exists after next key up.
ALARM – ENGINE MALFUNCTION
The Bell and Engine Icon will appear to inform the driver that an engine problem has occurred.
If the warning system senses that the problem could cause permanent engine damage, the
Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.

INSTALLATION ERROR DETECTION

1. System Monitor flashes a “nonE” message when there is no communication between
System Monitor and an ECM. Check for loose wiring. Preform master reset and try auto
detecting again. (Refer to Page 45 for Master Reset.)
2. System Monitor flashes a “Stbd” message when there is more than one Stbd ECM pres-
ent on the SmartCraft network. Need to configure ECM’s to proper engine location using
DDT or Quicksilver Diagnostics Tool.
3. System Monitor flashes a “noSt” message when there are no Stbd ECM’s present on the
SmartCraft network. Need to configure ECM’s to proper engine location using DDT or
Quicksilver Diagnostics Tool.

A)

B)

C)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-29

WIRING DIAGRAMS

CAL1 Calibration
Cal1 Display Calibrations:
•Trim Pop up Screen (On or Off)
•Trim Calibration
•English or Metric Units Selection
•Range Units Selection
•(On or Off) Depth, Trim, Engine Temperature, Oil Pressure, Oil
Temperature, Water Pressure, Volts, Engine Hours, and Data
Simulator pages.
NOTE: NOT ALL SCREENS MAY APPLY TO YOUR ENGINE TYPE.
CAL1 HEADER SCREEN
1. Turn ignition key to the on position.
2. Press and hold and for 3 seconds to bring up the Cal1 calibration screen.
Release the buttons to enter Cal1.
3. Press the button to advance through the Cal1 calibration functions.
4. Press and hold and for 3 seconds to save changes and exit the Cal1 cal-
ibration screen.

Press the button to move to the next calibration screen.

NOTE: Pressing the button while in this header screen, will “transfer” you straight into
Cal2.
TRIM POP UP SCREEN (ON OR OFF)
If you want the power trim display screen to pop up as you trim the propulsion unit, cali-
brate as follows: With the pop up screen displayed and the number “flashing”, press the
button to select 1=ON or 0=off.

Trim

Press the button to save and move to the next function.

Set the trim sensor as follows:
Calibration 0.0 – The word “Trim” and down arrow should be blinking. Use the trim switch and
trim the unit to the full Down/In position. Press the button to save. Press the
button to advance to the Calibration 10.0 setting.

Trim

Page 2D-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Calibration 10.0 – The word “Trim” and the down and up arrows should be blinking. Trim the
unit out to the maximum trim (not trailer) position. Press the button to save. Press
the button to advance to the Calibration 25.0 setting.

Trim

Calibration 25.0 – The word “Trim” and up arrow should be blinking. Use the trim switch and
trim the unit out to the maximum trailer position. Press the button to save. Press the
button to move to the next function.

Trim

ENGLISH OR METRIC READINGS SELECTION

The System Monitor allows you to display reading in the SAE (standard) English system or
the Metric system. Press the button to toggle between units.
SAE English System Metric System

C
F
Bar
Psi
Gal Ltr M
Ft

Press the button to save and move to the next function.

RANGE READINGS SELECTION
The System Monitor allows you to display reading in Miles, Nautical Miles or Kilometers.
Press the button to toggle between units.

Range

Miles
Miles NMiles
Km

Press the button to save and move to the next function.

DATA PAGE SELECTIONS
Select if you would like to display Depth, Trim, Engine Temperature, Oil Pressure, Oil Temper-
ature, Water Pressure, Volts, Engine Hours, and Data Simulator pages or not.
NOTE: The engine connected may not support all screen functions.
Press the button to toggle between units.
Press the button to save and move to the next function.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-31

WIRING DIAGRAMS

CAL2 Calibration
CAL2 Display Calibrations:
•Paddle Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency Setting
•Pitot Water Pressure Speed Sensor Input Setting
•Pitot Water Pressure Speed Sensor Multiplier
•Fuel Tank Calibration

CAL2 HEADER SCREEN

1. Turn ignition key to the on position.
2. Press and hold and , System Monitor will first display Cal1,and then after
6 seconds will display Cal2. Release the buttons to enter the Cal2 calibration screen.
3. Press the button to advance through the Cal2 calibration functions.
4. Press and hold and for 3 seconds to get out of the Cal2 calibration screen.

PITOT WATER PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SETTING (SPD1 OR SPD2)

Select the PSI input of the Pitot water pressure sensor on the engine. Press the button
to select 1 = 100 PSI or 2 = 200 PSI. The standard PSI input on production Mercury product
is 100 PSI. Certain High Performance applications may require a 200 Psi input.

Press the button to save and move to the next function.

PITOT WATER PRESSURE SENSOR MULTIPLIER (1.XX)
This multiplier can be used to adjust the pitot speed to match speed as measured on GPS
or radar gun. Press the button to select change.
Press the button to save and move to the next function.
Frequency can be changed to match requirements of different sensors. 4.9 (hz/Mile) is the fre-
quency of the paddle wheel speed sensor provided by Mercury Marine.

Miles

Press the button to save and move to the next function.

Page 2D-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

FUEL TANK CALIBRATION:

NOTE: There are three methods to set up fuel tank level monitoring feature:
First: Do nothing. Linear readout based on raw sensor values. This mode does not factor
in irregular tank shapes.
Second: By following the tank calibration procedure described on pages 33–35, but with-
out actually adding fuel. System Monitor will supply an estimated range value based on
linear interpolation of the sensor range values. This mode does not factor in irregular tank
shapes.
Third: By following the tank calibration procedure described on pages 33–35 completely
System Monitor will display an estimated range value that factors in the tank shape.
1. Scroll using the key until you see “t1”. This tells you that you have entered tank
1 calibration.
2. Press once more.
3. You will see the word “no” and the gas tank icon. Enter the capacity of tank 1 in gallons
using the key.

NOTE: The word “no” will not go away unless the gauge sees a tank connected to the system.
With no tank connected you will not be able to enter a capacity.
4. Press once more.
5. You will see “t2”. This tells you that you have entered tank 2 calibration.
6. Press once more.
7. You will see the word “no” and the gas tank icon. Enter the capacity of tank 2 in gallons
using the key.
NOTE: The word “no” will not go away unless the gauge sees a tank connected to the system.
With no tank connected you will not be able to enter a capacity.
NOTE: Tank 2 does not have to be a fuel tank. It could represent an oil tank for example. See
page 35 for tank 2 selection.
Select whether you want to calibrate the fuel tank “t1”. (The gauge will not let you calibrate
the fuel tank until the capacity had been entered). Press the button to select 0= off or
1= on.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-33

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Selecting “1” will bring up the following calibration screens.

Calibration 0% – The “0 percent” display alternates between percent of tank capacity and
quantity of fuel to add based on total capacity entered in Cal2. Add fuel to total quantity dis-
played and push the button to save. Press the button to advance to the Calibra-
tion 25% setting.

Gal

Calibration 25% – The “25 percent” display alternates between percent of tank capacity
and quantity of fuel to add based on total capacity entered in Cal2. Add fuel to total quantity
displayed and press the button to save. Press the button to advance to the
Calibration 50% setting.

Gal

Calibration 50% – The “50 percent” display alternates between percent of tank capacity
and quantity of fuel to add based on total capacity entered in Cal2. Add fuel to total quantity
displayed and press the button to save. Press the button to advance to the
Calibration 75% setting.

Gal

Calibration 75% – The “75 percent” display alternates between percent of tank capacity
and quantity of fuel to add based on total capacity entered in Cal2. Add fuel to total quantity
displayed and press the button to save. Press the button to advance to the
Calibration FULL setting.

Gal

Calibration FULL – The “FULL percent” display alternates between percent of tank capac-
ity and quantity of fuel to add based on total capacity entered in Cal2.

Gal

Add fuel to fill tank and press the button to save. Press the button to move
to the next function.

Page 2D-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

At this point you have completed tank 1 calibration and you will see “t2”.

Change “t20” to a 1 (on). Press the button, you will see a blinking tank icon. Using the
button, select which tank you want tank 2 to be, (oil, fuel or water/waste). Press the
button to continue.

NOTE: If you choose oil or water/waste, no further cal will be needed.

Repeat tank calibration procedure described on page 34 and 35 if calibration of the second tank
is desired.
Master Reset Command
Master Reset: You can return the gauge back to factory presets through the Master Reset
command.
IMPORTANT: Performing a master reset will reset the unit back to all factory defaults,
thus eliminating any installation calibrations performed during set up of product.
1. Hold in and for approximately 12 seconds. You will see the word “dFLt”
let go of the buttons.
2. Immediately press and hold in and again until the unit counts down to
zero “0”.
3. The “SEt” message flashing on the screen indicates that the unit has been reset to
factory defaults.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-35

WIRING DIAGRAMS

System Tach & Speed

Tachometer Speedometer
3 4 40
2 5 30 50
20 60
1 6
10 70
0 7 0 80

Basic Operation and Features

Power up: Each gauge will power up when the ignition is turned on. Gauges will stay on
as long as the ignition is on.
On first time power up of gauge or after a “Master Reset”, gauge will show “Auto detect”. Upon
pressing the mode button, gauge will automatically determine engine type. This will preset the
data monitoring screens accordingly. The intention is to make initial setup easier. If gauge
shows a warning of “No Starboard Engine” or “Multiple Starboard Engines”, engine will need
to be properly selected (Port and Stbd) using a Mercury engine diagnostic tool. “Master Reset”
and “Auto detect” again. (See page 45 for “Master Reset”).
Lights: The brightness and contrast are adjustable.
Buttons: The MODE button is used for selecting information screens. The “+” and “–” but-
tons are used for setting engine speed during troll control and setting gauge calibrations.
Troll Control: Allows the operator to set and control the idle speed of the engine for trol-
ling without using the throttle.
Engine Guardian System: Monitors the critical sensors on the engine for any early indications
of problems. The system will respond to a problem by reducing engine speed in order to main-
tain a safe operating condition.
Warning System: The system will sound the warning horn and display the warning message.
Digital Display Screen: Displays the following engine information.
Tachometer Display Screen: Speedometer Display Screen:
DEPENDING ON ENGINE TYPE DEPENDING ON ENGINE TYPE Speed
Engine Break–in Fuel Used
Engine Temperature COG/SOG – If GPS Input
Oil Psi Distance and fuel to way point –
Trim and RPM if way point programmed into optional GPS
Trim and Water Pressure Clock – Air/Sea Temp
Water Pressure Inst. and Ave. Fuel Economy
Battery Voltage and Engine Hours Trip Odometer
Fuel Flow and Fuel Used Fuel Tank Levels
RPM Oil Tank Levels
Fresh Water Tank2 or Level(s)
Waste Water Level(s) or
Dual Engine
Trim and RPM Synchronizer –
Fuel Range
Fuel Economy
Trip Odometer

Page 2D-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Speedometer Display Screens

Speedometer
1
30
40
50 6
2 20 60
10 70
7
0
3 80

8
4
9
5

NOTE: NOT ALL SCREENS MAY APPLY TO YOUR ENGINE TYPE.

When the ignition is turned on, the speedometer will show the last screen that was dis-
played before the ignition was turned off.
Press MODE to change display screens. You can revert back to the previous screen by press-
ing and holding MODE for 2 seconds. This will reverse the display rotation.
NOTE: Readings can be displayed in English (U.S.) or Metric. Refer to Calibrations.
NOTE: Descriptions are necessarily in order on the gauge. Order changes depending on
engine type.
1. Clock - Temp – Clock, air temperature and water temperature. The air and water temper-
ature sensors will have to be connected to obtain display readings.
2. Fuel Level – Displays the amount of fuel remaining.
3. Oil Level – Displays the amount of engine oil remaining, or water/waste tank level (if
attached).
4. RPM Synchronizer – Dual Engines Only – Monitors the revolutions of both engines.
5. Trim Synchronizer – Dual Engines Only – Displays the trim position of both engines. Sim-
plifies keeping trim levels equal.
6. Traveling Range – The estimated traveling range is based on boat speed, fuel consump-
tion and fuel remaining in the tank. The numbers displayed indicates an estimate of the
distance you can travel with the remaining fuel. Speed input required (Paddle Wheel, Pitot
Pressure or GPS).
7. Fuel Economy – The display shows average “AVG” fuel consumption as well as
Instantaneous “INST” fuel economy. The numbers displayed indicate miles per gallon
“MPG” or kilometer per liter “KM/L”.
Fuel Reset – To reset, select the display screen and press MODE and TROLL
– buttons.
8. Trip Odometer – Tells how far you’ve gone since you last reset the gauge to zero. Trip
Reset – To reset, select the display screen and press MODE and TROLL– buttons.
9. Digital Speedometer – Can display boat speed in miles per hour, kilometer per hour,
or nautical miles per hour. The (LCD) digital speedometer will continue to increase
even if “StEt” is at maximum. The speedometer will use the paddle wheel for its low
speed readings but will switch to the speedo or GPS (if connected) for high speed
readings. (Transition point setting described in Cal2, page 51.)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-37

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Tachometer Display Screens

Tachometer
1
3 4
ENG 2 5
2 °F
VOLT HRS
1 6
13.6 22.3 7
0 7
3 FUEL USED
2.4 22.0
8
PSI
4
3200 9
5 WATER
PSI

NOTE: NOT ALL SCREENS MAY APPLY TO YOUR ENGINE TYPE.

When the ignition is turned on, the tachometer will display the last screen that was dis-
played before the ignition was turned off.
Press MODE to change display screens. You can revert back to the previous screen by press-
ing and holding MODE for 2 seconds. This will reverse the display rotation.
NOTE: Readings can be displayed in English (U.S.) or Metric. Refer to Calibration.
1. Engine Break-in – Displays time remaining on the break-in period of a new engine. This
screen will automatically disappear after the break-in period is complete.
2. Temperature – Displays engine coolant temperature from Cold to Hot.
3. Power Trim Angle: Displays trim angle of the outboard or sterndrive up to the maxi-
mum trim angle, and then displays the trailer angle. 0 = down, 10 = maximum trim,
and 25 = full trailer.
4. Power Trim Angle - Water Pressure – Displays trim angle of the engine and cooling
system water pressure.
5. Water Pressure: Displays cooling system water pressure at the engine.
6. Oil Pressure (Not Shown Above) – Displays engine oil pressure in units of Psi or
Bar.
7. Battery Voltage – Displays voltage level (condition) of battery. Also records the run-
ning time of engine.
8. Fuel Flow – Displays engine fuel use in gallons per hour or liters per hours.
9. Digital Tachometer: Displays engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).

Page 2D-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Troll Control
BASIC OPERATION
Tachometer Speedometer
3 4
2 5
1 6

0 7
0 80

TROLL TROLL TROLL TROLL

– + – +

Actual Speed Set Speed Actual Speed Set Speed

a TR

With troll control you can maintain a trolling speed of 550 to1000 rpm without using the
throttle.
NOTE: Troll control may not be available on all engine models.
NOTE: Troll control min/max range may change depending on engine type.
You can set the troll control by using either the tachometer or speedometer. Tachometer
will set the speed in RPM and speedometer will set the speed in MPH, Kph or KN.
You can shut off troll control anytime by pushing the MODE button when in the troll display
screen or by moving the throttle.
If you have troll control set at a desired speed and then you shut off the troll control, the system
remembers the set speed and will return to that speed when re-engaged.
The display screen will revert back to the previous screen after 10 seconds of no activity. Push
the TROLL
+ or TROLL
– button to reactivate the display screen.
When the troll control is engaged and you are out of the troll control screen, a flashing signal
“TR” (a) will appear in the upper left corner of the display to indicate troll control is still running.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-39

WIRING DIAGRAMS

SETTING TROLL CONTROL

Tachometer Speedometer
3 4
2 5
1 6
0 7 0 80

TROLL TROLL TROLL

– + – TROLL
+

Actual Speed Set Speed Actual Speed Set Speed

a b

1. With the engine running, shift engine into gear. Set engine speed at idle.
TROLL TROLL
2. Push in the + or – button to bring up the troll control display screen.
3. Press MODE to engage (turn on) the troll control.
4. Use the TROLL
+
TROLL
– buttons to set the desired speed. Use (+) to increase speed and
(–) to decrease speed.
5. If you set troll control to a higher speed than the troll rpm can bring the boat to, the TAR-
GET SPEED TOO FAST (a) message will appear. Reduce troll speed.
6. If you set troll control to a slower speed than the troll rpm can bring the boat to, the TARGET
SPEED TOO SLOW (b) message will appear. Increase troll speed.
EXITING TROLL CONTROL
There are three ways to turn off the troll control:
• Press the MODE button when in the troll display screen.
• Move the throttle to a different speed.
• Shift engine into neutral.

Warning System

3 4
2 5

1 6

0 7 0 80

b a
c
2

NOTE: Warnings may be different depending on engine type. Please consult your engines
owners manual for a complete list of failures.
The SmartCraft warning system incorporates the display screens (a) the warning horn and the
Guardian Protection system. The warning horn is located inside the remote control or is part
of the ignition key switch wiring harness.

Page 2D-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

• Alarms Warnings – When a problem is detected, the warning horn sounds and the
name of the offending alarm appears on the display.
If problem can cause immediate engine damage – the horn will sound continuously and
the Engine Guardian System (b) will respond to the problem by limiting engine power.
Immediately reduce throttle speed to idle and refer to the warning messages on the fol-
lowing pages that tell what to do.
If problem will not cause immediate engine damage – The horn will sound but not con-
tinuously. Refer to the warning messages on the following pages that tell what to do.

The alarm message will stay displayed until the mode button is pressed. If there are
multiple alarms, these will cycle on the display at five-second intervals.
If the mode button is pressed to a different screen, the flashing alarm signal “AL” (c)
will appear in the upper right corner to indicate there still is a problem.
• Engine Guardian System – Monitors the critical sensors on the engine for any early
indications of problems. The system will respond to a problem by reducing engine pow-
er in order to maintain a safe operating condition. The display screen will show the per-
cent of power available.

Alarm Messages
These messages will appear and the horn will sound if there is a problem detected in one
of the engine systems.
NOTE: The warning system will alert the operator to the potential problems listed in the
chart. Refer to the page listed for explanation of the problem and the correct action to take.
PROBLEM TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER ENGINE HORN
DISPLAY DISPLAY GUARDIAN ONLY
SYSTEM
ACTIVATED
BATTERY *


ENGINE DATA BUS

FAULT – HORN

FAULT – IGNITION

FAULT – INJECTOR

FAULT – OIL PUMP


FAULT – SENSOR

*
FAULT – WATER TEMP

LOW FUEL

LOW OIL

OIL TEMP

OIL PSI

OVERHEAT


OVER SPEED

PRESSURE


RESERVE OIL


WATER IN FUEL

FLASH CHECK SUM

MAP

MAT

TPS

* Throttle and manifold pressure sensors only

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-41

WIRING DIAGRAMS

OVERHEAT
The overheat alarm message appears and the warning horn begins sounding continuously.
The Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.
If the engine overheats, immediately reduce throttle speed to idle. Shift engine into neu-
tral. Check for an obstruction covering the water intake holes on the engine.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.

3 4
2 5

1 6 a
0 7

a - Water Pump Indicator Hole

If no water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole or flow is intermittent, stop engine
and check cooling water intake holes for obstruction. If no obstruction is found, this may indicate
a blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Operating the engine while over-
heated will cause engine damage.
If a steady stream of water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole and the warning
horn continues to sound, there still may be insufficient cooling water or an engine problem.
Operating the engine while overheated will cause engine damage.
NOTE: If you are in a stranded situation, stopping the engine and allowing it to cool back
down will usually allow some additional low speed (idle) running time before the engine starts
to overheat again.
The overheat problem must be corrected before you can resume normal operation.
PRESSURE
This alarm message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to inform
the driver that there is insufficient water pressure in the cooling system. The Engine Guardian
System will start limiting engine power.
Some causes of insufficient cooling water pressure are (1) obstructed cooling water intake
holes (2) blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem (3) running the engine with
the cooling water intake holes out of the water.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.

3 4
2 5
1 6
a
0 7

a - Water Pump Indicator Hole

If the warning system is activated, immediately reduce throttle speed to idle. Shift engine into
neutral and check for a steady stream of water coming out of the water pump indicator hole.
If no water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole or flow is intermittent, stop engine
and check cooling water intake holes for obstruction. If no obstruction is found, this may indicate
a blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Operating the engine without ade-
quate cooling water pressure will overheat the engine.

Page 2D-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

If the warning signals stop and a steady stream of water is coming out of the water pump indica-
tor hole, return engine to normal operation. If the warning system is activated repeatedly, have
the outboard checked by your dealer.
OVERSPEED (a)
This message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to inform the
driver that the engine speed exceeded the maximum allowable RPM. The system will auto-
matically reduce the engine speed to within the allowable limit.
NOTE: Your engine speed should never reach the maximum limit to activate the system unless
the propeller is ventilating, an incorrect propeller is being used, or the propeller is faulty
WATER IN FUEL (b)
This message will appear and the warning horn will begin sounding a series of four beeps every
two minutes when water in the water-separating fuel filter reaches the full level. Water can be
removed from the filter. Refer to Maintenance Section for filter removal.
FAULT-HORN (c)
This message informs you that the warning horn is not functioning correctly.
RESERVE OIL LOW – 2 STROKE OUTBOARD ONLY (d)
This message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding a series of four beeps every
two minutes to inform the driver that the oil level is critically low in the engine mounted oil reser-
voir tank. When the oil level gets close to empty, the horn begins sounding continuously and
the Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power. The display shows percent of re-
serve oil that’s remaining.
The engine mounted oil reservoir tank along with the remote oil tank will have to be refilled
(Refer to Fuel & Oil Section).
FAULT-OIL PUMP (e)
This message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to inform the
driver that the oil pump has stopped functioning electrically. No lubricating oil is being supplied
to the engine. Stop the engine as soon as possible. The Engine Guardian system will start limit-
ing the engine power.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
FAULT-INJECTOR (f)
This alarm informs you if one or more of the fuel injectors have stop functioning electrically.
FAULT-IGNITION (g)
This alarm informs you that a problem has developed in the ignition system.

2
3 4 d
5
a 1 6

0 7 e
b
f
c
g

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-43

WIRING DIAGRAMS

BATTERY (a)
When the electrical system is not charging, or the battery charge is low, the warning message
is designed to come on and the Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power. If the
message appears immediately after starting, it is possible that the engine alternator can re-
charge the battery after operating awhile. If this message appears while driving or comes on
after starting and continues to be displayed, check engine to determine the cause of the prob-
lem and to avoid being stranded with a dead battery. To help the alternator recharge the battery
quickly, reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off any unneeded accessories.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
ENGINE DATA BUS (b)
This message tells you that the data communication link between the tachometer and engine
is not connected.
LOW FUEL LEVEL (c)
This message serves as a warning that the fuel level in the fuel tank is critically low. You
should stop for fuel immediately to avoid running out.
LOW OIL LEVEL – OUTBOARD 2 STROKE ONLY (d)
This message serves as a warning that the oil level in the remote oil tank is low. You should
stop and refill the oil tank immediately to avoid running out.
FAULT-SENSOR (e)
This message informs you if one of the sensors is not functioning correctly
If the throttle sensor has failed, the warning horn will sound a continuous beeping and the
engine will not reach its full power.
If the throttle sensor and manifold pressure sensor both fail, the warning horn will sound a con-
tinuous beeping and the engine speed will stay at idle.
If the temperature or block pressure sensor should fail, the Engine Guardian System will limit
the maximum engine power to 75 percent.
FAULT-WATER TEMP (f)
This message informs you that the sensor for measuring outside lake/sea water temperature
is not functioning correctly.

a 2
3 4
E F
d
5
1 6

0 7
b e

c F f

Page 2D-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

WARNING NO STARBOARD ENGINE (a)

Informs you that the Instrument does not see the starboard engine computer. Usually indicates
that no data is being transferred from the engine’s computer to the gauge. (Check wiring, also
make sure both terminator resistors are installed in the bus). Make sure both ECM’s are not
configured for port location using a DDT or Quicksilver Diagnostic Tool.
WARNING MULTIPLE STARBOARD ENGINE (b)
Informs you that the instruments are recognizing multiple engines as starboard.
In multiple engine applications, each engine must first be assigned a position (starboard, port,
starboard2 or port2) with a Quicksilver Diagnostic Tool before the system will function properly.
If you have a dual engine application, you must first program the port engine with a Quicksilver
Diagnostic Tool.
OIL TEMPERATURE (c)
This overheat alarm message appears and the warning horn begins sounding continuously.
The Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.
OIL PRESSURE (d)
This alarm message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to in-
form the driver that there is insufficient oil pressure.

a no starboard
engine
3 4
2 5

b muliple starboard engines 1 6

0 7

c OIL TEMP

d OIL PRESSURE

Auto-Detection Engine Function

AUTO–DETECTION ENGINE FUNCTION – System tach and speed come standard with
the “Engine Auto–detection Screen” this screen lets the gauge on its initial power up
automatically detect which engine type you are using and preconfigure the gauge to
match that vessel type.
Master Reset Command
MASTER RESET – By pressing TROLL – and TROLL
+ simultaneously for approximately 10
seconds (Until the graphic bars “collide”). You will be able to restore the unit back to facto-
ry presets.
WARNING: After a master reset all previously saved data will be lost (example: cal-
ibrations, clock settings, and trip logs).

MASTER RESET

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-45

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Tachometer Calibration
Quick Cal – This calibration for setting lighting and contrast.
TROLL
1. Press in the MODE and + buttons for up to 2 seconds to get to Quick Cal screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the lighting and contrast sections.
Cal1 – This calibration level lets you turn on and off the system screens. You may configure
the system to display as little or as much information as you prefer.
1. Press in the MODE and TROLL+ buttons and hold for approximately 7 seconds until you
see the calibration1 (Cal1) screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.
Cal2 – This calibration level lets you configure the system sensor inputs.
TROLL
1. Press in the MODE and + buttons and hold for approximately 10 seconds for calibra-
tion2 (Cal2) screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.

TACH CALIBRATION – CAL 1 LEVEL

1. Press in the MODE and TROLL+ buttons and hold for approximately 7 seconds until you
see the calibration1 (Cal1) screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.
If yes is selected, then screen changes made on this SC1000
REMOTE SCREENS? tach will effect any other SC1000 tach in the system.
NOTE: all tach will need to have this screen turned to “Yes” for this function
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]
to work.
If yes is selected, then lighting levels made on this SC1000 tach
REMOTE LCD LIGHT?
will effect any other SC1000 tach in the system.
NOTE: all tach will need to have this screen turned to “Yes” for this function
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]
to work.
If yes is selected, then contrast levels made on this SC1000 tach
REMOTE LCD CONTRAST?
will effect any other SC1000 tach in the system.
[NO] [SAVE] [YES] NOTE: all tach will need to have this screen turned to “Yes” for this function
to work.

TRIM POPUP?
Do you want power trim display screen to pop up momentarily
when you trim the engine?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

Page 2D-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

CALIBRATION Choosing edit allows you to calibrate the gauge to the stan-
TRIM CALIBRATION dard 0–10 unit trim and 11–25 trailer position scale.

[SKIP] [EDIT]

TRIM FULL DOWN

THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

TRIM FULL UP
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

TRIM TO TRAILER POINT

THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

DISPLAY UNITS
Lets you change units of measure between English (standard)
or Metric.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

SPEED UNITS
Lets you select speed units. You can choose from MPH (Miles
Per Hour), KN (Nautical Miles Per Hour) or KMH (Kilometers Per
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP] Hour).

DEPTH SCREEN? Do you want to turn on the depth screen? (Remember: You must
have a Smart Craft depth transducer connected to the system for
[NO] [SAVE]
this screen to operate)
[YES]

ENGINE TEMP SCREEN?

Do you want to turn on the engine temp screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

OIL TEMP SCREEN?

Do you want to turn on the oil temp screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

OIL PRESS SCREEN?

Do you want to turn on the oil pressure screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

TRIM AND PSI SCREEN?

Do you want to turn on the trim and water pressure split screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-47

WIRING DIAGRAMS

WATER PSI SCREEN?

Do you want to turn on the water pressure screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

TRIM AND RPM SCREEN?

Do you want to turn on the trim and RPM split screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

RPM SCREEN?
Do you want to turn on the digital RPM screen?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

SIMULATOR MODE?
Do you want to turn on a simulation mode? (used for demonstra-
tion purposes).
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

EXIT?
Do you want to exit calibration? Or jump straight into calibration
level 2?
[NO] [SAVE] [CAL2]

EXTERNAL SENSORS
This section lets you enable or disable the following external
sensor inputs.
[SKIP] [EDIT]

PITOT SENSOR?
Is the boat equipped with a pitot sensor to measure boat speed?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

PADDLE SENSOR?
Is the boat equipped with a paddle wheel to measure boat
speed?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

TRIM SENSOR?
Is the boat equipped with a trim sensor?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

SEA TEMP?
Is the boat equipped with a water temperature sensor?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

INVERT STEERING Is steering angle showing up on the link gauge opposite the direc-
tion that it should be? If it is then this feature will reverse the signal
so it is displayed properly.
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

Page 2D-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

TACH CALIBRATION – CAL 2 LEVEL

SPEED OPTION
This section lets you configure the following speed sensors.
[SKIP] [EDIT]

PITOT SENSOR?
Select pitot transducer type. You can choose 100 or 200 PSI.
(100 PSI is the most common)
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

PITOT SENSOR MULTIPLIER

Adjust the pitot pressure sensor for correcting display readings
that are to high/low.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

PADDLE SENSOR PULSE FACTOR

Adjust paddle wheel frequency for display readings that are to
high/low.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

PADDLE TO PITOT TRANSITION

Set the speed at which the gauge stops looking at the paddle
wheel and starts using pitot to measure boat speed.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

There are three methods for calibrating System Tach fuel tank level monitoring feature:
First: Do nothing. Linear readout based on raw sensor values. This mode does not factor
in irregular tank shapes.
Second: By following the tank calibration procedure described on pages 33–35, but with-
out actually adding fuel. Calibrate fuel tank by pressing the ”dEFLt” button. System Tach
will supply an estimated range value based on linear interpolation of the sensor range val-
ues. This mode does not factor in irregular tank shapes.
Third: By following the tank calibration procedure described on pages 33–35 completely
System Tach will display an estimated range value that factors in the tank shape.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Lets you enter the capacity of your boats fuel tank. This option
is the same for tank 1 as it is for tank 2.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION FUEL TANK Lets you enter the mode where you can calibrate your fuel tank.
Fuel tank calibration procedure is the same for tank 1 as it is for
tank 2.
[SKIP] [EDIT]

FILL TO 1/4 THEN PRESS PLUS BUT-

TON You can choose to have tank at 1/4 and hit SAVE, or hit DFLT and
a default value will be entered based on the capacity of the tank.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-49

WIRING DIAGRAMS

FILL TO 1/2 THEN PRESS PLUS

BUTTON You can choose to have tank at 1/2 and hit SAVE, or hit DFLT and
a default value will be entered based on the capacity of the tank.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

FILL TO 3/4 THEN PRESS PLUS

BUTTON You can choose to have tank at 3/4 and hit SAVE, or hit DFLT and
a default value will be entered based on the capacity of the tank.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

FILL TO FULL THEN PRESS PLUS

BUTTON You can choose to have tank at full and hit SAVE, or hit DFLT and
a default value will be entered based on the capacity of the tank.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

DEPTH SENSOR OFFSET Lets you electronically configure a depth offset. Entering a nega-
tive number gives you a water line offset. A positive number gives
[UP]
you a keel offset.
[DOWN] [SAVE]

DEPTH ALARM
Lets you enter a depth value. When the depth transducer reads
that value or below, the shallow water alarm will sound.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

EMPTY TANK THEN PRESS PLUS BUT- You can choose to have an empty tank and hit SAVE, or hit DFLT
TON
and a default value will be entered based on the capacity of the
tank.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

Speedometer Calibration
Quick Cal – This calibration for setting lighting and contrast.
TROLL
1. Press in the MODE and + buttons for up to 2 seconds to get to Quick Cal screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the lighting and contrast sections.
Cal1 – This calibration level lets you turn on and off the system screens. You may configure
the system to display as little or as much information as you prefer.
1. Press in the MODE and TROLL+ buttons and hold for approximately 7 seconds until you
see the calibration1 (Cal1) screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.
Cal2 – This calibration level lets you configure the system sensor inputs.
TROLL
1. Press in the MODE and + buttons and hold for approximately 10 seconds for calibra-
tion2 (Cal2) screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.

Page 2D-50 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

SPEEDOMETER CALIBRATION CAL 1 LEVEL

REMOTE LCD LIGHT?

Enables you to set the lighting levels on all the SC1000 simulta-
neously from this gauge.
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

REMOTE LCD CONTRAST?

Enables you to control the contrast from another System TACH/
Speed simultaneously from this gauge.
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

TIME
Allows you to set the time.
[NO] [SKIP] [EDIT]

TIME FORMAT
Choose between a 12 hour and 24 hour format.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

USE GPS TIME?

If you have a GPS connected this feature enables the gauge to
let the GPS update the gauges internal clock.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION HOUR 12:00 AM

Adjust the gauges internal clock to match your local time. First
set the hours then press MODE button to set the minutes.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

DISPLAY UNITS
Lets you change units of measurement between English (stan-
dard) or Metric.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

SPEED UNITS Lets you select the units at which speed is displayed. You can
choose from MPH (Miles Per Hour), KTS (Knots), or KMH (Kilo-
[SAVE] [UP]
meters Per Hour).
[DOWN]

TO WAY POINT SCREEN?

If you have a GPS connected you can turn on the screen that
shows your distance and fuel to a way point.
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

SIMULATOR MODE?
Do you want to turn on a simulation mode? (Used for demonstra-
tion purposes).
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

EXIT?
Do you want to exit calibration? Or jump straight into calibration
level 2?
[NO] [YES] [CAL2]

EXTERNAL SENSORS
This lets you enable or disable external sensor inputs.
[SKIP] [EDIT]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-51

WIRING DIAGRAMS

AIR TEMP?
Are you using a air temp. sensor?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

GPS?
Do you have a GPS sensor installed?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

USE GPS SPEED?

Use the GPS input to drive the speed display?
[NO] [SAVE] [YES]

WATER TEMPERATURE
ADJUST Adjust water temp. transducer to match actual sea water tem-
perature.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

SmartCraft Gauge Operation

Tachometer Speedometer

Basic Operation and Features

Power up: Each gauge will power up when the ignition is turned on. Gauges will stay on
as long as the ignition is on.
Lights: The brightness and contrast are adjustable. Refer to Gauge Calibration following.
Buttons: The MODE button is used for selecting information screens. The + and – but-
tons are used for setting engine speed during troll control and setting gauge calibrations.
Troll Control: Allows the operator to set and control the idle speed of the engine for trol-
ling without using the throttle.
Engine Guardian System: Monitors the critical sensors on the engine for any early in-
dications of problems. The system will respond to a problem by reducing engine speed
in order to maintain a safe operating condition.
Warning System – System will sound the warning horn and display warning message.
Gauge Calibrations
Digital Display Screen: Displays the following engine information.
Tachometer Display Screen: Speedometer Display Screen:
Digital Tachometer Clock and Temperature
Hour Meter Fuel Tank Level(s)
Power Trim Angle Oil Tank Level(s)
Fuel Flow Fuel Economy
Engine Temperature Fuel Range
Battery Voltage Trip Odometer
Water Pressure Digital Speedometer
Barometer Reading

Page 2D-52 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Speedometer Display Screen

Speedometer

1 6

2 7

3 8

4 9

5 10

When the ignition is turned on, the speedometer will show the last screen that was dis-
played before the ignition was turned off.
NOTE: Readings can be displayed in English or Metric. Refer to Calibration.
Press MODE to change display screens. You can revert back to the previous screen by
pressing and holding MODE for 2 seconds. This will reverse the display rotation.
1. Clock - Temp – Clock, air temperature and water temperature. The air and water tem-
perature sensors will have to be connected to obtain display readings.
2. Fuel Level – Displays the amount of fuel remaining.
3. Oil Level – Displays the amount of engine oil remaining.
4. RPM Synchronizer – Dual Engines – Monitors the revolutions of both engines. Allows
throttle adjustments to keep each running uniformly.
5. Trim Synchronizer – Dual Engines – Displays the trim position of both engines. Simplifies
keeping trim levels equal.
6. Traveling Range: The estimated traveling range is based on current fuel consump-
tion and fuel remaining in the tank .The numbers displayed indicates an estimate of
the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel.
7. Fuel Economy – The display shows average “AVG” fuel consumption as well as
instantaneous “INST” fuel economy. The numbers displayed indicate miles per gal-
lon “MPG” or kilometer per liter “KM/L”. Reset – To reset, select the display screen and
press MODE and TROLL– buttons.
8. Trip Odometer: Tells how far you’ve gone since you last set the gauge to zero. Trip Reset
– To reset, select the display screen and press MODE and TROLL – buttons.
9. Digital Speedometer: Can display boat speed in miles per hours, Kilometers per
hour, or knots. The digital speedometer will continue to increase even if needle is at
maximum. The speedometer will use the paddle wheel for its low speed readings but
will switch to the speedo or GPS (if connected) for high speed readings.
10. Barometer: Shows the barometer pressure reading only at the time the ignition was
turned on.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-53

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Tachometer Display Screens

Tachometer
1
6
2
7
3
8
4 ° F
9
5

When the ignition is turned on, the tachometer will display the last screen that was dis-
played before the ignition was turned off.
Press MODE to change display screens. You can revert back to the previous screen by
pressing and holding MODE for 2 seconds. This will reverse the display rotation.
NOTE: Readings can be displayed in English or Metric. Refer to Calibration.
1. Engine Break in – Displays time remaining on the break-in period of a new engine.
This screen will automatically disappear after the break-in period is complete.
2. Power Trim Angle - Water Pressure – Displays trim angle of the outboard and cool-
ing system water pressure.
3. Fuel Flow – Displays engine fuel use.
4. Temperature – Displays engine coolant temperature from Cold to Hot
5. Battery Voltage – Displays voltage level (condition) of battery
6. Water Pressure: Displays cooling system water pressure at the engine.
7. Power Trim Angle: Displays trim angle of the outboard up to the maximum trim angle,
and than displays the trailer angle. 0 = DOWN; 10 = FULL TRIM; and 25 = FULL
TRAILER.
8. Digital Tachometer: Displays engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM)
9. Hour Meter: Records the running time of the engine

Page 2D-54 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Troll Control

Tachometer Speedometer

TROLL TROLL TROLL TROLL

– + – +

Actual Speed Set Speed Actual Speed Set Speed

a TR

BASIC OPERATION
With Troll control you can maintain a trolling speed of 450 to1000 rpm without using the
throttle.
You can set the trolling control by using either the tachometer or speedometer. Tachome-
ter will set the speed in RPM and speedometer will set the speed in MPH.
You can shut off troll control anytime by pushing the MODE button when in the troll display
screen or moving the throttle.
If you have troll control set at a desired speed and then you shut off the troll control, the
system remembers the set speed and will return to that speed when re-engaged.
The display screen will revert back to the previous screen after 10 seconds of no activity.
Push the TROLL
+ or TROLL
– button to reactivate the display screen.
When the troll control is engaged and you are out of the troll control screen, a flashing
signal “TR” (a) will appear in the upper left corner of the display to tell you troll control is
still running.
TO SET TROLL CONTROL
1. With the engine running, shift outboard into gear. Set engine speed at idle.
TROLL TROLL
2. Push in the + or – button to bring up the troll control display screen.
3. Press MODE to engage (turn on) the troll control.
4. Use the TROLL
+
TROLL
– buttons to set the desired speed. Use (+) to increase speed and
(–) to decrease speed.
5. If you set troll control to a higher speed than the troll rpm can bring the boat to, the
TARGET SPEED TOO FAST message will appear. Reduce troll speed.
6. If you set troll control to a slower speed than the troll rpm can bring the boat to, the
TARGET SPEED TOO SLOW message will appear. Increase troll speed.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-55

WIRING DIAGRAMS

EXITING TROLL CONTROL

There are three ways to turn off the troll control:
• Press the MODE button when in the troll display screen.
• Move the throttle to a different speed.
• Shift outboard into neutral.

Warning System

a
b
c

The SmartCraft warning system incorporates the display screens (a) the warning horn
and the Guardian Protection system. The warning horn is located inside the remote con-
trol or is part of the ignition key switch wiring harness.
• Alarms Warnings – When a problem is detected, the warning horn sounds and the
name of the offending alarm appears on the display.
If problem can cause immediate engine damage – the horn will sound continuous-
ly and the Engine Guardian System (b) will respond to the problem by limiting en-
gine power. Immediately reduce throttle speed to idle and refer to the warning
messages on the following pages that will tells you what to do about it.
If problem will not cause immediate engine damage – The horn will sound but not
continuous.
The alarm message will stay displayed until the mode button is pressed. If there
are multiple alarms, these will cycle on the display at five second intervals.
If the mode button is pressed to a different screen, the flashing alarm signal “AL”
(c) will appear in the upper right corner to indicate there still a problem.
• Engine Guardian System – Monitors the critical sensors on the engine for any
early indications of problems. The system will respond to a problem by reducing
engine power in order to maintain a safe operating condition. The display screen
will show the percent of power loss.

Page 2D-56 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Alarm Messages
These messages will appear and the horn will sound if there is a problem detected in one
of the outboard systems.
NOTE: The warning system will alert the operator to the potential problems listed in the
chart. Refer to explanations following.
PROBLEM TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER ENGINE
DISPLAY DISPLAY GUARDIAN
SYSTEM
ACTIVATED
BATTERY *


ENGINE DATA BUS

FAULT – HORN

FAULT – IGNITION

FAULT – INJECTOR

FAULT – OIL PUMP


FAULT – SENSOR

*
FAULT – SPEEDO

FAULT – WATER TEMP

LOW FUEL

LOW OIL

OVERHEAT


OVER SPEED

PRESSURE


RESERVE OIL


UNIT MISMATCH

(MULTI ENGINE)
WATER IN FUEL

* Throttle and manifold pressure sensors only

OVERHEAT

a - Water Pump Indicator Hole

The overheat alarm message appears and the warning horn begins sounding continuous-
ly. The Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power.
If the engine overheats, immediately reduce throttle speed to idle. Shift outboard into neu-
tral and check for a steady stream of water coming out of the water pump indicator hole.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
If no water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole or flow is intermittent, stop en-
gine and check cooling water intake holes for obstruction. If no obstruction is found, this
may indicate a blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Operating the
engine while overheated will cause engine damage.
If a steady stream of water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole and the warning
horn continues to sound, there still may be insufficient cooling water or an engine problem.
Stop engine. Operating the engine while overheated will cause engine damage.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-57

WIRING DIAGRAMS

NOTE: If you are in a stranded situation, stopping the engine and allowing it to cool back
down will usually allow some additional low speed (idle) running time before the engine
starts to overheat again.
The overheat problem must be corrected before you can resume normal operation.
PRESSURE

a - Water Pump Indicator Hole

This alarm message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to
inform the driver that there is insufficient water pressure in the cooling system. The Engine
Guardian System will start limiting engine power.
Some causes of insufficient cooling water pressure are (1) obstructed cooling water in-
take holes (2) blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem (3) running the
outboard with the cooling water intake holes out of the water.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
If the warning system is activated, immediately reduce throttle speed to idle. Shift out-
board into neutral and check for a steady stream of water coming out of the water pump
indicator hole.
If no water is coming out of the water pump indicator hole or flow is intermittent, stop en-
gine and check cooling water intake holes for obstruction. If no obstruction is found, this
may indicate a blockage in the cooling system or a water pump problem. Stop engine.
Operating the engine without adequate cooling water pressure will overheat the engine.
If the warning signals stop and a steady stream of water is coming out of the water pump
indicator hole, return engine to normal operation.
OVERSPEED (a)
This message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to inform the
driver that the engine speed has exceeded the maximum allowable RPM. The system will
automatically reduce the engine speed to within the allowable limit.
NOTE: Your engine speed should never reach the maximum limit to activate the system unless
the propeller is ventilating, an incorrect propeller is being used, or the propeller is faulty.
WATER IN FUEL (b)
This message will appear and the warning horn will begin sounding a series of four beeps
every two minutes when water in the water separating fuel filter reaches the full level. The
water can be removed from the filter.
FAULT-HORN (c)
This message informs you that warning horn is not functioning correctly.

Page 2D-58 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

RESERVE OIL LOW (a)

This message will appear and the warning horn will begin sounding a series of four beeps
every two minutes to inform the driver that the oil level is critically low in the engine mounted
oil reservoir tank. When the oil level gets close to empty, the horn begins sounding continu-
ously and the Engine Guardian System will start limiting engine power. The display shows
percent of reserve oil that’s remaining.
The engine mounted oil reservoir tank along with the remote oil tank will have to be refilled.
FAULT-OIL PUMP (b)
This message is displayed and the warning horn begins sounding continuously to inform
the driver that the oil pump has stopped functioning electrically. No lubricating oil is being
supplied to the engine. Stop the engine as soon as possible. The Engine Guardian system
will start limiting the engine power.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
FAULT-INJECTOR (c)
This alarm informs you if one or more of the fuel injectors have stopped functioning electri-
cally.
FAULT-IGNITION (d)
This alarm informs you that a problem has developed in the ignition system.
FAULT-WATER TEMP (e)
This message informs you that the sensor (located in the paddle wheel) for measuring
outside lake/sea water temperature is not functioning. Two possible things to check for
are 1, Check the wiring going to the paddle wheel. 2, If the paddle wheel is not being used
or If only one paddle wheel is used for duel engine setup, edit the corresponding tachome-
ter calibration to delete the water temp sensor.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-59

WIRING DIAGRAMS

BATTERY (a)
The warning message is designed to come on and the Engine Guardian System will start
limiting engine power when the electrical system is not charging or the battery charge is
low. If the message appears immediately after starting, it is possible that the engine alter-
nator can recharge the battery after operating awhile. If this message appears while driv-
ing or comes on after starting and continued to be displayed, the electrical system must
be checked to determine the cause of the problem to avoid being stranded with a dead
battery. To help the alternator recharge the battery quickly, you can reduce the load on
the electrical system by turning off any unneeded accessories.
NOTE: The throttle will have to be returned to idle to reset the system.
ENGINE DATA BUS (b)
This message tells you the data communication link between the tachometer and engine
is not connected. Check for disconnected wires. Be sure the gray and brown/white wires
are connected to the diagnostic port plug on the engine. See SmartCraft Gauge Wiring.
UNIT MISMATCH (c)
(Multi Engines) This message tells you that the tachometers are not calibrated alike. (For
example, this could happen if one tachometer readings are in English and the another is
in Metric. Re-calibrate the tachometers.
NOTE: When calibrating multi tachometers, have all the tachometers powered up at the
same time while calibrating.

c
LOW FUEL LEVEL (d)
This message tells you that the fuel level in the fuel tank is critically low. Stop for fuel im-
mediately to avoid running out. The engine must be shut off to reset the warning system.
LOW OIL LEVEL (e)
This message tells you that the oil level in the remote oil tank is low. Stop and refill the
oil tank immediately to avoid running out. The engine must be shut off to reset the warning
system.
FAULT-SENSOR (f)
This message informs you if one of the sensors is not functioning correctly.
If the throttle sensor has failed, the warning horn will sound a continuous beeping and the
engine will not reach its full power.
If the throttle sensor and manifold pressure sensor both fail, the warning horn will sound
a continuous beeping and the engine speed will stay at idle.
If the temperature or block pressure sensor should fail, the Engine Guardian System will
limit the maximum engine power by 25 percent.

Page 2D-60 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Tachometer Calibration
NOTE: When calibrating multi tachometers (multi engines) turn ignition on for all the
tachometers.
Simple Calibration – This calibration for setting lighting and a few other common screens
can be made while engine is running.
TROLL
1. Press in the MODE and + buttons for calibration screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.
Advanced Calibration – This calibration goes through the entire mode selections.
1. Turn ignition key to the off position.
TROLL TROLL
2. Hold + – and turn ignition on.
3. Press and hold MODE for 2 seconds to bring up the calibration screen.
4. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.

CALIBRATION
Press – or + to adjust level. Press MODE to save setting
BRIGHTNESS
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION Do you want the same brightness level for all SmartCraft
BRIGHTNESS gauges? Press + for yes. Press MODE for no.
SET ALL INSTRUMENTS?
[ NO ] [ YES ]

CALIBRATION Press – or + to adjust level. Press MODE to save setting

CONTRAST
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION Do you want the same contrast level for all SmartCraft
CONTRAST gauges? Press + for yes. Press MODE for no.
SET ALL INSTRUMENTS?
[ NO ] [ YES ]

CALIBRATION Multi Engine – Do you want tachometer display screens to

CONTROL OPTIONS advance together? Press + or – to select. Press MODE to
REMOTE SCREEN ? YES – NO
[UP] save.
[DOWN] [SAVE]

Do you want power trim angle display screen to pop up when-

CALIBRATION
CONTROL OPTIONS ever you trim the outboard ? Press + or – to select. Press
TRIM POP UP ? YES – NO MODE to save.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

Match tachometer to the correct engine. Press + to select

CALIBRATION
ENGINE POSITION engine. Press MODE to save.
SINGLE-PORT-CENTER-STARBOARD
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

Select display readings in English or Metric. Press + or – to

CALIBRATION
DISPLAY UNITS select Press MODE to save.
ENGLISH - METRIC
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-61

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Display boat speed in KN (knots), KPH (kilometers per hour),

CALIBRATION
SPEED UNITS MPH (miles per hour). Press + or – to select setting. Press
KN - KPH - MPH MODE to save.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION Press MODE to skip to the next display. Press + (edit) if your
EXTERNAL SENSORS adding or deleting any external sensor to the SmartCraft Sys-
tem.
[SKIP] [EDIT] Editing External Sensors
Add Yes or No for each sensor
CALIBRATION No = not used Yes = in use
EXTERNAL SENSORS Press + or – for correct setting
SPEEDO SENSOR ? YES/NO
Press MODE to save and advance to next sensor
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION
EXTERNAL SENSORS
PADDLE WHEEL SENSOR ? YES/NO
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION
EXTERNAL SENSORS
WATER TEMP SENSOR ? YES/NO
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION
Add the capacity of the fuel tank. Press + or – to select.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY Press MODE to save.
CAPACITY = XX.XX
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION This calibration sets the fuel level of the tank.

FUEL TANK CALIBRATION NOTE: If the fuel tank is not calibrated, fuel range cannot be
displayed
[SKIP] [EDIT] Press MODE to skip to the next display. Press + (edit) to
calibrate the fuel tank.
CALIBRATING Pressing DFLT (default) during edit will return to original value
EMPTY TANK
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON setting
Calibrate the fuel tank as follows:
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]
1. Empty the fuel tank, Press + to save
2. Fill tank to 1/4 full, Press + to save.
CALIBRATING 1/4 VALUE
FILL TO X.X G. 3. Fill tank to 1/2 full, Press + to save
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON 4. Fill tank to 3/4 full, Press + to save.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE] 5. Fill tank to full, Press + to save.
The fuel tank is now calibrated
CALIBRATING 1/2 VALUE
FILL TO X.X G.
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATING 3/4 VALUE

FILL TO X.X G.
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATING FULL
FILL TANK TO FULL
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

Page 2D-62 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Add the capacity of the oil tank. Press + or – to select. Press

CALIBRATION
OIL TANK CAPACITY MODE to save.
CAPACITY = XX.XX
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION This calibration accurately adjusts the oil level sending unit in
OIL TANK CALIBRATION the oil tank.
Press MODE to skip to the next display. Press + (edit) to
[SKIP] [EDIT] calibrate the oil tank.
Pressing DFLT (default) during edit will return to original value
CALIBRATING setting
EMPTY TANK
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON Calibrate the oil tank as follows:
1. Empty the oil tank, Press + to save
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]
2. Fill tank to 1/4 full, Press + to save.
3. Fill tank to 1/2 full, Press + to save
CALIBRATING 1/4 VALUE
FILL TO X.X G. 4. Fill tank to 3/4 full, Press + to save.
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON 5. Fill tank to full, Press + to save.
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE] The oil tank is now calibrated

CALIBRATING 1/2 VALUE

FILL TO X.X G.
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATING 3/4 VALUE

FILL TO X.X G.
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATING FULL
FILL TANK TO FULL
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATION If the speedometer is not reading correctly, the speed sensors

SPEED SENSORS can be re-calibrated to correct the setting.
Press MODE to skip to the next display. Press + (edit) to cali-
[SKIP] [EDIT] brate the sensors.
Increasing or decreasing the multiplier will increase or de-
CALIBRATION crease the speed reading
PITOT SENSOR
Press – or + for changing setting. Press MODE to save.
MULTIPLIER 1.00
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION
PADDLE WHEEL SENSOR
MULTIPLIER 1.00
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-63

WIRING DIAGRAMS

CALIBRATION If the trim setting is not reading correctly, the trim sensor can
TRIM CALIBRATION be re-calibrated to correct the setting.
Pressing DFLT (default) during edit will return to original value
[SKIP] [EDIT] setting
Press MODE to skip to the next display. Press + (edit) to cali-
CALIBRATION brate the sensor.
TRIM FULL UP
1. Trim outboard full up, than Press + to save.
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE] 2. Trim outboard to the point where the trim cylinders takes over,
than Press + to save.
3. Trim outboard full down, than Press + to save.
CALIBRATION
TRIM TO TRAILER POINT
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATION
TRIM FULL UP
THEN PRESS PLUS (+) BUTTON
[DFLT] [SKIP] [SAVE]

CALIBRATION Do you want to exit the calibration mode? Press + for yes.
Press MODE for no.
EXIT ? [ YES ]
[ NO ]

Speedometer Calibration
Simple Calibration – This calibration for setting lighting and setting the clock can be
made while engine is running.
TROLL
1. Press in the MODE and + buttons for calibration screen.
2. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.
Advanced Calibration – This calibration goes through the entire mode selections.
1. Turn ignition key to the off position.
TROLL TROLL
2. Hold + – and turn ignition key to the on position.
3. Press and hold MODE for 2 seconds to bring up the calibration screen.
4. Press MODE to advance through the calibration selections.
Press – or + to adjust level. Press MODE to save setting
CALIBRATION
BRIGHTNESS

[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

Do you want the same brightness level for all SmartCraft

CALIBRATION
BRIGHTNESS gauges? Press + for yes. Press MODE for no.
SET ALL INSTRUMENTS?
[ NO ] [ YES ]

Press – or + to adjust level. Press MODE to save setting

CALIBRATION
CONTRAST

[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

Do you want the same contrast level for all SmartCraft

CALIBRATION
CONTRAST gauges? Press + for yes. Press MODE for no.
SET ALL INSTRUMENTS?
[ NO ] [ YES ]

Page 2D-64 90-883728 JULY 2001

 WIRING DIAGRAMS

CALIBRATION If the clock display is correct , press MODE to skip.

TIME To set or reset the clock Press +

[SKIP] [EDIT]

Select 12 hour or 24 hour clock set.

CALIBRATION Press – or + to select. Press MODE to save.
TIME FORMAT
12H – M,D,Y, or 24H – D,M,Y
[UP] Press – or + to enable or disable GPS time calibration. If a GPS
[DOWN] [SAVE]
navigation receiver is connected to the gauges, NMEA data
will set the time automatically. Press MODE to save.
CALIBRATION
NMEA
ENABLE or DISABLE Press – or + to add UTC correction. MODE to save. (Hour off-
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP] set from universal time constant)

CALIBRATION
UTC ZONE Press – or + to set the hour
UTC CORRECTION = X H Press MODE to save.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION HOUR

4:15 PM Press – or + to set the minute

Press MODE to save.
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION MINUTE

4:15 PM
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION Press MODE to skip to the next display. Press + (edit) if your
EXTERNAL SENSORS adding or deleting any external sensor to the SmartCraft Sys-
tem.
[SKIP] [EDIT] Editing External Sensors
Chose Yes or No for each sensor
CALIBRATION No = not used Yes = in use
EXTERNAL SENSORS Press + or – for correct setting
AIR SENSOR SENSOR ? YES/NO
Press MODE to save and advance to next sensor
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION
EXTERNAL SENSORS
GPS CONNECTED ? YES/NO
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

If YES was saved

CALIBRATION Chose Yes or No if you want the speedometer

EXTERNAL SENSORS to read GPS speed
USE GPS SPEED ? YES/NO
[DOWN] [SAVE] [UP]

CALIBRATION Do you want to exit the calibration mode? Press + for yes.
Press MODE for no.
EXIT ? [ YES ]
[ NO ]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-65

WIRING DIAGRAMS

SmartCraft Gauge Test Specifications

Test Equipment Required:
1. Test Harness 84-875233A2 (a).
2. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter 91-854009A1 (b).
NOTE: Connect negative DMT lead to BLACK/ORANGE lead on test harness
84-875233A2 for all tests. Use positive DMT lead on all other test harness leads to deter-
mine if individual sensors are within specifications.

b
a

57738

SENSOR RED TEST LEAD BLACK TEST LEAD RANGE

Trim Yellow Black/Orange 2.7 vdc UP – 0.6 vdc
DOWN
Fuel Sender Pink/Black Black/Orange 0.65 vdc FULL – 2.92 vdc
EMPTY
Lake Temperature Tan/Orange Black/Orange 2.5 vdc @ room temp.
(Voltage decreases as
temperature increases)
+5 vdc Sensor Power Purple/Yellow Black/Orange 4.9 vdc – 5.1 vdc
Pitot Pressure White/Orange Black/Orange 0.5 vdc static
(voltage increases with
pressure)
Oil Sender Light Blue/Black Black/Orange 0.63 vdc FULL – 2.89 vdc
EMPTY
Paddle Wheel Frequency Gray/Blue Black/Orange Set meter to Hz and spin
paddle wheel or set meter
to AC volts and spin
paddle wheel. Hz or AC
volts should increase as
wheel spins faster.

Page 2D-66 90-883728 JULY 2001

 19 21
150/175/200 EFI Wiring Diagram 6
7 8 9 10 18
11 14 15 16
1 - Low Oil Switch
1 2 3 4 5 50 12 13 17 B
2 - Shift Switch
20
30 85 86 8787a
A B C D E F G H A B A B C D E F G H J K
A B C D E F G H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 A B A B 30 85 86 8787a
3 - Crank Position Sensor

YEL/RED
A B

WHT/ORG
BLK
4 - Oil Pump

BRN/WHT

BLK
RED/BLK
DKBLU
PPL/GXL

PPL
WHT

DKBLU
BLK/ORG

RED

RED/FLEX
GRY/BLU

WHT
TAN/ORG
PNK/BLK

RED/GXL
BLK/WHT

PPL/YEL

TAN/PPL
RED/WHT/GXL

RED/WHT

RED/WHT

LTBLU/BLK

RED/FLEX
GRY
RED
RED/BLU

RED
RED/PPL

RED
BLK

RED/BLK

RED
RED/YEL
BLK/ORG

YEL/RED
LTBLU

BLK
BLK/RED

RED/FLEX
RED/GXL
RED/PPL

PPL/GXL

BLK

RED/PPL
YEL/PPL
5 - Fuel Pump
50

RED

RED
RED
WHT

YEL/RED
BLK

TAN/LTBLU
RED/BLU

BLK/YEL
BLK
LTBLU/BLK

RED/BLU

RED
TAN

PPL
6 - Main Power Relay

RED/FLEX
7 - 20 Amp Fuse – Fuel Injector Harness, Electric Fuel Pump, and Oil Pump

YEL/RED

RED/FLEX
8 - 20 Amp Fuse – Ignition Coils
9 - 20 Amp Fuse – Main Power Relay, Remote Control Harness and Power Trim A B C
A B C

10 - 15 Amp Fuse – Smart Craft Data Bus Circuit

11 - Accessory Power

BLK
44 45 46 47 48 49

RED/BLK
PPL
12 - Remote Control

GRY
13 - To Temp Analog Gauge
14 - Boat Harness
15 - Water In Fuel Sensor
RED/FLEX
22
16 - DDT Terminal
17 - Data Bus (SmartCraft)
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 BLK
52
18 - Slave Solenoid DKBLU 30
ORG/PNK
RED/BLU

RED/BLU
PPL/PNK
RED/PNK

DKBLU/PNK
RED/BLU

RED/BLU
RED/BLU
85

YEL/PNK
LTBLU/WHT
BRN/PNK
RED/BLU

19 - 60 Amp Alternator
23
BLK 86
87
20 - Starter Solenoid RED
BLK 87a
21 - Solenoid Driven Bendix
Starter GRN 30

RED/PPL
GRN/WHT 85
22 - To 12V Battery BLK
RED
86
87 24
23 - Trim Up Relay BLK 87a

24 - Trim Down Relay

25 - Trim Pump BLK
BLK
26 - Cowl Mounted Trim Switch BLK 50
27 - Remote Control Trim Switch BLK
GRN
28 - Port Knock Sensor
25
1 1 BRN/PNK
2 2 RED/PNK
29 - Stbd Knock Sensor 3 3 ORG/PNK
DKBLU

30 - Temp Sensor Gauge 4 4

5 5
YEL/PNK
DKBLU/PNK
31 - Port Head Temp Sensor 6 6 PPL/PNK RED/PPL 1

32 - Air Temp Sensor

7 7
8 8
RED/BLU
RED/BLU
GRN/WHT
BLU/WHT
2
3 26
33 - Stbd Head Temp Sensor 9 9
10 10
RED/BLU
RED/BLU GRN/WHT
34 - Throttle Position Sensor 11 11
12 12
RED/BLU
RED/BLU LTBLU/WHT 27
35 - Block Pressure Sensor
28
BLK/RED A
36 - MAP Sensor A GRN/BRN
BLK/RED A A BLK/RED WHT/BLU B
WHT/BLU B B WHT/BLU
37 - ECM B
C
BLK/GRN
BLK/WHT C C WHT/BLK
BLK D D WHT/BLK A
38 - #6 Ignition Coil
29
WHT/BLK WHT/BLK
D BLK/WHT
WHT/BLK B
E RED/YEL
39 - #5 Ignition Coil
40 - #4 Igintion Coil 43 GRN/BRN
GRN/RED
A
B
A
B
GRN/BRN
GRN/RED
TAN
30
GRN/ORG C C GRN/ORG
GRN A
41 - #3 Igintion Coil
31
GRN/YEL D D GRN/YEL
BLK/ORG B
GRN/BLU E E GRN/BLU
42 - #2 Ignition Coil A GRN/RED GRN/PPL F F GRN/PPL
B TAN/GRN A
32
BLK/GRN BLK/GRN G G BLK/GRN
43 - #1 Ignition Coil C BLK RED/YEL H H RED/YEL BLK/ORG B
D BLK/WHT BLK/WHT J J BLK/WHT
44 - #1 Fuel Injector E RED/YEL K K
45 - #2 Fuel Injector 42 TAN
BLK/ORG
A
B
33
46 - #3 Fuel Injector
PPL/YEL A
47 - #4 Fuel Injector
34
LTBLU/WHT B
A GRN/ORG
BLK/ORG C
48 - #5 Fuel Injector B BLK/GRN
C BLK
49 - #6 Fuel Injector D BLK/WHT BLK/ORG A

50 - To Ground
41
E RED/YEL PPL/YEL
WHT/GRN
B
C 35
51 - Early Production
BLK/ORG A
Centrifugal
36
BLK
BLK

LTBLU/BLK

LTBLU/WHT
BLK

YEL B
DKBLU/PNK

LTBLU/BLK
TAN/LTBLU

TAN/ORG
BLK/RED

BRN/WHT
BLK/WHT
PNK/BLK
GRN/ORG

TAN/PPL
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLU
ORG/PNK

GRN/BRN

BLK/ORG

WHT/ORG
BLK/RED

GRY/BLU
GRN/RED

PPL/YEL
RED/PNK

BRN/PNK

Bendix Starter PPL/YEL C

GRN/BLU

TAN/GRN
RED/BLU
RED/BLU
GRN/PPL

GRN/YEL

BLK/GRN
PPL/PNK

YEL/PNK

WHT/GRN
YEL/PPL
A

DKBLU
GRN/YEL
BLK/YEL

DKBLU
LTBLU
B

WHT

WHT

WHT
BLK/GRN

RED
GRY

PPL
52 - 12V Battery

YEL
TAN
GRN
BLK

BLK

C BLK
BLK

D BLK/WHT
Negative Lead E RED/YEL

40
BLK
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

A GRN/BLU
50
B BLK/GRN
C BLK
D BLK/WHT

39
E RED/YEL
51

4BLK

6BLK_YEL_ENDS
14RED_GXL
14RED

18YEL_RED
14RED

14RED

18RED
10RED
C B A

A GRN/PPL
B BLK/GRN
C BLK
D BLK/WHT
E RED/YEL

38 37 6BLK_YEL_ENDS

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 2D-67

 FUEL PUMP

FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3A - Fuel Pump
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-2 Checking Fuel Pump Lift (Vacuum) . . . . . . . . 3A-7
Fuel Pump Pressure @ W.O.T. . . . . . . . . . 3A-2 Vacuum Test Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 3A-7
Fuel Pump Pressure @ Idle . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3A-2
3A-2
Testing Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump Removal/Disassembly . . . . . .
3A-8
3A-9 3
Fuel Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump Description/Operation . . . . . . . . .
3A-4
3A-6
Cleaning/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly/lnstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3A-10
3A-10
A
Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow Caused by
Anti-siphon Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-6

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3A-1

FUEL PUMP

Specifications
Fuel Pump Pressure @ W.O.T.
Maximum – 10 psi (68.5 kPa)
Normal – 8-10 psi (41.0 – 54.8 kPa)
Minimum – 3 psi (20.5 kPa)
Fuel Pump Pressure @ Idle
Normal – 2-3 psi (13.7 – 20.5 kPa)
Minimum – 1 psi (6.8 kPa)
NOTE: Electric fuel pump pressure, if used in conjunction with engine mechanical fuel
pump, must be limited to no more than 4 psi (27.4 kPa).

Special Tools
1. Fuel Pressure Gauge (0–15 psi) (Obtain Locally)

57721

2. Vacuum Gauge (0 – 10 inches of vacuum mercury). Obtain Locally

Page 3A-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL PUMP

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3A-3

FUEL PUMP

Fuel Pump Assembly

19

19

19 Perfect Seal (92-34227-1)

Page 3A-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL PUMP

Fuel Pump Assembly

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
2 1 BODY–FUEL PUMP
3 2 CHECK VALVE
4 2 RETAINER
5 1 SPRING
6 1 CAP
7 1 SPRING
8 1 CAP
9 2 DIAPHRAGM
10 1 GASKET
11 1 GASKET-BOOST
12 1 GASKET-PULSE
13 1 PLATE
14 2 SCREW–FUEL PUMP (M5 x 40) 55 6.0
15 2 SCREW–PUMP TO CRANKCASE (M6 x 50) 55 6.0
16 1 BASE
17 1 ELBOW
18 1 FITTING
19 1 ELBOW (45 DEGREE)
20 2 STA STRAP
21 1 TUBING (6 IN.)
22 1 ELBOW

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3A-5

FUEL PUMP

Fuel Pump Description/Operation

The fuel pump is a crankcase-pressure-operated, diaphragm-type pump. Crankcase pul-
sating pressure (created by the up-and-down movement of piston) is transferred to fuel
pump by way of a passage (hole) between crankcase and fuel pump.
When piston is in an upward motion, a vacuum is created in the crankcase, thus pulling
in on the fuel pump diaphragm. The inlet check valve (in fuel pump) is opened and fuel
(from fuel tank) is drawn into fuel pump.
Downward motion of the piston forces the air mixture out of the crankcase into the cylin-
der. This motion also forces out on the fuel pump diaphragm, which, in turn, closes the
inlet check valve (to keep fuel from returning to fuel tank) and opens the outlet check
valve, thus forcing fuel to the VST(EFI models) or carburetors.

Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow Caused by Anti-Siphon

Valves
While anti-siphon valves may be helpful from a safety stand-point, they clog with debris,
they may be too small, or they may have too heavy a spring. Summarizing, the pressure
drop across these valves can, and often does, create operational problems and/or pow-
er-head damage by restricting fuel to the fuel pump and VST. Some symptoms of re-
stricted (lean) fuel flow, which could be caused by use of an anti-siphon valve, are:
1 - Loss of fuel pump pressure
2 - Loss of power
3 - High speed surging
4 - Preignition/detonation (piston dome erosion)
5 - Outboard cuts out or hesitates upon acceleration
6 - Outboard runs rough
7 - Outboard quits and cannot be restarted
8 - Outboard will not start
9 - Vapor lock
Since any type of anti-siphon device must be located between the outboard fuel inlet and
fuel tank outlet, a simple method of checking [if such a device (or bad fuel) is a problem
source] is to operate the outboard with a separate fuel supply which is known to be good,
such as a remote fuel tank.
If, after using a separate fuel supply, it is found that the anti-siphon valve is the cause of
the problem, there are 2 solutions to the problem; either 1) replace the anti-siphon valve
with one that has lighter spring tension or 2) replace it with a solenoid-operated fuel shut
off valve.

Page 3A-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL PUMP

Checking Fuel Pump Lift (Vacuum)

The square fuel pump is designed to lift fuel (vertically) about 60 in. (1524 mm) if there
are no other restrictions in the system using a fuel hose that is 5/16 in. (7.9 mm) minimum
diameter. As restrictions are added, such as filters, fittings, valves etc., the amount of fuel
pump lift decreases.
Fuel pump vacuum and air bubbles in the fuel supply can be checked with a vacuum
gauge, a t-fitting and a clear piece of fuel hose. Connect the clear hose between the inlet
fitting on the pulse driven fuel pump and the vacuum gauge t-fitting; keeping the t-fitting
as close as possible to the pump. Connect the fuel line from the fuel tank to the remaining
connection on the t-fitting.

b
a

57721
a - Clear Hose
b - T-fitting
c - Vacuum Gauge

Vacuum Test Troubleshooting

Before proceeding with the system vacuum test, confirm that the pulse fuel pump is capa-
ble of supplying the required vacuum. To do this, start the engine, pinch off/restrict the fuel
supply hose between the vacuum gauge and fuel tank. The vacuum gauge should rise
to or exceed the maximum normal reading of 2.5 inches vacuum (mercury). If it fails to
reach this minimum number, the pump needs servicing or there is a lack of crankcase
pressure to operate the pump.

Normal Reading Below 2.5 in. of vacuum (mercury)

Reading above 2.5 in. of vacuum (mercury) Restriction within the fuel system –
• Restricted anti-siphon valve
• Restriction within the primer bulb
• Kinked or collapsed fuel hose
• Plugged water separating fuel filter (in the
boat)
• Restriction in fuel line thru-hull fitting
• Restriction in fuel tank switching valves
• Plugged fuel tank pick-up screen

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3A-7

FUEL PUMP

Testing Fuel Pump

Problem: Air Bubbles in Fuel Line
Low fuel in tank. Fill tank with fuel.
Loose fuel line connection. Check and tighten all connectors.
Fuel pump fitting loose. Tighten fitting.
A hole or cut in fuel line. Check condition of all fuel lines and replace
Fuel Pump anchor screw(s) loose. Tighten all screws evenly and securely.
Fuel Pump filter cover anchor screw loose. Tighten screws securely.
Fuel pump filter gasket worn out. Replace gasket.
Fuel pump gasket(s) worn out. Rebuild fuel pump.
Fuel vaporizing Fuel with high reed vapor pressure (winter grade
fuel) may vaporize (form bubbles) when used in
hot/warm weather. Use fuel with a lower reed va-
por pressure (summer grade fuel)
Problem: Lack of Fuel Pump Pressure
An anti-siphon valve. See ‘‘Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow” preced-
ing.
Air in fuel line. See ‘‘Air Bubbles in Fuel Line”, above.
A dirty or clogged fuel filter. Clean or replace fuel filter.
The fuel pickup in fuel tank is clogged or dirty. Clean or replace pickup.
Worn out fuel pump diaphragm. Rebuild fuel pump.
Worn out check valve(s) in fuel pump. Rebuild fuel pump.
A leaky check valve gasket. Rebuild fuel pump.
Pulse hole(s) plugged. Remove fuel pump and clean out holes.
Hole in pulse hose. Replace pulse hose.
Loose pulse hose. Tighten connection(s).
Fuel hose internal diameter too small. Use 5/16 I.D. fuel hose.
Primer bulb check valve not opening. Replace primer bulb.
Excessive fuel lift required. Fuel lift exceeds 2.5 in. of vacuum (mercury)

Page 3A-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL PUMP

Fuel Pump Removal/Disassembly

IMPORTANT: Fuel pump diaphragm and gaskets should not be re-used once fuel
pump is disassembled.
1. Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel pump.
2. Disconnect pulse hose.
3. Remove two mounting screws.
4. Remove fuel pump from engine.

d
c
a
d

58799
a - Fuel Inlet
b - Fuel hose from fuel pump to Fuel/Water Separator
c - Pulse hose
d - Mounting screws

5. Disassemble fuel pump.

58876
a - Reverse View of Pump Body

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3A-9

FUEL PUMP

Cleaning/Inspection
1. Clean fuel pump housing, check valves, pulse chamber and pump base in solvent and
dry all but check valves with compressed air.
2. Inspect each check valve for splits or chips.
3. Inspect boost springs for weakness or breakage.
4. Inspect fuel pump housing, pulse chamber and base for cracks or rough gasket sur-
face and replace if any are found.
5. Inspect fitting on fuel pump housing for loosening or any signs of fuel or air leaks. Re-
place or tighten fitting if a leak is found.

Reassembly/lnstallation
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: The new repair kits contain check valves made of a plastic material, impervious
to damage from additives. When repairing the fuel pump discard old rubber and small
plastic check valve disks, and install one new plastic disk under each retainer. Caution
must be taken not to push the check valve retainer to tightly against the check valve, this
may cause valve to deform.

CORRECT INCORRECT 57861

a - Check Valve Retainer

b - Check Valve (Plastic)

1. Insert retainer thru plastic check valve.

b

23601
a - Retainer
b - Plastic Check Valve

Page 3A-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL PUMP

2. Install check valves and retainers into fuel pump body.

58887
3. With retainer installed in pump body, break retainer rod from retainer by bending side-
ways.

23601
a - Rod
b - Retainer Cap

4. Reinstall rod into retainer cap and, use a small hammer or hammer and punch to tap
rod down into retainer until flush with top of retainer.

23601
a - Rod
b - Retainer Cap

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3A-11

FUEL PUMP

5. Place boost spring into pump body and place cap onto boost spring.

50161
a - Boost Spring
b - Pump Body
c - Cap

6. Assemble remainder of components as shown and install retaining screws thru to

align.

58876
a - Reverse View of Pump Body

INSTALLATION
1. Install pump onto engine. Torque to 55 Ib. in. (6 N·m).
2. Install hoses onto proper fittings and secure with sta-straps.
3. Run engine and check for leaks.

Page 3A-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3B - Fuel Injection
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-2 Injector Load Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-30
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-3 Fuel Rail Assembly Leakage Test . . . . . . . 3B-30
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3B-5
3B-6
Air Temperature Sensor and Head
Temperature Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-31 3
Vapor Separator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Fuel Injection (EFl) System . . . . . .
3B-8
3B-10
Detonation Control System Test
(200 Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-32
B
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 Throttle Position Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-33
Using the Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 MAP Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-34
EFI System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 Problem Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-35
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10 Engine Head Temperature Sensor Removal 3B-38
Fuel Injection System Function . . . . . . . . . 3B-11 Engine Head Temperature Sensor Installation 3B-38
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11 Fuel Management Assembly Removal . . . . . 3B-39
Ignition Spark Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11 Fuel Rail Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-43
Electronic Fuel Injection Set Up . . . . . . . . 3B-12 Fuel Rail Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-45
Fresh Quality Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-12 Reed Block Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . 3B-47
Low Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-12 Reed Block Assembly Installation . . . . . . . 3B-47
Fuel Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-13 Air Temperature Sensor Removal . . . . . . 3B-48
Fuel Flow Component Description . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Air Temperature Sensor Installation . . . . . 3B-48
Pulse Fuel Pump (d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Water Separating Filter (e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Sensor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-48
Vapor Separator (h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Final Filter (n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-48
Electric Fuel Pump Throttle Plate Assembly Removal . . . . . . . 3B-49
(Inside Vapor Separator) (j) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Throttle Plate Assembly Installation . . . . . 3B-49
Fuel Injectors (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Vapor Separator Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . 3B-49
Fuel Pressure Regulator (p) . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-14 Vapor Separator Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . 3B-50
EFI Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-15 Air Plenum Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-52
EFI Fuel Management Vapor Separator (VST) Installation . . . . . . 3B-53
(Low Pressure Fuel Route) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-17 Water Separating Filter Assembly
EFI Fuel Management Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-54
(High Pressure Fuel Route) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-18 Water Separating Filter Assembly
Fuel Rail Electrical/Fuel Determination . . . . . 3B-19 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-54
EFI System Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-20 Throttle Position Sensor Removal . . . . . . 3B-55
Fuel Gauge Connection/Pressure Test . . 3B-20 Throttle Position Sensor Installation . . . . . 3B-55
Vapor Separator Fuel Delivery Test . . . . . 3B-21 Oil Reservoir Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-56
Pulse Fuel Pump Delivery Test . . . . . . . . . 3B-22 Oil Reservoir Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-56
Water Separating Filter Inspection . . . . . . 3B-23 Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal . . . . . . 3B-57
Vapor Separator Float Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-24 Fuel Pressure Regulator Disassembly . . 3B-58
Electric Fuel Pump Inlet Filter Check and Fuel Pressure Regulator Reassembly . . . 3B-58
De-Pressurizing EFI System Procedures 3B-25 EFI System Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . 3B-59
Pressure Regulator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-27 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-59
Electric Fuel Pump Voltage/Pressure Test 3B-28 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-59
Injector Electrical Harness Test . . . . . . . . . 3B-29

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-1

FUEL INJECTION

Specifications
FUEL Idle RPM
INJECTION – All Models 625 ± 50
Wide Open Throttle (WOT) RPM
– Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 5250 – 5750
Float Adjustment (Vapor Separator)
Float Level Preset @ Factory
Injectors
– All Models (Quantity) 6
– Injectors are Crank Angle
Driven by ECM
– #1 Cylinder RED + BRN Leads
– #2 Cylinder RED + WHT Leads
– #3 Cylinder RED + ORG Leads
– #4 Cylinder RED + YEL Leads
– #5 Cylinder RED + LT. BLUE Leads
– #6 Cylinder RED + PUR Leads
Line Pressure @ Injectors 41 psi – 45 psi (283 kPa – 310 kPa)
Injector Resistance 12.3 ohms ± 0.5 ohms
Electric Fuel Pump Resistance 0.7 ± 0.3 ohms
Electric Fuel Pump Amperage Draw 4 amperes ± 0.5 amperes

Page 3B-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Special Tools
1. Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-852087A3(a) or Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-881834A1(b).

55294 58879

2. Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) 91-823686T2

3. Software Cartridge 91-880118A2

4. DDT Reference Manual 90-881204-1

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-3

FUEL INJECTION

5. Adaptor Harness 84-822560A5 (use with DDT)

6. Remote Starter Switch 91-52024A1

7. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter P/N 91-854009A1

8. Inductive Timing Light 91-99379

9. Spark Gap Tester 91-850439T

55117
10. Strap Wrench 91-24937A1

Page 3B-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

11. Tamper Proof Torx Screw Set 91-881828

58685

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-5

FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Management System

25
26

27

Page 3B-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Management System

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
– 1 FUEL MANAGEMENT ASSEMBLY
1 1 ADAPTOR PLATE KIT
2 1 GASKET
3 1 GASKET
4 6 REED BLOCK
5 12 SCREW (1/4-20 x 0.88) 100 11.3
6 1 OIL PUMP
7 6 BUSHING
8 6 GROMMET
9 3 SCREW (M8 x 35) 140 16
10 6 WASHER
11 1 AIR PLENUM KIT
12 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR 14 1.6
13 3 O-RING
14 2 SCREW (M4 x 16) Drive Tight
15 1 THROTTLE BODY KIT
16 1 O-RING
17 4 SCREW 100 11.5
18 3 SCREW 140 16
19 1 MAP SENSOR
20 1 BRACKET
21 1 SCREW (M6 x 16) 80 9
22 1 FUEL RAIL
23 6 FUEL INJECTOR
24 1 INJECTOR HARNESS
25 1 VAPOR SEPARATOR TANK
26 1 GROUND CABLE
27 1 SCREW (M6 x 10) Drive Tight

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-7

FUEL INJECTION

Vapor Separator Components

Page 3B-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Vapor Separator Components

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb. in. lb. ft. N·m
– 1 VAPOR SEPARATOR ASSEMBLY
1 1 COVER KIT
2 1 FITTING - STRAIGHT
3 1 FITTING - STRAIGHT
4 2 ELBOW
5 1 FITTING - STRAIGHT
6 1 O-RING
7 1 VALVE
8 1 CAP
9 1 CAP
10 1 PLUG
11 1 SEAL
12 1 GASKET
13 1 PRESSURE REGULATOR KIT
14 1 O-RING KIT
15 1 WASHER - RUBBER
16 2 SCREW 22 2.5
17 1 SCREW 22 2.5
18 1 GROUND WIRE
19 7 SCREW 30 3.5
20 1 FLOAT KIT
21 1 FLOAT PIN
22 1 INLET VALVE
23 1 SCREW 40 4.5
24 1 FUEL FILTER
25 1 PROBE
26 1 FUEL BAFFLE
27 3 SCREW 40 4.5
28 1 FUEL PUMP KIT
29 1 SLEEVE
30 1 BOWL KIT
31 1 SEAL
32 1 PLUG KIT
33 1 O-RING
34 3 SCREW (M8 x 30) 15 20
35 3 BUSHING
36 3 GROMMET

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-9

FUEL INJECTION

Electronic Fuel Injection (EFl) System

Introduction
The troubleshooting information provided here consists of preliminary checks (checks to
be followed before proceeding with EFI tests), diagrams (fuel flow and electrical wiring),
component description (from diagrams), flow charts (low pressure fuel delivery, high pres-
sure fuel delivery, fuel delivery vs. electrical delivery), problem diagnosis, and a series of
test and check procedures that will help isolate problems associated with the fuel injection
system. Each test/check (listed) can be completed without major fuel system disassembly.
Using the Test Procedures
Read the entire test before beginning to perform outlined procedures. Study the RESULTS
material prior to testing. This will help in determining that each test is providing desired
results.
EFI System Tests
• EFI Electrical System and ECM Check
• Fuel Gauge Connection/Pressure Test
• Vapor Separator Fuel Delivery Test
• Vapor Separator Float Test
• Water Separating Filter Flow Test
• Pulse Fuel Pump Delivery Test
• Final Filter Check
• Fuel Pressure Regulator Test
• Electric Fuel Pump Test
• Injector Electrical Test
• Injector Fuel Delivery Test
• Injector Operating Test
• Induction Manifold Leak Check
• Sensor Tests

Safety Precautions
CAUTION
Always use approved safety glasses or goggles when working on pressurized fuel
systems.
DANGER
Motor fuels are extremely flammable. Do not show open sparks or flames when
working near fuel systems.
WARNING
To avoid potential fire hazards, use extreme caution when connecting and discon-
necting fuel line connections and test adaptors. Do not allow fuel to spill on hot
engine parts or on live electrical connections.

Page 3B-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

CAUTION
Wipe up fuel spills immediately.
CAUTION
Depressurize fuel system prior to opening line connections or removing fuel sys-
tem components.
DANGER
Perform the tests in this section in a well ventilated area to avoid being overcome
by fuel vapors or poisonous exhaust gases.

Fuel Injection System Function

Fuel is delivered directly to the engine by way of fuel injectors. These injectors are provided
with a constant supply of fuel (41 to 45 psi; 283 to 310 kPa) delivered to the fuel rail. The
injectors are opened and closed electronically by the Electronic Control Module (ECM).
The ECM receives input signals from various sensors in the EFI system which in turn trans-
mits controlling outputs (open/close) to the injectors. The length of time the injectors stay
open is considered pulse width. The pulse width will widen (richer) or narrow (leaner) de-
pending on signals ECM receives from sensors, to allow efficient operation at all speeds
and conditions.
IMPORTANT: The following preliminary steps MUST BE FOLLOWED before at-
tempting EFI problem diagnosis.

Preliminary Checks
Ignition Spark Check
Purpose: This test determines if the ignition system is delivering usable spark to the spark plugs. By perform-
ing this test, the probable cause can be isolated to either the ignition system or fuel system.
1. Disconnect all spark plug wires from spark plugs.
2. Connect spark gap tester Quicksilver (91-850439T) to a good ground on engine. Con-
nect Spark Plug Extensions (91-877870A1) between tester and spark plug leads.
3. Connect Remote Starter Switch Quicksilver (91-52024A1) to starter solenoid.
a. Connect RED lead from switch to large positive (+) terminal with RED banded
cable attached [(+) cable from battery].
b. Connect BLACK lead from switch to small terminal with YELLOW/RED lead at-
tached.
4. Turn ignition key switch to the “ON” position.
ON
OFF START

5. Look at spark gap tester viewing port for presence of good quality spark.
A steady, blue spark should be present at each spark plug wire. If a good spark is present,
problem may not be ignition related. If good spark is not present, problem may be ignition
related. Troubleshoot ignition system. Refer to appropriate ignition section in this service
manual.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-11

FUEL INJECTION

Electronic Fuel Injection Set Up

IMPORTANT: Follow EFI Synchronizing/Adjustment section 2C before attempting
tests on EFI system.
EFI set up procedures must be followed before tests on system are performed (refer to
Section 2C). Improper set up can result in poor engine performance (i.e. uncontrollable
idle speeds, lean sneezing, low power during acceleration or engine will simply not run.)
Failure to properly set up the EFI system can lead to misdirections in solving simple prob-
lems in the EFI system.
Fresh Quality Fuel

Using a remote fuel tank containing a major brand of premium unleaded gasoline, test run
the outboard to eliminate any problems related to restricted fuel supply (clogged lines, mal-
functioning anti-siphon valve, etc.) and/or marginal gasoline.
Low Battery Voltage
Low battery voltage can cause EFI system to deliver fuel in an inconsistent manner.
Inspect battery connections and charging system, refer to Section 2B. The EFI system re-
quires a substantial amount of voltage to function properly. Operating engine at a low RPM
for an extended period of time while operating numerous electrical accessories can cause
low voltage.

Page 3B-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Flow Diagram

b
a

p
q

o n
m d

k
j

i
h
f e

g
58901

a - Fuel Rail j - Electric Fuel Pump

b - Reed Block Plate Assembly k - Vapor Separator Float
c - Fuel Injectors (6) l - Needle and Seat
d - Pulse Fuel Pump m - Vapor Separator to Flywheel Cover Vent
e - Fuel/Water Separator Hose
f - Water Sensor n - Final Filter
g - From Fuel Tank o - Fuel Rail Pressure Port
h - Vapor Separator p - Fuel Pressure Regulator
i - Electric Fuel Pump Filter q - Fuel Pressure Regulator Vent Hose

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-13

FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Flow Component Description

Pulse Fuel Pump (d)
The pulse fuel pump operates through alternating crankcase pressure to deliver fuel
through the water separating filter to the vapor separator.
Fuel pressure @ Idle: 2 – 3 psi (13.8 – 20.7 kPa) [Minimum – 1 psi (6.9 kPa)].
Fuel Pressure @ Wide-Open-Throttle: 6 – 8 psi (41.4 – 55.2) [Minimum: 4 psi (27.6 kPa)].
Water Separating Filter (e)
The water separating filter protects the fuel injectors from water and debris. The filter con-
tains a sensor probe which monitors water level in the filter. If water is above the sensor
probe, the warning horn will begin a series of beeps.
Vapor Separator (h)
The vapor separator is a fuel reservoir which continuously blends and circulates fresh fuel
and oil.
a. Fuel Inlet – Fresh fuel delivered from the water separator by the crankcase
mounted pulse fuel pump. The amount of fuel allowed to enter the vapor separator
is controlled by a needle/seat and float assembly mounted in the cover of the vapor
separator.
b. Oil Inlet – Oil delivered by ECM controlled oil pump.
c. Fuel Pressure Regulator Inlet – Unused fuel/oil mixture being recirculated from the
pump back into the vapor separator.
Final Filter (n)
The final filter is located above the electric fuel pump in the brass fuel fitting. The filter col-
lects debris and prevents them from flowing into the fuel rail and injectors.
Electric Fuel Pump (Inside Vapor Separator) (j)
The electric fuel pump runs continuously while providing fuel in excess of engine de-
mands. The excess fuel is circulated through the fuel rail to the fuel pressure regulator and
back to the vapor separator. Normal fuel pressure is 41 – 45 psi (283 to 310 kPa).
Fuel Injectors (c)
The fuel injectors are located on the fuel rail. The injector valve body consists of a solenoid
actuated needle and seat assembly. The injector receives signals from the EFI Electronic
Control Module. These signals determine how long the needle is lifted from the seat (pulse
width) allowing a measured fuel flow. The pulse width will widen (richer) or narrow (leaner)
depending on various signals received from sensors connected to the EFI ECM. The ECM
receives a signal from the crank position sensor to fire each injector accordingly.
A 12 wire harness connects the fuel injectors to the ECM. The RED wire is at 12 volts and
connects to all injectors. The BLUE, YELLOW, WHITE, BROWN, PURPLE and ORANGE
wires each go to individual injectors and are normally at 12 volts for a zero differential. To
fire the injectors this voltage is brought down to near ground creating a potential across
the injectors.
Fuel Pressure Regulator (p)
The fuel pressure regulator is located on top of the vapor separator and is continuously
regulating fuel pressure produced by the electric fuel pump. The electric pump is capable
of producing 90 psi (621 kPa) of fuel pressure. The pressure regulator limits fuel pressure
at the injectors to 41 to 45 psi (283 to 310 kPa).

Page 3B-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

EFI Electrical Components

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE (ECM)
The ECM is continually monitoring various engine conditions (engine temperature, engine
detonation control (Model 200 only), engine throttle opening and climate conditions (induc-
tion air temperature, barometric pressure and altitude level) needed to calculate fuel deliv-
ery (pulse width length) of injectors. The pulse width is constantly adjusted (rich/lean con-
ditions) to compensate for operating conditions, such as cranking, cold starting, climate
conditions, altitude, acceleration and deceleration, allowing the outboard to operate effi-
ciently at all engine speeds.
12 Volt Battery - The 12 volt battery provides power to the ECM through the main power
relay.
IMPORTANT: When disassembling EFI System DISCONNECT BATTERY CABLES.
In the “start” position, injector pulse widths are increased as engine head temperature is
reduced to provide adequate fuel for quick start up.
Fuel Injectors - A 12 wire harness connects the fuel injectors to the ECM. The red wire
is at 12 volts and connects to all injectors. The BLUE, YELLOW, WHITE, BROWN, PUR-
PLE and ORANGE wires each go to individual injectors and are normally at 12 volts for
a zero differential. To fire the injectors this voltage is brought down to near ground creating
a potential across the injectors.
Electric Fuel Pump - The ECM contains a fuel pump driver circuit that provides power to
the electric fuel pump. The fuel pump does not have its negative terminal (–) “BLACK/RED
wire” grounded to the pump housing. The fuel pump positive terminal (+) “RED wire” and
the negative terminal (–) are at 12 volts with the ignition switch in the off position for a zero
differential. When the pump is on, the negative terminal is brought down to near ground
(i.e. 1.5 volts).
SENSOR INTERACTION WITH THE ECM
IMPORTANT: DO NOT run engine for extended periods of time with sensors discon-
nected or bypassed (shorted). Serious engine damage may result.
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The air temperature sensor transmits manifold absolute air temperature, through full RPM
range, to the ECM. As air temperature increases “sensor” resistance decreases causing
the ECM to decrease fuel flow (leaner mixture). Disconnecting the air temperature sensor
or temperature sensor failure will cause the ECM to revert to a default temperature source
of 32° F (0° C).
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
The map sensor is a non-serviceable sensor mounted on top of the air plenum. The MAP
sensor is used to sense changes in manifold absolute pressure. The MAP sensor is func-
tioning through the full RPM range and is continually signaling induction manifold pressure
readings to the ECM. The ECM in turn determines fuel flow as signals are received. The
MAP sensor’s operation can be monitored using the DDT. With the engine running, as the
throttle is increased or decreased, the MAP sensor’s DDT display should change. If no
change occurs, MAP sensor is not functioning properly.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-15

FUEL INJECTION

ENGINE HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR (PORT AND STARBOARD CYLINDER HEAD)

The Engine Head Temperature Sensors provide the ECM signals related to engine tem-
perature to determine level of fuel enrichment during engine warm up. The ECM is receiv-
ing information at all engine temperatures. Disconnecting the temperature sensors or tem-
perature sensor failure will cause the ECM to revert to a default temperature source of 32°
F (0° C). The temperature sensors can be monitored with the DDT.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)
The TPS transmits throttle angle information to the ECM which varies the injector pulse
width accordingly. Should the sensor fail, the dash mounted CHECK ENGINE light will illu-
minate and the warning horn will sound. RPM will be reduced by the ECM. The TPS is not
adjustable. TPS settings can be monitored with the Digital Diagnostic Terminal. Voltage
change should be smooth from idle to wide open throttle. If voltage change is erratic, the
TPS is defective.

IGNITION Throttle Position Sensor

SYSTEM @ Idle 0.19 – 1.0 vdc
@ W.O.T. 3.45 – 4.63 vdc

WATER SENSING SYSTEM

The system consists of a water separating fuel filter (port side powerhead) and a sensing
probe (bottom of filter).
WATER SENSING SYSTEM FUNCTION
1. The filter separates the accumulated water from the fuel.
2. A voltage is always present at sensing probe. When water reaches top of probe it com-
pletes the circuit to ground.
3. The completed circuit activates the warning horn which intermittantly sounds.
The system can be tested by disconnecting the TAN wire from sensor probe and holding
to a good engine ground connection for 10 seconds.

Page 3B-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

EFI Fuel Management (Low Pressure Fuel Route)

• Install fuel pressure gauge on to VST pres-

sure port.
• Place ignition switch in “OFF” position 30 sec-
onds before testing.
• Place ignition switch in “ON” position and
note pressure within 30 seconds (41 to 45 psi;
283 to 310 kPa).

Pump does not run No or low fuel pressure Fuel pressure above 45 psi (310 kPa)

Follow High Pressure Fuel Perform Vapor Separator Fuel Follow High Pressure Fuel
Route Flow Chart. Delivery Test . Route Flow Chart.

Results Results

No or little fuel flow from vapor Fuel flows freely from vapor
separator. separator.

Inspect float system of vapor Follow High Pressure Fuel

separator. Route Flow Chart.

Check fuel/water separator.

Perform Water Separating Fil-

ter Flow Test.

Results Results

Low or no fuel flow from water Fuel flows freely from water separat-
separating inlet hose. Reconnect ing filter inlet hose. Reconnect hose.
hose.

Perform Pulse Fuel Pump De- Replace water separating filter.

livery Test.

Results Results

Fuel flows freely from pulse

pump inlet hose. No fuel flow to pulse fuel pump.

See pulse pump removal and Check for restrictions, holes or loose
inspection section 3A. Locate connections from fuel supply.
all fragments of failed pump
before reassembly.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-17

FUEL INJECTION

EFI Fuel Management (High Pressure Fuel Route)

• Perform low pressure checks before performing

checks on high pressure route.
• Install fuel pressure gauge (P/N 91-852087A3) or
(P/N 91-881834A1) on to manifold pressure port.
• Place ignition switch in “OFF” position 30 seconds
before testing.
• Place ignition switch in “ON” position and note pres-
sure (41 to 45 psi; 283 to 310 kPa).

Fuel pressure above 45 psi (310 kPa) No or low fuel pressure Pump does not run

Clogged or faulty fuel pressure Perform Final Filter Check Perform Electric Fuel Pump Volt-
regulator remove and replace. age Test .
Results Results

Final filter OK. Final filter clogged.

Perform pump inlet filter check Inlet filter clogged.

Clean or replace final filter.

Inlet filter OK. Clean or replace final filter.

Perform Fuel Pressure Regulator Test

.

Results Results

Steady stream of fuel [pressure Low or no fuel flow.

still below 41 psi (283 kPa).

Perform Electric Fuel Pump

Replace fuel regulator. Voltage Test .

Results Results

Voltage from ECM driver circuit OK. Low or inconsistent voltage

from ECM driver circuit.

Replace fuel pump. Replace ECM.

Page 3B-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Rail Electrical/Fuel Determination

• Perform all preliminary checks page 3B-11.

• Adequate fuel pressure (41 to 45 psi; 283 to
310 kPa) follow Low/High Fuel Route Flow
Charts.
• Run engine @ idle and with DDT, perform
cylinder load test.

Results Results

No RPM change on cylinder(s), RPM decreases (on each cylinder).

indicating problem in cylinder(s).

Perform Fuel Injector load test. Fuel delivery OK.

Results Results

Fuel Injector has audible click. Fuel Injector does not have audible click.

Injector is functioning properly Defective injector or broken cir-

cuit to injector.

Perform Ignition Coil load test.

Perform Induction Manifold
Disassembly and inspection.

Results Results

Weak or no ignition spark Ignition spark OK

Replace defective coil, spark plug Perform compression check on

or wiring problem cylinder.

Results Results

Low or no compression on cylinder. Compression OK.

Inspect cylinder bore. Refer to Check:

Section 4 for disassembly. 1) Damaged reeds
2) End cap seals
NOTE: Injector filters must be 3) Crankcase split line leak
inspected prior to reassembly. 4) Crankshaft sealing rings

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-19

FUEL INJECTION

EFI System Test Procedures

NOTE: A clogged final filter located in fitting above fuel pump will cause low fuel pressure
readings at the fuel pressure port. Remove fuel fitting and inspect final filter. Clean and/or
replace final filter as necessary.

a - Final Filter
Fuel Gauge Connection/Pressure Test
IMPORTANT: When checking fuel pressure while engine is running, fuel pressure
may fluctuate. Fuel pressure fluctuation [i.e. 41 to 45 psi (283 to 310 kPa)] is com-
mon, as the regulated pressure is a differential between fuel rail and manifold vacu-
um.
Purpose: Checking fuel manifold pressure ensures that fuel under usable pressure is available to the fuel
injectors. This test isolates the probable cause as either a fuel delivery or EFI electrical system failure.
IMPORTANT: Fuel pressure should be monitored through full RPM range to deter-
mine fuel supply problems at high engine speeds.
1. Connect fuel pressure gauge to VST pressure port.

a
b

58874
a - Pressure Port c - Direct fuel into suitable
b - Fuel Pressure Gauge container
(91-881834A1)

Page 3B-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

2. Turn ignition key switch to “ON” position.

ON
OFF START

3. Operate electric fuel pump (ignition key on).

NOTE: Fuel pump will only operate for approximately 2-4 seconds. By turning the key
switch to “OFF” and then back to “ON” the pump will operate for 2-4 seconds more.
4. Take reading on fuel pressure gauge.
Results: If pressure reading is 41 to 45 psi (283 to 310 kPa), the electric fuel pump is providing fuel with
enough pressure to be used by the injectors. Pump malfunction is not the cause of EFI trouble.
If fuel pressure is well below 41 psi (283 kPa), fuel delivery to electric fuel pump, fuel pump
failure or other related problem exists. Inspect final filter for debris.
If fuel pressure is above 45 psi (310 kPa) go to fuel pressure regulator test.
Vapor Separator Fuel Delivery Test
Purpose: Verifying there is adequate fuel flow to the electric fuel pump (through full RPM range) will deter-
mine components in low pressure fuel system are functioning correctly.
1. Remove vapor separator drain plug and place a clean container under drain.
2. Prime fuel line primer bulb.

58891

Results: Fuel should flow when plug is removed and continue to flow as primer bulb is pumped. If fuel flow is
not present, inspect pulse fuel pump, water separator filter or VST float and needle valve.
If fuel flow is present, go to High Pressure Flow Chart.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-21

FUEL INJECTION

Pulse Fuel Pump Delivery Test

Purpose: This test will indicate pulse fuel pump is capable of supplying the low pressure fuel route with ade-
quate fuel supply.
1. Place emergency stop switch in OFF position to prevent engine from starting.
2. Remove fuel inlet hose from fuel/water separator.

58892

3. Turn ignition key switch to “START” and operate starter motor for 10 to 20 seconds.

Results: Fuel should flow freely from hose. Refer to Fuel/Water Separator Inspection and/or Vapor Sepa-
rator Float Test.
If fuel does not flow from hose:
4. Remove inlet hose to pulse fuel pump and put end into clean container.
5. Squeeze primer bulb several times.

58902
a - Inlet Fuel Hose

Page 3B-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Results: If low or no fuel flow is present, inspect fuel hose for restrictions. Inspect anti-siphon valve and boat
fuel tank for proper fuel delivery. If fuel flow is present, remove, disassemble and inspect pulse fuel
pump. All fragments of failed pump must be located before reassembly.

58799

a - Pulse Fuel Pump

Water Separating Filter Inspection
Remove fuel/water separator filter. Inspect filter for debris. Replace filter as required.
1. Place emergency stop switch in OFF position to prevent engine from starting.
2. Remove vapor separator drain plug and place a clean container under drain.
3. Crank engine over with starter.

58891

Results: If fuel flow is present, fuel is being delivered to electric fuel pump. If fuel is not present, refer to Vapor
Separator Float Test.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-23

FUEL INJECTION

Vapor Separator Float Test

NOTE: If squeezing the primer bulb in the Vapor Separator Fuel Delivery Test previous
provides adequate fuel to the vapor separator, the vapor separator float, needle and seat
is functioning properly and the following test does not need to be performed.
Purpose: This test will indicate if float is stuck in the up (closed) position.
NOTE: If float is stuck down, vapor separator will over flow causing a rich condition.
1. Place emergency stop switch in OFF position to prevent engine from starting.
2. Turn ignition key switch to “START” position and operate starter motor for 15 to 20 sec-
onds.
ON
OFF START

3. Remove vapor separator drain plug and place a clean container under drain.

58891

Results: If fuel flow is low or not present, remove, disassemble and inspect float assembly. See vapor separa-
tor disassembly.

Page 3B-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Electric Fuel Pump Inlet Filter Check and De-Pressurizing EFI System
Procedures
Purpose: Checking the inlet filter for obstructions, damage etc. eliminates this component as a possible
source of restriction in the system.
1. De-pressurize EFI fuel system by wrapping a clean cloth around pressure port valve
and inserting tip of screwdriver into valve, depressing valve core. Let fuel drain from
valve.

b
58873
a - Pressure Port b - Drain Plug

2. Remove drain plug from vapor separator and allow fuel to drain into suitable container.

58891

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-25

FUEL INJECTION

3. Remove 3 bolts securing vapor separator assembly to manifold.

58801
a - Bolts

4. Tilt vapor separator assembly out from manifold and remove 9 screws securing cover.
5. Remove vapor separator tank from cover.
6. Pull downward to remove filter from fuel pump.

58869
a - Inlet Filter

7. Inspect filter for debris or damage.

Results: If filter is clogged with debris, clean filter with solvent and compressed air or replace filter. Reas-
semble vapor separator to manifold and recheck fuel pressure. If pressure is still below 41 psi (283
kPa), perform fuel Pressure Regulator Test.

Page 3B-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Pressure Regulator Test

NOTE: Low fuel pressure can be caused by inadequate fuel supply, a defective electric
fuel pump or fuel pressure regulator. Verify adequate fuel is being supplied to the vapor
separator. If fuel supply is proper, inspect final filter inside outlet fuel fitting on vapor sepa-
rator for debris. If filter is clean, perform amperage draw test on electric fuel pump. If am-
perage draw is within specifications, replace fuel pressure regulator.
Purpose: This test will determine if a weak, plugged or open pressure regulator is causing inadequate fuel
pressure in the system.
1. Connect pressure gauge 91-881834A1 to EFI test port.

91-881834A1

58874
a - Test Port

2. Turn ignition key switch to “ON” position and check fuel pressure reading on gauge.
If pressure reading is below 41 psi (283 kPa) replace regulator.
ON
OFF START

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-27

FUEL INJECTION

Electric Fuel Pump Voltage/Pressure Test

NOTE: The Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) can implement a load test for the electric
fuel pump. If the electric fuel pump does not appear to run, it is recommended that the DDT
load test be performed first before performing the following voltage test.
Purpose: If insufficient electrical power is available at the pump, no or low fuel pressure will be developed.
1. Disconnect electric fuel pump harness connector.
2. Set volt meter to read battery voltage and connect black test lead to BLACK wire in the
fuel pump connector, positive test lead to positive wire (RED/BLUE) of fuel pump con-
nector (engine harness end).

58794
a - Fuel Pump Harness Connector – Positive test lead to RED/BLUE wire and
Negative test lead to BLACK wire (engine harness end)
3. Turn key to RUN position. Battery voltage will be applied to the RED/BLUE lead for
about 2 seconds.
Results: If battery voltage is not present, inspect battery, battery connections and harness for corrosion, dam-
age or loose connections. If correct battery voltage is present, replace electric pump.
NOTE: If electric fuel pump runs but fuel pressure is low, perform amperage draw test on
electric pump. Amperage draw should be 4 amperes ± 0.5 amperes. If amperage draw is
high, replace pump.

Page 3B-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Injector Electrical Harness Test

An injector load test can be performed using the Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT). An au-
dible click will be heard each time an injector is activated. If an injector does not respond
to the load test, an ohm test can be made on the harness and the injector(s).

a 58886
a - Injector Harness
Injector Resistance
#1 Cylinder – RED + BRN Leads
#2 Cylinder – RED + WHT Leads
#3 Cylinder – RED + ORG Leads 12.3 ohms ± 0.5 ohms
#4 Cylinder – RED + YEL Leads
#5 Cylinder – RED + LT. BLUE Leads
#6 Cylinder – RED + PUR Leads

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-29

FUEL INJECTION

Injector Load Test

An injector load test can be performed using the Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT). An au-
dible click will be heard each time an injector is activated. This test will verify that each in-
jector is operating mechanically, not that each injector is allowing the proper amount of fuel
to enter each cylinder. Refer to DDT Reference Manual 90-881204–1 for test procedures.
Fuel Rail Assembly Leakage Test
Purpose: This test will determine if the supply tube or injector o-rings are leaking or if an injector is stuck open.
1. Remove 4 screws securing throttle plate assembly to air plenum and remove assem-
bly.

a a

58898
a - Screws b - Throttle Plate Assembly
2. Put ignition key switch in “ON” position. Electric fuel pump should run for approximately
2 seconds.
ON
OFF START

3. While pump is running, observe fuel rail.

Results: If leakage is observed, refer to Fuel Rail Removal. Replace o-rings and/or injectors as required.

Page 3B-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Air Temperature Sensor and Head Temperature Sensor Test

Purpose: This test eliminates possibilities of improper fuel delivery related to air/head temperature sensors.
NOTE: Air/Head Temperature Sensor functioning can be monitored using the Digital Diag-
nostic Terminal (DDT). The Air Temperature sensor should indicate ambient air tempera-
ture. The Head Temperature sensor should indicate cylinder head water temperature. The
ECM will revert to a default temperature of 32° F (0° C) if it should lose either air or head
temperature sensor signal. The sensors can also be tested using a DMT2000 Digital Multi-
meter 91-854009A1.

a
b

58898 58893
a - Air Temperature Sensor b - Head Temperature Sensor
Disconnect temperature sensor harness and check continuity with digital or analog ohm-
meter test leads between both connector pins. With engine at temperature (F°) indicated,
ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%. There should be no continuity between each
connector pin and ground.
1. Disconnect and remove temperature sensors from engine.
2. Connect DMT (91-854009A1) to leads of sensor.
3. Place sensor in ice water while monitoring meter reading. Use chart (below) for refer-
ence.
Results: Resistance does not change inversely with temperature change. Replace defective temperature
sensor. Resistance changes inversely with temperature change. Temperature sensor OK.

Temperature Sensor Specifications

Fahrenheit Centigrade OHMS
257 125 340
248 120 390
239 115 450
230 110 517
221 105 592
212 100 680
203 95 787
194 90 915
185 85 1070
176 80 1255
167 75 1480
158 70 1752

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-31

FUEL INJECTION

149 65 2083
140 60 2488
131 55 2986
122 50 3603
113 45 4370
104 40 5327
95 35 6530
86 30 8056
77 25 10000
68 20 12493
59 15 15714
50 10 19903
41 5 25396
32 0 32654
14 –10 55319
5 –15 72940

Detonation Control System Test (200 Models Only)

a a

58893
a - Knock Sensor
Purpose: Determines whether the detonation sensor and circuit located in the ECM is functioning.
1. Place outboard in water, connect Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) to engine.
NOTE: If either knock sensor is not functioning, #4 LED indicator light on DDT will be illumi-
nated.
2. Start engine, allow to warm up. Using SPECIAL FUNCTIONS portion of DDT, access
KNOCK OUTPUT LOAD TEST.
Results: As throttle is advanced and engine is under load (in gear), numerical value on DDT display should
increase. As throttle is retarded, numerical value should decrease indicating knock sensor/circuit is
functioning. If numerical value does not change as throttle setting and load on engine varies, knock
sensor or knock circuit in ECM is defective.

Page 3B-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Throttle Position Sensor Test

58871
a - Throttle Position Sensor
Purpose: Determines whether Throttle Position Sensor is functioning properly through the use of the Digital
Diagnostic Terminal (DDT). The Throttle Position Sensor is not adjustable.
1. Place outboard in water, connect Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) to engine.
NOTE: If throttle position sensor is not functioning, #4 LED indicator light on DDT will be
illuminated.
2. Start engine, allow to warm up. Using DATA MONITOR portion of DDT, access TPI
VOLTS.
Results: As throttle is advanced, numerical value on DDT display should increase. As throttle is retarded,
numerical value should decrease.
HEAT TEST
With engine at idle, heat the TPS (with a hot air gun) below the electrical connection until
warm to the touch. Watch for any one or a combination of the following symptoms:
• RPM change
• Check engine light illumination
• Momentary warning horn signal
• TPS voltage value change (1/2 volt) on DDT
NOTE: Excessive heat will damage TPS.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-33

FUEL INJECTION

PRESSURE TEST
IMPORTANT: When testing TPS voltage, do not move the drive mechanism (rotor/
wiper).
1. Connect DDT and rotate the key to the “ON” position.
2. Set DDT to read TPS voltage; expand the screen to show Now/Min/Max.
NOTE: Test accuracy is improved when TPS is at its lowest voltage reading; this may be
idle or WOT depending on model year.
3. Clear the minimum/maximum values on the DDT – press the “0” button.
4. Watch the DDT readings while pressing below the electrical connection point on the
TPS cover.

a
a - Press on cover below electrical connection
5. Voltage reading should change:
• Less than a couple of digits (i.e. 1.90 v to 1.92 v)
NOTE: Version 5.0 cartridge gives 3 decimal point (millivolts) accuracy if below 1 volt.
• Less than 10 millivolts (i.e. 0.293 v to 0.285 v)
Replace any TPS that fails either test.
MAP Sensor Test

58898
a - MAP Sensor
Purpose: Determines whether the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor is functioning properly through
the use of the Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT).
1. Place outboard in water, connect Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT) to engine.
NOTE: If MAP sensor is not functioning, #4 LED indicator light on DDT will be illuminated.
2. Start engine, allow to warm up. Using DATA MONITOR portion of DDT, access MAP
PSI.
Results: As throttle is advanced, numerical value on DDT display should increase. As throttle is retarded,
numerical value should decrease indicating MAP sensor is functioning. If numerical value does not
change as throttle setting varies, MAP sensor is defective. The ECM would revert to a default of
approximately 14.7 PSI (near sea level) should it not receive a signal from the MAP sensor.

Page 3B-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Problem Diagnosis
Condition Possible Source Action
Engine Down On Power Or RPM – Failed Ignition Coil Refer to Section 2 Electrical and
Ignition Tests.

– Low Compression Refer to Section 4 Power Head.

– Broken Reed Inspect Reeds.

– Fuel Delivery Problem Follow Low/High Pressure Fuel

Route Flow Charts and Fuel Rail
Electrical/Fuel Determination
Flow Chart.

– Fuel Rail Leak Perform Fuel Rail Leak Test.

– Vapor Separator Flooding Check for fuel coming out of va-

Over, Engine Running Rich. por separator vent hose.

– Cylinder Head Temperature Check cylinder head temperature

Sensor Circuit Failed. sensor.
Poor Acceleration – Idles Ok, – Improper EFI Set Up. Refer to Section 2 Electrical and
Top Speed Ok Ignition for proper EFI set up pro-
cedures.

– Water Covering Idle Relief Boats with extended transoms or

Exhaust Ports. low engine mount can cause en-
gine to load up on acceleration.

– T.P.S. Failure. Refer to page 3B-33.

– MAP Sensor Failure Refer to page 3B-34.

– R.F.I. Problem* Install BPZ8HS-10 Spark Plugs.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-35

FUEL INJECTION

Condition Possible Source Action

Poor Acceleration – Idles Ok, – Timing Not Advancing. Check Timing Advance with DDT.
Top Speed Ok (Continued)
Engine Surges Between 4000 – Intermittant Ignition Coil Fail- Refer to Section 2A Electrical
And 5000 RPM ure. and Ignition for tests.

– Final Filter Clogging. Perform Final Filter Check.

– T.P.S. Check TPS Operation with DDT

– Injector Connector Problem. Perform DDT Load Test and

Ohms Test.

– Vapor Separator Flooding Check for fuel coming out of va-

Over. por separator vent hose.

– Injector Filter Clogged. Must be determined by elimina-

tion; mechanical, electrical and
load tests
Engine Idles Ok But Stumbles At – Improper EFI Setup. Refer to Section 2C Electrical
Off Idle Speeds and Ignition for proper EFI set up
procedures.

– Failed Ignition Coil. Refer to Section 2A Electrical

and Ignition Tests.

– Failed Or Disconnected EFI Perform EFI sensor tests.

Sensors.

– Fuel Delivery Problem. Follow Low/High Pressure Fuel

Route Flow Charts and Fuel Rail
Electrical/Fuel Determination
Flow Chart.

– Manifold Fuel Leak. Perform Induction Manifold Leak

Check.

– R.F.I.* Problem. Install BPZ8HS-10 Spark Plugs.

Check manifold cover gasket,

– Induction Manifold Air Leak. manifold to reed block housing
gasket and reed block housing to
crankcase gasket.

– MAP Sensor Failure. Refer to page 3B-34.

Engine Idles Rough (May Lean – Improper EFI Setup. Refer to Section 2C Electrical
Sneeze) – Acceleration Ok; Full and Ignition for proper EFI set up
Throttle Ok procedures.

– MAP Sensor Failure. Refer to page 3B-34.

Page 3B-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Condition Possible Source Action

Engine Idles Rough (May Lean – Ignition Coil Failure. Refer to Section 2A Electrical
Sneeze) – Acceleration OK; Full and Ignition Tests.
Throttle Ok. (continued)
– Broken Reed. Inspect Reed Assembly
Engine Runs but Slowly Drops – Restrictions in Fuel System Install remote gas tank with
RPM then Dies. between Tank and Engine. fresh, high quality fuel.

– Clogged Final Filter. Perform Final Filter Check.

Follow Low Pressure Fuel Route

– Pulse Fuel Pump Failure. Flow Chart.

Follow High Pressure Fuel Route

– Electric Fuel Pump Delivery Flow Chart.
Failure.
Engine Stops for No Apparent – Battery Undercharged. Check battery connections, un-
Reason or Does Not Start. der charged battery or worn out
battery.

– EFI Harness Connections. Check EFI harness connector for

improper connection.

– Ignition System Failure. Refer to Section 2A Electrical

and Ignition Tests.

– Pulse Fuel Pump Failure. Follow Low Pressure Fuel Route

Flow Chart.

– Electric Fuel Pump Failure. Follow High Pressure Fuel Route

Flow Chart.

– ECM Failure. The DDT (91-823686T2) will

monitor information coming from
sensors or switches to the ECM
and will indicate if the sensor or
switch is defective. For a more
thorough analysis of the ECM,
refer to EFI Tester Manual
91-11001A2.
Engine Stops for No Apparent – Restriction in Fuel System Check fuel pressure on fuel rail
Reason, but will Restart. at the RPM that failure occurs.

*R.F.I. Radio Frequency Interference. High voltage can alter signals ECM receives from sensors causing im-
proper fuel delivery. Route all sensor wires away from high voltage leads (i.e. spark plug leads)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-37

FUEL INJECTION

Engine Head Temperature Sensor Removal

ANALOG TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Remove screw and retaining plate.
2. Disconnect bullet connector and remove sensor.
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Disconnect wire harness for PORT and STARBOARD sensors

f g

e
b
a

d c

58893
a - Bullet Connector e - Digital Temperature
b - Analog Temperature Sensor
Sensor f - Port Sensor Harness
c - Retainer g - Starboard Sensor Har-
d - Retainer Screw ness

Engine Head Temperature Sensor Installation

ANALOG TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Install sensor into pocket.
2. Secure sensor with retainer and screw. Ground (BLACK) lead of sensor is secured with
retainer screw. Torque retainer screw to 16.5 lb. ft. (22.4 Nm).
3. Reconnect sensor bullet connector.
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Install sensors into cylinder heads. Torque sensors to 14 lb. in. (1.6 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness connectors.

Page 3B-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Management Assembly Removal

CAUTION
Fuel system must be bled off prior to removal of fuel system components.
NOTE: Use Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 91-881834A1 to de-pressurize fuel system.
1. De-pressurize fuel system.

91-881834A1

58874
a - Fuel Pressure Port b - Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-881834A1
2. Place suitable container underneath vapor separator drain plug and remove plug.

58891

a - Drain Plug

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-39

FUEL INJECTION

3. Disconnect the following hoses and connectors:

a
c

d
g

58878

a - VST Vent Hose

b - Fuel Pressure Regulator Vent Hose
c - VST Output Fuel Hose
d - VST Oil Input Hose
e - VST Electric Fuel Pump Harness Connector
f - Water Sensor Bullet Connector
g - Fuel/Water Separator Input Fuel Hose

Page 3B-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

4. Remove ground lead between VST and air plenum.

5. Remove 3 bolts securing VST to air plenum and remove VST.

58896
a - VST Ground Lead b - VST Attaching Bolts
6. Disconnect throttle cam link rod and the Throttle Position Sensor link rod.

58871
a - Throttle Cam Link Rod b - Throttle Position Sensor Link Rod

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-41

FUEL INJECTION

7. Disconnect the following hoses and connectors:

a b

f
g 58886
a - Air Temperature Sensor e - Oil Inlet Hose (plug to prevent leakage)
b - MAP Sensor f - Oil Output Hose
c - Fuel Regulator Hose g - Fuel Injector Harness Connector
d - Engine Harness
8. Disconnect oil pump electrical harness.

a
58875
a - Electrical Harness

Page 3B-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

9. Remove 12 bolts securing air management assembly to crankcase and remove as-
sembly.

58793
a - Bolts (12 each)
Fuel Rail Removal
The fuel rail/injector assembly is attached to the reed block assembly plate by 4 screws.

58797
a - Fuel Rail/Injector Assembly b - Reed Block Assembly

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-43

FUEL INJECTION

1. Remove 4 screws to securing fuel rail/injector assembly to reed block assembly.

a a

58798
a - Screws
2. Lift fuel rail assembly from reed block assembly.
3. Inspect o-rings for cuts and abrasions. Replace if necessary.

a b a a d

e
c

58881
a - Fuel Injectors (6) d - Fuel Rail
b - Fuel Rail Fuel Inlet Pipe e - Reed Block Assembly
c - O-Rings

Page 3B-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

4. Individual fuel injectors and fuel inlet pipe can be removed from fuel rail by removing
attaching screws. Use Tamper Proof Torx Screw Set 91-881828 to remove screws.

a a a

58792
a - Fuel Injector Attaching Screws
b - Fuel Inlet Pipe Attaching Screw
Fuel Rail Installation
NOTE: Inspect all o-rings for cuts and abrasions. Applying light oil to all o-rings and o-ring
contact surfaces on reed block assembly plate will ease installation of fuel rail assembly.
1. Secure fuel injectors to fuel rail with tamper proof screws. Torque screws to 27 lb. in.
[3.0 Nm].
2. Secure fuel inlet pipe to fuel rail with tamper proof screw. Torque screw to 65 lb. in. [7.0
Nm].

a a a
58792
a - Fuel Injector Attaching Screws [Torque to 27 lb. in. (3.0 Nm)]
b - Fuel Inlet Pipe Attaching Screw [Torque to 65 lb. in. (7.0 Nm)]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-45

FUEL INJECTION

3. Apply light oil to all o-rings and o-ring contact surfaces on reed block assembly plate
to ease installation of fuel rail assembly.

a b a a d

e
c

f f f
f

58881
a - Fuel Injectors (6) d - Fuel Rail
b - Fuel Rail Fuel Inlet Pipe e - Reed Block Assembly
c - O-Rings f - O-Ring Contact Surface
4. Secure fuel rail assembly to reed block assembly plate with 4 screws. Torque screws
to 65 lb. in. [7.0 Nm].

a a

58798

a - Screws [Torque to 65 lb. in. (7.0 Nm)]

Page 3B-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Reed Block Assembly Removal

1. Remove 12 screws securing air plenum to reed plate assembly.
2. Remove 12 screws securing reed blocks to reed plate assembly.

g a

e
c

a - Screws (2 each per reed block) (M4x16)

b - Air Plenum
c - Screws (12 each) (1/4x20x0.88)
d - Gasket
e - Adaptor Plate
f - Gasket
g - Reed Block (6 each)
Reed Block Assembly Installation
NOTE: The gasket between the air plenum and the adaptor plate has a sealing bead which
faces toward the air plenum during assembly. Gaskets may be reused if they do not show
signs of tears, abrasions or oil saturation. Replace gaskets if necessary.
1. Secure reed block assembly to adaptor plate with 2 screws. Torque screws to 105 lb.
in. (11.8 Nm).
2. Secure air plenum and adaptor plate/reed block assembly to cylinder block crankcase
with 12 screws. Torque screws to 15 lb. ft. (20 Nm).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-47

FUEL INJECTION

Air Temperature Sensor Removal

Disconnect sensor harness and unscrew sensor.

58898
a - Temperature Sensor Harness b - Air Temperature Sensor
Air Temperature Sensor Installation
1. Carefully thread sensor into air plenum. Torque sensor to 14 lb. in. (1.6 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal
1. Disconnect MAP sensor harness connector.
2. Remove sensor retaining screw.

a
c

58898
a - MAP Harness Connector
b - Retaining Screw
c - MAP Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Installation
1. Secure MAP sensor with screw. Torque screw to 80 lb. in. (9.0 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness.

Page 3B-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Throttle Plate Assembly Removal

NOTE: The throttle plate assembly is calibrated and preset for proper running characteris-
tics and emissions at the factory. Other than complete assembly removal from the air ple-
num, no further disassembly should be made.
Remove 4 bolts securing throttle plate assembly to air plenum and remove assembly.

a a

58898

a - Bolts b - Throttle Plate Assembly

Throttle Plate Assembly Installation

Secure throttle plate assembly to air plenum with 4 bolts. Torque bolts to 100 lb. in. (11.5
Nm).
Vapor Separator Disassembly
1. Remove 7 screws securing separator cover and remove cover.
2. Inspect seal in fuel pump chamber of separator tank for cuts and abraisions. Replace
seal if necessary. If seal is serviceable, apply 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant
(92-825407A12) to seal lips.

a a a
b

a
a a
a
58784 58783
a - Screws (7 each)
b - Seal
3. Fuel pump may be removed from cover by wiggling slightly while pulling outward.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT twist pump during removal as wire harness may be damaged.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-49

FUEL INJECTION

4. Disconnect harness from pump to separate pump from cover. Inspect filter screen for
debris. Screen may be pried out of pump and cleaned as required.
5. Inspect seal above fuel pump for cuts or abraisions. Replace seal if necessary. Apply
2-4-C w/Teflon to seal lips.

b
d

c
a
58786
a - Filter Screen c - Pump
b - Harness Connector d - Seal (Seal shoulder
faces OUT)

6. Loosen screw securing float assembly and remove float. Inspect float for deterioration
or fuel retention. Replace float as required.
7. Remove gasket and inspect imbedded neoprene sealing bead on both sides of gasket
for cuts or abraisions. Replace gasket/seal assembly as required.
a
c

b 58787 58783
a - Screw
b - Float
c - Gasket
d - Sealing bead
Vapor Separator Reassembly
NOTE: Inspect VST cover gasket with sealing bead for cuts or abrasions. Replace if nec-
essary. Inspect fuel pump seal in VST cover for cuts or abrasions. Replace if necessary.
1. Install gasket w/sealing bead onto vapor separator cover.
2. Secure float, needle and pivot pin assembly to separator cover with screw. Torque
screw to 10 lb. in. (1.0 Nm)

Page 3B-50 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

3. Apply 2-4-C with Teflon to lips of seal in separator cover.

a
c e

b 58787 58783

a - Screw [Torque to 10 lb. in. (1.0 Nm)]

b - Float
c - Gasket
d - Sealing Bead
e - Seal (Seal shoulder faces OUT)
4. Connect electrical harness to fuel pump. Inspect fuel pump filter screen for debris. Re-
move screen and clean as required.
5. Seat fuel pump and harness into separator cover being careful not to pinch harness.

a
c

d
b
58786
a - Harness
b - Filter
c - Seal
d - Fuel Pump

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-51

FUEL INJECTION

6. Install separator cover with pump onto separator tank.

7. Secure cover to tank with 7 screws. Torque screws to 30 lb. in. (3.5 Nm).

a a a

a
a a
a
58784
a - Screws [Torque to 30 lb. in. (3.5 Nm)]
Air Plenum Installation
Secure plenum to crankcase with 12 bolts. Torque bolts to 125 lb. in. (14 Nm). in sequence
shown
9
a 10

6 5
2 1
b
3 4
7 8

11 12
56144
a - Air Plenum
b - Bolts [Torque to 125 lb. in. (14 Nm)]

Page 3B-52 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Vapor Separator (VST) Installation

1. Install ground lead between VST and air plenum.
2. Install 3 bolts securing VST to air plenum. Torque bolts to 140 lb. in. (16 Nm).

58896
a - VST Ground Lead b - Bolts [Torque to 140 lb. in. (16 Nm)]
3. Reconnect the following hoses and connectors:

c a

d
g

f
58878
a - VST Vent Hose e - VST Electric Fuel Pump Harness
b - Fuel Pressure Regulator Connector
Vent Hose f - Water Sensor Bullet Connector
c - VST Output Fuel Hose g - Fuel/Water Separator Input Fuel
d - VST Oil Input Hose Hose

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-53

FUEL INJECTION

Water Separating Filter Assembly Removal

NOTE: To inspect or replace water separator, it is not necessary to remove inlet fuel line.
1. Remove water sensor lead from bottom of separator.
2. With wipe towels available, use Strap Wrench (91-24937A1) to remove water separa-
tor.

a
91-24937A1

b 58800
a - Water Separator
b - Water Sensor Lead

Water Separating Filter Assembly Installation

IMPORTANT: Apply a light coat of outboard oil to the rectangular sealing ring on the
water separator before installation.
1. After applying oil to sealing ring of water separator, install separator onto bracket.
2. HAND TIGHTEN SEPARATOR. DO NOT use strap wrench or other tool to tighten sep-
arator.
3. Reconnect water sensor lead to bottom of separator.

Page 3B-54 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Throttle Position Sensor Removal

NOTE: Vapor Separator has been removed for visual clarity.
1. Remove throttle position sensor (TPS) harness connector.
2. Remove sensor link rod.
3. Remove 3 screws securing sensor.

58871
a - Sensor Harness Connector c - Retaining Screws
b - Sensor Link Rod d - Throttle Position Sensor
Throttle Position Sensor Installation
1. Secure sensor with 3 screws. Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (8.0 Nm).
2. Reconnect sensor harness.
3. Reconnect sensor link rod.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-55

FUEL INJECTION

Oil Reservoir Removal

1. Disconnect low oil sensor bullet connectors (BLUE leads).
2. Remove sta-strap securing reservoir hose to oil pump and remove hose. Plug hose
to prevent leakage.
3. Remove oil input hose to oil reservoir from check valve.
4. Remove 3 screws and remove reservoir.

b
a 58896

a - Bullet Connectors
b - Reservoir Hose
c - Oil Input Hose
d - Screws
e - Oil Reservoir
Oil Reservoir Installation
1. Secure oil reservoir to engine with 3 screws. Torque screws to 14 lb. ft. (19 Nm).
2. Secure oil reservoir hose to oil pump with sta-strap.
3. Secure oil input hose to check valve with sta-strap.
4. Reconnect low sensor bullet connectors.

Page 3B-56 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal

1. Disconnect boat battery from engine harness.

CAUTION
Fuel system must be bled off prior to removal of fuel system components.
NOTE: Use Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 91-881834A1 to de-pressurize fuel system.
1. De-pressurize fuel system.

91-881834A1

58874
a - Fuel Pressure Port
2. Remove fuel regulator vent hose from pressure regulator.
3. Remove 2 screws securing regulator to separator and remove regulator.

a
b

58878
a - Fuel Pressure Regulator
b - Regulator Vent Hose
c - Screws

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-57

FUEL INJECTION

Fuel Pressure Regulator Disassembly

1. Inspect O-rings for cuts and abraisions. Replace as required.
2. Inspect fuel filter for debris. Clean with solvent as required.

58789
a - O-Rings
b - Filter

Fuel Pressure Regulator Reassembly

1. Reinstall fuel regulator into vapor separator.
2. Secure regulator with 2 screws. Drive screws tight.
3. Reconnect regulator vent hose.

Page 3B-58 90-883728 JULY 2001

 FUEL INJECTION

EFI System Cleaning and Inspection

Cleaning
1. Clean all non-electrical metal parts using a good grade solvent.
2. Use a soft bristle brush for removing large accumulations of dirt or grease and oil.
3. Varnish type coating of induction manifold parts may be removed using carburetor
cleaner.
4. Wiring harnesses can be wiped down with a slightly solvent dampened rag.
5. Clean all fuel passages in induction manifold.
6. Dry all components using clean lint free cloths that are free of abrasives such as metal
shavings or dirt.
7. Compressed air may be used to dry parts if the air used is free of moisture and unlubri-
cated.
Inspection
1. Look at entire system for signs of an obvious problem such as poor condition of wire
insulation, leaking fitting, cracked or loose hoses and lines.
2. Look for fuel or oil leaks wherever these fluids are used (i.e. fuel filter cap, fuel pump,
vapor separator cap, etc.).
3. Check for signs of tampering or abuse such as modifications to wiring or hose routing.
4. Look at main connector between engine harness and ECM box for missing, corroded
or bent contact pins and socket. Check for dislodged grommet in ECM where harness
enters box.
5. Look at all sensors (throttle position, air temperature and water temperature) connec-
tors and harnesses for bad connections or poor insulation conditions such as fraying,
stripping, cracks or signs of abrasion wear.
6. Look for loose, missing or damaged mounting hardware such as stripped threads on
screws.
7. Look at sensors for signs of wear or damage such as cracks, chips, etc.
8. Look at filter housing for cracks, holes or other damage. Check for secure mounting.
9. Look at vapor separator for leaks, cracks, pitting or other damage.
10. Check all rubber mounting grommets for swelling tears, cracks or other conditions that
would render parts unserviceable.
11. Check vapor separator float for signs of fuel entry in the float. Look at needle for wear
of point.
12. Look at injectors for signs of plugging or looseness in fit with induction manifold.
13. Look at throttle linkage for bends, kinking or binding. Check spring for kinks.
14. Inspect all rubber seals and gaskets for swelling, cracks or slices that would cause im-
proper sealing.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3B-59

 OIL INJECTION

FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3C - Oil Injection
Table of Contents
Operation of the Oil Injection System . . . . . . 3C-2 Priming the Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-14
Final Checks Before Operation of Engine 3C-2 Priming Procedure – Method 1 . . . . . . . . . 3C-15
Checking Operation of the Oil Injection
System (Engine Running) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-2
Remote Oil Hose Connections . . . . . . . . .
Filling the Oil Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3C-16
3C-17 3
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Injection Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3C-3
3C-4
Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir
and Remote Oil Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-17
C
Oil Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-6 Oil Warning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-18
Oil Injection Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-10 Oil System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-19
Oil Injection Flow System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-11 Low Oil Warning System is Activated . . . 3C-19
Oil Pump Removal and Installation . . . . . 3C-12
Engine Oil Reservoir Removal and
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-13

Specifications
OIL Recommended Oil Quicksilver TC-W3
INJECTION Oil Tank Capacity 3 gal. (11.4 Liter)
Approx. Time
– Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 6.6 hrs. Approx.
Reserve Capacity/Approx. Time 0.74 qt. (0.70 Liter) 20–25 min.

Oil Pump Output

– Model 150XRI/175XRI/200XRI 26cc during auto prime time period

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-1

OIL INJECTION

CAUTION
Be careful not to get dirt or other contamination in tanks, hoses or other compo-
nents of the oil injection system during installation.

Operation of the Oil Injection System

The oil injection system delivers oil mixture on engine demand, from 120:1 at idle to 50:1
at wide open throttle.
Oil is stored inside a remote oil tank in the boat. This tank holds enough oil for approxi-
mately 150 gallons of fuel at wide open throttle.
Crankcase pressure forces oil from the remote oil tank into the engine oil reservoir. The
engine oil reservoir feeds oil to the oil pump. The engine oil reservoir contains enough oil
for 20–25 minutes of full throttle running after the remote oil tank is empty. The warning
horn will sound if the oil level in the engine oil reservoir is low.
The oil pump is ECM driven and pumps oil to the vapor separator tank where it mixes with
fuel supplied by the engine mounted pulse pump.
The ECM is programmed to automatically increased the oil supply to the engine during
the initial engine break-in period. The oil ratio during the first 120 minutes is 100:1 @ idle
and 40:1 @ wide open throttle. After the first 120 minutes, the oil ratio changes to 120:1
@ idle and 50:1 @ wide open throttle.
Final Checks Before Operation of Engine
• Make sure fill cap gaskets are in place and caps are tight on engine oil reservoir and
remote oil tank.
• Be certain the warning horn is installed and is operational. Refer to Instrument and
Warning Horn Installation.
• Each time the key switch is turned from the “OFF” to “ON” position (engine not run-
ning); the warning horn will sound momentarily. This tells you the warning system for
the oil injection system is functional and the warning horn is operational. If warning
horn does not sound or horn stays on when key is turned to the “ON” position, refer to
oil injection system troubleshooting chart following to correct the problem.

Checking Operation of the Oil Injection System (Engine Running)

1. Operate engine following the break-in procedure outlined in the Operation and Main-
tenance Manual. If warning horn should sound an intermittent “beep,” “beep,” “beep”
during operation, this indicates low oil level in the engine mounted oil reservoir. Refer
to troubleshooting following, to correct the problem.
2. After engine has been run for a short time, check that no oil is leaking out of engine
oil reservoir fill cap.

Page 3C-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-3

OIL INJECTION

Oil Injection Components

Page 3C-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Oil Injection Components

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 OIL RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY
2 1 OIL RESERVOIR
3 1 DECAL-RESERVOIR
4 3 GROMMET
5 3 WASHER
6 3 SCREW [5/16-18 x 1-1/4 IN) 15 20
7 3 BUSHING
8 1 SWITCH
9 1 SCREW [0.164-18 x 1-1/4 IN) Drive Tight
10 1 WASHER

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-5

OIL INJECTION

Oil Lines

Page 3C-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Oil Lines
TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 FITTING
2 1 TEE FITTING
3 3 TUBING [6 IN (15.2 CM)]
4 2 CAP
5 1 HOSE ASSEMBLY
6 2 FITTING
7 1 FUEL FILTER
8 1 HOSE
9 AR STA-STRAP [8 IN (20.3 CM)]
10 AR STA-STRAP [5-1/2 IN (14 CM)]
11 1 TUBING [24 IN (60.9 CM)]

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-7

OIL INJECTION

Oil Lines

TO A

TO B

58791 58795 58790

Page 3C-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Oil Lines
TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 FITTING
2 1 TUBING [22 IN (55.8 CM)]
3 2 TEE FITTING
4 2 TUBING [1-1/2 IN (3.8 CM)]
5 1 TUBING [4-3/4 IN (12 CM)]
6 1 TUBING [3-1/2 IN (8.9 CM)]
7 3 CHECK VALVE
8 1 CHECK VALVE

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-9

OIL INJECTION

Oil Injection Components

REMOTE OIL TANK a
Holds 3 gallons (11.5 liters) of oil.
NOTE: Some boats may be equipped with optional 1.8 gallon (7.0 liters) oil tank.
The tank is pressurized by air from crankcase pressure thus forcing oil up the outlet hose
to the oil reservoir on engine.
OIL PICK UP TUBE b
A filter screen is located in end of tube to prevent dirt or other particles from entering the
system.
FILTER c
Directional filter designed to prevent impurities from entering oil reservoir.
4 PSI CHECK VALVE d
If oil flow to reservoir is obstructed and injection pump continues to pump oil, the 4 PSI
valve will open to allow air to enter reservoir to prevent a vacuum.
OIL RESERVOIR e
The oil reservoir feeds the oil pump and contains enough oil for 20–25 minutes of full
throttle running after the remote tank is empty. The warning horn will sound if the oil level
in oil reservoir is low.

LOW OIL (FLOAT) SENSOR f

If oil level drops in oil reservoir, the sensor will signal the Electronic Control Module (ECM)
to sound the warning horn.
VAPOR SEPARATOR TANK (VST) g
Contains electric fuel pump which pumps fuel @ 43 psi ± 2 psi (296.5 kPa ±13.8 kPa) to
the fuel rail. Oil supplied by the electric oil pump is mixed with fuel supplied by the engine
pulse pump in the VST.

OIL INLET HOSE h

Hose that carries oil from oil reservoir to electric oil pump.

OIL INJECTION PUMP i

Injection pump is electrically operated and controlled by the ECM. Pump varies oil ratio
from 120:1 at idle to 50:1 at wide open throttle.

OIL OUTLET HOSE j

Hose that carries oil from electric fuel pump to mix with fuel in vapor separator.

Page 3C-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Oil Injection Flow System

e
d
i h

j c

b a

58888
a - Remote Oil Tank g - Vapor Separator Tank
b - Oil Pick-up Tube h - Oil Inlet to Oil Pump
c - Filter i - Oil Injection Pump
d - 4 PSI Check Valve j - Oil Outlet Hose to Vapor Separator
e - Oil Reservoir Tank
f - Low Oil (Float) Sensor (Inside Reser-
voir)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-11

OIL INJECTION

Oil Pump Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the pump.
2. Disconnect the oil hoses.
NOTE: Plug oil supply hose from oil reservoir to prevent spillage.
3. Remove three bolts and remove pump.

a
g

f
c
d
e
58781

a - Oil Pump
b - Bushing (3)
c - Rubber Grommet (3) – Insert into Hole
d - Washer (3)
e - Bolt (3) – Torque to 140 lb. in. (16 Nm)
f - Wiring Harness
g - Sta-Straps

INSTALLATION
1. Install pump as shown.
2. Reconnect the oil hoses. Refer to Oil Injection Hose Installation for correct location.
Fasten hoses to pump fittings with sta-straps.
3. Connect the wiring harness.
4. Refill the oil system. Refer to Priming the Oil Pump.

Page 3C-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Engine Oil Reservoir Removal and Installation

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the oil hoses. Plug the hoses to prevent spillage.
2. Disconnect the BLUE with BLACK STRIPE wire leads.
3. Remove three bolts securing oil tank to powerhead and remove tank.

h
g
b
c
f
e

a
d

58780
c

a - Oil Reservoir
b - Bushing (3)
c - Rubber Grommet (3) – Insert into Holes
d - Decal
e - Bolt (3) – Torque to 170 lb. in. (19 Nm)
f - Washer (3)
g - Washer
h - Screw (Drive Tight)
i - Low Oil Switch (Normally Closed Circuit)
INSTALLATION
1. Install oil reservoir as shown.
2. Fasten the oil hoses with sta-straps.
3. Connect the BLUE with BLACK STRIPE wire leads.
4. Refill the oil system. Refer to Priming the Oil Pump.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-13

OIL INJECTION

Priming the Oil Pump

NOTE: If a new powerhead is being installed or oil hoses/oil pump has been removed,
it is recommended all air be purged from oil pump/oil lines using gearcase leakage tester
(FT-8950)(a). Connect the leakage tester to the inlet t-fitting on the onboard oil reservoir.
While clamping off the inlet hose, manually pressurize the reservoir to 10 psi. Using the
Digital Diagnostic Terminal 91-823686A2, activate the oil pump prime sequence. Main-
tain the 10 psi pressure throughout the auto prime sequence. When the auto prime is
completed, remove the leakage tester and refill the onboard oil reservoir.

58889
Priming the oil pump (filling pump and hoses using pressure) is required on new or rebuilt
power heads and any time maintenance is performed on the oiling system that allows air
into the oil system.
There are three methods for priming the oil pump:
METHOD 1 – SHIFT SWITCH ACTIVATION PRIME
This method does three things:
a. Fills the oil pump, oil supply hose feeding pump and oil hoses going to the crank-
case and air compressor.
b. Activates break-in oil ratio.
c. Initiates a new 120 minute engine break-in cycle.
Refer to priming procedure following.
METHOD 2 – (DDT) DIGITAL DIAGNOSTIC TERMINAL – RESET BREAK-IN
This method is the same as Method 1, except the run history and fault history are erased
from the ECM.
Refer to procedure in the Technician Reference Manual provided with the Digital Diagnos-
tic Software Cartridge Part 91-880118A2.
METHOD 3 – (DDT) DIGITAL DIAGNOSTIC TERMINAL – OIL PUMP PRIME
This method fills the oil pump, oil supply hose feeding pump, and oil hoses going to the
crankcase and air compressor.

Page 3C-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Refer to procedure in the Technician Reference Manual provided with the Digital Diagnos-
tic Software Cartridge Part. No. 91-880118--1.

Conditions Requiring Priming the Oil Pump

Condition Priming Procedure
New engine Use Method 1 or 2
Rebuilt Powerhead Use Method 1 or 2
New Powerhead Use Method 1 or 2
Oil system ran out of oil Use Method 3
Oil drained from oil supply hose feeding pump Use Method 3
Oil pump removed Use Method 3
Oil injection hoses drained Use Method 3

Priming Procedure – Method 1

METHOD 1 – SHIFT SWITCH ACTIVATION PRIME PROCEDURE
Before starting engine for the first time, prime the oil pump. Priming will remove any
air that may be in the pump, oil supply hose, or internal passages.

a
b

58781
a - Oil Injection Pump
b - Oil Supply Hose

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the fuel pump, fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Other-
wise the fuel pump will run without fuel during the priming process.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-15

OIL INJECTION

Prime the oil injection pump as follows:

1. Fill the engine fuel system with fuel. Connect fuel hose and squeeze primer bulb until
it fells firm.
2. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ON” position.
3. Within the first 10 seconds after the key switch has been turned on, move the remote
control handle from neutral into forward gear 3 to 5 times. This will automatically start
the priming process.
N
F

NOTE: It may take a few minutes for the pump to complete the priming process.
Remote Oil Hose Connections
NOTE: Oil hose with BLUE stripe contains a directional filter which is designed to trap any
debris in the oil before the oil reaches the engine oil reservoir. The filter is marked with
an arrow denoting direction of flow of oil and should be installed accordingly. Should en-
gine oil reservoir oil level drop while remote oil tank oil level is normal, oil flow through
inline filter has been reduced by debris and filter must be replaced.
CONNECTING OIL HOSE WITH BLUE STRIPE
1. Remove shipping cap from fitting and connect oil hose (b). Fasten hose with sta-strap.

58800
a - Directional Oil Filter b - Oil Hose with Blue
Stripe

Page 3C-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

CONNECTING OIL HOSE WITHOUT BLUE STRIPE

1. Remove shipping cap from fitting and connect hose (a). Fasten hose with sta-strap.

a - Oil Hose Without Blue Stripe

Filling the Oil Tanks

1. Fill remote oil tank with the recommended oil listed in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Tighten fill cap.
2. Remove cap and fill engine oil tank with oil. Reinstall the fill cap.
3. Remove air from remote oil hose. Refer to Purging Air from the Engine Oil Reservoir
and Remote Oil Hose.
c
a
a
bb

a - Fill Cap c - Fill Cap

b - Engine Oil Reservoir
Purging Air From the Engine Oil Reservoir and Remote Oil Hose
NOTE: Before starting engine, make sure the oil pump has been primed.
1. Start the engine. Run the engine until all the air has been vented out of the reservoir
and oil starts to flow out of the reservoir. Re-tighten fill cap.
a

a - Fill Cap

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-17

OIL INJECTION

Oil Warning Systems

Warning Horn
Function Sound Description
Start Up One Beep Normal System Test
Oil level is low in the engine mounted oil reservoir
Low Oil Reserve Four Beeps every 2 tank. Refill the engine mounted oil reservoir tank
Minutes along with the remote oil tank. Refer to Fuel & Oil
Section.
Engine Guardian System is activated. Power
Oil Level is Critically Low Continuous limit will allow a fast idle. The oil level is critically
low in the engine mounted oil reservoir tank. Re-
fill the engine mounted oil reservoir tank along
with the remote oil tank. Refer to Fuel and Oil
Section.
Engine Guardian System is activated. Power
Oil Pump Failure Continuous limit will allow a fast idle. The warning horn is
activated if the oil pump should ever stop func-
tioning electrically. No lubricating oil is being
supplied to the engine.
NOTE: As an option, Mercury Monitor or SmartCraft Gauges may be used to provide low
oil information or oil pump operation information.

Page 3C-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 OIL INJECTION

Oil System Troubleshooting

Low Oil Warning System is Activated
Problem Problem Problem Problem
Low oil level in en- Oil level is not low Oil leaks out of
Low oil level in engine
gine oil reservoir and in either tank exhaust
oil reservoir but not low
also remote oil tank or #6 cylinder
in remote oil tank
Note: Oil level in engine Disconnect BLUE/
oil reservoir should be BLACK wires going
Refill both oil tanks. Pulse hose and
up to the fill cap to the low oil float
Purge air from en- oil supply hose
switch in the engine
gine oil tank. Refer are reversed
oil reservoir. Check
to procedure
switch for continuity
Boat oil tank is
Air was never purged from Purge air from engine oil tank. mounted higher
engine oil tank Refer to procedure than pulse hose
fitting on engine
and oil tank is
Fill cap is leaking air on re- Caps on remote tank must be over-filled
mote tank sealed and installed tight

Remote oil hoses blocked or Check hoses for a kink or

punctured leakage

Restricted oil outlet filter in re-

Remove filter and clean
mote oil tank

Restricted oil inlet filter in oil

hose before engine oil reser- Replace oil filter
voir

Air leak in upper portion on

Replace tube
the oil pickup tube

Faulty pressure check valve.

Replace check valve
Located in engine at end of
(black without blue stripe) re-
mote oil hose

No Continuity Continuity
Check for open wire between
Remove engine oil reservoir oil float switch and ECM
cap and use wire to pull float
to top of travel

No Continuity Continuity
Oil Float switch is faulty. Re- Float in oil tank is faulty. Re-
place switch place oil tank

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3C-19

 EMISSIONS

FUEL SYSTEM
Section 3D – Emissions
Table of Contents
Exhaust Emissions Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Emissions Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4
What Are Emissions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Manufacturer’s Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4
Hydrocarbons – HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1 Dealer Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5
Carbon Monoxide – CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1
Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Owner Responsibility: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5
EPA Emission Regulations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5 3
Controlling Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Manufacturer’s Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Service Replacement Certification Label . . . . . . . . 3D-7
D
Outboard Hydrocarbon Emissions Reductions . . . 3D-2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Stratified vs Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Date Code Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Homogenized Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Stratified Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4 Decal Location: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7

Exhaust Emissions Standards

Through the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the federal government has estab-
lished exhaust emissions standards for all new marine engines sold in the United States.
What Are Emissions?
Emissions are what comes out of the exhaust system in the exhaust gas when the engine
is running. They are formed as a result of the process of combustion or incomplete com-
bustion. To understand exhaust gas emissions, remember that both air and fuel are made
of several elements. Air contains oxygen and nitrogen among other elements; gasoline
contains mainly hydrogen and carbon. These four elements combine chemically during
combustion. If combustion were complete, the mixture of air and gasoline would result in
these emissions: water, carbon dioxide and nitrogen, which are not harmful to the environ-
ment. However, combustion is not usually complete. Also, potentially harmful gases can
be formed during and after combustion.
All marine engines must reduce the emission of certain pollutants, or potentially harmful
gases, in the exhaust to conform with levels legislated by the EPA. Emissions standards
become more stringent each year. Standards are set primarily with regard to three emis-
sions: hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx).
Hydrocarbons – HC
Gasoline is a hydrocarbon fuel. The two elements of hydrogen and carbon are burned
during combustion in combination with oxygen. But they are not totally consumed. Some
pass through the combustion chamber and exit the exhaust system as unburned gases
known as hydrocarbons.
Carbon Monoxide – CO
Carbon is one of the elements that make up the fuel burned in the engine along with oxy-
gen during the combustion process. If the carbon in the gasoline could combine with
enough oxygen (one carbon atom with two oxygen atoms), it would come out of the en-
gine in the form of carbon dioxide (CO2). CO2 is a harmless gas. However, carbon often
combines with insufficient oxygen (one carbon atom with one oxygen atom). This forms
carbon monoxide, CO. Carbon monoxide is the product of incomplete combustion and
is a dangerous, potentially lethal gas.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3D-1

EMISSIONS

Oxides of Nitrogen - NOx

NOx is a slightly different byproduct of combustion. Nitrogen is one of the elements that
makes up the air going into the engine. Under extremely high temperatures it combines
with oxygen to form oxides of nitrogen (NOx). This happens in the engine’s combustion
chambers when temperatures are too high. NOx itself is not harmful, but when exposed
to sunlight it combines with unburned hydrocarbons to create the visible air pollutant
known as smog. Smog is a serious problem in California as well as many other heavily
populated areas of the United States.
Controlling Emissions
There are two principle methods of reducing emissions from a two-stroke-cycle marine
engine. The first method is to control the air/fuel ratio that goes into the combustion cham-
ber. The second is to control the time when this air/fuel mixture enters the combustion
chamber. Timing is important, to prevent any unburned mixture from escaping out of the
exhaust port.
Stoichiometric (14.7:1) Air/Fuel Ratio
In the search to control pollutants and reduce exhaust emissions, engineers have discov-
ered that they can be reduced effectively if a gasoline engine operates at an air/fuel ratio
of 14.7:1. The technical term for this ideal ratio is stoichiometric. An air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1
provides the best control of all three elements in the exhaust under almost all conditions.
The HC and CO content of the exhaust gas is influenced significantly by the air/fuel ratio.
At an air/fuel ratio leaner than 14.7:1, HC and CO levels are low, but with a ratio richer
than 14.7:1 they rise rapidly. It would seem that controlling HC and CO by themselves
might not be such a difficult task; the air/fuel ratio only needs to be kept leaner than 14.7:1.
However, there is also NOx to consider.
As the air/fuel ratio becomes leaner, combustion temperatures increase. Higher combus-
tion temperatures raise the NOx content of the exhaust. However, enrichening the air/fuel
ratio to decrease combustion temperatures or reduce NOx also increases HC and CO,
as well as lowering fuel economy. So the solution to controlling NOx - as well as HC and
CO - is to keep the air/fuel ratio as close to 14.7:1 as possible.

Outboard Hydrocarbon Emissions Reductions

8 1/3%
per Year Over 9 Model Years
120

100

80

60

40

20

0
96 97 98 99 2000 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

Page 3D-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 EMISSIONS

Stratified vs Homogenized Charge

At certain operating conditions, DFI engines use a stratified charge inside the combustion
chamber to aid in reducing emissions. All other models exclusively use a homogenized
charge. The difference between the two is:
Homogenized Charge
A homogenized charge has the fuel/air particles mixed evenly throughout the cylinder.
This mixing occurs inside the carburetor venturi, reed blocks, crankcase and/or combus-
tion chamber. Additional mixing occurs as the fuel is forced through the transfer system
into the cylinder.
The homogenized charge has an air/fuel ratio of approximately 14.7:1 and is uniform
throughout the cylinder.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3D-3

EMISSIONS

Stratified Charge
A stratified charge engine only pulls air through the transfer system. The fuel required for
combustion is forced into the cylinder through an injector placed in the top of the cylinder
(head). The injector sprays a fuel/air mixture in the form of a fuel cloud into the cylinder.
Surrounding this cloud is air supplied by the transfer system. As the cloud is ignited and
burns, the surrounding air provides almost complete combustion before the exhaust port
opens.
A stratified charge engine concentrates a rich mixture in the vicinity of the spark plug (air/
fuel ratio is less than 14.7:1). Elsewhere, the mixture is very lean or is comprised of air
only.

Emissions Information
Manufacturer’s Responsibility:
Beginning with 1998 model year engines, manufacturers of all marine propulsion engines
must determine the exhaust emission levels for each engine horsepower family and certi-
fy these engines with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). A certifi-
cation decal/emissions control information label, showing emission levels and engine
specifications directly related to emissions, must be placed on each engine at the time
of manufacture.

Page 3D-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 EMISSIONS

Dealer Responsibility:
When performing service on all 1998 and later outboards that carry a certification, atten-
tion must be given to any adjustments that are made that affect emission levels.
Adjustments must be kept within published factory specifications.
Replacement or repair of any emission related component must be executed in a manner
that maintains emission levels within the prescribed certification standards.
Dealers are not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horsepower or
allow emission levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Exceptions include manufacturers prescribed changes, such as that for altitude adjust-
ments. Also included would be factory authorized:
• Installation of performance style gear housings by Mercury Marine.
• Service replacement parts modified, changed or superceded by Mercury Marine.

Owner Responsibility:
The owner/operator is required to have engine maintenance performed to maintain emis-
sion levels within prescribed certification standards.
The owner/operator is not to modify the engine in any manner that would alter the horse-
power or allow emissions levels to exceed their predetermined factory specifications.
Single engine exceptions may be allowed with permission from the EPA for racing and
testing.
EPA Emission Regulations:
All new 1998 and later outboards manufactured by Mercury Marine are certified to the
United States Environmental Protection Agency as conforming to the requirements of the
regulations for the control of air pollution from new outboard motors. This certification is
contingent on certain adjustments being set to factory standards. For this reason, the fac-
tory procedure for servicing the product must be strictly followed and, whenever practica-
ble, returned to the original intent of the design.
The responsibilities listed above are general and in no way a complete listing of the rules
and regulations pertaining to the EPA laws on exhaust emissions for marine products. For
more detailed information on this subject, you may contact the following locations:
VIA U.S. POSTAL SERVICE:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
401 M St. NW
Washington, DC 20460
VIA EXPRESS or COURIER MAIL:
Office of Mobile Sources
Engine Programs and Compliance Division
Engine Compliance Programs Group (6403J)
501 3rd St. NW
Washington, DC 20001
EPA INTERNET WEB SITE:
http:/www.epa.gov/omswww

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3D-5

EMISSIONS

Manufacturer’s Certification Label:

The certification label must be placed on each engine at the time of manufacture and must
be replaced in the same location if damaged or removed. Shown below is a typical certifi-
cation label and is not representative of any one model. Label shown below is not to scale;
(shown at twice the normal size).

Emission Control a
Information
This engine conforms to 2002 Model Year U.S. EPA regulations for Marine SI engines.
Refer to Owners Manual for required maintenance
j Idle Speed (in gear): 650 RPM Family: 2M9XM02.51C0 b
i 175 HP 2507 cc FEL: 139.00 GM/KW-HR c
Timing (in degrees): Idle – 0 – 9° ATDC
WOT – 20° BTDC d
h
Standard Spark Plug: NGK BPZ8HS-10 JUN
g Gap: 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) e
2001

Intake: N/A
f Valve Clearance (Cold) mm
Exhaust: N/A

a - Spark Ignition (SI)

b - Family example
c - FEL: Represents (Mercury Marine) statement of the maximum emissions out-
put for the engine family
d - Timing specifications when adjustable
e - Month and Year of Production
f - Valve Clearance (Four Stroke engines only)
g - Recommended spark plug for best engine performance
h - Cubic Centimeter
i - Engine Horsepower rating
j - Idle Speed (In Gear)

2 M9X M 02.5 1 C 0

Type of Product
Regulation Technology 0=General Outboard
Model Year Type J=Sport Jet
2=2002 M=Marine
1=Old H=High Performance
2=New Cycle Type
Manufacturer 3=Sport Jet
Mercury Marine C=2 Stroke
Displacement G=4 Stroke
Liter
Cubic Inch

Page 3D-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 EMISSIONS

Service Replacement Certification Label

IMPORTANT: By federal law, it is required that all 1998 and newer Mercury Marine
outboards have a visible and legible emission certification label. If this label is mis-
sing or damaged, contact Mercury Marine Service for replacement if appropriate.
Removal
Remove all remaining pieces of the damaged or illegible label. Do not install new label
over the old label. Use a suitable solvent to remove any traces of the old label adhesive
from the display location.
Date Code Identification
Cut and remove a “V” notch through the month of engine manufacture before installing
the new label. The month of manufacture can be found on the old label. If the label is mis-
sing or the date code illegible, contact Mercury Marine Technical Service for assistance.

Emission Control 2507 2002

Information cc PART # 37–804669-02

This engine conforms to 2002 Model Year Idle Speed (in gear): 650 RPM
U.S. EPA regulations for marine SI engines.
Refer to Owners Manual Timing: Idle – 0 – 9° ATDC
for required maintenance WOT – 20° BTDC
Family: 2M9XM02.51C0 Spark Plug: NGK BPZ8HS-10
Gap: 0.040 in. (1.0 mm)

Valve Clearance (Cold) mm

FEL: 139.00 GM/KW-HR Intake: N/A Exhaust: N/A

175 HP
b JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

a
a - “V” Notch
b - Month of Manufacture
Installation
Install the label on a clean surface in the original factory location.
Decal Location:
Model Service Part No. Location on Engine
2002 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 (150 37-804669-02 Air Cover (Carb)
H.P.) Vapor Separator
(EFI)
2002 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 (175 37-804669-02 Vapor Separator
H.P.) (EFI)
2002 Merc/Mar 2.5 L V6 (200 37-804669-02 Air Cover (Carb)
H.P.) Vapor Separator
(EFI)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 3D-7

 POWERHEAD

POWERHEAD
Section 4A - Powerhead
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2 Special Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-42
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2 Cylinder Bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-43
Reed Valve Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2 Pistons and Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-44
Cylinder Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2 Cylinder Heads and Exhaust Divider Plate 4A-45
Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-2 Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-46
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-3 Crankshaft (and End Cap) Bearings . . . . 4A-46
Powerhead Repair Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-4 Reed Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-47
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4A-5
4A-6
Reed Block Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4A-48
4A-48
4
Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate . . . . . . . 4A-8 Powerhead Reassembly and Installation . . . 4A-51 A
Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods . . 4A-10 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-51
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-12 Crankshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-55
Bleed System Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-14 Piston and Connecting Rod Reassembly 4A-57
Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-16 Piston and Piston Ring Combinations . . . 4A-58
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-17 Piston Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-59
Powerhead Removal from Driveshaft Crankcase Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-62
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-18 Reed Block Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-64
Removing Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-24 Assembly of Reed Blocks to Intake
Removing Engine Components Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-64
Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-24 Assembly of Exhaust Divider Plate to
Removing Engine Components as an Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-64
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-25 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-66
Ignition Coil Plate and Harness Removal 4A-27 Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover . . . 4A-66
Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-28 Reinstalling Engine Components . . . . . . . 4A-68
Electrical Plate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-29 Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-69
Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-30 Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-70
Air Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-31 Powerhead Installation On Driveshaft
Powerhead Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-32 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-74
Water Pressure Relief Valve Components 4A-41 Engine Break-in Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-81
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-41 Gasoline/Oil Break-In Mixture . . . . . . . . . . 4A-81
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-42 Break-In Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A-81
Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover . . . 4A-42

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-1

POWERHEAD

Specifications
Block
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60° V, 2 Cycle
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 cu. in. (2.5 Litre)
Reed Valve Opening
Reed Stand Open (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020 in. (0.50 mm)
Cylinder Bore
Dia. Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.501 in. (88.925 mm)
Dia. 0.015 in. Oversize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.516 in. (89.306 mm)
Taper/Out of Round Max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.003 in. (0.0762 mm)
Piston
Dia. Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.494 in. ± .001 in. (88.748 mm ± .025 mm)
Dia. 0.015 in. Oversize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.509 in. ± .001 in. (89.129 mm ± .025 mm)

IMPORTANT: Using a micrometer, measure dimension “B” at location shown. Dimen-

sion “B” should be 0.008 in. or less than dimension “A”.

Dimension “A”
at Right Angle
(90°) to Piston
Pin

1/2 in.
(12.7mm)

Dimension “B” ( in
line with Piston Pin)

Page 4A-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Special Tools
1. Lifting Eye 91-90455

2. Flywheel Holder 91-52344

91–52344

54964
3. Protector Cap 91-24161

4. Flywheel Puller 91-849154T1

55117

5. Powerhead Stand 812549T

6. Piston Ring Expander 91-24697

7. Lockring Removal Tool 91-52952A1

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-3

POWERHEAD

8. Piston Pin Tool 91-74607A1

9. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241

10. Snap Ring Pliers 91-24283

11. Lockring Installation Tool 91-91-79109A3

12. Piston Ring Compressor 91-818773 (for 2.5 Liter)

13. Compression Tester 91-29287

54965
Powerhead Repair Stand
A powerhead repair stand may be purchased from:
Bob Kerr’s Marine Tool Co.
P.O. Box 1135
Winter Garden, FL 32787
Telephone: (305) 656-2089

Page 4A-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-5

POWERHEAD

Cylinder Block Assembly

9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant
12 Loctite Master Gasket
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil
33 Loctite 680
95 2-4-C with Teflon

12 95

95

33

33

9
14
95

95

Page 4A-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Cylinder Block Assembly

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 CYLINDER BLOCK (150)
1
1 CYLINDER BLOCK (175/200)
2 6 STUD–POWERHEAD (1-3/4 IN.)
2 STUD–POWERHEAD (5-1/2 IN.)
3
2 STUD–POWERHEAD (6-3/4 IN.)
4 2 DOWEL PIN–LOCATING
5 2 DOWEL PIN (BEARING RACE)
6 1 COVER–STARTER MOTOR (UPPER)
7 2 SCREW (1-1/2 IN.) (HEX FLANGE) 17.5 23.5
8 1 COVER (LOWER)
9 2 SCREW (2 IN.)(HEX HEAD FLANGE) 17.5 23.5
10 1 ELBOW
11 8 SCREW (3/8-16 x 3-1/4 IN.) 38 51.5
12 6 SCREW (0.312-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 15 20.3
13 1 CAP
14 1 ADJUSTING SCREW (1/4-20 1-3/4)
15 1 JAM NUT
16 1 PIN
17 1 UPPER END CAP ASSEMBLY
18 1 O-RING
19 1 ROLLER BEARING
20 1 BEARING RACE
21 1 OIL SEAL
22 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1 IN.) 150 17.0
23 1 LOWER END CAP
24 1 O-RING (3-1/4 IN. I.D.)
25 2 OIL SEAL
26 4 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3/4) 80 9
27 4 LOCKWASHER
28 1 SCREW (M8 x 14)
29 1 BATTERY CABLE (NEGATIVE)
30 1 BRACKET
31 1 TPS LEVER
32 3 SCREW (M6 x 25) 70 8
33 3 BUSHING
34 3 WASHER
35 3 GROMMET
36 1 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
37 1 TPS COVER
38 3 SCREW (10-32 x 2) 15 1.7
39 1 THROTTLE LINK
40 1 J-CLAMP
41 1 SCREW (M6 x 16)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-7

POWERHEAD

Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate

95

7 Loctite 271
51 Loctite 222
62
62 3M Permabond #3MO8155 (Obtain Locally)
95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 4A-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Exhaust Manifold and Exhaust Plate

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 GASKET
2 1 DIVIDER PLATE
3 1 SEAL
4 17 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/2) 16.5 22.5
5 2 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1) 16.5 22.5
6 1 COVER-RELIEF VALVE
7 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/4) 16.5 22.5
8 1 SCREW (10-16 x 3/4 in.) 25 2.8
9 1 WASHER
10 1 DIAPHRAGM
11 1 WATER DEFLECTOR
12 1 PLATE
13 2 GASKET
14 1 SPRING
15 1 POPPET
16 1 GROMMET
17 1 CARRIER
18 1 GASKET
19 1 EXHAUST PATE
20 2 DOWEL PIN
21 1 SEAL
22 1 BRACKET
23 8 SCREW (10-16 x 1/2 IN.) 80 9
24 1 GROMMET
25 6 WASHER
26 6 NUT 23 31.0
27 1 BUSHING
28 1 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 25 34.0
29 1 SCREW (5/16-18 x 2-1/2 IN.) 25 34.0
30 3 SCREW (3/8-16 x 3-1/2 IN.) 50 68.0
31 1 FRONT BRACKET ASSEMBLY
32 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1/2 IN.) 25 34
33 4 WASHER
34 4 GROMMET
35 1 REAR BRACKET ASSEMBLY
36 1 GROMMET
37 1 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-3/4)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-9

POWERHEAD

Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods

14
12 95 13

10
11

17 95

15

14
95
13
14

8 95

95 9
16

14
7

4
5
6 95

2
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil
95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 4A-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm
1 1 CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
2 1 WEAR SLEEVE
3 1 BALL BEARING (LOWER)
4 1 RETAINING RING
5 1 CARRIER ASSEMBLY
6 1 SEAL
7 7 RING–SEALING
8 2 ROLLER BEARING
9 2 RACE
3 PISTON (STARBOARD)
10
3 PISTON (PORT)
11 12 PISTON RING
12 12 LOCK RING
13 6 CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
1st Torque: 15 lb-in
2nd Torque: 20 lb-ft
14 12 SCREW Turn screw addition-
al 90 degrees after
2nd torque.

15 12 WASHER
16 12 ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY
17 174 NEEDLE BEARING–PISTON END

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-11

POWERHEAD

Cylinder Head

9
14

9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant

14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil

Page 4A-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Cylinder Head
TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 2 CYLINDER HEAD (150)
2 CYLINDER HEAD (175/200)
2 2 SEAL
3 6 SEAL
4 24 SCREW (0.375-16 x 2.30) SEE NOTE #1
5 4 DOWEL PIN
6 2 GASKET
7 2 COVER
8 2 THERMOSTAT
9 4 SCREW (M8 x 25) 16.5 22.5
10 1 ELBOW
11 1 HOSE [12-3/4 IN.(32.3 CM)]
12 1 FITTING
13 10 STA-STRAP
14 1 HOSE [13-1/2 IN.(34.3 CM)]
15 1 HOSE [4-1/2 IN.(11.4 CM)]
16 1 T-FITTING
17 1 FITTING
18 2 KNOCK SENSOR (200)
19 2 ADAPTOR (200) 20 27
20 2 WASHER (200)
21 2 SCREW (M10 x 35) (200) 15 20.3
22 2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
23 2 O-RING
24 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
25 2 SCREW (M8 x 14) 16.5 22.5
26 1 RETAINER
NOTE # 1: APPLY LIGHT OIL TO THREADS - TORQUE TO 30 LB. FT. (40.5 Nm),
THEN TIGHTEN ADDITIONAL 90 DEGREES.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-13

POWERHEAD

Bleed System Routing

TO A

Note

TO B

58791 58795 58790

Page 4A-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Bleed System Routing

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 FITTING
2 1 TUBING [22 IN (55.8 CM)]
3 2 TEE FITTING
4 2 TUBING [1-1/2 IN (3.8 CM)]
5 1 TUBING [4-3/4 IN (12 CM)]
6 1 TUBING [3-1/2 IN (8.9 CM)]
7 3 CHECK VALVE
8 1 CHECK VALVE
NOTE: High pressure fuel hose from fuel pump in vapor separator to fuel rail fitting on air
plenum.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-15

POWERHEAD

Torque Sequence
CRANKCASE COVER BOLTS
8 7

Apply light oil to

threads and bolt face:
8 Bolts (3/8 in. - 16 in. 4
38 lb. ft. (51.5 N·m) 1

3 2
Bolts (5/16 in. - 18)
15 lb. ft. (20.3 N·m)

5 6
EXHAUST COVER BOLTS
15 lb. ft. (20.3 N·m) Apply light oil to threads and bolt face
19 18

20 15
13 14
10
9
6
5
3
1
2
4
7
8
11
12

16 17 50806

Page 4A-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS

Apply light oil to threads and bolt face: 30 lb. ft. (40.7 N·m) and rotate 90°

10 9

6 5
2 1

3 4
7 8

11 12

POWERHEAD TO ADAPTOR PLATE ATTACHING NUT

Torque nuts to 25 lb. ft. (33.8 Nm)

2
4
6 Starboard Side
8 9

Front

7
10
3 Port Side
5
1

General Information
Powerhead “Disassembly” and “Reassembly” instructions are printed in a sequence that
should be followed to assure best results when removing or replacing powerhead compo-
nents. If complete disassembly is not necessary, start reassembly at point disassembly was
stopped. (Refer to “Table of Contents,” preceding.) Usually, complete disassembly of pow-
erhead will be required.
If major powerhead repairs are to be performed, remove powerhead from drive shaft hous-
ing. Removal of powerhead is not required for 1) inspection of cylinder walls and pistons
(refer to “Powerhead Removal and Disassembly,” following, and remove cylinder heads and
exhaust cover), 2) minor repairs on components, such as ignition system, carburetors, reed
blocks and cylinder heads and checking operation of thermostats.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-17

POWERHEAD

Powerhead Removal from Driveshaft Housing

1. Disconnect battery cables from battery terminals.
2. Remove top cowling.
3. Remove two screws which secure remote control harness retainer and remove retainer.

a a

57841

a - Screws
b - Retainer

4. Remove bottom cowls.

58774

58068
a - Bolts

Page 4A-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

5. Disconnect and/or remove the following:

d
e
a

58778

a - Remote Oil Tank Pressure Hose

b - Remote Control Harness
c - Power Trim Wires
d - Negative Battery Cable
e - Positive Battery Cable
f - SmartCraft Harness Connector

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-19

POWERHEAD

6. Disconnect and/or remove the following:

58780
a - Oil Supply Hose

Page 4A-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

7. Disconnect water pressure sensor (gray) hose and speedometer pressure sensor
(black) hose.

a
b

58773
a - Water Pressure Sensor
b - Speedometer Pressure Sensor
c - Speedometer Sensor Hose (BLACK)(for Digital Gauges)
d - Water Pressure Sensor Hose (GRAY)(for Digital Gauges)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-21

POWERHEAD

8. Slide outboard shift lever into neutral position.

9. Remove locknut and flat washer securing throttle cable and remove cable.
10. Remove locknut that secures shift cable latch assembly and remove latch, flat washer,
nylon wear plate, spring and shift cable from control cable anchor bracket.

j b a
d

e f
g
h i 57838
a - Lock Nut (Throttle g - Spring (Hidden)
Cable) h - Shift Cable
b - Flat Washer i - Anchor Bracket
c - Shift Cable Latch j - Throttle Cable
d - Lock Nut (Shift Cable)
e - Flat Washer (Hidden
under nut)
f - Nylon Wear Plate

11. Disconnect input fuel line, water pressure hose and speedometer hose.

b c
a

a - Input Fuel Hose

b - Water Pressure Hose (GRAY) (Analog Gauges)
c - Speedometer Hose (BLACK) (Analog Gauges)

Page 4A-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

12. Remove water hose from fitting on exhaust adaptor plate.

b a

58069
a - Water Hose
b - Fitting

13. Remove 10 nuts and 10 washers (5 each side) from powerhead base.

a a a

a
a

51846
a - Nuts and Washers (5 each side)

14. Remove plastic cap from center of flywheel and install Lifting Eye 91-90455 into flywheel
at least 5 full turns. Using a hoist, lift powerhead assembly from driveshaft housing.

58890
a - Lifting Eye 91-90455

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-23

POWERHEAD

Removing Engine Components

NOTE: Engine components can be removed individually or in some cases as an assembly.
Removing Engine Components Individually
Section 2
Starter Motor
*Electronic Control Module
*Ignition Coils
*Starter Solenoid
*Trim Relays
Alternator
Flywheel
Section 3
Air Plenum
Fuel Rail and Injectors
Vapor Separator Assembly
Pulse Fuel Pump
Oil Pump
Oil Reservoir
Section 7
Shift Cable Latch Assembly
Control Cable Anchor Bracket
*All ignition and electrical components should remain attached to the electrical plate and
removed as an assembly.

Page 4A-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Removing Engine Components as an Assembly

VAPOR SEPARATOR TANK (VST) REMOVAL

CAUTION
Depressurize fuel system prior to opening line connections or removing fuel sys-
tem components.
1. Use Fuel/Air Pressure Gauge 91-16850A7 or Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-881834A1 to de-
pressurize fuel system. Direct fuel into suitable container.
2. Remove VST drain plug and allow fuel to empty into suitable container.

58874
a - Fuel Pressure Gauge 91-881834A1
b - Fuel Pressure Test Port
c - Drain Plug

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-25

POWERHEAD

3. Disconnect and/or remove the following:

d
b c

f
a e

g
58878
a - Fuel Pump Harness e - Ground Lead (hidden)
Connector between VST and Air
b - High Pressure Fuel Plenum
Hose f - Fuel Inlet Hose
c - Fuel Regulator Hose g - Water Sensor Lead
d - Vent Hose
4. Remove 3 bolts securing vapor separator to air plenum.

58801
a - Bolts

Page 4A-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Ignition Coil Plate and Harness Removal

Disconnect the following:

b c d

a
e

j
f

f
g

h
f

58893
a - Speedometer Sensor
b - Port Temperature Sensor
c - Water Pressure Sensor
d - Starboard Temperature Sensor
e - Ignition Coil Harness Connector
f - Bolts (4)
g - Spark Plug Leads (Use proper tool to remove spark plug boot to avoid damage
to boot)
h - Speedometer Hose
i - Water Pressure Hose
j - Temperature Gauge Bullet Connector

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-27

POWERHEAD

Starter Motor
Disconnect and/or remove the following:

58803
a - Yellow Lead from Starter
b - Bolts (4)

Page 4A-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Electrical Plate Removal

Disconnect and/or remove the following:

e
c

58895

a - Crank Position Sensor Connector

b - Trim Motor Bullet Connectors
c - Fuel Injector Harness Connector
d - ECM Screws (3)
e - Solenoid Plate Screws (3)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-29

POWERHEAD

Oil Pump
Disconnect and/or remove the following:

a
d
b 58894

a - Oil Pump Electrical Connector

b - Remote Oil Tank Pressure Hose
c - Negative Battery Lead
d - Bleed Hose

Page 4A-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Air Plenum
Disconnect and/or remove the following:

a
b

g
58886

a - Air Temperature Sensor Connector

b - Manifold Pressure Sensor Connector
c - Fuel Regulator Hose
d - Remote Control Harness Connector
e - Oil Pump Inlet Hose (Plug hose to prevent leakage)
f - Oil Pump Outlet Hose (Plug hose to prevent leakage)
g - Fuel Injector Harness Connector

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-31

POWERHEAD

Powerhead Disassembly
1. Place powerhead in repair stand or on a bench.
2. Remove thermostat covers and washers.

a
51852
a - Cover
b - Washer

3. Remove cylinder heads from engine block.

a

51847
a - Cylinder Head
b - Engine Block

Page 4A-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

4. Remove exhaust manifold and seal.

a c
b

51852
a - Exhaust Manifold
b - Seal
c - Gasket

5. Remove reed block housing from cylinder block.

51845
a - Reed Block Housing

6. Inspect reeds as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection”.

7. Remove bolts from end caps.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-33

POWERHEAD

UPPER END CAP

51854
a - Crankcase Attaching End Cap Bolts

LOWER END CAP

51849
a - Crankcase Attaching End Cap Bolts

8. Remove bolts which secure crankcase cover to cylinder block.

Page 4A-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

9. Pry crankcase cover off cylinder block using pry bars in locations shown.

b aa

a
51845
a - Pry Points
b - Crankcase Cover

CRANKCASE COVER REMOVED

51848

10. Use Powerhead Stand (91-30591A1) for rotating crankshaft to desired position for re-
moval of connecting rods.
11. Using an awl or electric pencil, scribe the cylinder identification number on each con-
necting rod as shown. Reassemble connecting rods in same cylinder.

ÄÄ
ÄÄ

51849

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-35

POWERHEAD

12. Use a 5/16 in. 12 point socket to remove connecting rod bolts, then remove rod cap, roll-
er bearings and bearing cage from connecting rod.
aa

51850
a - Connecting Rod Bolts

13. Push piston out of cylinder block.

14. After removal, reassemble each piston and connecting rod assembly.

CAUTION
Each connecting rod and end cap are a matched machined set and must never be
mismatched.
15. Inspect pistons as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection” following.
16. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) to remove piston rings. Always install new piston
rings.

51849 51081

a - Piston Ring Expander (91-24697)

Page 4A-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

17. Using an awl, scribe identification number of connecting rod on inside of piston. Reas-
semble piston on same connecting rod.
18. Using tool (91-52952A1), remove piston pin lock rings from both ends of piston pin. Nev-
er re-use piston pin lockrings.

b
a

c 51083

51851
a - Lockring c - Lockring Tool (91-52952A1)
b - Scribe Identification
Number
IMPORTANT: Warming the piston dome using a torch lamp will ease removal and in-
stallation of piston pin.
19. Support piston and tap out piston pin using service tool (91-76159A1) as shown.
20. Remove piston pin needle bearings (29 per piston) and locating washers (2 per piston)
as shown.
IMPORTANT: We recommend that you use new needle bearings at reassembly for
lasting repair. However, if needle bearings must be re-used, keep each set of bearings
identified for reassembly on same connecting rod.
a
b

c
51853 51088
a - Piston Pin Tool c - Needle Bearing Locating Washers
(91-76159A1)
b - Piston Pin

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-37

POWERHEAD

21. Remove upper end cap and lower end cap from crankshaft.
22. Remove and discard O-ring seals from each end cap.
23. Remove oil seal(s) from end of each end cap by driving seal out with a punch and ham-
mer.
24. Inspect roller bearing in upper end cap as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection”.
NOTE: If roller bearing is damaged, replace upper end cap and roller bearings as an assem-
bly.
b
b a

51848 c
51853
a - Upper End Cap c - O-Ring
b - Lower End Cap d - Seal
25. Remove crankshaft and place in powerhead stand.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove crankshaft sealing rings from crankshaft, unless re-
placement of a sealing ring(s) is necessary. Usually, crankshaft sealing rings do not
require replacement, unless broken.

CAUTION
Safety glasses should be worn when removing or installing crankshaft sealing
rings.

Page 4A-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

26. Remove crankshaft and place in powerhead stand as shown.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove crankshaft sealing rings from crankshaft, unless re-
placement of a sealing ring(s) is necessary. Usually, crankshaft sealing rings do not
require replacement, unless broken.

CAUTION
Safety glasses should be worn when removing or installing crankshaft sealing
rings.
27. Remove retaining ring as shown.

58617 58619
a - Sealing Rings b - Retaining Ring

28. Remove bearing race halves and roller bearings from crankshaft.
IMPORTANT: Keep same bearing races and roller bearings together.

aa

58614
a - Bearing Race Halves
b - Roller Bearings

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-39

POWERHEAD

Inspect crankshaft ball bearing as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” following.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove crankshaft ball bearing, unless replacement is re-
quired.
29. Remove lower ball bearing from crankshaft as follows:
a. Remove retaining ring using a pair of snap ring pliers.

a b

51854
a - Crankshaft Ball Bearing
b - Pliers
c - Retaining Ring
b. Press crankshaft out of lower ball bearing as shown.

51081
a - Press
b - Powerhead Stand (91-812549T)
c - Crankshaft Ball Bearing
d - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)

Page 4A-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Water Pressure Relief Valve Components

1. If necessary, remove water pressure relief valve components as shown.

12
12
11
11
10
13
13
3 99
4

55
77
3 88
1

bb

aa
50803
1 - Cover
2 - Bolt
3 - Gasket
4 - Relief Valve Plate
5 - Diaphragm
6 - Water Deflector
7 - Washer
8 - Screw
9 - Spring
10 - Poppet Valve
11 - Grommet
12 - Carrier
13 - Washer
Torque Specifications
a 150 lb. in. (17 N·m)

b 25 lb. in. (3 N·m)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-41

POWERHEAD

Cleaning and Inspection

Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover
IMPORTANT: Crankcase cover and cylinder block are a matched, line-bored assem-
bly and never should be mismatched by using a different crankcase cover or cylinder
block.

CAUTION
If crankcase cover or cylinder block is to be submerged in a very strong cleaning
solution, it will be necessary to remove the crankcase cover/cylinder block bleed
system from crankcase cover/cylinder block to prevent damage to hoses and check
valves.
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block and crankcase cover. Be sure that all sealant and old
gaskets are removed from matching surfaces. Be sure that carbon deposits are re-
moved from exhaust ports.
2. Inspect cylinder block and crankcase cover for cracks or fractures.
3. Check gasket surfaces for nicks, deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause
compression leakages.
4. Check all water and oil passages in cylinder block and crankcase cover to be sure that
they are not obstructed and that plugs are in place and tight.

Special Service Information

Grooves in Cylinder Block Caused By Crankshaft Sealing Rings
Grooves in cylinder block caused by crankshaft sealing rings are not a problem, except if
installing a new crankshaft and the new sealing rings on crankshaft do not line up with exist-
ing grooves in cylinder block. If installing a new crankshaft, refer to crankshaft installation,
Powerhead Reassembly section to determine if powerhead can be used.

Page 4A-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Cylinder Bores
1. Inspect cylinder bores for scoring, scuffing or a transfer of aluminum from piston to cylin-
der wall. Scoring or scuffing, if NOT TOO SEVERE, can normally be removed by honing.
If a transfer of aluminum has occurred, an acidic solution such as “TIDY BOWL CLEAN-
ER” should be applied to the areas of the cylinder bore where transfer of aluminum has
occurred. After the acidic solution has removed the transferred aluminum, thoroughly
flush the cylinder bore(s) to remove any remaining acid. Cylinder walls may now be
honed to remove any glaze and to aid in the seating of new piston rings.
HONING PROCEDURE
a. When cylinders are to be honed, follow the hone manufacturer’s recommendations
for use of the hone and cleaning and lubrication during honing.
b. For best results, a continuous flow of honing oil should be pumped into the work
area. If pumping oil is not practical, use an oil can. Apply oil generously and frequent-
ly on both stones and work area.

CAUTION
When honing cylinder block, remove hone frequently and check condition of cylin-
der walls. DO NOT hone any more than absolutely necessary, as hone can remove
cylinder wall material rapidly.
c. Start stroking at smallest diameter. Maintain firm stone pressure against cylinder
wall to assure fast stock removal and accurate results.
d. Localize stroking in the smallest diameter until drill speed is constant throughout
length of bore. Expand stones, as necessary, to compensate for stock removal and
stone wear. Stroke at a rate of 30 complete cycles per minute to produce best
cross-hatch pattern. Use honing oil generously.
e. Thoroughly clean cylinder bores with hot water and detergent. Scrub well with a stiff
bristle brush and rinse thoroughly with hot water. A good cleaning is essential. If any
of the abrasive material is allowed to remain in the cylinder bore, it will cause rapid
wear of new piston rings and cylinder bore in addition to bearings. After cleaning,
bores should be swabbed several times with engine oil and a clean cloth, then wiped
with a clean, dry cloth. Cylinders should not be cleaned with kerosene or gasoline.
Clean remainder of cylinder block to remove excess material spread during honing
operation.
2. Hone all cylinder walls just enough to de-glaze walls.
3. Measure cylinder bore diameter (with a snap gauge micrometer) of each cylinder, as
shown below. Check for tapered, out-of-round (egg-shaped) and oversize bore.

51846

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-43

POWERHEAD

Models 150/175/200 2.5 liter Cylinder Block Finish Hone

Standard Piston 3.501 in. (88.93 mm)
0.015 in. (0.381 mm) Oversize Piston 3.516 in. (89.31 mm)

4. If a cylinder bore is tapered, out-of-round or worn more than 0.003 in. (0.076 mm) from
standard “Cylinder Block Finish Hone” diameter (refer to chart, preceding), it will be nec-
essary to re-bore that cylinder(s) to 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) oversize or re-sleeve and in-
stall oversize piston(s) and piston rings during reassembly.
NOTE: The weight of an oversize piston is approximately the same as a standard size pis-
ton; therefore, it is not necessary to re-bore all cylinders in a block just because one cylinder
requires re-boring.
5. After honing and thoroughly cleaning cylinder bores, apply light oil to cylinder walls to
prevent rusting .
Pistons and Piston Rings
IMPORTANT: If engine was submerged while engine was running, piston pin and/or
connecting rod may be bent. If piston pin is bent, piston must be replaced. (Piston
pins are not sold separately because of matched fit into piston.) If piston pin is bent,
connecting rod must be checked for straightness (refer to “Connecting Rods,” fol-
lowing, for checking straightness).
1. Inspect pistons for scoring and excessive piston skirt wear.
2. Check tightness of piston ring locating pins. Locating pins must be tight.
3. Thoroughly clean pistons. Carefully remove carbon deposits from pistons, with a soft
wire brush or carbon removal solution. Do not burr or round off machined edges.
Inspect piston ring grooves for wear and carbon accumulation. If necessary, scrape carbon
from piston ring grooves being careful not to scratch sides of grooves. Refer to proce-
dure following for cleaning piston ring grooves.
CLEANING PISTON RING GROOVES
NOTE: Cleaning instructions differ between the rectangular ring groove and keystone (ta-
pered) ring groove. Pistons may have two keystone ring grooves or one keystone ring
groove and one rectangular ring groove as shown.
Rectangular ring grooves
1. A broken rectangular piston ring can be used as a tool for scraping carbon from ring
grooves. Carefully scrape carbon from ring grooves without scratching the side surfaces
of grooves.
Keystone (tapered) ring grooves

CAUTION
Care must be taken not to scratch the side surfaces of the ring groove. Scratching
the side surface of the ring groove will damage the ring groove.
1. Use a bristle brush and carbon remover solution to remove carbon from side surfaces.
2. A tool can be made for cleaning the inner diameter of the tapered ring grooves. The tool
can be made from a broken tapered piston ring with the side taper removed to enable
the inside edge of the ring to reach the inner diameter of the groove. Carefully scrape
carbon from inner diameter of ring grooves. Care must be taken not to damage the
grooves by scratching the side surfaces of the grooves.

Page 4A-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Piston with two half keystone (half tapered) rings

Enlarged View of
Piston Ring Grooves

MEASURING PISTON ROUNDNESS

Piston has a barrel profile shape and is not a true diameter.
1. Using a micrometer, measure dimension “A” at location shown. Dimension “A” should
be as indicated in chart following.

150/175/200 Piston Dimension “A”

Standard Piston 3.494 in. ± .001 in. (88.747 mm ± .025
mm)
0.015 in. Oversize Piston 3.509 in. ± .001 in. (89.128 mm ± .025
mm)

2. Using a micrometer, measure dimension “B” at location shown. Dimension “B” should
be within 0.008 in. of dimension “A.”

a 1/2 in.
(12.7mm)

b
a - Dimension A at right angle (90°) to Piston Pin
b - Dimension B (inline with Piston Pin)
Cylinder Heads and Exhaust Divider Plate
1. Inspect internal surface of cylinder heads for possible damage (as a result of piston or
foreign material striking cylinder heads).
IMPORTANT: Cylinder head warpage should not exceed 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) over the
ENTIRE length of the cylinder head. If measured warpage, as determined on a surface
block, exceeds 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) or a discontinuity of up to 0.004 in. (0.1 mm) exists
in a narrow portion of the cylinder head’s surface length, then the cylinder head should
be replaced.
2. Replace cylinder head(s) as necessary.
3. Thoroughly clean gasket surfaces of exhaust divider plate.
4. Inspect exhaust divider plate for deep grooves, cracks or distortion that could cause
leakage. Replace parts as necessary.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-45

POWERHEAD

Crankshaft
1. Inspect crankshaft to drive shaft splines for wear. (Replace crankshaft, if necessary.)
2. Check crankshaft for straightness – maximum runout: 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) (Replace
as necessary.)
3. Inspect crankshaft oil seal surfaces. Sealing surfaces must not be grooved, pitted or
scratched. (Replace as necessary.)
4. Check all crankshaft bearing surfaces for rust, water marks, chatter marks, uneven wear
and/or overheating. (Refer to “Connecting Rods”.)
5. If necessary, clean crankshaft surfaces with crocus cloth.

a b

c
c

51847
a - Crankshaft Journals
b - Crocus Cloth
c - Work Cloth “Back-and-Forth”

WARNING
DO NOT spin-dry crankshaft ball bearing with compressed air.
6. Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft and crankshaft ball bearing. Re-
check surfaces of crankshaft. Replace crankshaft, if surfaces cannot be properly
“cleaned up.” If crankshaft will be re-used, lubricate surfaces of crankshaft with light oil
to prevent rust. DO NOT lubricate crankshaft ball bearing at this time.
Crankshaft (and End Cap) Bearings
1. After cleaning crankshaft, grasp outer race of crankshaft ball bearing (installed on lower
end of crankshaft) and attempt to work race back-and- forth. There should not be exces-
sive play.
2. Lubricate ball bearing with light oil. Rotate outer bearing race. Bearing should have
smooth action and no rust stains. If ball bearing sounds or feels “rough” or has “catches,”
remove and discard bearing. (Refer to “Powerhead Removal and Disassembly - Crank-
shaft Removal and Disassembly”.)

Lower Ball
Bearing

Page 4A-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

3. Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft center main roller bearings. Lubri-
cate bearings with 2-Cycle Outboard Oil.

CAUTION
DO NOT intermix halves of upper and lower crankshaft center main roller bearings.
Replace bearings in pairs only.
4. Thoroughly inspect center main roller bearings. Replace bearings if they are rusted,
fractured, worn, galled or badly discolored.

Center main
Roller Bearing

5. Clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft roller bearing that is installed in upper end cap.
Lubricate bearing with light oil.
6. Thoroughly inspect upper end cap roller bearing. If roller bearing is rusted, fractured,
worn, galled, badly discolored or loose inside of end cap replace end cap and roller bear-
ing as an assembly.

Upper Roller
Bearing

Reed Block Assembly

IMPORTANT: Reed block assembly is not serviceable. If reeds are damaged replace
reed block assembly.
1. Thoroughly clean gasket surfaces of reed blocks and reed block housing. Check for
deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause leakage. Replace parts as neces-
sary.
2. Check for wear (indentations) on face of each reed block. Replace reed block assembly
if reeds have made indentations.
3. Check for chipped and broken reeds.

51851
Allowable reed opening is 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) or less. Replace reed block assembly if any
reed is standing open more than 0.020 in. (0.51 mm).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-47

POWERHEAD

Reed Block Housing

1. Check rubber bleed hoses. Replace any hose that is cracked, cut or deteriorating.
2. Check operation of bleed system check valves in reed block housing. If valves are work-
ing properly, air can be drawn thru check valves “one way” only. If air can pass thru a
check valve both ways, valve is not working properly and must be replaced.
3. Check that bleed system check valves are pressed tight into reed housing.
4. Inspect passages in reed block housing to be sure that they are not obstructed.

Connecting Rods
1. Check connecting rods for alignment by placing rods on a surface plate. If light can be
seen under any portion of machined surfaces, if rod has a slight wobble on plate, or if
a 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) feeler gauge can be inserted between any machined surface and
surface plate, rod is bent and must be discarded.
2. Overheating: Overheating is visible as a bluish bearing surface color that is caused by
inadequate lubrication or excessive RPM.
3. Rust: Rust formation on bearing surfaces causes uneven pitting of surface(s).

a
51853
a - Pitting

Page 4A-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

4. Water Marks: When bearing surfaces are subjected to water contamination, a bearing
surface “etching” occurs. This etching resembles the size of the bearing.

51853
5. Spalling: Spalling is the loss of bearing surface, and it resembles flaking or chipping.
Spalling will be most evident on the thrust portion of the connecting rod in line with the
“I” beam. General bearing surface deterioration could be caused by or accelerated by
improper lubrication.

a
51853
a - Spalling

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-49

POWERHEAD

6. Chatter Marks: Chatter marks are the result of a combination of low speed - low load
- cold water temperature operation, aggravated by inadequate lubrication and/or im-
proper fuel. Under these conditions, the crankshaft journal is hammered by the connect-
ing rod. As ignition occurs in the cylinder, the piston pushes the connecting rod with tre-
mendous force, and this force is transferred to the connecting rod journal. Since there
is little or no load on the crankshaft, it bounces away from the connecting rod. The crank-
shaft then remains immobile for a split second until the piston travel causes the connect-
ing rod to catch up to the waiting crankshaft journal, then hammers it. The repetition of
this action causes a rough bearing surface(s) which resembles a tiny washboard. In
some instances, the connecting rod crank pin bore becomes highly polished. During op-
eration, the engine will emit a “whirr” and/or “chirp” sound when it is accelerated rapidly
from idle speed to approximately 1500 RPM, then quickly returned to idle. If the preced-
ing conditions are found, replace both the crankshaft and connecting rod(s).

a
51853
a - Chatter Marks Between Arrows

7. Uneven Wear: Uneven wear could be caused by a bent connecting rod.

a
51853
a - Uneven Wear Between Arrows

8. If necessary, clean connecting rod bearing surfaces, as follows:

a. Be sure that “etched” marks on connecting rod (crankshaft end) are perfectly aligned
with “etched” marks on connecting rod cap. Tighten connecting rod cap attaching
bolts securely.

CAUTION
Crocus cloth MUST BE USED to clean bearing surface at crankshaft end of connect-
ing rod. DO NOT use any other type of abrasive cloth.
b. Clean CRANKSHAFT END of connecting rod by using CROCUS CLOTH placed
in a slotted 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter shaft, as shown. Chuck shaft in a drill press
and operation press at high speed while keeping connecting rod at a 90 angle to
slotted shaft.

Page 4A-50 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

IMPORTANT: Clean connecting rod just enough to clean up bearing surfaces. DO

NOT continue to clean after marks are removed from bearing surfaces.
a

51083
a - Crocus Cloth

c. Clean PISTON PIN END of connecting rod, using same method as in Step “b”, pre-
ceding, but using 320 grit carborundum cloth instead of crocus cloth.
d. Thoroughly wash connecting rods to remove abrasive grit. Recheck bearing sur-
faces of connecting rods. Replace any connecting rod(s) that cannot be properly
“cleaned up.” Lubricate bearing surfaces of connecting rods (which will be re-used)
with light oil to prevent rust.

Powerhead Reassembly and Installation

General
Before proceeding with powerhead reassembly, be sure that all parts to be re-used have
been carefully cleaned and thoroughly inspected, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,”
preceding. Parts, which have not been properly cleaned (or which are questionable), can
severely damage an otherwise perfectly good powerhead within the first few minutes of op-
eration. All new powerhead gaskets MUST BE installed during reassembly.
During reassembly, lubricate parts with Quicksilver 2-Cycle Outboard Lubricant whenever
“light oil” is specified. Quicksilver part numbers of lubricants, sealers and locking com-
pounds and tools are listed in “Powerhead General Information,” preceding.
A torque wrench is essential for correct reassembly of powerhead. DO NOT attempt to
reassemble powerhead without using a torque wrench. Attaching bolts for covers, housings
and cylinder heads MUST BE torqued by tightening bolts in 3 progressive steps (following
specified torque sequence) until specified torque is reached (see “Example,” following).
EXAMPLE: If cylinder head attaching bolts require a torque of 30 Ib. ft. (40.7 N·m), a) tighten
all bolts to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 N·m), following specified torque sequence, b) tighten all bolts to
20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m), following torque sequence, then finally c) tighten all bolts to 30 Ib. ft. (40.7
N·m), following torque sequence.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-51

POWERHEAD

1. If removed, press lower crankshaft ball bearing onto crankshaft as shown. Be sure bear-
ing is pressed firmly against counterweight.
2. Reinstall retaining ring using a suitable pair of Snap Ring Pliers.
ea
dd

cc

aa bb

51854

51852
a - Crankshaft
b - Crankshaft Ball Bearing
c - Suitable Mandrel
d - Press
e - Retaining Ring
3. If removed, spread new crankshaft sealing rings just enough to slide over crankshaft
journal.
4. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) and install crankshaft sealing rings into groove.

51854 51849
a - Crankshaft Sealing Rings
b - Piston Ring Expander (91-24697)

Page 4A-52 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

5. Lubricate center main crankshaft roller bearings and races with light oil.

a b 51854
a - Install so larger of the 3 holes is toward bottom end of crankshaft
b - Verify retaining ring bridges the separating lines of the bearing race

6. Place center main crankshaft roller bearings on upper and lower main bearing journals
as shown.
7. Install center main bearing races as shown.
8. Secure center main bearing races together with retaining rings. Make sure retaining ring
bridges the separating lines of the bearing race.
FLYWHEEL END

aa

DRIVE SHAFT END 58617

58614
a - Center Main Bearing Races

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-53

POWERHEAD

9. Install oil seals into lower end cap as follows:

a. Apply a thin bead of Loctite 271 to outer diameter on 2 lower end cap oil seals (a).
b. Using driver head (91-55919) press one oil seal (lip facing down) into lower end cap
until firmly seated. Remove any excess Loctite.
c. Press second oil seal (lip facing down) until firmly seated on first oil seal. Remove
any excess Loctite.
d. Lubricate oil seal lips with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon.
e. Lubricate O-ring seal surface on end cap with 2 cycle oil. Install o-ring over lower end
cap.

7
aa
95 a
7 Loctite 271 b
51849
14
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil
95 2-4-C With Teflon

a - Oil Seal b - O-ring

10. Install oil seal into upper end cap as follows:
a. Apply a thin bead of Loctite 271 to outer diameter of upper end cap oil seal.
b. Use a suitable mandrel, press oil seal into upper end cap (lip facing down) until bot-
tomed out on lip of end cap. Remove any excess Loctite.
c. Lubricate oil seal lip with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon.
d. Lubricate O-ring seal surface on end cap with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon. Install
O-ring on end cap.

95 a

95

7 Loctite 271
95 2-4-C With Teflon c 58324

a - Oil Seal
b - Lip of End Cap
c - O-Ring

Page 4A-54 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Crankshaft Installation
SPECIAL INFORMATION
Installing A New Crankshaft Assembly Into Cylinder Block
Check the crankshaft sealing ring mating surfaces in the cylinder block and crankcase cover
for wear grooves that were caused by the crankshaft sealing rings from the previous crank-
shaft. If wear grooves are present, the sealing rings on the new crankshaft will have to fit
into the grooves without binding the crankshaft.
Before installing crankshaft, remove any burrs that may exist on groove edges.
Lubricate sealing rings with light oil and install new crankshaft as instructed.
Install upper and lower end caps and then inspect fit between sealing rings and grooves.
Temporarily install crankcase cover and rotate crankshaft several times to check if sealing
rings are binding against crankshaft. (You will feel a drag on the crankshaft.) If sealing rings
are binding, recheck grooves for burrs. If this does not correct the problem, it is recom-
mended that the cylinder block be replaced.
Install crankshaft as follows:
1. Lubricate crankshaft sealing rings with light oil.
2. Check cylinder block to be sure that dowel pins are in place.

51848
a - Dowel Pins

3. Position all crankshaft seal ring gaps straight up.

4. Align hole in each center main bearing race with dowel pin.
5. Gently push crankshaft down into position making sure that the dowel pins are lined up
with the holes in center main bearings and crankshaft seal rings are in place.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-55

POWERHEAD

6. Lubricate crankshaft ends (oil seal areas) with light oil, then install upper and lower end
caps (“a” and “b”). Secure end caps to cylinder block with attaching bolts. DO NOT tight-
en end cap bolts at this time.

14 14

51848
aa

c b

14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil 51848

a - Dowel Pin c - Lower End Cap
b - Upper End Cap

Page 4A-56 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Piston and Connecting Rod Reassembly

1. Place needle bearings on a clean piece of paper and lubricate with Quicksilver 2-4-C
with Teflon Marine Lubricant.
NOTE: There are 29 needle bearings per piston.
2. Place sleeve which is part of piston pin tool (91-74607A1) into connecting rod and install
needle bearings around sleeve as shown.
3. Place locating washers on connecting rod.
IMPORTANT: Position connecting rod part number facing towards flywheel.
Carefully position piston over end of rod. Make sure locating washers remain in place.

a
b
a

51851

ba 51851
a - Sleeve
b - Locating Washers

4. Insert piston pin tool (91-74607A1) and push sleeve out of piston. Keep piston pin tool
in piston.
5. Use a mallet and tap piston pin into piston and push piston pin tool out.

a b c
a

db

51080
51086
a - Piston Pin Tool c - Piston Pin
b - Sleeve d - Piston Pin Tool

6. Install new piston pin lockrings (one each end of piston pin) with Lockring Installation
Tool (91-79109A3).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-57

POWERHEAD

7. Make sure lockrings are properly seated in piston grooves.

aa

51086
51086

a - Lockring Installation Tool b - Lockring

Piston and Piston Ring Combinations

All 153 cu. in. (2.5 Liter) models have two half keystone (half tapered) rings.

.056 in.

.056 in.

Page 4A-58 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Piston Installation
1. Before installing new piston rings, check gap between ring ends by placing each ring
in its respective cylinder, then pushing ring about 1/2 in. (12.7mm) into cylinder using
piston to assure proper position.
2. Check end gap of each new piston ring with a feeler gauge. End gap must be within
0.018 in. to 0.025 in. (0.45mm to 0.64mm). If end gap is greater, check other piston rings
in cylinder bore, until rings (within tolerance) are found.

c d

51852
a - Piston Ring
b - Dots (Faces Up)
c - Feeler Gauge
d - Ring End Gap

IMPORTANT: Piston ring side with dot or letter must be facing up.
Dot or Letter

Piston Ring

3. Use Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) and install piston rings (dot side up) on each pis-
ton. Spread rings just enough to slip over piston.
4. Check piston rings to be sure that they fit freely in ring groove.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-59

POWERHEAD

5. Lubricate piston, rings and cylinder wall with 2-Cycle Outboard Oil.

51081
a - Piston Ring Expander (91-24697) b - Dot Side “Up” on Piston Ring

6. Rotate each piston ring so end of ring is aligned with locating pin as shown.
7. Install Piston Ring Compressor.
8. Remove screws and connecting rod cap from piston rod assembly being installed.
IMPORTANT: Piston must be correctly installed and positioned as shown.
Pistons marked with the word “UP” and with the letter “P” or “S” on top of piston.
Pistons with the letter “P” must be installed in the port side of engine and the word “UP” fac-
ing toward top of engine.
Pistons with the letter “S” must be installed in the starboard side of engine and the word “UP”
toward top of engine.
9. Coat cylinder bore with 2-cycle oil. Match piston assembly with cylinder it was removed
from, and position piston as described below. Push piston into cylinder.

14
UP UP
CYL 2 CYL 1
P S

UP UP
CYL 4 CYL 3
P S

UP UP
CYL 6 CYL 5
P S
56156
14 2 Cycle Outboard Oil

Page 4A-60 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

10. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon to bearing surface of connecting rod and, install
bearing assembly as shown.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that connecting rod bolts not be reused.
11. Place connecting rod cap on connecting rod. Apply light oil to threads and face of con-
necting rod bolts. Thread connecting rod bolts finger-tight while checking for correct
alignment of the rod cap as shown.
IMPORTANT: Connecting rod and connecting rod caps are matched halves. Do not
torque screws before completing the following procedure.
• Run a pencil lightly over ground area.
• If pencil stops at fracture point, loosen bolts, retighten, and check again.
NOTE: If you still feel the fracture point, discard the rod.
12. Tighten connecting rod bolts (using a 5/16 in. - 12 point socket). First torque to 15 lb.
in. (1.7 N·m) then 30 lb. ft. (41 N·m). Turn each bolt an additional 90° after 2nd torque
is attained. Recheck alignment between rod cap and rod as shown.
aa
aa
95

14 14
2 Cycle Outboard Oil
95 2-4-C With Teflon
51850
a - Connecting Rod Screws
13. Rotate crankshaft several times (using powerhead stand) to assure free operation (no
binds and catching).
Check each connecting rod cap for correct alignment. If not aligned, a ridge can be seen
or felt at the separating line as shown below. Correct any misalignment.
Side Side View
View Incorrect-Cap
Correct on Backwards

End View
End Incorrect- End View
View Not Incorrect-Cap
Correct Aligned on Backwards

Ä Ä Ä
Ä Ä Ä
Ä Ä
90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-61
POWERHEAD

14. Verify that no piston rings were broken during installation by pressing in on each piston
ring thru exhaust port using a screwdriver. If no spring tension exists (ring fails to return
to position), it’s likely the ring is broken and must be replaced.

51852
a - Screwdriver

Crankcase Cover Installation

1. Thoroughly remove all oil from mating surfaces of crankcase cover and cylinder block
with Loctite 7649 Primer.
2. Install gasket strips into grooves in crankcase cover. Trim end of each gasket strip flush
with edge of cover as shown.

a b

51852
a - Gasket Strips
b - Edge of Cover

Page 4A-62 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

3. Apply a thin, even coat of Loctite Master Gasket #203 on mating surfaces of crankcase
cover and cylinder block.

12 a

12 Loctite Master Gasket 58620

a - Loctite Master Gasket

4. Place crankcase cover in position on cylinder block. Turn the 8 center main bolts in a
LITTLE at a time, (following torque sequence) compressing crankshaft seal rings until
crankshaft cover has been drawn down to cylinder block. Tighten eight bolts evenly in
three progressive steps (following torque sequence).
5. Install remaining crankcase cover flange bolts.
6. Tighten end cap bolts to specified torque.
Upper End Cap Bolts
150 lb. in. (17 N·m)

8 7

Add light oil to threads

and bolt face:
8 Bolts (3/8 in. - 16 in.
38 lb. ft. (51.5 N·m) 4
1

2
3
Bolts (5/16 in. - 18)
180 lb. in. (20.3 N·m)

5 6

Lower End Cap Bolts

80 lb. in. (9 N·m)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-63

POWERHEAD

Reed Block Assembly

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove reeds from reed blocks, unless replacement is neces-
sary. DO NOT turn used reeds over for re-use. Replace reeds in sets only.
1. Thoroughly clean gasket surfaces of reed blocks and reed block housing. Check for
deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause leakage. Replace parts as neces-
sary.
2. Inspect reed block neoprene surface for wear, cuts or abraisions. Replace reed block(s)
as required.
3. Check for chipped and broken reeds.

051
020

58347
Allowable reed opening is 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) or less. Replace reeds if either reed is stand-
ing open more than 0.020 in. (0.51 mm).
Assembly of Reed Blocks to Intake Manifold

105 lb. in. (11.8 N·m)

80 lb. in. (9 N·m) 50806

Assembly of Exhaust Divider Plate to Block
1. Place exhaust divider seal into slot in block and install divider plate with gasket.
2. Clean bolt threads with Loctite 7649 Primer.
3. Apply Loctite 271 to bolt threads and torque bolts to 15 Ib. ft. (20.3 Nm).

Page 4A-64 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

4. Torque exhaust divider plate bolts in following sequence.

19 18
10 15
13 14
9
6 5
3
1
2
d 4
b 7
8
c 11
a 12
50805
56167
16 17
a - Divider Seal c - Gasket
b - Exhaust Divider Plate d - Attaching Bolt
5. If removed, install water pressure relief valve components as shown. Torque bolts to
specifications.

12
12
11
11
10
13
13
99
4 3

5
77 5
1 3 88

2
6
50803
1 - Cover 8 - Screw - 25 lb. in. (3 N·m)
2 - Bolt - 150 lb. in. (17 N·m) 9 - Spring
3 - Gasket 10 - Poppet Valve
4 - Relief Valve Plate 11 - Grommet
5 - Diaphragm 12 - Carrier
6 - Water Deflector 13 - Washer
7 - Washer

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-65

POWERHEAD

Cleaning and Inspection

Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover
IMPORTANT: Crankcase cover and cylinder block is a matched, line-bored assembly
and should never be mismatched by using a different crankcase cover or cylinder
block.

CAUTION
If crankcase cover or cylinder block is to be submerged in a very strong cleaning
solution, it will be necessary to remove the crankcase cover/cylinder block bleed
system from crankcase cover/cylinder block to prevent damage to hoses and check
valves.

1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block and crankcase cover. Be sure that all sealant and old
gaskets are removed from matching surfaces. Be sure that carbon deposits are re-
moved from exhaust ports.
2. Inspect cylinder block and crankcase cover for cracks or fractures.
3. Check gasket surfaces for nicks, deep grooves, cracks and distortion that could cause
compression leakages.
4. Check all water and oil passages in cylinder block and crankcase cover to be sure that
they are not obstructed and that plugs are in place and tight.

Page 4A-66 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION

1. Install each cylinder head to engine block with thermostat pocket “UP”. Apply light oil
to cylinder head bolt threads and torque bolts to 30 Ib. ft. (40.7 N·m) and rotate 90°.

10 9

6 5
2 1

3 4
7 8

11 12
2. Install thermostat washer into each cylinder head.
3. Install analog gauge temperature sensor into port cylinder head below #1 spark plug.
e f
9
c
d
k
b
a
g

h
i

9 Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)

a - Washer h - Bolt (Torque to 200 Lb.
b - Thermostat Cover in. - 22.6 N m)
c - Hose i - Retainer
d - Clamp j - Bolt [Apply Light Oil to
e - Bolt (Torque to 200 Lb. Threads - Torque to 30
in. - 22.6 N·m) lb. ft. (40.7 N·m) and ro-
f - 90° Elbow tate 90°]
g - Temperature Sensor k - Thermostat (2) 143 °F
(Analog Gauge) (61.7 °C)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-67

POWERHEAD

Reinstalling Engine Components

Install the following engine components:
SECTION 2 h. Fuel Pump
a. Starter Motor i. Oil Reservoir
b. Ignition Coils j. Oil Pump
c. Starter Solenoid* k. Fuel Injection
d. Trim Solenoids SECTION 4
e. Alternator l. Shift Cable Latch Assy.
f. Control Module m. Control Cable Anchor
Bracket
g. Flywheel
SECTION 3
All ignition and electrical components should remain attached to electrical plate.
Plate with components can be installed as an assembly.

Page 4A-68 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-69

POWERHEAD

Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft

95

95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 4A-70 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 THROTTLE CONTROL LEVER
2 1 SCREW (0.375-16 x 1-3/4 IN.)
3 1 BUSHING
4 1 SPACER
5 1 SCREW (2-1/8 IN.)
6 1 NUT (1/4-20)
7 1 CAP
8 1 INSERT
9 1 WASHER 35 4.0
10 1 NUT
11 1 CAM
12 1 BUSHING
13 1 SCREW (M8 x 40)
14 1 SWIVEL BUSHING
15 1 BEARING
16 1 LINK
17 1 ROLLER
18 1 THROTTLE ROLLER
19 1 SCREW (M5 x 16)
20 1 WASHER
21 1 STAR WASHER
22 1 ANCHOR BRACKET
23 1 LATCH
24 1 SCREW-DRIVE
25 1 CAP
26 1 WEAR PLATE
27 1 LATCH
28 1 WASHER
Tighten and back off
29 1 NUT
1/4 turn
30 3 SCREW (0.312-18 x 7/8) 20 27
31 1 GUIDE BLOCK
32 1 SPRING
33 1 LINK ROD
1 SHIFT ASSEMBLY (LONG)
34
1 SHIFT ASSEMBLY (X-LONG)
35 1 ROLL PIN
36 1 SHIFT SHAFT LEVER-UPPER
37 1 BUSHING
38 1 WAVE WASHER
39 1 WASHER
Tighten and back off
40 1 NUT
1/4 turn
41 1 IDLE STABILIZING SHIFT KIT

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-71

POWERHEAD

Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft

95

95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 4A-72 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Throttle Lever and Shift Shaft

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
42 2 SCREW (6-32) 15 1.7
43 2 WASHER

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-73

POWERHEAD

Powerhead Installation On Driveshaft Housing

1. Install Lifting Eye (91-90455) into flywheel.

WARNING
BE SURE that Lifting Eye is threaded into flywheel a minimum of five (5) turns BE-
FORE lifting powerhead.
2. Using a hoist, lift powerhead high enough to allow removal of powerhead from repair
stand. Remove powerhead from repair stand, being careful not to damage drive shaft
housing gasket surface of powerhead.
3. Place a new gasket around powerhead studs and into position on base of powerhead.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT apply lubricant to top of driveshaft as this will prevent drive-
shaft from fully engaging into crankshaft.
4. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto driveshaft splines.
NOTE: Verify shift shaft is properly installed in gearcase/driveshaft housing before installing
powerhead.
5. Use hoist to lower powerhead onto driveshaft housing. It may be necessary to turn fly-
wheel (aligning crankshaft splines with driveshaft splines) so that powerhead will be fully
installed.

58890
a - Lifting Eye (90-90455)

Page 4A-74 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

6. Install 10 flat washers,and 10 locknuts which secure powerhead to exhaust extension

plate/driveshaft housing. Torque locknuts in 3 progressive steps until secured.
7. Disconnect hoist from Lifting Eye and remove Lifting Eye from flywheel.
8. Reinstall plastic cap into center of flywheel cover.

a a a

a
a

51846
a - Locknuts and Washers – Torque nuts to 20 lb. ft. (27 N m)

9. Connect water hose to fitting on exhaust adaptor plate.

a
b

58069
a - Water Hose
b - Fitting

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-75

POWERHEAD

10. Reconnect and/or reinstall the following:

d
e
a

58778

a - Remote Oil Tank Pressure Hose

b - Remote Control Harness
c - Power Trim Wires
d - Negative Battery Cable
e - Positive Battery Cable
f - SmartCraft Harness Connector

Page 4A-76 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

11. Reinstall the following:

58780
a - Oil Supply Hose

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-77

POWERHEAD

12. Reconnect water pressure sensor (GRAY) hose and speedometer pressure sensor
(BLACK) hose.

a
b

58773
a - Water Pressure Sensor
b - Speedometer Pressure Sensor
c - Speedometer Sensor Hose (BLACK)(for Digital Gauges)
d - Water Pressure Sensor Hose (GRAY)(for Digital Gauges)

Page 4A-78 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

13. Install bottom cowls.

58068
a - Bolts

14. Reconnect input fuel line, water pressure hose and speedometer hose.

b c
a

a - Input Fuel Hose

b - Water Pressure Hose (GRAY) (Analog Gauges)
c - Speedometer Hose (BLACK) (Analog Gauges)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-79

POWERHEAD

15. Install harness retainer and secure with 2 screws.

a a

57841

a - Screws
b - Retainer

16. Slide outboard shift lever into neutral position.

17. Install throttle cable.
18. Install locknut that secures shift cable latch assembly and install latch, flat washer, nylon
wear plate, spring and shift cable from control cable anchor bracket.

j b a
d

e f
g
h i 57838
a - Lock Nut (Throttle f - Nylon Wear Plate
Cable) g - Spring (Hidden)
b - Flat Washer h - Shift Cable
c - Shift Cable Latch i - Anchor Bracket
d - Lock Nut (Shift Cable) j - Throttle Cable
e - Flat Washer (Hidden
under nut)
Refer to Section 2 of this Service Manual “Timing/Synchronizing/Adjusting” for engine
set-up procedures.

Page 4A-80 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWERHEAD

Engine Break-in Procedure

IMPORTANT: Prior to initially starting engine, oil pump prime sequence must be acti-
vated using the Digital Diagnostic Terminal (DDT). Initiating the oil pump prime se-
quence will vacate any air in the oil output hose and mix oil with fuel in the vapor sepa-
rator thus preventing scoring of internal components during initial startup.

CAUTION
Severe damage to the engine can result by not complying with the Engine Break-In
Procedure.

Gasoline/Oil Break-In Mixture

MODELS WITH ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION (EFI)
Do not use pre-mixed gas and oil during break-in. Oil from the oil injection system will supply
adequate lubrication during engine break-in.
Break-In Procedure
FIRST HOUR
• Avoid continuous operation at idle speed for more then ten minutes.
• Run the engine the majority of time between 3000 and 4500 RPM approximately
three quarter throttle.
• Vary engine speed; change engine speed approximately every 2 minutes.
• Avoid trimming the outboard out (up) beyond a vertical trim position during operation.
• Allow engine to warm-up for 30-60 seconds.
• Short bursts of full throttle for periods up to 10 seconds are acceptable.
NEXT THREE HOURS
• Change engine speed every 10 minutes.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to always drive in a safe manner. Improper trim angle
of the outboard when driving at speed can be difficult and dangerous. The purpose of speci-
fying trim angle is to help guide the operator in determining how to put the proper load on
the engine. They are intended to be guidelines and do not suggest or require unsafe boat
operation.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4A-81

 COOLING

POWERHEAD
Section 4B - Cooling
Table of Contents
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2 Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-7
Water Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-8
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-9
Digital Port and Sstarboard Temperature Thermostat Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-9
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-3 Water Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-10
Analog Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-4
Water Pump Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 4B-11
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-5
Water Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4B-6
4B-6
Problem Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4B-12 4
B

90-883278 JULY 2001 Page 4B-1

COOLING

Specifications
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . 143 °F (61.7 °C)
Water Pressure
Idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI
(6.8 – 20.5 kPa)
Poppet Valve Opening 4.0 – 9.0 PSI
(27.4 – 61.6 kPa)
W.O.T. 12.0 PSI (82.1 kPa)
Minimum

c
b

58893
a - Analog Temperature Sensor (EFI c - Digital Temperature Sensor for Starboard
Models) and optional gauge sender Head
b - Digital Temperature Sensor for Port
Head

Page 4B-2 90-883278 JULY 2001

 COOLING

Digital Port and Starboard Temperature Sensors

An ohms test of the temperature sensors would be as follows:
Disconnect temperature sensor harness and check continuity with digital or analog ohm-
meter test leads between both connector pins. With engine at temperature (F°) indicated,
ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%. There should be no continuity between each
connector pin and ground.

Temperature Sensor Specifications

Fahrenheit Centigrade OHMS
257 125 340
248 120 390
239 115 450
230 110 517
221 105 592
212 100 680
203 95 787
194 90 915
185 85 1070
176 80 1255
167 75 1480
158 70 1752
149 65 2083
140 60 2488
131 55 2986
122 50 3603
113 45 4370
104 40 5327
95 35 6530
86 30 8056
77 25 10000
68 20 12493
59 15 15714
50 10 19903
41 5 25396
32 0 32654
14 –10 55319
5 –15 72940

90-883278 JULY 2001 Page 4B-3

 COOLING

Analog Temperature Sensor

TAN/BLACK sensor lead (in port analog temperature sensor) provides signal for optional
temperature gauge.
An ohms test of the analog temperature sensor (in port cylinder head) would be as follows:
Insert digital or analog ohmmeter test leads into both TAN/BLACK sensor leads. With en-
gine at temperature (F°) indicated, ohm readings should be as indicated ±10%.

270
255
240
225
210
195
Temperature Sensor
Temperature (F )

180
°
165
150
135
120
105
90
75
60
45
30
15
0
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2
Resistance (k
)
Temperature Sensor
Between Black and each TAN/BLK wire. No
Continuity
Between each lead and ground No
Continuity
Between each TAN/BLK wire Resistance will vary with temperature

Page 4B-4 90-883278 JULY 2001

 COOLING

Special Tools
1. DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multimeter P/N 91-854009A1

2. Water Pressure Gauge 91-79250A2

56725

90-883278 JULY 2001 Page 4B-5

COOLING

Water Flow
Description
Cooling water enters the cooling system through the lower unit water inlets. The pump
assembly forces water through the water tube and exhaust adapter plate passages filling
the power head central water chamber (located behind the exhaust cavity). Water enters
the exhaust cover cavity through 2 holes near the top of the exhaust cover.
Water exits the exhaust cover cavity through 4 slots (2 each side) filling the water pas-
sages around the cylinders. Water flows around each bank of cylinders to the top of the
cylinder block.
Water flow exiting the cylinder block is controlled by the thermostats (1 in each cylinder
head) and the poppet valve (located at the bottom starboard side of powerhead). At low
RPM (below 1500 RPM), the thermostats control water flow depending upon engine tem-
perature. When the thermostats are open, water passes through the cylinder heads and
exits to the drive shaft housing. At higher RPM (above 1500 RPM) the poppet valve will
control the water flow.
Water that passes through the poppet valve enters water passages in the adaptor plates.
Water passes through the adaptor plates into the driveshaft housing.
Water dumped into the drive shaft housing builds up a wall of water around the exhaust
tube. This performs 2 functions:
• Helps silence the exhaust
• Prevents air from being drawn into the pump
Water exits the engine in 3 locations:
• Excess water from the wall of water exits around anodes on the gear housing.
• A portion of the water that passes through the thermostats exits out the tell tail.
• Water exits through two 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) holes in the lower adaptor plate into the
exhaust.
To allow complete passage filling and to prevent steam pockets, all cooling passages are
interconnected. Small passages are incorporated to allow the cooling system to drain.

Page 4B-6 90-883278 JULY 2001

 COOLING

2.5 Litre V-6 Water Flow Diagram 2002 Models

8

6 10

11
9

4
3 2

5 17

16 58063

12 14

15 1. Water Inlet
2. Water Pump
3. Wall of Water – If water level height is insufficient, water pump may draw in air resulting in an overheated engine.
4. Water Tube
5. Main Water Feed to Powerhead from Water Tube
13 6. Water by-pass prevents air/steam pockets at top of powerhead
7. Cylinder Head Cover – Removed from head for illustration, normally part of head casting.
8. Thermostat (2) 143 °F (61.7 °C) – If stuck closed, engine will overheat at low speed. If stuck open, engine will not warm up at idle speed.
9. Poppet Valve – Controls water flow at high RPM. If poppet valve is stuck open at low rpm, the engine will not reach proper operating temperature (run cold) and will run rough at idle.
10. Primary water discharge into driveshaft housing.
11. Water Dump Holes for exhaust cooling (2 each) 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) – if holes are plugged, tuner pipe will melt and bearing carrier prop shaft seals will be damaged.
7
12. Water Pressure Sensor
13. Check Valve for powerhead flush
14. Water passing through thermostats dump into adaptor plate, then discharges down the exhaust.
15. Tell-Tale Outlet
16. Excess water from wall of of water around exhaust bucket exits around anodes.
17. Water exiting exhaust discharge.
8

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4B-7

COOLING

Notes:

Page 4B-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 COOLING

Troubleshooting
Thermostat Test
1. Inspect thermostat covers and cylinder head covers (thermostat opening) for cracks and
corrosion damage that could cause leakage. Replace parts as necessary.
2. Remove and discard gasket from each thermostat.
3. Wash thermostats with clean water.
4. Using a thermostat tester, similar to the one shown, test each thermostat as follows:
a. Open thermostat valve, then insert a thread between valve and thermostat body. Al-
low valve to close against thread.
b. Suspend thermostat (from thread) and thermometer inside tester so that neither
touches the container. Bottom of thermometer must be even with bottom of thermo-
stat to obtain correct temperature of thermostat opening.
c. Fill thermostat tester with water to cover thermostat.
d. Plug tester into electrical outlet.
e. Observe temperature at which thermostat begins to open. (Thermostat will drop off
thread, that was installed in Step “a”, when it starts to open.) Thermostat must begin
to open when temperature reaches 140 °-145 °F (60 °-63 °C).
f. Continue to heat water until thermostat is completely open.
g. Unplug thermostat tester.
h. Replace thermostat, if it fails to open at the specified temperature, or if it does not
fully open.
NOTE: BE SURE that water in thermostat tester is allowed to cool sufficiently [below 110 °F
(43.3 °C)] before testing the other thermostat.

51087
IMPORTANT: DO NOT operate engine without thermostats installed.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4B-9

COOLING

Water Pressure Check

Water pressure may be checked by attaching a test pressure gauge to the top of the engine
block.
A water pressure line (GRAY colored) is provided that exits at the front of the lower cowl.
A dash style gauge may be connected to this line to register water pressure.

WARNING
Shut off engine and refer to troubleshooting chart if water pressure is not within
specification. DO NOT exceed 3000 RPM in neutral.

Idle 1.0 – 3.0 PSI

(6.8 – 20.5 kPa)
Poppet Valve Opening 4 – 9 PSI
(27.4 – 61.6 kPa)
W.O.T. 12.0 PSI (82.1 kPa)
Minimum

Page 4B-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 COOLING

Water Pump Cleaning and Inspection

1. Inspect the water tube coupling for wear or damage. If necessary replace.

a - Water Tube Coupling

2. Inspect the water pump impeller for wear on the end, top and bottom of the impeller
blades. Replace the impeller if this condition is found.
3. Inspect for proper bonding between the hub and the impeller. Replace the impeller if im-
proper bonding is found.

a b

a - Hub
b - Impeller
4. Inspect the impeller blades to see if they are cracked, burnt, hard or deformed. Replace
the impeller if the blades are in this condition.
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be dis-
regarded when inspecting cover and plate. The depth of the groove will not affect wa-
ter pump output.
5. Replace cover if plastic is melted from excessive heat (lack of water). Replace stainless
insert and/or face plate if grooves (other than impeller sealing bead groove) are more
than 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) deep.
a
c

b
d
57408
a - Water Pump Face Plate
b - Sealing Groove (disregard)
c - Water Pump Cover
d - Stainless Insert [discard if grooves exceed 0.010 in. (0.254 mm)]
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that the water pump impeller be replaced whenever
the gearcase is removed for maintenance. However, if it is necessary to re-use the
impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation as premature impeller failure
will occur.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 4B-11

COOLING

Problem Diagnosis
Condition Recommended Range Possible Cause
Pressure below specification @ 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) •Poppet valve spring defective
idle (weak, broken, missing)
•Defective poppet valve seal
•Thermostat stuck open
•Severe internal leak
•Low output water pump
•Inlet restriction

Pressure above 5 psi (34.2kPa) 1.0 – 3.0 PSI (6.8 – 20.5 kPa) •Plugged poppet by-pass pas-
@ idle sage or tell-tale
Pressure does not drop between 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) be- •Wrong poppet valve spring
1000 – 2500 RPM indicating pop- tween 1000 – 2200 RPM •Low output water pump
pet valve has opened •Inlet restriction
•Poppet valve vent hole plugged
or restricted
•Severe internal leak
•Defective poppet valve seal
Poppet valve flutter/water pres- 4 – 9 PSI (27.4 – 61.6 kPa) be- •Wrong poppet valve spring
sure drop does not stabilize prior tween 1000 – 2200 RPM •Low output water pump
to 2500 RPM •Inlet restriction
•Broken diaphragm in poppet
valve
•Severe internal leak
•Defective poppet valve seal
Pressure is below minimum spec- 12 PSI (54.9 – 68.5kPa) •Inlet restriction
ification @ W.O.T. •Engine mounted too high on
transom
•Engine trimmed out too far
•Configuration of boat bottom in-
terfering with adequate flow of
water to coolant inlets
•Severe internal leak
•Low output water pump

Pressure higher than normal @ Maximum pressure – 23 PSI •Outlet water passages restricted.
W.O.T., but engine still indicates (157.4 kPa) •Steam pocket has formed at top
overheat condition of powerhead due to lack of cool-
ing water

Page 4B-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

MID-SECTION
Section 5A – Clamp/Swivel Brackets & Driveshaft Housing
Table of Contents
Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2 Drive Shaft Housing and Dyna-Float
Transom Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube . . . . . . 5A-6 Removal and Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-8
Reassembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-11

5
A

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-1

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm

15 14

13 95
12 17
11
10
21
A
16

B
95 18

9
95

8 24
95 25
26
1
2 3

29
23
7 28
22
7

30

95 27

3 5
4
95

19

20

7 Loctite 271
95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 5A-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Swivel Bracket and Steering Arm

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 SWIVEL BRACKET ASSEMBLY (BLACK)
2 1 OIL SEAL (LOWER)
3 2 BUSHING
4 1 SPACER
5 1 O-RING
6 2 GREASE FITTING 75 8.5
7 2 BUSHING
8 1 THRUST WASHER
9 2 SCREW (7/16-20 x 7-1/2 IN.)
10 2 MOUNT
11 2 WASHER
12 2 WASHER
13 2 NUT 50 68
14 1 STEERING LINK ASSEMBLY
15 1 SCREW (3/8-24 x 1-1/4 IN.) 20 27
16 2 NUT See Note
17 2 WASHER
18 1 SWIVEL PIN AND STEERING ARM (BLACK)
19 1 BOTTOM YOKE (BLACK)
20 1 RETAINING RING
21 1 BUMPER
22 2 SCREW (1/4-28 x 1/2 IN.) 100 11.5
23 1 TRIM SENDER ASSEMBLY
24 2 SCREW 15 1.7
25 2 LOCKWASHER
26 2 WASHER
27 2 STRIKER PLATE
28 2 LOCKWASHER
29 2 NUT 23 31
30 1 DECAL-Serial Number Overlaminate
NOTE: A – Torque nut to 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) and then back off 1/4 turn.
NOTE: B – Torque nut to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-3

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Transom Brackets

95

17 16 95
95
5
6
3 14
2
95 4
95 15
14

13
12
18

1
95

7
8

9
10
11

95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 5A-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Transom Brackets
TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (STARBOARD)(BLACK)
2 1 TRANSOM BRACKET (PORT) (BLACK)
3 1 GREASE FITTING (PORT) 80 9
4 1 TILT TUBE
5 1 NUT (1 IN.-14) 45 61
6 1 O-RING
7 2 WAVE WASHER
8 1 NUT (7/8-14) 45 61
9 4 BOLT
10 4 WASHER
11 4 NUT
12 1 TILT LOCK LEVER ASSEMBLY
13 1 SPRING
14 2 BUSHING
15 1 SPRING
16 1 KNOB
17 1 GROOVE PIN
18 1 PIN

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-5

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube

26

36
25

23

31
32
95

30 95 24
62

34
23
29
96 22
33 36

21
28
19
7
20

35 1

18
27
3 17
4
12
7 Loctite 271
5 11
23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 13 6
36 P80 Rubber Lubricant 8
(Purchase Locally)
14 10
2
16
62 Permabond 105 Cyanacrylate Adhesive 15 7 9
(Purchase Locally) 33
95 2-4-C with Teflon
96 Loctite Superbonder 454 Gel (Purchase Locally)
33 Loctite “RCA/680” Retaining Compound

Page 5A-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Drive Shaft Housing and Exhaust Tube

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm
1 DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING (LONG)
1
1 DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING (X-LONG)
2 2 STUD
3 2 SCREW (1/2-20 x 6 IN.)
4 1 GROUND WIRE
5 2 LOWER MOUNT
6 2 WASHER
7 1 GROUND WIRE
8 2 NUT 50 68
9 1 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3/8 IN.)
10 2 WASHER
11 2 NUT 50 68
12 2 CLAMP
13 4 SCREW (5/16-18 x 1-1/4 IN.) 22 30
14 2 COVER
15 4 SCREW (12-24 x 5/8 IN.) 17 2
16 4 NUT 25 34
17 1 WASHER
18 1 NUT 57 77
19 4 WASHER
20 4 NUT 23 31
21 1 IDLE EXHAUST BOOT
22 1 PLUG
23 1 GASKET
24 1 SEAL (LOWER)
25 1 EXHAUST TUBE
26 1 SEAL (UPPER)
27 1 EXHAUST EXTENSION
1 WATER TUBE (LONG)
28
1 WATER TUBE (X-LONG)
29 1 PLATE ASSEMBLY
30 1 SEAL
31 1 BRACKET
32 12 SCREW (10-16 x 1/2 IN.) 80 9
33 2 DOWEL PIN
34 1 SEAL
35 6 SCREW (1/4-20 x 3/4 IN.) 60 7
36 1 GASKET

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-7

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

Drive Shaft Housing and Dyna-Float Suspension

Refer to “Powerhead Removal” section to remove powerhead. Refer to “Lower Unit
Removal” in this section to remove lower unit.
Removal and Disassembly
1. Remove shift shaft from driveshaft housing by pulling straight up on shaft.
2. Remove 5 bolts which secure exhaust extension plate to drive shaft housing. After
bolts are removed, lift exhaust extension plate off drive shaft housing.
3. Remove screws, which secure lower mount covers to drive shaft housing, then re-
move covers.

c a

ff

bb d
d

e
57729
a - Shift Shaft Linkage
b - Exhaust Extension Plate
c - Exhaust Plate to Drive Shaft Housing Bolts
d - Driveshaft Housing Plate
e - Lower Mount Cover (One Each Side)
f - Mounting Bracket Bolts (3)

Page 5A-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

SHIFT LINKAGE ASSEMBLY

d
d
d
cc g
ff

ee

aa bb
a - Shift Shaft Assembly
b - Bushing
c - Lock Nut
d - Washer (2)
e - Bushing (Hidden)
f - Spring
g - Guide Block

1. Remove upper mount nuts and flat washers.

aa

a - Upper Mount Nuts

2. Lift driveshaft housing plate off housing.

aa

b 51850
a - Drive Shaft Housing Plate
b - Drive Shaft Housing

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-9

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

3. Remove water tube from driveshaft housing plate.

4. Exhaust diffuser is secured to housing plate with 6 bolts. Remove bolts, then remove
diffuser.
5. Pull exhaust tube out of drive shaft housing.

b
ca

aa

d
b 51850

51857

a - Water Tube
b - Exhaust Diffuser
c - Exhaust Tube
d - Drive Shaft Housing

6. Remove all gasket material from driveshaft housing and related components.
7. Remove bolts, which secure lower mount retainers to drive shaft housing, and remove
retainers.
8. Remove rubber caps from lower mount bolts.

a
a

51855
a - Bolts
b - Lower Mount Retainer (One Each Side)

Page 5A-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

9. Remove lower mount nuts.

aa

51855
a - Lower Mount Nuts
b - Lower Mount (1 each side)

10. Remove driveshaft housing from swivel bracket by pulling alternately from top to bot-
tom on housing.
11. Remove upper and lower mounts by lifting them out of driveshaft housing.

Reassembly and Installation

1. Apply a thin coat of 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto inside portion of exhaust
tube seal.
2. Install exhaust tube seal into driveshaft housing with tapered side of seal facing up.

bb

aa

51856
a - Exhaust Tube Seal
b - Driveshaft Housing

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-11

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

3. Push exhaust tube boots onto tabs on each side of exhaust tube.
4. Position exhaust tube in drive shaft housing and push down on tube until boots rest
in grooves on inside of housing.
5. Position driveshaft housing to plate gasket on top of housing.
6. Install an exhaust diffuser gasket and exhaust diffuser onto plate, then secure both
to plate with 6 bolts. Clean bolts with Loctite 7649 Primer and then apply Loctite 271
to bolt threads. Torque bolts to 60 Ib. in. (7.0 Nm).

bb
b

ca

51856 51857

a - Exhaust Tube
b - Exhaust Tube Boots
c - Exhaust Diffuser Gasket
d - Exhaust Diffuser

7. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto water tube seal.
8. Install water tube seal into driveshaft housing plate with plastic end of seal facing up
and install water tube.

bb
51856
a - Water Tube Seal
b - Driveshaft Housing Plate

Page 5A-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

9. Position drive shaft housing plate on top of housing.

10. Apply a thin coat of Perfect Seal onto metal portion of upper dyna-float mounts.
11. Position mounts on drive shaft housing plate.
12. Install a rubber washer onto each upper mount, followed by a metal washer.
cc bb

aa

d
d
b
d
d cc

51857
a - Water Tube Seal (Plastic End)
b - Dyna-Float Mounts
c - Rubber Washers
d - Metal Washer

13. Install a ground strap onto one of the lower mount mounting bolts.
NOTE: Apply Perfect Seal along length of lower mount bolts.
14. Insert a mounting bolt thru the short end of each lower mount.
15. Position a mount on each lower side of driveshaft housing.
16. Install a flat washer over each lower mounting bolt.
17. Position a bumper on steering arm between mounting bolts.
18. Start upper mounting bolts in upper mounts and align lower mounting bolts with holes
in swivel pin yoke. Slide driveshaft housing up against yoke and bumper.
19. Secure upper mounts to steering arm with flat washers and self-locking nuts. Torque
nuts to 50 Ib. ft. (68.0 Nm).
20. Install ground strap (if equipped) between port lower mount bolt and swivel bracket.
21. Secure lower mounts to swivel pin yoke with self-locking nuts. Torque nuts to 50 Ib.
ft. (68.0 Nm). Place a rubber cap over each lower mounting bolt head.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5A-13

CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS & DRIVESHAFT HOUSING

22. Install lower mount retainers and secure each retainer with 2 bolts. (Secure ground
strap with the nearest retainer bolt.) Torque bolts to 160 Ib. in. (18.0 Nm).

fb
a
ea

c gc
dd 51855
f
b 51855
a - Lower Mount
b - Nut (2) [Torque to 50 lb. ft. (68.0 Nm)]
c - Rubber Cap
d - Ground Strap (only one side)
e - Lower Mount Retainer
f - Bolts (2) [Torque to 160 lb. in. (18.0 Nm)]
g - Ground Strap

23. Install lower mount covers and secure each cover with 2 screws.
24. Install exhaust extension plate on driveshaft housing with shift shaft assembly. Secure
extension plate to drive shaft housing with 5 bolts.

e c

aa
h

d f
b

g
51855
a - Cover (One Each Side)
b - Screws (Two for Each Cover)
c - Shift Shaft Linkage
d - Exhaust Extension Plate
e - Exhaust Plate to Driveshaft Housing Bolts, Torque to 25 Ib. ft. (34 Nm)
f - Drive Shaft Housing Plate
g - Lower Mount Cover (One Each Side)
h - Mounting Bracket Bolts, Torque to 40 Ib. ft. (54 Nm)

Page 5A-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

MID-SECTION
Section 5B – Power Trim
Table of Contents
Power Trim Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-21
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2 Testing Power Trim System With Test
Power Trim Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-4 Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23
Power Trim Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-6 “UP” Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-23
Power Trim - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 “DOWN” Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-26
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Hydraulic Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-28
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-7 Trim Rod End Cap Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-29
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Tilt Ram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-30
Tilting Outboard Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-8 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-31
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9 Scraper Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-34
Striker Plate Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-9 Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Anode Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 Trim Pump Motor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Trim Indicator Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-10 Motor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-38
Check, Fill and Purge - Power Trim System . . 5B-10
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-39
Motor Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-40
5
Power Trim System with Relays and 2 Wire Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-44 B
Trim Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-14 Reassembly - Motor and Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-46
Electrical System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Priming Power Trim System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47
General Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Trim Sender Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-47
Troubleshooting the “Down Circuit” . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-15 Trim Indicator Gauge Needle Adjustment . . . . 5B-48
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-16 Trim Indicator Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-49
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits
(All Circuits Inoperative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-17
Power Trim Assembly Removal and Installation . 5B-18
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-18

Power Trim Specifications

NOTE: Maximum acceptable amount of leak down in 24 hours is 1 in. (25.4 mm)

Test Reading
Trim “UP” 1300 PSI (91kg/cm2)
Maximum Pressure
Trim “DOWN” 500 PSI (35kg/cm2)
Minimum Pressure

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-1

POWER TRIM

Special Tools
1. Alignment Tool 91-11230

17238
2. Trim Rod Removal Tool 91-44486A1

51337

3. Trim Rod Guide Removal Tool 91-44487A1

51337
4. Power Trim Test Gauge Kit 91-52915A6

73835

Page 5B-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

5. Adaptor Fitting 91-82278A2 and 91-82278A3

54458
6. Spanner Wrench 91-74951

51337

7. Multi-Meter DVA Tester 91-99750A1 or DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter

91-854009A1

a b

a - Multi-Meter DVA Tester 91-99750A1

b - DMT 2000 Digital Tachometer Multi-meter 91-854009A1

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-3

POWER TRIM

Power Trim Components

109
36
6 33
34
35
5 5
6
5 5 6 37
6 6 4 20
6
7 110
38
18
21
13
13 19

13 16
3 17
15
8 13
13 13
14
10 13
9
9
13
94 13 32

11
26 13
25
1 12

2
3
31 7
30
27

24
29 13
28

7 Loctite 271 22 23
94 Anti-Corrosion Grease
109 GM Silicone Sealer
110 Power Trim & Steering Fluid

Page 5B-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Power Trim Components

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
– 1 POWER TRIM ASSEMBLY–Complete
1 1 MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY
2 9 PIPE PLUG
3 1 TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
4 1 PISTON ROD
5 1 GUIDE KIT
6 1 REPAIR KIT
7 1 CHECK VALVE KIT
8 2 GUIDE ASSEMBLY
1 PISTON/ROD ASSEMBLY (PORT)
9
1 PISTON/ROD ASSEMBLY (STBD.)
10 1 TRIM FILTER ASSEMBLY
11 1 VALVE ASSEMBLY
12 1 E RING
13 1 O RING KIT
14 1 PUMP
15 1 PLUG ASSEMBLY
16 4 SCREW
17 4 WASHER
18 1 COVER
19 1 DRIVE SHAFT
TRIM MOTOR
20 1
(Breakdown on Power Trim Motor)
2 SCREW (LONG) 80 9
21
2 SCREW (SHORT) 80 9
22 1 SHAFT ASSEMBLY
23 2 PIPE PLUG
24 1 GROOVE PIN
25 1 GROOVE PIN
26 1 SHAFT
27 1 ANODE ASSEMBLY
28 2 SCREW (M6 x 1 x 25) 70 8
29 2 WASHER
30 6 SCREW (M10 x 1.5 x 30) 45 61
31 6 WASHER
32 1 DECAL-Caution power trim
33 1 SCREW (10-16 x 3/5 IN.)
34 1 C WASHER
35 2 CLAMP
36 1 TUBING
37 1 STA-STRAP
38 2 FILTER SCREENS
NOTE: Lubricate all o-rings with Power Trim and Steering Fluid.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-5

POWER TRIM

Power Trim Motor

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb.in. lb.ft. N·m
– 1 POWER TRIM MOTOR
1 1 BRUSH AND SEAL KIT
2 1 ARMATURE KIT
3 1 END FRAME (Complete)

Page 5B-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Power Trim - General Information

Description
The Power Trim System consists of an electric motor, pressurized fluid reservoir, pump,
tilt cylinder, and two trim rams.
The remote control (or trim panel) has switches that trim the outboard “Up” or “Down” and
tilt the engine for “Trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed and tilted under power or
when the outboard is not running.
Trimming Characteristics
NOTE: Because hull designs react differently in varying water conditions, varying the trim
position will often improve the ride and boat handling. When trimming from a mid-trim po-
sition (with outboard trim tab in a straight fore and aft position), expect the following:
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (OUT):

WARNING
Excessive trim “Out” may reduce the stability of some high speed hulls. To cor-
rect instability, reduce the power gradually and trim the outboard “In” slightly be-
fore resuming high speed operation. A rapid reduction in power will result in a
sudden change of steering torque and may cause additional boat instability.
Will lift boat bow, increasing top speed.
Transfers steering torque harder to port (left) on installations below 23 in. (584.2 mm) tran-
som height.
Increases gearcase clearance over submerged objects.
Excess trim can cause “porpoising” and/or ventilation.

WARNING
Excessive outboard trim angle will result in insufficient water supply causing wa-
ter pump and/or powerhead overheating damage. Insure water level is above wa-
ter intake holes whenever outboard is running.
The “Up” circuit actuates the up solenoid (under outboard cowl) and closes the motor cir-
cuit. The electric motor drives the pump, forcing fluid thru passageways into the up side
of the trim cylinders.
The trim cylinders position the outboard at the desired trim angle in the 20 degree maxi-
mum trim range. The system will not allow the outboard to be trimmed above the 20 de-
gree trim range as long as the engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM.
The outboard can be trimmed above the 20 degree maximum trim angle (for shallow wa-
ter operation, etc.), by keeping the engine RPM below 2000. If the RPM increases over
2000, propeller thrust (if propeller is deep enough) will cause the trim system to return the
outboard to the 20 degree maximum trim position.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-7

POWER TRIM

TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (IN):

WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may result in undesirable and/or unsafe
steering conditions. Test for handling characteristics after any adjustment is
made to the trim angle (and tilt pin location).
Aids planing, particularly with heavy loads.
Improves ride in choppy water conditions.
Excess trim “In” can cause “bow steer” (boat veers to left or right).
Transfers steering torque to starboard (right).
Improves acceleration to planing speed.
The “Down” circuit actuates the down solenoid (under engine cowl) and closes the motor
circuit. The electric motor drives the pump in the opposite direction as the up circuit, forc-
ing fluid thru passageways into the “down” side of the tilt ram. The tilt ram moves the en-
gine down to the desired position.
Trailering Outboard
The “Up” circuit first moves the trim cylinders; when the trim cylinders extend fully, the tilt
ram extends to tilt the outboard to the full up position for trailering.
Before the boat is trailered, the operator should check for clearance between the outboard
skeg and pavement to prevent damage to skeg from striking pavement.
If the outboard must be tilted for clearance between skeg and pavement, a device such
as a “Transom Saver” should be installed to prevent stress to boat transom from outboard
weight while the boat/outboard are being trailered.
Tilting Outboard Manually
WARNING
Before opening the manual release valve knob, insure all persons are clear of out-
board as outboard will drop to full “Down” when valve is opened.
The outboard can be raised or lowered manually by opening the manual release valve
3 to 4 turns counterclockwise. Close manual release valve to hold outboard at the desired
tilt position.

51353
a
a - Manual Release Valve

Page 5B-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Trim “In” Angle Adjustment

WARNING
Boat operation with outboard trimmed to the full “In” trim angle [not using the
trim angle adjustment bolt (a)] at planing speed may result in undesirable and/or
unsafe steering conditions. A water test for handling/steering conditions is re-
quired after any trim angle adjustments.
IMPORTANT: Some boat/motor combinations not using the trim angle adjustment
pin (a) and trimmed to the full “In” trim angle position may not exhibit any undesir-
able and/or unsafe handling and/or steering characteristics at planing speed. If so,
not using the trim angle adjustment bolt may be advantageous to acceleration and
planing. A water test is required to determine if these characteristics apply to a par-
ticular boat/motor combination.

51353
a
a - Trim Angle Adjustment Bolt

Striker Plate Replacement

Visually inspect striker plates and replace if worn excessively.

c
b

aa

27930
a - Striker Plate (2)
b - Lockwasher
c - Locknut. Torque to 80 lb. in. (9 Nm)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-9

POWER TRIM

Anode Plate
Anode plate is a self-sacrificing alloy plate that is consumed gradually by corrosion while
providing protection to the midsection and power trim from galvanic corrosion. Replace
anode plate when it is 50% consumed.

aa 27932
a - Anode Plate

IMPORTANT: Do not paint or place protective coating on anode plate, or corrosion

protection function will be lost.
Trim Indicator Gauge
A Quicksilver Trim Indicator Gauge accessory kit is available for the power trim sender
(if not previously installed).
Check, Fill and Purge - Power Trim System
TO CHECK:

CAUTION
Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever before checking fluid
level. System is pressurized. Extend trim and tilt rams fully to depressurize sys-
tem.
Remove fill plug and O-ring. System is full when oil level is present at filler hole. Tighten
fill plug securely.
NOTE: Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA, Dexron II or Dexron III may be
used.

51368
a - Tilt Lock Lever

Page 5B-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

TO FILL:
IMPORTANT: This trim system is pressurized. Remove “Fill” plug only when out-
board is tilted to the full “Up” position or the trim/tilt rams are fully extended. Re-
tighten “Fill” plug before tilting outboard down or retracting tilt/trim rams. Remove
“Fill” plug and O-ring. System is full when oil level is present at fill hole. Tighten
“Fill” plug securely.

aa
b

51344

a - Fill Plug and O-ring (remove to fill system, tighten securely)

b - Oil Can (fill system with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid)
c - Tilt Lock Lever (engage to support engine in “Up” position)

TO PURGE:
IMPORTANT: Fill plug and O-ring must be tightened securely before purging sys-
tem.
IMPORTANT: Run Trim System in short “jogs” until pump is primed and trim sys-
tem moves. If trim motor is run without priming pump, driveshaft failure could re-
sult.
Cycle outboard through entire trim/tilt range 4 times. Check fluid level after purging sys-
tem.
Push down on outboard when trim rams are slightly extended. If rams retract more than
1/8 in. (3.2 mm), air is present in system. Cycle system again and check fluid level.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-11

POWER TRIM

Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT: Determine if Electrical or Hydraulic problem exists.
IMPORTANT: Acceptable power trim leak down should not exceed 1 in. (25.4 mm)
(when measured at the tilt ram) in a 24 hour period.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
IMPORTANT: Make one correction at a time. Check operation of trim system before
proceeding to the next check.

CONDITION OF TRIM SYSTEM PROBLEM

A. Trim motor runs; trim system does not move up or down. 1, 2, 5, 10
B. Does not trim full down. Up trim OK. 2, 3, 4
C. Does not trim full up. Down trim OK. 1, 6
D. Partial or “Jerky” down/up. 1, 3
E. “Thump” noise when shifting. 2, 3, 6, 7
F. Does not trim under load. 5,8, 9,10
G. Does not hold trim position under load. 2, 5, 6
H. Trail out when backing off from high speed. 3, 4
I. Leaks down and does not hold trim. 2, 5, 7
J. Trim motor working hard and trims slow up and down. 8, 9
K. Trims up very slow. 1, 2, 8, 9
L. Starts to trim up from full down position when “IN” trim button is depressed. 3, 4
M. Trim position will not hold in reverse. 3, 4
PROBLEM
1. Low oil level.
2. Pump assembly faulty.
3. Tilt ram piston ball not seated (displaced, dirt, nickel seat).
4. Tilt ram piston O-ring leaking or cut.
5. Manual release valve leaking (check condition of O-rings) (Valve not fully closed).
6. Lower check valve not seating in port side trim ram.
7. Upper check valve not seating in port side trim ram.
8. Check condition of battery.
22
9. Replace motor assembly. 10
11
10. Broken motor/pump drive shaft.

33

7
44

55
External Mounted Hydraulic 6
System 51491

Page 5B-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

CONDITION OF TRIM SYSTEM PROBLEM

A. Trim motor does not run when trim button is depressed. 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
B. Trim system trims opposite of buttons. 3
C. Cowl mounted trim buttons do not activate trim system. 2, 4, 5, 6, 7

PROBLEM
1. Battery low or discharged.
2. Open circuit in trim wiring.
3. Wiring reversed in remote control.
4. Wire harness corroded through.
5. Internal motor problem (brushes, shorted armature).
6. Blown fuse(s).
7. Trim switch failure.
8. Verify relays are functioning correctly.
POWER TRIM RELAY TEST PROCEDURE
The trim motor relay system used on permanent magnet trim systems connect each of
the two wires from the trim motor to either ground or positive in order to allow the motor
to run in both directions.
If the motor will not run in the UP direction, it could be either the UP relay is not making
contact to 12 volts OR the DOWN relay is not making contact to ground. The opposite is
true if the system will not run DOWN. When the system is not energized, both relays
should connect the heavy motor leads to ground.
To test which relay is faulty if the trim system does not operate in one direction:
1. Disconnect the heavy gauge pump wires from the trim control relay.
2. Check for continuity between the heavy leads from the trim relays to ground.

Ohmmeter Resistance Scale Reading

Leads Between (Ohms) (R x 1)
GREEN and Ground 0 Full Continuity (Rx1)
BLUE and Ground 0 Full Continuity (Rx1)

Replace the relay that does not have continuity.

3. Connect a voltmeter to the heavy BLUE lead and to ground. You should have 12 volts
on the BLUE lead when the UP switch is pushed. You should should also have 12 volts
on the GREEN lead when the DOWN switch is pushed. Replace the relay that does
not switch the lead to positive.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-13

POWER TRIM

Power Trim System with Relays and 2 Wire Trim Motor

7
4

3
9

8 6

53794
UP Relay DOWN Relay
BLK = Black
BLU = Blue
10 GRN = Green
RED = Red
WHT = White

Page 5B-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Electrical System Troubleshooting

General Checks
Before troubleshooting the Power Trim electrical system, check the following:
1. Check for disconnected wires.
2. Make certain all connections are tight and corrosion free.
3. Check that plug-in connectors are fully engaged.
4. Make certain battery is fully charged.
Refer to the preceding four wiring diagrams for connection points when troubleshooting
the electrical systems (Connection points are specified by number.)

Troubleshooting the “Down Circuit”

Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 1 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Down” trim button.

No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated: Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 4 and black lead to ground.
Point 3. Depress “Down” trim button. If
battery voltage is indicated, wire
is open between Points 4 and 1.

Battery Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated:

•Connect Voltmeter red lead to There is an open circuit be-
Point 2. tween Point 3 and positive (+)
•Depress “Down” trim button. battery terminal.
•Check for loose or corroded
connections.
•Check wires for open circuit.

Battery Voltage Indicated:

•Test UP relay.
Refer to page 5B-13 for relay No Voltage Indicated:
test procedure. Relay Switch is defective.

No Voltage Indicated:
Relay good: Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indi-
•Pump motor wiring is defec-
cated, trim switch is faulty. If no
tive.
battery voltage, check for loose
•Pump motor is defective. or corroded connection at Point
5 or open circuit in wire supply-
ing current to Point 5.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-15

POWER TRIM

Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit

Connect Voltmeter red lead to

Point 8 and black lead to ground.

Depress the “Up” trim button.

No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated: Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Connect Voltmeter red lead to Point 7 and black lead to ground.
Point 9. Depress “Up” trim button. If bat-
tery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 7 and 8.

Battery Voltage Indicated: No Voltage Indicated:

•Connect Voltmeter red lead to There is an open circuit be-
Point 6. tween Point 9 and positive (+)
•Depress “Up” trim button. battery terminal.
•Check for loose or corroded
connections.
•Check wires for open circuit.

Battery Voltage Indicated:

•Test DOWN relay.
Refer to page 5B-13 for relay
test procedure. No Voltage Indicated:
Relay Switch is defective.

Relay good: No Voltage Indicated:

•Pump motor wiring is defec-
tive. Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indi-
•Pump motor is defective. cated, trim switch is faulty. If no
battery voltage, check for loose
or corroded connection at Point
5 or open circuit in wire supply-
ing current to Point 5.

Page 5B-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits

(All Circuits Inoperative)
Check in-line fuse (under cowl)
to see if fuse is blown.

Blown Fuse: Fuse Not Blown:

•Correct problem that caused Connect Voltmeter red lead to
fuse to blow. Point 3 and black lead to
ground. Battery voltage should
•Replace fuse.
be indicated.

Battery Voltage Indicated:

No Voltage Indicated: •Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 8 and black lead to
•Check battery leads for poor ground.
connections or open circuits. •Depress “Up” trim button and
check for battery voltage.
•Check battery charge.

No Voltage Indicated: Battery Voltage Indicated:

Connect red Voltmeter lead to •Check black ground wires for
Point 5, and black lead to poor connection or poor
ground. ground, Point 10.
•Pump motor is faulty. Refer to
“Motor and Electrical Tests/
Repair”, following.

Battery Voltage Indicated:

No Voltage Indicated:
Trim switch is faulty or there is an
Check that voltage is being open circuit in wires (green-white,
supplied to control by performing blue-white) between trim buttons
the following checks: and trim pump.
•DO NOT start engine. •Check trim switch.
•Turn ignition switch to “Run” •Check all trim harness con-
position. nectors for loose or corroded
•Check for voltage at any instru- connections.
ment, using a Voltmeter. •Check for pinched or severed
wires.

No Voltage Indicated:
Red wire is open between Point Battery Voltage Indicated:
3 and red terminal on back of
the ignition switch. There is an open circuit in wire
between Point 5 and Red ter-
•Check for loose or corroded
minal on the back of the ignition
connections.
switch.
•Check for open in wire.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-17

POWER TRIM

Power Trim Assembly Removal and Installation

Removal
1. Remove clamps on transom bracket to free power trim wiring.
2. Raise outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever.

ba

aa
51377
50605
a - Clamps
b - Tilt Lock Lever
WARNING
Failure to support outboard as shown could result in personal injury and/or dam-
age to outboard or boat.

cc
bb

51346
cc
a - Tilt Lock Lever
b - Support Tool
c - Retaining Clips
IMPORTANT: Support outboard as shown above to prevent engine from tipping
when power trim retaining pin is removed.

Page 5B-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

SUPPORT TOOL
3/8 in. diameter metal rod (a used shift shaft works well)
14”

aa a
2”

1/4”
a - Drill holes for retaining clips

METRIC CONVERSION
14 in. = 35.56 cm. 2 in. = 50.8 mm
3/8 in. = 9.5 mm. 1/4 in. = 6.35 mm.

CAUTION
Disconnect battery cables at battery before removing power trim wires from sole-
noids.
3. Disconnect power trim wires at solenoids (BLUE, GREEN, and BLACK) or if relay
style, disconnect (BLUE and GREEN) bullet connector harness.
4. Open filler cap and release any remaining pressure in the system.
IMPORTANT: Outboards equipped with thru-the-tilt-tube steering - remove steer-
ing link arm from end of steering cable and cable retaining nut from tilt tube.

ba
51339 51354
a - Filler Cap
b - Retaining Nut

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-19

POWER TRIM

5. Remove outboard transom mounting bolts, and loosen tilt tube nut until nut is flush
with end of tilt tube thread.
6. Remove 3 screws and washers and move starboard transom bracket.

bb

c d

aa
51375 51375
a - Transom Mount Bolts (2)
b - Tilt Tube Nut (flush with end of thread)
c - Screws (3)
d - Washers (3)
IMPORTANT: Cross pin (a) should not be reused. Replace with new cross pin.
7. Drive out cross pin, push out upper swivel pin, and remove 3 screws and washers re-
taining trim system. Remove system from outboard.
bb
a

cc

51339
a - Cross Pin
b - Upper Swivel Pin
c - Port Transom Bracket Screws and Washers (3). Remove to Release Trim
System from Outboard.

Page 5B-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Installation
1. Paint any exposed metal surfaces to prevent corrosion.
2. Apply Loctite 271 to screws. Install trim system, starboard transom bracket, and tilt
tube nut.
3. Use a 12 volt power source to extend tilt ram up to align upper swivel shaft hole and
end of ram. Connect trim motor wires [BLUE wire to POSITIVE (+), BLACK wire to
NEGATIVE (–)]. If ram extends too far, retract ram by connecting GREEN wire to POS-
ITIVE (+).
4. Install Upper Swivel Pin with slotted end to left (port) side of engine.
cc

e
b
da
fc

a b

51375
a - Screw (6) Torque to 40 lb. ft. (54.0 N·m)
b - Lockwasher (6) Install one per screw
c - Tilt Tube Nut
d - Upper Swivel Pin
e - Slotted end
f - Cross hole (in line with slotted end)

IMPORTANT: Cross pin should not be reused. Install a new pin.

5. Position slot on end of swivel shaft in line with hole in tilt ram end. Insert a punch into
tilt ram hole to align cross hole in upper swivel shaft. Tap new cross pin in until flush.
aa

c b

a - Upper Swivel Shaft (Slot is in line with cross hole)

b - Chamfered End of Hole (Faces away from transom)
c - Retaining Pin
d - Tilt Ram End

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-21

POWER TRIM

6. Connect trim motor wires to solenoids. Refer to Wiring Diagrams in this manual. Route
trim wires as specified in this manual.
NOTE: The 2 power leads going to the trim motor should be encapsulated with conduit
tubing. If tubing has not been previously installed, order 32-828547-353 and cut to ap-
propriate length.

56921 56922
a - Conduit Tubing

7. Apply marine sealer to shanks of mount bolts and install transom mount bolts.
IMPORTANT: Do not use an impact driver to tighten transom mount bolts.
Apply marine sealer to threads of mount bolts. Secure with flat washers and locknuts. Be
sure installation is watertight.
8. Tighten tilt tube nut securely.
IMPORTANT: Outboards equipped with thru-the-tilt-tube steering: Tighten steering
cable retaining nut securely to tilt tube.

aa 51354
a - Steering Cable Retaining Nut

9. Apply Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene on all electrical connections.

Page 5B-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

WARNING
Electrical wires passing through cowl openings must be protected from chafing
or being cut. Follow the recommended procedures outlined in Section 1D of this
Manual. Failure to protect wires as described could result in electrical system fail-
ure and/or injury to occupants of boat.
Testing Power Trim System With Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6)
IMPORTANT: This test will not locate problems in the trim system. The test will
show if the system is correct after a repair. If minimum pressures are not obtain-
able, the trim system requires additional repair.
“UP” Pressure Check
IMPORTANT: Insure battery is fully charged before performing tests.
1. Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever.
2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure from reservoir.
3. Remove circlip securing manual release valve and unscrew release valve from trim
assembly.
NOTE: A small amount of trim fluid may drip from manual release valve hole. Place a suit-
able container under trim assembly to collect any leakage.
NOTE: Assemble test adaptor by using O-ring installation tool to position small O-ring
onto adaptor 1st, then install medium O-ring and lastly large O-ring. Thread brass fitting
into test adaptor securely using teflon tape on threads.
gg

ee d c
c bb
ff aa 54457

a - Test Adaptor (91-822778A2)

b - O-ring Installation Tool
c - Small O-ring (Install 1st)
d - Medium O-ring (Install 2nd)
e - Large O-ring (Install Last)
f - Brass Fitting
g - Apply Teflon Tape

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-23

POWER TRIM

4. Install test adaptor 91-822778A2 into manual release valve hole.

54458

a - Test Adaptor (91-822778A2)

5. Thread hose from Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) into brass fitting on adaptor.
ee

aa
d

b
cc
54459
a - Brass Fitting
b - Test Gauge Assembly
c - Tilt Pin (Position in Hole Shown)
d - Hose
e - Hose (Not Used)

6. Reinstall fill plug.

7. Disengage tilt lock lever.

Page 5B-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

CAUTION
Failure to install spare tilt pin (or hardened bolts and nuts) in hole shown could
result in transom bracket failure and possible injury.
8. Move outboard “IN” until hole in swivel bracket “ear” aligns with the 3rd tilt hole in tran-
som bracket. Lock engine in trim range by installing a 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter tilt pin
or two 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) hardened bolts and nuts thru the transom brackets and swivel
bracket in the hole shown.

a 54460
a - Tilt Pin Hole (Install Spare Tilt Pin or Hardened Bolts and Nuts)

9. Open valve (a) and close valve (b).

a bb

51374

10. Run trim “UP”. The minimum pressure should be 1300 P.S.I. (91 kg/cm2).
11. Run trim “DOWN” to release pressure and remove spare tilt pin or bolts and nuts.
12. Tilt outboard full “UP” and engage tilt lock lever.
13. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure.
14. Remove test gauge hose and adapter.
15. Reinstall Manual Release Valve and secure valve with circlip.
16. Retighten “Fill” plug.
NOTE: If pressure is less than 1300 PSI (91 kg/cm 2), troubleshoot system per instructions
on page 5B-16.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-25

POWER TRIM

“DOWN” Pressure Check

IMPORTANT: Insure battery is fully charged before performing tests.
1. Tilt outboard to full “Up” position and engage tilt lock lever.
2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure from reservoir.
3. Remove circlip securing manual release valve and unscrew release valve from trim
assembly.
NOTE: A small amount of trim fluid may drip from manual release valve hole. Place a suit-
able container under trim assembly to collect any leakage.
NOTE: Assemble test adaptor by using O-ring installation tool to position small O-ring
onto adaptor 1st, then install medium O-ring and lastly large O-ring. Thread brass fitting
into test adaptor securely using teflon tape on threads.
g

a 54457
f e d c b
a - Test Adaptor (91-822778A3)
b - O-ring Installation Tool
c - Small O-ring (Install 1st)
d - Medium O-ring (Install 2nd)
e - Large O-ring (Install Last)
f - Brass Fitting
g - Apply Teflon Tape

4. Install test adaptor 91-822778A3 into manual release valve hole.

54458

a - Test Adaptor (91-822778A3)

Page 5B-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

5. Thread hose from Test Gauge Kit (91-52915A6) into brass fitting on adaptor.
ee

aa dd

gg
bb
c ff 54459
a - Brass Fitting
b - Test Gauge Assembly
c - Tilt Pin (Position in Hole Shown)
d - Hose
e - Hose (Not Used)
f - OPEN Valve
g - CLOSE Valve

6. Reinstall fill plug.

7. Disengage tilt lock lever.
8. Open valve (f) and close valve (g).
9. Run trim “DOWN”. Minimum pressure should be 500 P.S.I. (35 kg/cm2).
10. Tilt outboard full “UP” and engage tilt lock lever.
11. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed pressure.
12. Remove test gauge hose and adaptor.
13. Reinstall manual release valve and secure valve with circlip.
14. Retighten “Fill” plug.
NOTE: If pressure is less than 500 PSI (35 kg/cm 2), troubleshoot system per instructions
on Page 5B-15.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-27

POWER TRIM

Hydraulic Repair
TRIM ROD REMOVAL AND REPAIR
NOTE: Power Trim does not have to be removed from outboard to remove trim rods.
1. Tilt outboard to full “UP” position and engage tilt lock lever.
2. Slowly remove “Fill” plug to bleed reservoir pressure.
3. Turn Manual Release Valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise) to bleed remaining pres-
sure.
4. Remove trim rod cylinder caps.
NOTE: Place a clean pan under trim system to catch fluid.

db

ca
aa
b
b bb

51353 51337

a - Trim Rod Cylinder Cap

b - Turn Counterclockwise to Remove
c - Removal Tool (91-44487A1)
d - Spanner Wrench (91-74951)

5. Install trim rod removal tool and pull trim rod from cylinder.
aa

27933
a - Trim Rod Removal Tool (91-44486A1)

Page 5B-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

CLEANING AND INSPECTION - TRIM RODS AND CAPS

CAUTION
Do not remove check valve (a). Check valve is preset to operate at a specific pres-
sure. Removal and installation of check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible system damage.
NOTE: Check valve is in port side trim rod only.
NOTE: Certain models may have trim limit reducers installed on the trim rod to limit trim
out angle. Each reducer limits the amount of total trim by 2°. A maximum of 5 reducers
may be installed on each trim rod.
1. Inspect check valve and check valve screen for debris; if debris cannot be removed,
replace trim rod assembly. Clean trim rod with parts cleaner and dry with compressed
air.

aa

51352 c
bb 57886
a - Check Valve
b - Check Valve Screen
c - Trim Limit Reducers

Trim Rod End Cap Seal

1. Inspect trim cap end seal and replace if damaged or if seal does not keep trim rod
clean.
aa

51343
a - Seal (remove as shown)
2. Install new seal with seal lip up.
TRIM ROD INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: Components must be free of dirt and lint. Any debris in the system
can cause system to malfunction.
NOTE: Install trim rod with check valve in the port (left) cylinder.
1. Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid on all O-rings and seals before in-
stallation.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-29

POWER TRIM

2. Install trim rods and caps. Use installation tool (91-44487A1) or spanner wrench
(91-74951) to tighten caps securely.
aa
aa
c c

b bb

51353
a - Trim Rods
b - Cylinder End Caps
c - Rod End Rollers (lubricate with Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease or
Special Lubricant 101)

Tilt Ram
REMOVAL - TILT ROD ASSEMBLY ONLY
NOTE: Tilt Rod Assembly can be removed from cylinder without removing entire power
trim system from outboard.
TILT RAM COMPONENTS

77
66
22
22
55
33
2
2 22
22
10 44
11

88 99
11
51372
1 - Housing - Tilt Ram 7 - Oil Seal
2 - O-ring* (5) 8 - Bolt (Design 1)
3 - Memory Piston** 9 - Nut (Design 2)
4 - Washer 10 - Tilt Rod (Design 1)
5 - Piston Assembly 11 - Tilt Rod (Design 2)
6 - End Cap
*O-ring Repair Kit Available, P.N. 811607A1 (Includes item 7, Oil Seal)
**Memory piston (3) for tilt rods (10 and 11) are different and must be used with correct
tilt rod/cylinder assembly. Memory piston for Design 1 tilt rod is flat, Design 2 is dished
to clear nut and thread.

Page 5B-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

TILT RAM REMOVAL - POWER TRIM SYSTEM REMOVED FROM OUTBOARD

CAUTION
Insure trim system is depressurized prior to tilt ram removal.
1. Remove cross pin.
2. Remove lower swivel pin.

ba
51355

aa
51366
a - Cross Pin (Remove as shown)
b - Lower Swivel Pin (Remove as shown)

Disassembly
1. Secure tilt ram in a soft jawed vise. Remove tilt rod and cap.

91-74951
cc

aa

51337

bb

51364
a - Cap (Turn Counterclockwise to Remove)
b - Spanner Wrench (91-74951)
c - Tilt Rod - Pull to Remove

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-31

POWER TRIM

2. Clamp tilt rod in a soft jawed vise. Remove bolt or nut as applicable to disassemble
rod assembly. Remove O-ring.

aa
b

51378

51340

a - Bolt (Design 1) or Stud/Nut (Design 2)

b - O-Ring

IMPORTANT: Note Design 1 and 2 on page 5B-30. Design 1 tilt rod assembly re-
places either tilt rod assembly. Either design will fit as a (replace) cylinder assem-
bly complete.
Design 2 will NOT fit a cylinder originally using a Design 1 tilt rod assembly.
Memory Pistons for Design 1 and 2 differ also and must be used only on the cylin-
der the piston was removed from.
3. Remove washer, check valve assemblies, and piston.
NOTE: Check valve held in by roll pin can be cleaned but not removed.
a

bb

cc

51363
a - Washer
b - Check Valve Assembly (7)
c - Piston

Page 5B-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

4. Remove end cap from tilt rod.

5. Remove allen plug.
IMPORTANT: Remove plug from same side as holes in shaft.

b c

aa

DO NOT REMOVE 51361

51376
a - End Cap
b - Allen Plug
c - Hole In Shaft

6. Lubricate shaft with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. Insert shaft into
cylinder.

51342

7. Tap shaft into cylinder until shaft is positioned as shown.

51365

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-33

POWER TRIM

WARNING
Memory Piston Cup may be expelled at a high velocity when air pressure is
applied. Failure to place cylinder as shown below could result in personal injury.
8. Place cylinder as shown. Hold down on cylinder and inject air into shaft opening.

cc

bb

aa

51353
a - Shop Cloth
b - Solid Surface
c - Air Nozzle
9. Remove shaft after Memory Piston Cup has been expelled. Replace allen plug re-
moved in Step 5 and tighten securely.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Inspect all internal parts for damage or wear. Clean and replace parts as necessary.
2. Inspect tilt rod for scratches. Replace scraper seal in rod end cap if tilt rod is scratched
or worn.
3. Slight scratches or tool marks less than 0.005 in. (0.1 mm) deep in cylinder are accept-
able.
Scraper Seal Replacement
1. Remove components from end cap.
dd
bb
aa

ee
cc

b
a - Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Scraper Seal
d - Washer
e - Retaining Ring

Page 5B-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

REASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT: Components must be clean for reassembly. Any debris in the system
can cause the system to malfunction.
NOTE: Refer to “Tilt Ram Components” for proper O-ring sizes.
1. Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid on O-rings prior to reassembly.
2. Install O-ring on Memory Piston Cup and install in cylinder.

b
a
51372
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston Cup (Design 1 shown)

3. Assemble end cap.

4. Install end cap.
dd af

bb
aa

ee
51376
cc

b
b
a - End Cap
b - O-ring (2)
c - Scraper seal
d - Washer
e - Retaining Ring
f - End Cap

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-35

POWER TRIM

5. Install components on rod.

e dd
cc
bb
a
cc

51363

51340

a - Piston
b - O-ring
c - Check Valve Assembly (7)
d - Washer
e - Bolt or Locknut. (Tighten securely)

6. Clamp cylinder in a soft jawed vise and install tilt rod assembly. Use spanner wrench
and tighten end cap securely.
cc
91-74951

bb
51337

aa

51341
a - Cylinder
b - Tilt Rod Assembly
c - End Cap (Tighten Securely.) Use Spanner Wrench.

Page 5B-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

TILT RAM ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

1. Lubricate alignment tool (91-11230) and shaft. Use Quicksilver Power Trim and Steer-
ing Fluid.
b

aa 51369
a - Alignment Tool (91-11230)
b - Shaft

2. Align tilt ram and housing using alignment tool.

3. Install shaft.

a
ba

dc
51348 cb
51352
a - Alignment Tool (91-11230)
b - Shaft
c - Groove
d - Hole [Groove (c) will Align with this Hole]

4. Drive pin in until flush.

aa

51356
a - Pin (Drive Against Knurled End)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-37

POWER TRIM

Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair

Trim Pump Motor Test
WARNING
Do not perform this test near flammable materials, as a spark may occur while
making electrical connections.
1. Connect a 12 volt power supply to motor wires; one motor lead to POSITIVE (+) bat-
tery terminal and the other motor lead to the NEGATIVE (–) battery terminal. Motor
should run. Reverse motor leads between battery terminals. Motor should run.

53774

2. If motor does not run, disassemble and check components.

Motor Disassembly
1. Remove 2 screws.

a a

53774
a - Screw (2)

Page 5B-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

2. Remove field housing and armature from end frame. Use care not to drop armature.
aa b
cc

53779
a - Field Housing
b - Armature
c - End Frame

Armature Tests
TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature on a Growler per the Growler manufacturer’s instructions. Replace ar-
mature if a short is indicated.
TEST FOR GROUND
1. Use an Ohmmeter (Rx1 scale). Connect one lead on armature shaft and other lead
on commutator. If continuity is indicated, armature is grounded. Replace armature.

53786

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-39

POWER TRIM

CHECKING AND CLEANING COMMUTATOR

1. If commutator is worn it may be turned on an armature conditioner or a lathe.
2. Clean commutator with “OO” sandpaper.
aa

53775
a - Commutator

FIELD TESTS
IMPORTANT: Commutator end of armature must be installed in brushes when per-
forming the following tests.

Ohmmeter Resistance Scale Reading*

Leads Between (Ohms) (x____________)
BLUE and BLACK Motor Wires 0 (Rx1)
BLACK Motor Wire, and Frame
No Continuity (Rx1)
(Motor Housing)
BLUE Motor Wire and Frame No Continuity (Rx1)

*If specified readings are not obtained, check for:

• defective armature
• dirty or worn brushes
• dirty or worn commutator
If defective components are found, repair or replace component(s) and retest.
Motor Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE: Power Trim System does not have to be removed from outboard to repair/replace
motor.
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to “Motor Disassembly” on page 5B-38 to disassemble motor from pump.

Page 5B-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

CLEANING AND INSPECTION

Inspect O-rings and replace if necessary. Carefully inspect power cord for cuts or tears
which will allow water to enter motor. Replace cord if cut or torn. Clean, inspect, and test
motor components. Refer to “Brush Replacement”, “Armature Test”, and “Field
Tests” for inspection and test procedures.
a bb ee
cc

dd
53779
a - Frame
b - Armature
c - Shim
d - Brush Card Assembly
e - O-rings

BRUSH REPLACEMENT
1. Brush replacement is required if brushes are pitted, chipped, or if distance (a) be-
tween the brush pigtail and end of brush holder slot is 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) or less. Check
distance with armature installed.

53784
a - 1/16 in. (1.6 mm)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-41

POWER TRIM

2. To replace brush card, disconnect spade terminal.

3. Cut crimped brush lead.
4. Remove 2 screws securing brush card to end cap.

a cc

bb

a - Spade Terminal
b - Crimped Brush Lead
c - Screws

5. Install new brush card (BRUSH and SEAL KIT 828714A1).

6. Crimp metal connector onto motor lead and new brush lead.
7. Connect spade connector motor lead to brush card connector.
8. Secure brush card to end cap with 2 screws and lockwashers.
9. Inspect O-ring for cuts and abraisions. Replace O-ring as required (BRUSH and SEAL
KIT 828714A1).

cc dd

bb ee

53778
a - Brush Card
b - Metal Connector
c - Spade Connector
d - Screws and Lockwashers
e - O-ring

Page 5B-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

END CAP INSPECTION

1. Inspect seal and O-ring for cuts and abraisions. If replacement is required, install
BRUSH and SEAL KIT 828714A1.
2. Inspect bushing for wear. If bushing appears to be excessively worn – grooves,
scratches, etc. – install END FRAME ASSEMBLY (COMPLETE) 828715A1.

aa

bb

53783 53785
a - Seal (Apply 2-4-C with Teflon to seal lips)
b - O-ring
c - Bushing

3. If trim motor is overheated, a thermoswitch located under brush card will open. Nor-
mally, this switch will reset itself within 1 minute.

a
53781
a - Thermoswitch

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-43

POWER TRIM

Reassembly
IMPORTANT: Components must be clean. Any debris in power trim system can
cause system to malfunction.
1. Install armature into end cap/brush card assembly.

aa

dd
bb

cc

53779 53784

a - Armature
b - Shim
c - End Cap Assembly
d - Armature (Spread brushes to install armature into end cap)

2. Install O-rings in end cap.

aa
aa
53783
53784
a - O-rings

Page 5B-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

IMPORTANT: Attach Vise Grip pliers to armature shaft before installing frame as-
sembly. The Vise Grip pliers will prevent the armature from being drawn out of the
brush card assembly by the frame magnets while installing the frame assembly.
3. Install Vise Grip pliers on armature shaft.
4. Carefully install frame assembly over armature.
5. Position harness retainer hole over tab in end cap.
6. Secure frame assembly to end cap with 2 screws.

hh

i ee
ff ii

g
dd
cc

aa

53776
a - Vise Grip Pliers
b - Armature Shaft
c - O-ring
d - End Cap
e - Harness Retainer
f - Retainer Hole
g - O-ring
h - Frame Assembly
i - Screws

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-45

POWER TRIM

Reassembly - Motor and Pump

NOTE: Drive shaft is a loose part and may fall out of position.
1. Install pump onto power trim manifold. Insure O-rings are in proper locations. Secure
with two (2) screws. Torque screws to 80 lb. in. (9 N·m).
IMPORTANT: Install pump with location flat facing towards starboard transom
bracket.

c dd

bb

cc

51433
a - Pump (Flat Towards Starboard Transom Bracket)
b - Flat - Faces Starboard Transom Bracket)
c - O-rings (4)
d - Drive Shaft (Install in Center Hole in Pump)

2. Fill pump with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid prior to installing motor.
3. Install motor, secure with two (2) screws. Route wiring; refer to Wiring Diagrams in this
service manual.

Page 5B-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

NOTE: Verify motor and drive shaft are aligned.

aa
c cc

bb

53777
53782
a - Motor
b - O-ring
c - Screw (2) Tighten securely.

4. Complete reassembly of Power Trim System as outlined in “Installation” on page

5B-21.
Priming Power Trim System
1. Fill system with Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid or Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) Type F,FA, Dexron II or Dexron III. Refer to “Fill, Check, and Purge” on
page 5B-10.
IMPORTANT: Run Trim System in short “jogs” until pump motor primes and trim
system moves. If trim motor is run without priming pump, drive shaft failure could
result.
Trim Sender Test
1. Check trim sender BLACK lead for proper ground.
2. Trim outboard to full “DOWN” position.
3. Place ignition switch to “ON” position.
4. Disconnect BRN/WHT trim sender wire from trim sender harness.
5. Connect Ohmmeter (Rx1 scale) leads between outboard ground and Point 1 (trim
sender end).
6. Depress “UP” button. Ohmmeter needle should move as the outboard is trimmed up.
If needle does not move, trim sender is defective.

1
1

aa

22908
a - Trim sender

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-47

POWER TRIM

Trim Indicator Gauge Needle Adjustment

1. Turn ignition key to “RUN” position.
2. Tilt outboard to full “IN” position. Needle of trim indicator gauge should be in full “IN”
position.
3. If not, tilt outboard to full “OUT” position to gain access to trim sender and engage tilt
lock lever.
4. Loosen trim sender screws and reposition trim sender.
5. Tighten trim sender screws.

cc d

aa

22744
a - Trim Sender
b - Screws, Loosen to Rotate Sender
c - Turn Sender Counterclockwise to raise needle reading
d - Turn Sender Clockwise to Lower Needle Reading
e - Tilt lock lever

Page 5B-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 POWER TRIM

Trim Indicator Wiring Diagrams

Wiring Diagram - For boats equipped with Quicksilver
Commander Series side mount remote control.

aa bb c

Wiring Diagram - For boats equipped with Quicksilver

Ignition/Choke and Main Harness Assembly. gg
aa ff c

22908
a - Trim Indicator
b - Remote Control
c - Trim Sender
d - Engine Ground
e - To Engine
f - Ignition Switch
g - Power Trim Harness

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 5B-49

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

LOWER UNIT
Section 6A – Right Hand Non-Ratcheting
Table of Contents
Gear Housing Specifications (Standard Rotation) . 6A-1 Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2 Reassembly and Installation Standard Rotation . 6A-26
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-5 Driveshaft Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-26
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation) . . 6A-6 Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-27
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation) . . . 6A-8 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-30
General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10 Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-31
Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection Driveshaft and Pinion Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-32
– Standard Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11 Pinion Gear Depth/Forward Gear
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11 Backlash/Reverse Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . 6A-34
Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12 Shift Shaft Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-38
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-13 Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-39
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Removal 6A-16 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-42
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-18 Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 6A-45
Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-20 Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing 6A-45
Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-22 Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-47
Pinion Gear and Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-22 Speedometer Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-48
Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-25
6
Gear Housing Specifications (Standard Rotation) A

Forward Gear Reverse Gear

Ratio Pinion Depth
Backlash Backlash
0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With Tool 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.460 mm
0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
1.87:1 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and to 0.686 mm) Pointer on line
(0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Flat #7 mark #1
0.025 in. (0.635 mm)With Tool
0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm to 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
2.00:1 91-12349A2 using Disc #2 and
0.56 mm) Pointer on line mark #2 (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Flat #7

Gearcase Lubricant Capacity

All Ratios 22.5 fl. oz. (665.4 ml)

Gear Ratio Teeth on Pinion Gear Teeth on Forward and Reverse

Gear
1.87:1 15 28
2.00:1 12 24

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-1

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Special Tools
1. Shift Shaft Bushing Tool 91-31107T

2. Gear Housing Cover Nut Tool 91-61069T

3. Bearing Carrier Removal Tool 91-46086A1 and Puller Bolt 91-85716

4. Slide Hammer Puller 91-34569A1

5. Bearing Removal and Installation Kit 91-31229A7. This kit contains the following
tools: Pilot 91-36571T; Puller Rod 91-31229; Nut 11-24156; Puller Plate 91-29310;
Mandrel 91-38628T; and Driver Rod 91-37323.

6. Pilot 91-36571T

7. Puller Rod 91-31229 and Nut 91-24156

Page 6A-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

8. Puller Plate 91-29310

9. Mandrel 91-38628T

10. Driver Rod 91-37323

11. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241

12. Cross Pin Tool 91-86642

13. Driveshaft Holding Tool 91-90094

14. Oil Seal Driver 91-31108T

15. Forward Gear Bearing Tool 91-86943T

16. Bearing Driver Cup 91-31106

17. Pinion Locating Gear Tool 91-12349A2 or 91-74776T

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-3

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

18. Backlash Indicator Rod 91-78473

19. Dial Indicator 91-58222A1

20. Bearing Retainer Tool 91-43506T

21. Bearing Preload Tool 91-14311A2

8h

7g
6f
5e
4d

3c
2b

1a

1 - Adaptor (N.S.S.)
2 - Bearing (N.S.S.)
3 - Washer (N.S.S.)
4 - Spring (24-14111)
5 - Bolt (10-12580)
6 - Nut (11-13953)
7 - Set Screw (10-12575)
8 - Sleeve (23-13946)
22. Mandrel 91-92788

23. Mandrel 91-15755

24. Dial Indicator Holder 91-89897

Page 6A-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Notes:

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-5

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation)

23
4.75 48
40 43
IN/120.65MM 45 44
47 95
TORPEDO DIA. 44 46
95
38 28
27
19
39 26
95
41 95
17
42 95

36
25 24
37 23
95 22
35 21
29
7

30
78 95 95
34
33
7 32 7 20
31 4
95
7 9
10 6 12
13
5

1918
9 3
11 33
2
95
8
14
7 Loctite 271
15 1
19 Perfect Seal 16
23 Liquid Soap (Purchase Locally) 92
19
33 Loctite 680
78 G.E. Sealer RTV #1473 7
18
92 Loctite 7649 Primer
95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 6A-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Standard Rotation)

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm
1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC)
2 2 DOWEL PIN
1 STUD (3-1/8 IN.) (LONG)
3
1 STUD (3-11/16 IN.) (X-LONG)
4 2 STUD (2-1/16 IN.)
5 1 STUD (3-3/8 IN.)
6 2 STUD (3-1/8 IN.)
7 1 FILLER BLOCK
8 1 ROLLER BEARING
9 2 ANODE
10 1 SCREW (M6 x 40)
11 1 NUT 60 7
1 HOSE (10 IN. - LONG)
12
1 HOSE (12 IN. - X-LONG)
13 1 FITTING
1 PINION GEAR (1.87:1- 15 TEETH)
14
1 PINION GEAR (2:1 - 14 TEETH))
15 1 WASHER
16 1 NUT 75 101
17 AR SHIM (006 thru 048)
18 2 SCREW–drain 60 7
19 2 WASHER
20 1 SHIFT SHAFT
21 1 O-RING
22 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 50 68
23 1 OIL SEAL
24 1 WASHER–rubber
1 DRIVE SHAFT (LONG)
25
1 DRIVE SHAFT (X-LONG)
26 1 ROLLER BEARING
27 1 CUP
28 1 RETAINER 100 135
29 1 WATER PUMP BASE
30 1 RETAINER
31 1 GASKET
32 1 O-RING
33 1 OIL SEAL
34 1 OIL SEAL
35 1 GASKET–lower
36 1 GASKET–upper
37 1 FACE PLATE
38 1 WATER PUMP BODY ASSEMBLY
39 1 INSERT
40 1 SEAL–rubber
41 1 lMPELLER
42 1 KEY
43 1 SCREW (#14-8 x 2-1/4 IN.) 35 4
44 2 WASHER
45 2 NUT 50 5.5
46 1 WASHER
47 1 NUT 50 5.5
48 1 SLEEVE

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-7

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation)

75 4.75
IN/120.65MM
TORPEDO DIA.
74

77

76 78
94

95
50
1

95

61 59
87

60

58
57

52
73 7 56
72 54
55
70 68 95
69 53
51
67
95 49
66
65
95
64 87
87
62
63

71
7 Loctite 271 95 95
87 Quicksilver Gear Lubricant 87

94 Anti-Corrosion Grease
95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 6A-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Standard Rotation)

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm
1 1 GEAR HOUSING(BASIC)
49 1 CAM FOLLOWER
50 1 SHIFT CAM
51 1 ROD
1 FORWARD GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)(150)
52
1 FORWARD GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)(115/135)
53 AR SHIM (.006 thru 050)
54 1 TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
55 1 CUP
56 1 NEEDLE BEARING
57 1 CLUTCH
58 1 CROSS PIN
59 1 DETENT PIN
60 1 SPRING
61 1 PROPELLER SHAFT
1 REVERSE GEAR (1.87:1 - 15/28)
62
1 REVERSE GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)
63 1 THRUST SPACER
64 1 THRUST RING
65 1 BALL BEARING
66 1 O-RING
67 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY
68 1 ROLLER BEARING
69 1 OIL SEAL (INSIDE)
70 1 OIL SEAL (OUTSIDE)
71 1 KEY
72 1 TAB WASHER
73 1 COVER 210 285
1 TRIM TAB
74
1 ANODIC PLATE (TRACKER/150 LONG)
75 1 SCREW (1-3/4 IN.) 25 34
76 1 SCREW (3/8-16 x 1 IN.) 30 41
77 2 WASHER
78 2 NUT 50 68

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-9

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

General Service Recommendations

There may be more than one way to “disassemble” or “reassemble” a particular part(s),
therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair.
IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs.
In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and
inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more compo-
nents.
Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence.
It is suggested that the sequence be followed without deviation to assure proper repairs.
When performing partial repairs, follow the instructions to the point where the desired
component can be replaced, then proceed to “reassembly and installation” of that compo-
nent in the reassembly part of this section. Use the “Table of Contents” (on back of section
divider) to find correct page number.
Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated.
When holding, pressing or driving is required, use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood
for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race)
when pressing or driving bearings.
Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, be sure that no water is present in air line.
BEARINGS
Upon disassembly of gear housing, all bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean
bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing
so that it passes thru the bearing. DO NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may
cause bearing to score from lack of lubrication. After cleaning, lubricate bearings with
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubricate tapered bearing cups until after inspection.
Inspect all bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bear-
ing race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear.
When inspecting tapered bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race
by inspecting bearing cup for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles
and/or discoloration from overheating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the bearing surface of the shaft that
the roller bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting, scoring, grooving, imbedded
particles, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must
be replaced, if the conditions described are found.
SHIMS
Keep a record of all shim amounts and location during disassembly to aid in reassembly.
Be sure to follow shimming instructions during reassembly, as gears must be installed to
correct depth and have the correct amount of backlash to avoid noisy operation and pre-
mature gear failure.
SEALS
As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals SHOULD BE REPLACED without regard
to appearance. To prevent leakage around oil seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter
of all metal case oil seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean
and dry. To ease installation, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on all
O-rings. To prevent wear, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant on l.D. of oil
seals.

Page 6A-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

To prevent corrosion damage after reassembly, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine
Lubricant to external surfaces of bearing carrier and cover nut threads prior to installation.

Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection – Standard

Rotation
Removal
WARNING
Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from
engine before removing gear housing from driveshaft housing.
1. Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine.

CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing BEFORE propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
2. Shift engine into NEUTRAL position.
3. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever.
4. Bend tabs of propeller tab washer away from thrust hub (rear), then remove propeller
locknut, tab washer, thrust hub (rear), propeller and thrust hub (forward) from propel-
ler shaft.
5. Mark gear housing and trim tab so that trim tab can be reinstalled in the same position.
Remove plastic cap at rear edge of driveshaft housing. Remove bolt that secures trim
tab and remove tab from gear housing.
6. Once trim tab is removed, remove bolt from inside of trim tab cavity.
7. Remove 2 locknuts from bottom middle of anti-cavitation plate.

g
d
h
f
a
i

b
e
c

51916 51912 51866

a - Tab Washer e - Propeller Shaft
b - Propeller Nut f - Thrust Hub (forward)
c - Rear Thrust Hub g - Bolt (secures trim tab)
d - Continuity Washer (if h - Bolt (inside trim tab cavity)
equipped) i - Locknuts and Washers

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-11

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

8. While pressing in on speedometer hose junction, pull out on hose to disconnect.

b
a

57735

a - Press in on Junction
b - Pull out on Hose

9. Remove locknut from the front gear housing mounting stud.

10. Loosen the side mounting locknuts. (DO NOT attempt to remove one nut before oppo-
site side is loosened sufficiently, or driveshaft housing could be damaged.)

bb
a
51873
a - Front Mounting Locknut
b - Side Mounting Locknut (One Each Side)

11. Pull gear housing away from driveshaft housing as far as the loosened nuts (in Step
9) will allow, then remove loosened nuts. (DO NOT allow gear housing to fall, as it now
is free.)
12. Pull gear housing from driveshaft housing.
Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing Lubricant
1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with the driveshaft in a vertical
position.
NOTE: Drain and Fill screws may be located on the starboard side of gearcase on later
models.

Page 6A-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

2. Position a clean drain pan under gear housing and remove “Fill” and “Vent” screws
from gear housing.

bb

51871
a - “Fill” Screw
b - “Vent” Screw

3. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles. Presence of a small amount of fine metal
particles (resembling powder) indicates normal wear. Presence of larger particles (or
a large quantity of fine particles) indicates need for gear housing disassembly, and
component inspection.
4. Note the color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in
lubricant. Check drain pan for water separation from lubricant. Presence of water in
gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly, and inspection of oil seals, seal sur-
faces, O-rings and gear housing components.
NOTE: Gear lubricant drained from a recently run gear case will be a light chocolate
brown in color due to agitation/aeration. Oil which is stabilized will be a clear yellow brown
in color.
Water Pump
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean all water pump parts with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect water pump cover and base for cracks and distortion (from overheating).
3. Inspect face plate and water pump insert for grooves and/or rough surfaces.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repairs, that require removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary,
however, to re-use impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or prema-
ture impeller failure will occur.
4. Inspect impeller side seal surfaces and ends of impeller blades for cracks, tears and
wear. Replace impeller if any of these conditions are found.
5. Inspect impeller bonding to impeller hub.
6. Inspect impeller for glazed or melted appearance (caused by operation without suffi-
cient water supply). Replace impeller if any of these conditions exist.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-13

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY

1. Slide rubber centrifugal slinger up and off driveshaft.
2. Remove water tube guide and seal from water pump cover. (Retain guide for reas-
sembly and discard seal.)
3. Remove (and retain) 3 nuts, one bolt and all washers which secure water pump cover
to gear housing.
4. Using 2 pry bars, lift water pump cover up and off driveshaft.

aa

bb
51874

c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolt and Washers To Be Removed

5. Inspect water pump cover and insert, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” pre-
vious.
6. If inspection of water pump insert determines that replacement is required, follow Step
“a” or “b” (immediately following) to remove insert from water pump cover.
NOTE: Try Step “a” first. If insert cannot be removed with Step “a,” use Step “b”.
a. Drive water pump insert out of water pump cover with a punch and hammer.

51874

Page 6A-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

b. Drill two 3/16 in. (4.8mm) diameter holes thru the top of water pump cover (but not
thru insert). Drive insert out of cover with a punch and hammer.

aa

51873
a - Drill Two Holes at These Locations

7. Remove impeller from driveshaft. (It may be necessary to use a punch and hammer
to drive impeller upward on driveshaft. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to split
hub of impeller with a hammer and chisel.)
8. Once impeller is removed, remove impeller drive key from driveshaft.
9. Remove water pump face plate and both gaskets (one above and below face plate)
from water pump base.
10. Using 2 pry bars, positioned and padded as shown, lift water pump base up and off
driveshaft.

a
51874
a - Pads

11. Remove (and discard) O-ring from O-ring groove on water pump base.
12. Using a screwdriver, pry oil seals out of water pump base from gear housing side of
base.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-15

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Removal

CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position, and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing before propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture with propeller shaft in a horizontal posi-
tion.
2. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) to unthread shift shaft bushing. (DO NOT re-
move bushing from shift shaft at this time.)
IMPORTANT: Prior to removal of shift shaft from gear housing, recheck that gear
housing is in NEUTRAL position.
3. Bend cover nut lock tab out of cover nut recess.

a c
b ba
51874
51865
a - Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107)
b - Punch
c - Tab of Tab Washer

4. Remove gear housing cover nut with Cover Nut Tool (91-61069).

aa

51866
a - Cover Nut Tool (91-61069)

5. After cover nut has been removed, remove lock tab washer from gear housing.

CAUTION
Once bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken
not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may
break the neck of the clutch actuator rod.
6. Use long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) to remove bearing car-
rier. (Use propeller thrust hub to maintain outward pressure on puller jaws.)

Page 6A-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: When bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, the bearing carrier alignment
key will come out with it.
7. With gear housing in NEUTRAL, pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If necessary, use
a pliers to pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If pliers are used to pull shift shaft out,
wrap a strip of soft metal (aluminum) around splines before clamping pliers. DO NOT
turn shaft (clockwise OR counterclockwise) while pulling shaft out. (For further infor-
mation on shift shaft, see “Shift Shaft Cleaning/lnspection and Disassembly.”)

da
a
bb

eb

51867
cc

51867
a - Long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
b - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
c - Thrust Hub
d - Shift Shaft Bushing
e - Shift Shaft

CAUTION
Propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam, in most cases, will come out of gear
housing by simply pulling outward on propeller shaft. DO NOT FORCE shaft side-
ways or ATTEMPT TO PULL with a slide hammer or any mechanical puller.
8. Remove propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam by pulling shaft straight out of gear
housing. (DO NOT JERK propeller shaft.) If propeller shaft will not come out, proceed
with Step “a” or “b”, following:
a. Push propeller shaft back into place against the forward gear. Visually inspect lo-
cation of shift cam by looking down shift shaft hole (illuminated with a flashlight).
If splined hole in shift cam is visible, reinstall shift shaft and rotate shift shaft to neu-
tral position. Remove shift shaft, then remove propeller shaft as instructed in Step
8, immediately preceding.
b. Push propeller shaft back into place against forward gear. Slide bearing carrier
back into gear housing (to support propeller shaft). Place gear housing on its left
side (viewed from rear) and strike upper leading end of gear housing with a rubber
mallet. This will dislodge the shift cam from cam follower into a clearance pocket
in left side of gear housing. Remove bearing carrier and pull propeller shaft out
of gear housing.
NOTE: If Step 8-b was used to remove propeller shaft, the shift cam can be retrieved after
removal of forward gear.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-17

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Shift Shaft
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean shift shaft and bushing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check shift shaft splines on both ends for wear and/or corrosion damage.
3. Inspect shift shaft for groove(s) at shift shaft bushing seal surface.
4. Inspect shift shaft bushing for corrosion damage.
5. Inspect shift shaft bushing oil seal for wear and/or cuts.
NOTE: Oil seal in shift shaft bushing should be replaced as a normal repair procedure.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove (and discard) shift shaft bushing oil seal by prying it out or driving it out with
a punch and hammer.
CLEANING/INSPECTION - BEARING CARRIER
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and O-rings be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
1. Clean bearing carrier with solvent and dry with compressed air.

CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
2. Bearing carrier propeller shaft needle bearing condition is determined by propeller
shaft bearing surface condition. (See “Propeller Shaft Inspection.”)
3. Inspect reverse gear to pinion gear wear pattern (should be even and smooth). If not,
replace reverse gear and pinion gear.
4. Check clutch jaws on reverse gear for damage. Replace reverse gear, if damage is
found on clutch jaws.
5. Apply light oil to reverse gear bearing. Rotate reverse gear bearing while checking
bearing for rough spots and/or catches. Push in and pull out on reverse gear to check
for bearing side wear. Replace bearing if any of the listed conditions exist.
DISASSEMBLY - BEARING CARRIER
1. Remove and discard O-ring from between bearing carrier and thrust washer.
2. If inspection of reverse gear or reverse gear bearing determines that replacement of
gear or bearing is required, remove gear and bearing as follows:
a. Position bearing carrier in a soft jaw vise.
b. Use Slide Hammer (91-34569A1) and remove reverse gear.

51868

Page 6A-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

c. If reverse gear bearing remains attached to reverse gear, install Universal Puller
Plate (91-37241) and position puller plate, gear and bearing on a press with gear
side down. Use a suitable mandrel and press gear out of bearing.

b
b

aa 51874
a - Universal Puller Plate
b - Mandrel

d. If reverse gear bearing has remained in bearing carrier, use slide hammer to re-
move bearing in the same methods as was used to remove reverse gear (Step
“b”).
3. Propeller shaft oil seals can be removed by (a) using a pry bar, or (b) pressing seals
out when propeller shaft needle bearing is pressed out of bearing carrier.
4. If inspection of propeller shaft needle bearing determines that replacement of bearing
is required, use Universal Bearing Removal and Installation Tool (91-31229A1) to
press bearing and seals out of bearing carrier.
NOTE: Reverse gear must be removed from bearing carrier before propeller shaft needle
bearing can be removed.

aa

cb

a
b

c
d

51868 51871
a - Pry Bar
b - Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing
c - Mandrel
d - Oil Seals

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-19

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Propeller Shaft
INSPECTION
1. Clean propeller shaft assembly with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect bearing carrier oil seal surfaces for grooves. Run fingernail across seal sur-
face to check for groove. Replace shaft if groove is found.
3. Visually check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven
wear or discoloration (bluish color) from overheating. Replace shaft and correspond-
ing needle bearing if any of the above conditions are found. (Bearing carrier needle
bearing contacts propeller shaft just in front of oil seal surface. Forward gear bearing
contacts propeller shaft in front of sliding clutch splines.)
4. Inspect propeller shaft splines for wear and/or corrosion damage.
5. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Use either method, following:
BALANCE WHEELS
Place propeller shaft on balance wheels. Rotate propeller shaft and observe propeller end
of shaft for “wobble.” Replace shaft if any “wobble” is observed.
bb b

aa
cc

51872
a - Balance Wheels
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Watch for Wobble

Position propeller shaft roller bearing surfaces on “vee” blocks. Mount a dial indicator at
front edge of propeller splines. Rotate propeller shaft. Dial indicator movement of more
than 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) (or noticeable “wobble”) is reason for replacement.
b bb

a
c

51872
a - “Vee” Blocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Measure with Dial Indicator at this Point

Page 6A-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

6. Inspect sliding clutch. Check reverse gear and forward gear clutch jaws. Rounded
jaws indicate one or more of the following:
a. Improper shift cable adjustment.
b. Improper shift habits of operator(s) (shift from NEUTRAL to REVERSE gear too
slowly).
c. Engine idle speed too high (while shifting).
aa

aa

51865
a - Clutch Jaws

7. Check condition of cam follower. If it shows wear (pitting, scoring or rough surface),
replace cam follower and shift cam.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove shift cam from cam follower.
2. Insert a thin blade screwdriver or awl under first coil of cross pin retainer spring and
rotate propeller shaft to unwind spring from sliding clutch. DO NOT over-stretch
spring.

CAUTION
Detent pin is free and can fall out of sliding clutch. Care MUST BE taken not to lose
pin.
3. Detent pin is free and can be removed from sliding clutch at this time.
bb
ca
db

aa
51864 51864
ec
a - Awl
b - Cross Pin Retainer Spring
c - Detent Pin
d - Cross Pin
e - Sliding Clutch

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-21

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

4. Push cross pin out of sliding clutch and propeller shaft with Cross Pin Tool (91-86642).
5. Pull sliding clutch off propeller shaft.
6. Pull cam follower and clutch actuator rod out of propeller shaft. DO NOT force cam
follower up-or-down or side-to-side when pulling from propeller shaft.

aa

ca b
d ec 51864

b 51864
a - Cross Pin Tool c - Cam Follower
(91-86642) d - Clutch Actuator Rod
b - Cross Pin e - Propeller Shaft

7. Once cam follower and clutch actuator rod are removed from propeller shaft, lift rod
out of cam follower.
Clutch Actuator Rod
IMPORTANT: If outboard is run on a dynometer, the dynometer head must be se-
curely attached to the propshaft with applied forward pressure (i.e. multiple rubber
straps) to prevent possible breakage of the clutch actuator rod.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean clutch actuator rod in solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect actuator components for wear or damage. Replace components as required.
Pinion Gear and Driveshaft
REMOVAL
1. Remove bearing retainer using Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506T).

aa
51865
a - Bearing Retainer
b - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506T)

2. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-90094) over driveshaft splines.

3. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut. (Pad area of gear housing where flex
handle will make contact to prevent damage to gear housing.)
4. Use a socket and flex handle on Driveshaft Holding Tool to loosen pinion nut. Remove
pinion nut and Driveshaft Holding Tool.

Page 6A-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Remove gear housing from vise and re-position it as shown. Be sure to use soft jaw
vise covers and clamp as close as possible to water pump studs.
6. Place a block of wood on gear housing mating surface. Use a mallet and carefully tap
gear housing away from driveshaft.

CAUTION
DO NOT strike gear housing hard with the mallet or allow gear housing to fall.

bb a

51870

a - Wooden Block
b - Soft Jaw Vise Covers

7. Reach into gear housing and remove pinion gear and forward gear assembly.
8. After driveshaft is removed from gear case, remove and retain shim(s) that were lo-
cated under upper tapered driveshaft bearing.
9. If inspection determines that replacement of driveshaft tapered bearing is required,
remove bearing from driveshaft as follows:
a. Position driveshaft in a vise; DO NOT tighten vise jaws against shaft.
b. Strike shaft with a lead hammer; take care not to drop shaft.

51866
10. Remove 18 loose needles from outer race of driveshaft needle bearing.
11. If inspection of driveshaft needle bearing surface determines that replacement of
needle bearing is required, the 18 loose needle bearings previously removed must
be reinstalled in bearing race to provide surface for mandrel to drive against.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-23

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: FORWARD gear must be removed first BEFORE removing driveshaft needle
bearing.
IMPORTANT: Discard driveshaft needle bearing after removal. (Bearing cannot be
reused.)

cc

aa

51869
a - Mandrel (91-37263)
b - Pilot* (91-36571)
c - Driver Rod* (91-37323)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)

CLEANING AND INSPECTION

1. Clean driveshaft, tapered bearing and race, and pinion gear with solvent. Dry with
compressed air. DO NOT allow driveshaft bearing to spin while drying.
2. Inspect pinion gear for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration
from overheating. Replace pinion gear, if any of the above conditions are found.
3. Inspect driveshaft needle bearing surface (area just above pinion gear splines) for pit-
ting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Replace
driveshaft and driveshaft needle bearing, if any of the preceding conditions are found.
4. Inspect driveshaft to crankshaft splines for wear. Replace driveshaft if wear is exces-
sive.
5. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discolor-
ation from overheating. Replace tapered bearing and race as a set, if any of the pre-
ceding conditions are found.
6. Inspect driveshaft for groove(s) where water pump base oil seals contact shaft. Re-
place driveshaft if groove(s) are found.

Page 6A-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Forward Gear
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Forward gear can only be removed from gear housing after driveshaft and pinion
gear have been removed.
1. Reach into gear housing and lift out forward gear.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove tapered bearing or needle bearings from forward
gear, unless replacement of bearings is required. (Bearings cannot be reused after
they have been removed.)
2. If inspection determines that replacement of forward gear tapered bearing is required,
remove bearing from gear and bearing race from gear housing (tapered bearing and
race MUST BE replaced as a set), as follows:
a. Install Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) between forward gear and tapered bear-
ing.
b. Place forward gear, bearing and puller plate on a press and press gear out of bear-
ing with a suitable mandrel.
c. Use Slide Hammer (91-34569A1) to remove forward gear tapered bearing race.

bb
a
c
aa

51870 51865
db
a - Universal Puller Plate
b - Mandrel
c - Slide Hammer
d - Tapered Bearing Race

d. After forward gear tapered bearing race is removed from gear housing, lift out and
retain shims which were behind bearing race.
3. If inspection determines that replacement of propeller shaft needle bearings in for-
ward gear is required, remove bearing from gear as follows:
a. Clamp forward gear in a soft jaw vise securely.
b. From toothed-side of gear, drive propeller shaft needle bearings out of gear with
a punch and hammer.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-25

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

CLEANING AND INSPECTION

CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
1. Clean forward gear and bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect gear teeth for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and for discoloration
(from overheating). Replace gear if any of these conditions are found.
3. Check clutch jaws on forward gear for damage. Replace forward gear if damage is
found.
4. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discolor-
ation (from overheating). Replace tapered bearing (on forward gear) and race if any
of these conditions are found. (Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.)
5. To determine condition of propeller shaft needle bearings (in forward gear), inspect
propeller shaft forward gear needle bearing surface as outlined in “Propeller Shaft In-
spection.”
Gear Housing
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean gear housing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check gear housing carefully for impact damage.
3. Check for loose fitting bearing cups and needle bearings.
4. Inspect bearing carrier cover nut retainer threads in gear housing for corrosion dam-
age and/or stripped threads.

Reassembly and Installation Standard Rotation

Driveshaft Needle Bearing
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION

CAUTION
If driveshaft needle bearing failure has occurred, and original bearing race has
turned in the gear housing, gear housing MUST be replaced. Loose fitting needle
bearing will move out of position and cause repeated failures.
1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Lubricant to driveshaft needle bear-
ing bore in gear housing.
2. By way of propeller shaft cavity, place needle bearing in driveshaft bore with num-
bered side of bearing facing up driveshaft bore.

Page 6A-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

3. Install and seat needle bearing with the following tools: Puller Rod* (91-31229), Nut*
(11-24156), Pilot* (91-36571T), Plate* (91-29310) and Mandrel* (91-92788). Pull
bearing up into bore until it bottoms on gear housing shoulder. (DO NOT use exces-
sive force.)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)

ff

ee

cc

aa
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Bearing
c - Pilot
d - Plate
e - Puller Rod
f - Hold

Bearing Carrier
REASSEMBLY
1. Place reverse gear on a press with gear teeth facing down.
IMPORTANT: The reverse gear thrust washer has a tapered outside diameter so
that one side is larger than the other. The larger outside diameter of washer must
be toward reverse gear.
2. Place thrust washer over gear with the larger outside diameter down toward gear.
3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto inside diameter of
reverse gear ball bearing.
4. Position ball bearing over gear (with numbered side of bearing up).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-27

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Press ball bearing onto gear with a suitable mandrel until firmly seated. (Be sure to
press only on inner race of bearing and that bearing is firm against gear.)
6. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto outside diameter of
propeller shaft needle bearing.
7. Place propeller shaft needle bearing into aft end of bearing carrier with numbered side
toward aft end.
8. Use Mandrel 91-15755 and press needle bearing into bearing carrier.

bb

aa
ca

51873
51872
a - Thrust Washer
b - Mandrel
c - Mandrel (91-15755)

9. Apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter of propeller shaft oil seals.

10. Place one seal on longer shoulder side of Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with lip of seal
away from shoulder. Press seal into bearing carrier until seal driver bottoms against
bearing carrier.

aa

51872
a - Oil Seal (Lip of Seal Down)
b - Oil Seal Driver
c - Seated

Page 6A-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

11. Place second seal on short shoulder side of seal driver with lip of seal toward shoulder.
Press seal into bearing carrier until seal driver bottoms against bearing carrier.

bb

aa
cc

51872
a - Oil Seal (Lip of Seal Up)
b - Oil Seal Driver
c - Seated

12. Wipe off excess Loctite.

13. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto the outside diameter
of reverse gear ball bearing.
14. Place bearing carrier over reverse gear and bearing assembly. Press bearing carrier
onto bearing.

aa

51870
a - Mandrel
b - Seated

15. Place O-ring over bearing carrier and position it between bearing carrier and thrust
washer.
16. Lubricate oil seals and O-ring with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-29

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Forward Gear
REASSEMBLY
1. Place forward gear on a press with gear teeth down.
2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant onto the inside diameter
of forward gear tapered bearing.
3. Position forward gear tapered bearing over gear.
4. Press bearing onto gear until firmly seated. (Be sure to press only on inner race of
bearing and that bearing is firm against the gear.)
aa

bb

51869
a - Mandrel
b - Wooden Block

5. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to bore in center of forward
gear.
6. Place one forward gear needle bearing on longer shoulder side of Forward Gear Bear-
ing Tool (91-86943) with numbered side of bearing toward shoulder. Press bearing
into forward gear until bearing tool bottoms against gear.

aa bb

51873
a - Forward Gear Bearing Tool (91-86943)
b - Numbered Side of Needle Bearing

7. Place second needle bearing on short shoulder side of bearing tool with numbered
side of bearing toward shoulder. Press bearing into forward gear until bearing tool bot-
toms against gear.

Page 6A-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Forward Gear Bearing Race

INSTALLATION
1. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or
a new gear housing is being used, start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).
2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to forward gear bearing
race bore in gear housing.
3. Position tapered bearing race squarely over bearing bore in front portion of gear hous-
ing.
4. Place Bearing Driver Cup (91-87120) over tapered bearing race.
NOTE: A used propeller shaft is recommended for use in Step 5. If it is necessary, howev-
er, to use the propeller shaft that will be installed in gear housing, the propeller shaft must
be disassembled. (Refer to “Propeller Shaft Disassembly,” preceding.)
5. Place propeller shaft into hole in center of bearing driver cup.
6. Install bearing carrier assembly over propeller shaft and lower it into gear housing.
Bearing carrier acts as a pilot to assure proper bearing race alignment.
7. Thread a nut onto propeller shaft to protect propeller shaft threads.
8. Use a mallet to drive propeller shaft against bearing driver cup until tapered bearing
race is seated against shim(s).

bb

aa 51867
a - Tapered Bearing Race
b - Bearing Driver Cup (91-31106)
c - Shim(s)

9. Remove nut from propeller shaft, then remove bearing carrier and propeller shaft from
gear housing. Lift bearing driver cup out of gear housing.
10. Apply a light coat of oil on tapered bearing race, then place forward gear assembly
into forward bearing race.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-31

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Driveshaft and Pinion Gear

REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant on l.D. of driveshaft ta-
pered bearing.
2. Thread a used pinion nut onto end of driveshaft. Leave approximately 1/16 in. (1.6
mm) of nut threads exposed. Driveshaft threads MUST NOT extend beyond nut or
thread damage could result while pressing.
3. Place bearing over driveshaft.
4. Using an old driveshaft bearing inner race or other suitable mandrel (which applies
pressing force on center bearing race only), press bearing onto shaft until seated.

c
d
e

a - Used Pinion Nut

b - Driveshaft
c - Tapered Bearing
d - Old Bearing Inner Race
e - Universal Puller Plate

5. Position pinion gear in gear housing below driveshaft bore with teeth of pinion gear
meshed with teeth of reverse gear.
6. Insert driveshaft into driveshaft bore while holding pinion gear. Rotate driveshaft to
align and engage driveshaft splines with pinion gear splines. Continue to insert drive-
shaft into gear housing until driveshaft tapered bearing is against bearing race.
NOTE: It is recommended that after final pinion depth is obtained, a new pinion nut be
installed. Clean pinion nut threads with Loctite 7649 Primer before applying Loctite 271.
7. Place a small amount of Loctite 271 onto threads of pinion gear nut and install flat
washer and nut on driveshaft with flat side of nut away from pinion gear. Hand tighten
pinion nut.
8. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or
are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).

Page 6A-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

9. Install bearing race and bearing retainer.

aa

di
b
b cc
hc

d gb

ee 51867 fa 51880
a - Driveshaft (rotate to engage splines with pinion gear)
b - Forward Gear Assembly
c - Pinion Gear
d - Washer (located above pinion nut)
e - Pinion Nut [apply Loctite 271 on threads and install with flat side away from
pinion gear.]
f - Shim(s)
g - Bearing Race
h - Bearing Retainer (Word “OFF” must be visible) Torque to 100 lb. ft. (135.5
Nm)
i - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506T)

10. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut (pad area where flex handle will con-
tact gear housing while torquing nut).
11. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-90094) over crankshaft end of driveshaft. Torque
pinion nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm).

cc
bb aa

aa

cc

d
a - Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-90094)
b - Torque Wrench; Torque Nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm)
c - Socket
d - Breaker Bar

IMPORTANT: Wipe any excess Loctite from pinion nut and pinion gear.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-33

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Pinion Gear Depth/Forward Gear Backlash/Reverse Gear Backlash

DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness.
IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly must be installed in gear housing when
checking pinion gear depth or an inaccurate measurement will be obtained.
1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A2) over driveshaft in sequence shown.
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) may also be used. Follow instructions pro-
vided with tool for proper installation.
hh

gg g

ee

ff

cc

bb

aa
a - Adaptor
b - Bearing
c - Washer
d - Spring
e - Nut; thread nut all the way onto bolt
f - Bolt
g - Set Screw
h - Sleeve; Holes in sleeve must align with set screw

3. Align adaptor on driveshaft bearing pocket ledge.

4. With tool installed over driveshaft, tighten both set screws securely, making certain
to align sleeve holes to allow set screws to pass thru.

Page 6A-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Measure distance (a) and increase that distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm) by turning bottom
nut away from top nut.

1 in. (25.4 mm)

aa ba

cb
51870
a - Distance
b - Adaptor
c - Ledge

6. Turn driveshaft clockwise 2 or more turns to seat driveshaft bearings.

7. Insert Pinion Gear Locating Tool* (91-74776) into gear housing until it bottoms out on
bearing carrier shoulder.
*Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2) can be used. Use flat #7 and disc #2. Follow
instructions supplied with tool.
8. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler gauge thru access slot in pinion gear
shimming tool.
9. Clearance between shimming tool and pinion gear should be 0.025 in. (0.64 mm).
10. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool on driveshaft for “Determining For-
ward Gear Backlash,” following.
11. If clearance is not correct, add (or subtract) shims at location shown to raise (or lower)
pinion gear. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut and re-
torque pinion nut.

cc b
d
aa

cc
aa

24643
a - Pinion Gear Tool (91-74776 or 91-12349A2)
b - Feeler Gauge
c - Obtain 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) Clearance between Shimming Tool and Pinion
Gear
d - Add or Subtract Shim(s) Here

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-35

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) should remain installed on driveshaft after
setting pinion gear depth as it is required to properly check forward gear and reverse gear
backlash.
DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH
IMPORTANT: Bearing carrier must be assembled to provide a pilot for propeller
shaft.
1. Insert propeller shaft into position in gear housing. (DO NOT place shift cam on pro-
peller shaft.)
2. Place bearing carrier into gear housing and thread cover nut tightly against bearing
carrier. (It is not necessary to torque cover nut against bearing carrier.)
3. Attach Bearing Carrier Removal Tool (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) onto
gear housing.
4. Torque puller bolt against propeller shaft to 45 Ib. in. (5 Nm). Turn driveshaft 10 revolu-
tions with the load applied to propeller shaft. This will seat forward gear bearing.
a dd
bb

cc 51867
a - Propeller Shaft (DO NOT install shift cam)
b - Bearing Carrier (assembled)
c - Cover Nut (Tighten; DO NOT torque)
d - Bearing Carrier Removal Tool (91-46086A1)
e - Puller Bolt (91-85716); Torque to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm)

5. Fasten dial indicator to gear housing and Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473) to drive-
shaft.
6. Recheck torque on puller bolt [45 Ib. in. (5 Nm)].

Page 6A-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

7. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear
ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on Backlash Indicator
Tool, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear).
d

c
e a
b

51880
a - Thread Stud Adaptor (from 91-14311A2)
b - Stud
c - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
d - Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)

8. Lightly turn driveshaft back-and-forth (no movement should be noticed at propeller

shaft).
9. Dial indicator registers amount of backlash which must be 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.46
mm to 0.69 mm) for the 1.87:1 gear ratio, 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm to 0.56 mm)
for the 2:1 gear ratio.
10. If backlash is LESS than the specified minimum, REMOVE shim(s) from in front of for-
ward gear bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply
Loctite 271 on threads of nut.
11. If backlash is MORE than the specified MAXIMUM, add shim(s) in front of forward
gear bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loc-
tite 271 on threads of nut.
NOTE: By adding or subtracting 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shim, the backlash will change ap-
proximately 0.001 in. (0.025 mm ).
REVERSE GEAR
Determining Reverse Gear Backlash
Although reverse gear backlash is not adjustable, it may be checked as follows:
1. Propeller shaft and bearing carrier must be completely assembled and installed in
gearcase.
2. Install shift shaft in gearcase.
3. Shift gearcase into reverse.
4. Slide 5-1/2 in. x 1.5 in. I.D. (139.7 mm x 38.0 mm) piece of PVC pipe over propeller
shaft and position pipe against bearing carrier.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-37

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Secure pipe against carrier with propeller nut and tab washer.

b a

51866
a - Pipe [5-1/2 in. x 1.5 in. (139.7 mm x 38.0 mm)]
b - Propeller Nut
c - Tab Washer

6. Torque propeller nut to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm).

7. Gently rock driveshaft. Dial indicator should show backlash of 0.030 in. – 0.050 in.
(0.762 mm – 1.27 mm).
If backlash is not as indicated, gear case is not properly assembled or parts are excessive-
ly worn and must be replaced before returning gear case to service.
Clutch Actuator Rod
REASSEMBLY
1. Place a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Lubricant on actuator rod and
install cam follower.
b aa

a - Actuator Rod
b - Cam Follower

Shift Shaft Bushing

REASSEMBLY
1. Position shift shaft bushing on a press with threaded side down.
2. Apply Loctite 271 to outside diameter of oil seal.
3. Press oil seal into shift shaft bushing with lip of seal up.
4. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seal and bushing.
5. Place rubber washer against oil seal.
6. Install O-ring over threads and up against shoulder of bushing.
7. Lubricate O-ring and oil seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.

Page 6A-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Propeller Shaft
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Insert clutch actuator rod assembly into end of propeller shaft. Align cross pin slot in
actuator rod with cross pin slot in propeller shaft.
2. On PRODUCTION MODEL GEAR CASES, position sliding clutch onto propeller shaft
with GROOVED RINGS (ON SLIDING CLUTCH) TOWARD PROPELLER END OF
PROPELLER SHAFT. Cross pin hole and detent holes (in sliding clutch) must line up
with cross pin slot and detent notches on propeller shaft.
d
b hf
g
e
ec
fd

aa bb 51864
ca 51864

a - Cam Follower
b - Propeller Shaft
c - Sliding Clutch
d - Grooved Rings
e - Cross Pin Hole
f - Detent Hole (Behind Finger and Thumb)
g - Detent Notch (One on Each Side)
h - Cross Pin Slot

3. Insert cross pin thru sliding clutch, propeller shaft and actuator rod, forcing cross pin
tool out.
4. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant on detent pin. Position
a detent pin in detent pin hole of sliding clutch with rounded end of pin toward propeller
shaft.
ab
cb

51864 dc 51864
a - Cross Pin
b - Detent Pin
c - Cross Pin
d - Sliding Clutch

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-39

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Install cross pin retaining spring onto sliding clutch as follows:

IMPORTANT: DO NOT over-stretch retaining spring when installing onto sliding
clutch.
6. Spirally wrap spring into groove on sliding clutch.
7. Place gear housing in a soft jaw vise with the driveshaft in a vertical position.
8. Coat cam pocket of cam follower with 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.
9. Place shift cam into cam pocket of cam follower with numbered side of cam facing up.
10. With shift cam positioned as shown, insert propeller shaft thru forward gear until shaft
bottoms out.

b a

c
55095
da
eb
51864
a - Cam Pocket
b - Cam Follower
c - Shift Cam
d - Shift Cam (Position as Shown)
e - Gear Housing

Page 6A-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

CAUTION
Until bearing carrier is installed into gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken
not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may
break the neck of the clutch actuator rod.
11. Insert shift shaft down shift shaft hole (of gear housing) and thru shift cam and cam
follower. (It may be necessary to rotate shift shaft back-and-forth slightly for it to enter
shift cam.)
12. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to threads of shift
shaft bushing. (Thread bushing into position, but do not tighten down at this time)

aa

b
b

51867
a - Shift Shaft Bushing
b - Shift Shaft

13. Lubricate O-ring on bearing carrier with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubri-
cant.
14. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to outside diameter
of bearing carrier (where carrier contacts gear housing).
NOTE: When performing Step 15, rotate driveshaft clockwise (viewed from top) to mesh
pinion gear with reverse gear.
15. Position bearing carrier over propeller shaft and slide it into gear housing. (Be sure
to align bearing carrier keyway with gear housing keyway.)
16. Push bearing carrier in as far as possible by hand, then install bearing carrier key.
17. Place tab washer against bearing carrier.
18. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to threads of cover nut and install
cover nut in gear housing (verify that the word “OFF” and arrow are visible).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-41

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: Before torquing bearing carrier cover nut, gear case should either be mounted in
a stand specifically designed for holding gear cases or bolted to a driveshaft housing to
avoid possible damage to the gear case.
19. Start cover nut a few turns by hand, then using Cover Nut Tool (91-61069T) and torque
wrench, torque cover nut to 210 Ib. ft. (285 Nm).

aa
b
cc

51871
a - O-ring
b - Cover Nut Tool
c - Torque Wrench

20. Bend one lock tab of tab washer into cover nut (only one will align).
21. Bend remaining tabs of tab washer toward front of gear housing.
22. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107T) and torque shift shaft bushing to 30 Ib. ft.
(41 Nm).
Water Pump
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Install oil seals into water pump base, as follows:
a. Place water pump base on a press.
b. Just before installing each seal apply Loctite 271 on outside diameter of oil seal.
c. With a suitable mandrel, press the smaller diameter oil seal into pump base with
lip of oil seal toward impeller side of base.
d. With a suitable mandrel, press the larger diameter oil seal into pump base with lip
of oil seal toward gear housing side of base.
e. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seals and water pump base.
2. Install O-ring into O-ring groove of water pump base. Lubricate O-ring and oil seals
with 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.

aa

cc
bb
51869
a - Mandrel c - O-ring Groove
b - Oil Seal (Smaller OD)

Page 6A-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

3. Install divider block if removed. Use RTV Sealer to seal seams between divider block
and gear housing.
4. Install a new water pump base gasket and install water pump base.

ba c
b 51866

51870
a - Divider Block
b - Water Pump Base
c - Gasket
d - Hole (MUST be positioned as shown)
5. Install the following in order: Pump base to face plate gasket, face plate gasket and
face plate to pump cover gasket. Gaskets and face plate are indexed by dowel pin
location and must be installed correctly.

b
cc

aa

51868
a - Gasket (Water Pump Base to Face Plate)
b - Face Plate
c - Gasket (Face Plate to Water Pump Cover)
6. Place impeller drive key on flat of driveshaft. Hold key on driveshaft with a small
amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repair, that requires removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary,
however, to reuse the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or pre-
mature impeller failure will occur. Original rotation is clockwise.

CAUTION
A visual inspection of impeller drive key MUST BE made to determine that drive
key is on flat of driveshaft after impeller is installed. If key has moved off flat of
driveshaft, repeat Steps 6 and 7.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-43

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

7. Slide impeller down driveshaft to impeller drive key. Align drive key with keyway in the
center hub of impeller, and slide impeller over drive key.
8. If removed, install new water pump insert into pump cover as follows:
a. Apply Perfect Seal to water pump insert area of pump cover.
b. Install water pump insert into pump cover. Verify that tab on insert enters recess
in pump cover.
c. Wipe any excess Perfect Seal from insert and cover.
NOTE: If 2 holes were drilled in top of water pump cover to aid in removal of insert, fill holes
with RTV Sealer or equivalent. Allow to cure, 24 hours prior to operating engine.
9. Install water tube seal into pump cover, being sure that plastic side of seal goes into
cover first.
10. Reinstall water tube guide into water pump cover.
11. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant inside of water
pump insert.
12. Position assembled water pump cover over driveshaft and lower over water pump
studs. Rotate driveshaft in a clockwise direction (viewed from top), while pushing
down on pump cover to ease impeller entry into cover.
13. Install water pump cover retainer washers, nuts and bolt.

CAUTION
DO NOT over-torque nuts and bolt, as this could cause cover to crack during op-
eration.
14. Torque water pump nuts to 50 Ib. in. (5.5 Nm), and water pump bolt to 35 Ib. in. (4 Nm).
15. Install centrifugal slinger over driveshaft and down against pump cover.

aa

c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolts and Washers

Page 6A-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions

1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill” and “Vent” screws and gear housing.
2. Install new gaskets on Fill and Vent screws.
IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing Vent
screw, or gear housing cannot be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing
ONLY when housing is in a vertical position.
3. Slowly fill housing thru Fill hole with Quicksilver Super Duty Lower Unit Lubricant until
lubricant flows out of “Vent” hole and no air bubbles are visible.
4. Install Vent screw into Vent hole.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT lose more than one fluid ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while
reinstalling Fill screw.
5. Remove grease tube (or hose) from Fill hole and quickly install Fill screw into Fill hole.
Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing
WARNING
Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from
engine before installing gear housing onto driveshaft housing.
1. Tilt engine to full up position and engage the tilt lock lever.
2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto driveshaft
splines.

CAUTION
DO NOT allow lubricant on top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in
clearance space, will not allow driveshaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subse-
quently, tightening the gear housing nuts (while excess lubricant is on top of dri-
veshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the power-
head and gear housing. Top of driveshaft is to be wiped free of lubricant.
3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto shift shaft
splines. (DO NOT allow lubricant on top of shift shaft.)
4. Apply a thin bead of G.E. Silicone Sealer against the top of divider block.
5. Insert trim tab bolt into hole in rear of gear housing to driveshaft housing machined
surface.
6. Shift gear housing into forward gear and place guide block anchor pin into forward
gear position.
Right Hand Rotation Outboard
Forward Gear Reverse Gear

a
a - Guide Block Anchor Pin

7. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-45

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: If, while performing Step 8, the driveshaft splines will not align with crankshaft
splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear
housing is being pushed toward driveshaft housing.
8. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing while aligning shift shaft splines and
water tube with water tube guide (in water pump cover).
9. Place flat washers onto studs (located on either side of driveshaft housing). Start a
nut (a) on these studs and tighten finger-tight.
10. Start bolt (b) at rear of gear housing inside trim tab recess. DO NOT tighten bolt at this
time.
11. Recheck shift shaft spline engagement and correct if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not force gear case up into place with attaching nuts.
12. Evenly tighten 2 nuts (a) which were started in Step 9. Torque to listing in “Torque
Specifications,” preceding.
13. After 2 nuts (located on either side of driveshaft housing) are tightened, check shift
operation as follows:
a. Place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position while turning prop shaft.
Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate clock-
wise.
b. Place guide block anchor pin into NEUTRAL position. Propeller shaft should ro-
tate freely clockwise/counterclockwise.
c. Place guide block anchor pin into REVERSE gear position. Rotate flywheel clock-
wise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate counterclockwise.
IMPORTANT: If shifting operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing
must be removed and the cause corrected.
14. Install washers and nuts (c) onto studs (located on bottom center of anti-cavitation
plate). Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.

a
d

51873 51866

15. Install special flat washer and nut (d) on stud at leading edge of driveshaft housing.
Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
16. Torque bolt (started in Step 10) to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
17. Install trim tab, adjust to position in which it had previously been installed, and tighten
bolt (e) securely.
18. Install plastic cap into trim tab bolt opening at rear edge of driveshaft housing.

Page 6A-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Propeller Installation
WARNING
When installing or removing propeller, because of the engine’s ease in starting,
be sure that the remote control is in neutral position and that the key switch is
“OFF.” Place a block of wood between the anti-cavitation plate and propeller to
prevent accidental starting and to protect hands from propeller blades while re-
moving or installing nut.
1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat the propeller shaft splines with
one of the following Quicksilver products:
-- Anti-Corrosion Grease
-- Special Lubricant 101
-- 2-4-C Marine Lubricant
-- Perfect Seal
2. Place forward thrust hub over propeller shaft with shoulder side toward propeller.
3. Place propeller on propeller shaft and slide it up against thrust hub.
4. Place continuity washer (if equipped) onto shoulder of rear thrust hub.
5. Place rear thrust hub, tab washer and propeller nut on propeller shaft.
6. Thread propeller nut onto propeller shaft until nut is recessed into tab washer.
7. After propeller nut is recessed into tab washer, tighten nut securely [minimum of 55
Ib. ft. (74.5 Nm) torque].
8. Bend 3 of the tabs of tab washer down in grooves of rear thrust hub to secure propeller
nut. (If tab washer tabs do not align with slots, continue to tighten propeller nut to ob-
tain alignment. DO NOT loosen nut to align tabs.)

aa
f

c d

d e
b
51866 51866
a - Forward Thrust Hub d - Rear Thrust Hub
b - Propeller Shaft e - Tab Washer
c - Continuity Washer (if f - Propeller Nut
Equipped)
CAUTION
DO NOT misinterpret propeller shaft movement with propeller movement. If pro-
peller and propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft, this is normal; how-
ever, propeller should not move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft.
9. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer (Steps 7 and
8, preceding). Propeller should be checked periodically for tightness, particularly if a
stainless steel propeller is used.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6A-47

RIGHT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Speedometer Tube Installation

1. Route speedometer tube from gearcase around lower yoke and push into junction.
Junction should be secured to yoke with sta-strap.
2. Route speedometer tube from swivel tube around lower yoke and push into junction.
After insertion of speedometer tubes into junction, pull on each tube to verify that they
are locked into junction. If tube pulls out, reinsert into junction.

a
c

d
57736 d 57735

a - Speedometer Tube from Gearcase

b - Junction
c - Sta-strap
d - Speedometer Tube from Swivel Tube

Page 6A-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

LOWER UNIT
Section 6B – Left Hand Non-Ratcheting
Table of Contents
Gear Housing Specifications (Counter Rotation) . . 6B-1 Reassembly and Installation of Counter Rotation
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2 Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation) . . . 6B-6 Driveshaft Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-31
Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation) . . . . 6B-8 Bearing Carrier, Forward Gear and Bearing
General Service Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-11 Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-32
Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection of Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor Assembly . . . 6B-35
Counter Rotation (Left Hand) Gear Housing . . . . 6B-12 Driveshaft and Pinion Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-37
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-15 Pinion Gear Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-39
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . 6B-17 Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-41
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-19 Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-42
Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-21 Propeller Shaft/Forward Gear Bearing
Clutch Actuator Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-24 Adapter/Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-45
Forward Gear and Bearing Adapter . . . . . . . . . 6B-24 Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-52
Pinion Gear and Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-26 Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 6B-55
Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-28 Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing 6B-55
Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-30 Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-57
Speedometer Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-58

6
Gear Housing Specifications (Counter Rotation) B
Ratio Pinion Depth Forward Gear Reverse Gear
Backlash Backlash
1.87:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm) With 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
Tool 91-12349A2 using (0.460 mm to 0.686 mm) (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Disc #2 and Flat #7 Pointer on line mark #1
2.0:1 0.025 in. (0.635 mm)With 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
Tool 91-12349A2 using (0.38 mm to 0.56 mm) (0.762 mm to 1.27 mm)
Disc #2 and Flat #7 Pointer on line mark #2

Gearcase Lubricant Capacity

All Ratios 22.5 fl. oz. (665.4 ml)

Gear Ratio Teeth on Pinion Gear Teeth on Forward and Reverse

Gear
1.87:1 15 28
2.00:1 12 24

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-1

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Special Tools
1. Shift Shaft Bushing Tool 91-31107T

2. Gear Housing Cover Nut Tool 91-61069

3. Bearing Carrier Removal Tool 91-46086A1 and Puller Bolt 91-85716

4. Slide Hammer Puller 91-34569A1

5. Bearing Removal and Installation Kit 91-31229A5. This kit contains the following
tools: Pilot 91-36571; Puller Rod 91-31229; Nut 11-24156; Puller Plate 91-29310;
Mandrel 91-38628; and Driver Rod 91-37323.

6. Pilot 91-36571

7. Puller Rod 91-31229 and Nut 91-24156

Page 6B-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

8. Puller Plate 91-29310

9. Mandrel 91-38628

10. Driver Rod 91-37323

11. Universal Puller Plate 91-37241

12. Driveshaft Holding Tool 91-34377A1 or91-90094

13. Oil Seal Driver 91-31108

14. Forward Gear Bearing Tool 91-86943

15. Pinion Locating Gear Tool 91-12349A2 or 91-74776

16. Backlash Indicator Rod 91-78473

17. Dial Indicator 91-58222A1

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-3

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

18. Bearing Retainer Tool 91-43506

19. Mandrel 91-92788

20. Mandrel 91-15755

21. Dial Indicator Holder 91-89897

22. Bearing Preload Tool 91-14311A1

8h

7g
6f
5e
4d

3c
2b

1a

1 - Adaptor (N.S.S.)
2 - Bearing (N.S.S.)
3 - Washer (N.S.S.)
4 - Spring (24-14111)
5 - Bolt (10-12580)
6 - Nut (11-13953)
7 - Set Screw (10-12575)
8 - Sleeve (23-13946)

23. Propeller Shaft 44-93003 and Load Washer (i) 12-37429

24. Forward Gear Installation Tool 91-815850

Page 6B-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

25. Reverse Gear Installation Kit 91-18605A1 includes Pilot 91-18603; Retainer
91-18604; Shaft 91-18605 and Screw 10-18602

d a

a - Pilot 91-18603
b - Shaft 91-18605
c - Retainer 91-18604
d - Screw 10-18602

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-5

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation)

4.75 IN/120.65 MM 48 23
40 43
44
TORPEDO DIA. 45
47
95
44 46
95
28
38
19
27
39 26
95
95
41
17
42 95

36
24
25
37 23

95 22
35 21
29
7
30

78 95
34 95

33
7 32 7 20
31
4 12
95 9
7

10 6
13
49 5 98

19 18
9 3
11 33
2
95
8
14
7 Loctite 271
15
19 Perfect Seal 1
16
23 Soap (Purchase Locally) 92
33 Loctite 680 19
78 G. E. RTV Sealant 7
18
92 Loctite 7649 Primer
95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 6B-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Drive Shaft)(Counter Rotation)

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION
1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BASIC)
2 2 DOWEL PIN
3 1 STUD (3-11/16 IN.)
4 2 STUD (2-1/16 IN.)
5 1 STUD (3-3/8 IN.)
6 2 STUD (3-1/8 IN.)
7 1 FILLER BLOCK
8 1 ROLLER BEARING
9 2 ANODE
10 1 SCREW
11 1 NUT 60 7
12 1 HOSE (12 IN.)
13 1 FITTING 50 5.5
1 PINION GEAR (1.87:1 - 15 TEETH)
14
1 PINION GEAR (2:1 - 14 TEETH)
15 1 WASHER
16 1 NUT 75 101
17 AR SHIM (006 thru 048)
18 2 SCREW–drain 60 7
19 2 WASHER
20 1 SHIFT SHAFT
21 1 O-RING
22 1 BUSHING ASSEMBLY 50 68
23 1 OIL SEAL
24 1 WASHER–rubber
25 1 DRIVE SHAFT
26 1 ROLLER BEARING
27 1 CUP
28 1 RETAINER 100 135
29 1 WATER PUMP BASE
30 1 RETAINER
31 1 GASKET
32 1 O-RING
33 1 OIL SEAL
34 1 OIL SEAL
35 1 GASKET–lower
36 1 GASKET–upper
37 1 FACE PLATE
38 1 WATER PUMP BODY ASSEMBLY
39 1 INSERT
40 1 SEAL–rubber
41 1 lMPELLER
42 1 KEY
43 1 SCREW (#14-8 x 2-1/4 IN.) 35 4
44 2 WASHER
45 2 NUT 50 5.5
46 1 WASHER
47 1 NUT 50 5.5
48 1 SLEEVE
49 1 DECAL-Counter Rotation

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-7

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation)

84
4.75 IN/120.65 MM
TORPEDO DIA.

85
95
86
83 87
51
87
50
52
57
87 53
65
59 64
95
54 87
63 55
62

56 87 94

87 68
87
66

60 58 67
61 69
95
70
87 75
71
72 87
87 7
73 76
74 95 77
73 78
79 81
72 95
71
80
82
95

7 Loctite 271 94 Anti-Corrosion Grease

87 Quicksilver Gear Lubricant 95 2-4-C with Teflon

Page 6B-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation)

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC)
50 1 CAM FOLLOWER
51 1 SHIFT CAM
52 1 ROD
53 AR SHIM SET
54 1 BEARING ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY
55 1 ROLLER BEARING
56 1 THRUST WASHER
57 1 THRUST BEARING
1 REVERSE GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)
58
1 REVERSE GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)
59 1 ROLLER BEARING
60 1 SPRING
61 1 SLIDING CLUTCH
62 1 CROSS PIN
63 1 DETENT PIN
64 1 PROPELLER SHAFT
1 FORWARD GEAR (1.87:1 – 15/28)
65
1 FORWARD GEAR (2:1 – 14/28)
AR SPACER SHIM .206 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .208 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .210 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .212 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .214 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .216 IN.
66 AR SPACER SHIM .218 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .220 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .222 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .224 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .226 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .228 IN.
AR SPACER SHIM .230 IN.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-9

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation)

84
4.75 IN/120.65 MM
TORPEDO DIA.

85
95
86
83
87
51
87
50
52
57
87 53
65
59 64
95
54 87
63 55
62
56 87 94

87 68
66
87

60 58 67
61 69
95
70
87 75
71
72 87
87 7
76
73
74 95 77
73 78
79 81
72 95
71
80
82

95

7 Loctite 271 94 Anti-Corrosion Grease

87 Quicksilver Gear Lubricant 95 2-4-C With Teflon

Page 6B-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Housing (Prop Shaft)(Counter Rotation)

TORQUE
REF.
REF
NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION lb-in lb-ft Nm.
1 1 GEAR HOUSING (BLACK)(BASIC)
67 1 ROLLER BEARING
68 1 THRUST WASHER
69 1 BEARING ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY
70 1 ROLLER BEARING
71 2 THRUST WASHER
72 2 THRUST BEARING
73 2 THRUST RACE
74 2 KEEPER
75 1 O RING
76 1 BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY
77 1 ROLLER BEARING
78 1 OIL SEAL (INSIDE)
79 1 OIL SEAL (OUTSIDE)
80 1 TAB WASHER
81 1 KEY
82 1 COVER 210 285
83 1 TRIM TAB
84 1 SCREW (1-3/4 IN.) 25 34
85 1 SCREW (3/8-16 x 1) 30 41
86 2 WASHER
87 2 NUT 50 68

General Service Recommendations

There may be more than one way to “disassemble” or “reassemble” a particular part(s),
therefore, it is recommended that the entire procedure be read prior to repair.
IMPORTANT: Read the following before attempting any repairs.
In many cases, disassembly of a sub-assembly may not be necessary until cleaning and
inspection reveals that disassembly is required for replacement of one or more compo-
nents.
Service procedure order in this section is a normal disassembly-reassembly sequence.
It is suggested that the sequence be followed without deviation to assure proper repairs.
When performing partial repairs, follow the instructions to the point where the desired
component can be replaced, then proceed to “reassembly and installation” of that compo-
nent in the reassembly part of this section. Use the “Index” (on back of section divider)
to find correct page number.
Threaded parts are right hand (RH), unless otherwise indicated.
When holding, pressing or driving is required, use soft metal vise jaw protectors or wood
for protection of parts. Use a suitable mandrel (one that will contact only the bearing race)
when pressing or driving bearings.
Whenever compressed air is used to dry a part, verify that no water is present in air line.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-11

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

BEARINGS
Upon disassembly of gear housing, all bearings must be cleaned and inspected. Clean
bearings with solvent and dry with compressed air. Air should be directed at the bearing
so that it passes thru the bearing. DO NOT spin bearing with compressed air, as this may
cause bearing to score from lack of lubrication. After cleaning, lubricate bearings with
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant. DO NOT lubricate tapered bearing cups until after inspection.
Inspect all bearings for roughness, catches and bearing race side wear. Work inner bear-
ing race in-and-out, while holding outer race, to check for side wear. When inspecting ta-
pered bearings, determine condition of rollers and inner bearing race by inspecting bear-
ing cup for pitting, scoring, grooves, uneven wear, imbedded particles and/or
discoloration from over-heating. Always replace tapered bearing and race as a set.
Roller bearing condition is determined by inspecting the bearing surface of the shaft that
the roller bearing supports. Check shaft surface for pitting, scoring, grooving, imbedded
particles, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. The shaft and bearing must
be replaced, if the conditions described are found.
SHIMS
Keep a record of all shim amounts and location during disassembly to aid in reassembly.
Be sure to follow shimming instructions during reassembly, as gears must be installed to
correct depth and have the correct amount of backlash to avoid noisy operation and pre-
mature gear failure.
SEALS
As a normal procedure, all O-rings and oil seals SHOULD BE REPLACED without regard
to appearance. To prevent leakage around oil seals, apply Loctite 271 to outer diameter
of all metal case oil seals. When using Loctite on seals or threads, surfaces must be clean
and dry. To ease installation, apply 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant on all O-rings. To
prevent wear, apply 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant on l.D. of oil seals. To prevent cor-
rosion damage after reassembly, apply Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon to external surfaces
of bearing carrier and cover nut threads prior to installation.

Removal, Disassembly, Cleaning and Inspection of Counter

Rotation (Left Hand) Gear Housing
REMOVAL

WARNING
Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from
engine before removing gear housing from driveshaft housing.
1. Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from engine.

CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in NEUTRAL position and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing BEFORE propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
2. Shift engine into NEUTRAL position.
3. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock lever.
4. Bend tabs of propeller tab washer away from thrust hub (rear), then remove propeller
locknut, tab washer, thrust hub (rear), propeller and thrust hub (forward) from propel-
ler shaft.

Page 6B-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Mark gear housing and trim tab so that trim tab can be reinstalled in the same position.
Remove plastic cap at rear edge of driveshaft housing. Remove bolt that secures trim
tab and remove tab from gear housing.
6. Once trim tab is removed, remove bolt from inside of trim tab cavity.
7. Remove 2 locknuts from bottom middle of anti-cavitation plate.

g
d
h
f
a
c i

b
e
c

51916 51912 51866

a - Tab Washer e - Propeller Shaft

b - Propeller Nut f - Thrust Hub (forward)
c - Rear Thrust Hub g - Bolt (secures trim tab)
d - Continuity Washer (if h - Bolt (inside trim tab cavity)
equipped) i - Locknuts and Washers

8. While pressing in on speedometer hose junction, pull out on hose to disconnect.

b
a

57735

a - Press in on Junction
b - Pull out on Hose

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-13

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

9. Remove locknut from the front gear housing mounting stud.

10. Loosen the side mounting locknuts. (DO NOT attempt to remove one nut before oppo-
site side is loosened sufficiently, or driveshaft housing could be damaged.)

bb
a
51873
a - Front Mounting Locknut
b - Side Mounting Locknut (One Each Side)
11. Pull gear housing away from driveshaft housing as far as the loosened nuts (in Step
9) will allow, then remove loosened nuts. (DO NOT allow gear housing to fall, as it now
is free.)
12. Pull gear housing from driveshaft housing.
DRAINING AND INSPECTING GEAR HOUSING LUBRICANT
1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with the driveshaft in a vertical
position, as shown.
NOTE: Drain and Fill screws may be located on the starboard side of gearcase on later
models.
2. Position a clean drain pan under gear housing and remove “Fill” and “Vent” screws
from gear housing.
3. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles. Presence of a small amount of fine metal
particles (resembling powder) indicates normal wear. Presence of larger particles (or
a large quantity of fine particles) indicates need for gear housing disassembly, and
component inspection.
4. Note the color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in
lubricant. Check drain pan for water separation from lubricant. Presence of water in
gear lubricant indicates the need for disassembly, and inspection of oil seals, seal sur-
faces, O-rings and gear housing components.
IMPORTANT: Gear lubricant drained from a recently run gear case will be a light
chocolate brown in color due to agitation/aeration. Oil which is stabilized will be
a clear yellow brown in color.

bb

aa
51871
a - Fill Screw
b - Vent Screw

Page 6B-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Water Pump
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean all water pump parts with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect water pump cover and base for cracks and distortion (from overheating).
3. Inspect face plate and water pump insert for grooves and/or rough surfaces.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repairs, that require removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary,
however, to re-use impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation, or prema-
ture impeller failure will occur.
4. Inspect impeller side seal surfaces and ends of impeller blades for cracks, tears and
wear. Replace impeller if any of these conditions are found.
5. Inspect impeller bonding to impeller hub.
6. Inspect impeller for glazed or melted appearance (caused by operation without suffi-
cient water supply). Replace impeller if any of these conditions exist.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and gaskets be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
1. Slide rubber centrifugal slinger up and off driveshaft.
2. Remove water tube guide and seal from water pump cover. (Retain guide for reas-
sembly and discard seal.)
3. Remove (and retain) 3 nuts, one bolt and all washers which secure water pump cover
to gear housing.
4. Using 2 pry bars, lift water pump cover up and off driveshaft.

51874

c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolt and Washers to be Removed

5. Inspect water pump cover and insert, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection,” pre-
vious.
6. If inspection of water pump insert determines that replacement is required, follow Step
“a” or “b” (immediately following) to remove insert from water pump cover.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-15

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: Try Step “a” first. If insert cannot be removed with Step “a,” use Step “b.”
a. Drive water pump insert out of water pump cover with a punch and hammer.

b. Drill two 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) diameter holes thru the top of water pump cover (but
not thru insert). Drive insert out of cover with a punch and hammer.

aa

51874

51873
a - Drill Two Holes at These Locations

7. Remove impeller from driveshaft. (It may be necessary to use a punch and hammer
to drive impeller upward on driveshaft. In extreme cases, it may be necessary to split
hub of impeller with a hammer and chisel.)
8. Once impeller is removed, remove impeller drive key from driveshaft.
9. Remove water pump face plate and both gaskets (one above and below face plate)
from water pump base.
10. Using 2 pry bars, positioned and padded as shown, lift water pump base up and off
driveshaft.

a
51874
a - Pads

11. Remove (and discard) O-ring from O-ring groove on water pump base.
12. Using a screwdriver, pry oil seals out of water pump base from gear housing side of
base.

Page 6B-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft

REMOVAL

CAUTION
Gear housing MUST BE in neutral position, and shift shaft MUST BE removed
from gear housing before propeller shaft can be removed from gear housing.
1. Place gear housing in a suitable holding fixture or vise with propeller shaft in a horizon-
tal position.
2. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) to un-thread shift shaft bushing. (DO NOT
remove bushing from shift shaft at this time.)
3. Bend retainer nut lock tab out of retainer nut recess.

aa

bb
d
b ca

51882 51865
a - Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107)
b - Shift Shaft Bushing
c - Punch
d - Tab of Tab Washer

4. Remove gear housing retainer nut with Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069).
5. After retainer nut has been removed, remove lock tab washer from gear housing.

ca

a b

51911 51885
a - Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069)
b - Retainer Nut
c - Tab Washer

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-17

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

CAUTION
Once bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, extreme care MUST BE taken
not to apply any side force on propeller shaft. Side force on propeller shaft may
break the neck of the clutch actuator rod.
6. Use long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1) and Puller Bolt (91-85716) to remove bearing car-
rier. (Use propeller thrust hub to maintain outward pressure on puller jaws.)
NOTE: When bearing carrier is removed from gear housing, the bearing carrier alignment
key will come out with it.

a
b

cc 51867
a - Long Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
b - Puller Bolt (91-85716)
c - Thrust Hub
IMPORTANT: Prior to removal of shift shaft from gear housing, recheck that gear
housing is in neutral position.
7. With gear housing in neutral, pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If necessary, use a
pliers to pull shift shaft out of gear housing. If pliers are used to pull shift shaft out, wrap
a strip of soft metal (aluminum) around splines before clamping pliers. DO NOT turn
shaft (clockwise OR counterclockwise) while pulling shaft out. (For further information
on shift shaft, see “Shift Shaft Cleaning/lnspection and Disassembly.”)

aa

bb

51867
a - Shift Shaft Bushing
b - Shift Shaft

Page 6B-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

CAUTION
Propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam, in most cases, will come out of gear
housing by simply pulling outward on propeller shaft. DO NOT FORCE shaft side-
ways or ATTEMPT TO PULL with a slide hammer or any mechanical puller.
8. Remove propeller shaft, cam follower and shift cam by pulling shaft straight out of gear
housing. (DO NOT JERK propeller shaft.)
NOTE: Sliding clutch, forward gear assembly, bearing adaptor, thrust washer and thrust
bearings will be removed from gearcase with propeller shaft.

51877
9. If propeller shaft will not come out, proceed with Step “a” or “b,” following:
a. Push propeller shaft back into place against the reverse gear. Visually inspect lo-
cation of shift cam by looking down shift shaft hole (illuminated with a flashlight).
If splined hole in shift cam is visible, reinstall shift shaft and rotate shift shaft to neu-
tral position. Remove shift shaft, then remove propeller shaft as instructed in Step
8, immediately preceding.
b. Push propeller shaft back into place against reverse gear. Slide bearing
carrier back into gear housing (to support propeller shaft). Place gear hous-
ing on its left side (viewed from rear) and strike upper leading end of gear
housing with a rubber mallet. This will dislodge the shift cam from cam fol-
lower into a clearance pocket in left side of gear housing. Remove bearing
carrier and pull propeller shaft out of gear housing.
NOTE: If Step 9-b was used to remove propeller shaft, the shift cam can be retrieved after
removal of reverse gear.
Shift Shaft
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean shift shaft and bushing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check shift shaft splines on both ends for wear and/or corrosion damage.
3. Inspect shift shaft for groove(s) at shift shaft bushing seal surface.
4. Inspect shift shaft bushing for corrosion damage.
5. Inspect shift shaft bushing oil seal for wear and/or cuts.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-19

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove (and discard) shift shaft bushing oil seal by prying it out or driving it out with
a punch and hammer.
CLEANING/INSPECTION - BEARING CARRIER
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that all seals and O-rings be replaced (as a normal
repair procedure) to assure effective repair.

CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
1. Clean bearing carrier with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Bearing carrier propeller shaft needle bearing condition is determined by propeller
shaft bearing surface condition. (See “Propeller Shaft Inspection.”)
DISASSEMBLY- BEARING CARRIER
1. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing carrier.
2. If thrust bearing, thrust washer or thrust bearing surface on propeller shaft shows
signs of rust, pitting or blueing from lack of lubricant, component(s) should be dis-
carded.
3. Remove bearing carrier oil seals.

aa ad

b
e
cc bb
fc
g
d
51878

51886
a - Thrust Bearing
b - Thrust Washer
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Pry Bar
e - Oil Seals
f - Bearing Carrier
g - Bearing Carrier Needle Bearing

NOTE: Do not remove bearing carrier needle bearing unless replacement is needed.

Page 6B-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

4. Use bearing removal and replacement tool (91-31229A5) or equivalent to press bear-
ings out of bearing carrier.
bb

cc

aa

51885
a - Needle Bearing
b - Push Rod
c - Mandrel
Propeller Shaft
INSPECTION
1. Clean propeller shaft assembly with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect bearing carrier oil seal surfaces for grooves. Run fingernail across seal sur-
face to check for groove. Replace shaft if groove is found.
3. Visually check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven
wear or discoloration (bluish color) from overheating. Replace shaft and correspond-
ing needle bearing if any of the above conditions are found. (Bearing carrier needle
bearing contacts propeller shaft just in front of oil seal surface. Reverse gear bearing
contacts propeller shaft in front of sliding clutch splines.)
4. Inspect propeller shaft splines for wear and/or corrosion damage.
5. Check propeller shaft for straightness. Use either method, following:
Balance Wheels
Place propeller shaft on balance wheels, as shown. Rotate propeller shaft and observe
propeller end of shaft for “wobble.” Replace shaft if any wobble is observed.
b

a
51877
a - Balance Wheels
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Watch for Wobble

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-21

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

“Vee” Blocks and Dial Indicator

Position propeller shaft roller bearing surfaces on vee blocks. Mount a dial indicator at
front edge of propeller splines. Rotate propeller shaft. Dial indicator movement of more
than 0.006 in. (0.152 mm) (or noticeable wobble) is reason for replacement.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove shift cam from cam follower.
2. Insert a thin blade screwdriver or awl under first coil of cross pin retainer spring and
rotate propeller shaft to unwind spring from sliding clutch. DO NOT overstretch spring.
aa

51875
a - Cross Pin Retainer Spring

CAUTION
Detent pin is free and can fall out of sliding clutch. Care MUST BE taken not to lose
pin.
3. Detent pin is free and can be removed from sliding clutch at this time.
4. Push cross pin out of sliding clutch and propeller shaft with a punch.

aa

cc
e

bb
d
51879
51875
a - Detent Pin
b - Cross Pin
c - Sliding Clutch
d - Cross Pin
e - Punch

Page 6B-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Pull sliding clutch off propeller shaft.

6. Inspect sliding clutch. Check reverse gear clutch “jaws” and forward gear clutch
“jaws.” Rounded “jaws” indicate one or more of the following:
a. Improper shift cable adjustment.
b. Improper shift habits of operator(s) (shift from neutral to reverse gear or forward
gear too slowly).
c. Engine idle speed too high (while shifting).

cc

bb
aa
51875
a - Sliding Clutch
b - Reverse Gear Clutch Jaws
c - Forward Gear Clutch Jaws

7. Pull cam follower and clutch actuator rod out of propeller shaft. DO NOT force cam
follower up-or-down or side-to-side when pulling from propeller shaft.
8. Once cam follower and clutch actuator rod are removed from propeller shaft, lift rod
out of cam follower.
9. Check condition of cam follower. If it shows wear (pitting, scoring or rough surface),
replace cam follower and shift cam.
10. Remove forward gear and bearing adaptor assembly.
11. Remove 2 thrust races and 2 keepers from prop shaft.

ca
ec
fd

db
b 55097
aa 51884
a - Cam Follower
b - Clutch Actuator Rod
c - Forward Gear
d - Bearing Adaptor Assembly
e - Thrust Races (2)
f - Keepers (hidden) (2)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-23

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Clutch Actuator Rod

CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean clutch actuator rod in solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect actuator components for wear or damage. Replace components as required.
Forward Gear and Bearing Adapter
DISASSEMBLY/CLEANING/INSPECTION
1. Remove forward gear from bearing adapter.
2. Inspect forward gear clutch teeth for signs of wear. If clutch teeth are worn, sliding
clutch should be replaced also.
3. Inspect forward gear teeth for full tooth contact, chips, pits and signs of rust. If forward
gear teeth are damaged, pinion gear must be inspected and replaced if necessary.
4. Inspect forward gear hub for signs of pitting, rust, scoring or discoloration (blueing)
due to lack of lubricant.
5. Remove thrust bearing and spacer shim. Inspect thrust bearing for pits, rust, or discol-
oration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant.

b
b aa
cc

dd

ee

ff

g
51878
a - Forward Gear
b - Forward Gear Clutch Teeth
c - Forward Gear Teeth
d - Forward Gear Hub
e - Thrust Bearing
f - Thrust Washer
g - Spacer Shim

Page 6B-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

6. Remove thrust washer and O-ring. The thrust washer acts as a bearing surface for
the thrust bearing and it should be inspected for pits, rust, scoring or discoloration due
to lack of lubricant. O-ring should be inspected for cuts or abrasions and replaced if
necessary.
7. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from bearing adaptor. Thrust roller bearing
should be inspected for pitting, rust or signs of discoloration (blueing) due to lack of
lubricant. If thrust roller bearing must be replaced, the bearing surfaces on the thrust
washer and propeller shaft where the thrust roller bearing rides should also be in-
spected for signs of wear.

aa

bb ec

ca

55089

db

55090
a - Thrust Washer
b - O-Ring (hidden)
c - Thrust Bearing
d - Thrust Washer
e - Bearing Adaptor

8. The forward gear bearing should be carefully inspected for smoothness of movement,
pits, rust, or signs of discoloration (blueing) due to lack of lubricant. If the bearing must
be replaced, it is recommended that a hammer and cape chisel be used to break the
bearing loose from the bearing adapter. Be careful not to damage bearing adapter
when removing roller bearing.
aa

b
55091
a - Forward Gear Bearing
b - Bearing Adaptor

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-25

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Pinion Gear and Driveshaft

REMOVAL
1. Remove bearing retainer using Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506).

aa
51865
a - Bearing Retainer
b - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506)

2. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) over driveshaft splines.

3. Use a socket and flex handle to hold pinion nut. (Pad area of gear housing, where flex
handle will make contact, to prevent damage to gear housing.)
4. Use a socket and flex handle on Driveshaft Holding Tool to loosen pinion nut. Remove
pinion nut and Driveshaft Holding Tool.
5. Remove gear housing from vise and re-position it as shown. Be sure to use soft jaw
vise covers and clamp as close as possible to water pump studs.
6. Place a block of wood on gear housing mating surface. Use a mallet and carefully tap
gear housing away from driveshaft.

CAUTION
DO NOT strike gear housing hard with the mallet or allow gear housing to fall.

b a

51878

a - Wooden Block
b - Soft Jaw Vise Covers

7. Reach into gear housing and remove pinion gear.

Page 6B-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

8. After driveshaft is removed from gear case, remove and retain shim(s) that were lo-
cated under upper tapered driveshaft bearing.
9. If inspection determines that replacement of driveshaft tapered bearing is required,
remove bearing from driveshaft as follows:
a. Position driveshaft in a vise; DO NOT tighten vise jaws against shaft.
b. Strike shaft with a lead hammer; take care not to drop shaft.

51866
10. Remove 18 loose needles from outer race of driveshaft needle bearing.
11. If inspection of driveshaft needle bearing surface determines that replacement of
needle bearing is required, the 18 loose needle bearings previously removed must
be reinstalled in bearing race to provide surface for mandrel to drive against.
NOTE: Reverse gear must be removed first before removing driveshaft needle bearing.
IMPORTANT: Discard driveshaft needle bearing after removal. (Bearing cannot be
reused.)

cc

bb

aa

51869
a - Mandrel (91-37263)
b - Pilot* (91-36571)
c - Driver Rod* (91-37323)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-27

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

CLEANING AND INSPECTION

1. Clean driveshaft, tapered bearing and race, and pinion gear with solvent. Dry with
compressed air. DO NOT allow driveshaft bearing to spin while drying.
2. Inspect pinion gear for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration
from overheating. Replace pinion gear, if any of the above conditions are found.
3. Inspect driveshaft needle bearing surface (area just above pinion gear splines) for pit-
ting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and/or discoloration from overheating. Replace
driveshaft and driveshaft needle bearing, if any of the preceding conditions are found.
4. Inspect driveshaft to crankshaft splines for wear. Replace driveshaft if wear is exces-
sive.
5. Inspect tapered bearing race for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and discolor-
ation from overheating. Replace tapered bearing and race as a set, if any of the pre-
ceding conditions are found.
6. Inspect driveshaft for groove(s) where water pump base oil seals contact shaft. Re-
place driveshaft if groove(s) are found.
Reverse Gear
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Reverse gear can be removed from gear housing only after driveshaft and pinion
gear have been removed.
NOTE: Cautiously applying heat to both sides of gearcase where reverse gear assembly
is located will aid in removal of bearing cup adapter.
1. Remove reverse gear by hand.

50884
a - Reverse Gear

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove needle bearing from reverse gear unless replace-
ment of bearing is required. Bearing cannot be reused after it has been removed.

Page 6B-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

2. Remove thrust bearing and thrust washer from reverse gear bearing cup.
3. Remove reverse gear bearing adaptor. Remove, measure and make note of the shim
thickness and discard (DO NOT reuse shims if they are damaged during removal)
the shims.

da g
d fc
b
e

eh

fi
bb

cc 50882

50780

a - Thrust Bearing
b - Thrust Washer
c - Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor
d - Bolt (91-31229)
e - Nut (91-11-24156)
f - Guide Plate (91-816243)
g - Washer (91-34961)
h - Puller Head (from Slide Hammer Puller Kit 91-34569A1)
i - Jaws (91-816242)

CLEANING AND INSPECTION

CAUTION
DO NOT spin bearings dry with compressed air, as this could cause bearing to
score.
1. Clean reverse gear and bearing with solvent and dry with compressed air. DO NOT
spin the bearing.
2. Inspect gear teeth for pitting, grooves, scoring, uneven wear and for discoloration
(from overheating). Replace gear if any of these conditions are found.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-29

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

3. Check clutch jaws on reverse gear for damage. Replace reverse gear if damage is
found.

aa

23351
a - Reverse Gear Teeth
b - Clutch Jaws
NOTE: The needle bearings in the reverse gear should not be removed unless damage
has been found. Inspect to ensure that all of the needles are present and in position.
Needles that have been dislodged may be snapped back into place as long as no damage
has occurred to the bearing cage.
4. Inspect the needle bearings on the inside of the reverse gear and the bearing surface
on the propeller shaft. If either the needle bearings or the bearing surface of the pro-
peller shaft is pitted grooved, worn unevenly, discolored from overheating or has em-
bedded particles, replace the propeller shaft and needle bearing in the reverse gear.
a

a - Reverse Gear Needle Bearing Contact Area

5. If reverse gear needle bearing is found to be damaged, place reverse gear in a press
and use mandrel 91-63569 to press bearing out of gear.
aa

50778
a - Bearing
Gear Housing
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
1. Clean gear housing with solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Check gear housing carefully for impact damage.
3. Check for loose fitting bearing adaptors and needle bearings.
NOTE: If bearing adaptors have spun in gear case, gear housing must be replaced.
4. Inspect bearing carrier cover nut retainer threads in gear housing for corrosion dam-
age and/or stripped threads.

Page 6B-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Reassembly and Installation of Counter Rotation Gear

Housing
Driveshaft Needle Bearing
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION

CAUTION
If driveshaft needle bearing failure has occurred, and original bearing race has
turned in the gear housing, gear housing must be replaced. Loose fitting needle
bearing will move out of position and cause repeated failures.
NOTE: Driveshaft needle bearing must be installed prior to installation of reverse gear.
1. Apply a thin coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant to driveshaft needle bearing
bore in gear housing.
2. By way of propeller shaft cavity, place needle bearing in driveshaft bore with num-
bered side of bearing facing up driveshaft bore.
3. Install and seat needle bearing with the following tools: Puller Rod* (91-31229), Nut*
(91-24156), Pilot* (91-36571), Plate* (91-29310), and Mandrel* (91-92788). Pull
bearing up into bore until it bottoms on gear housing shoulder. (DO NOT use exces-
sive force.)
*From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)

ff

ee

dd

cc

bb

aa
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Bearing
c - Pilot
d - Plate
e - Puller Rod
f - Hold

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-31

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Bearing Carrier, Forward Gear and Bearing Adaptor

REASSEMBLY
1. Using suitable mandrel, press forward gear bearing into bearing adaptor until bearing
is flush with lip of adaptor.

aa
bb

cc

a - Suitable Mandrel
b - Forward Gear Bearing
c - Bearing Adaptor

PROPELLER SHAFT NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING AND OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

1. Using mandrel 91-15755, press bearing carrier needle bearing (number side up) into
bearing carrier until mandrel shoulder contacts bearing carrier.

aa
d

c
bb

51881
a - Mandrel (91-15755)
b - Bearing Carrier Needle Bearing
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Shoulder

2. Apply Loctite 271 to outside diameter of oil seals.

Page 6B-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

3. With seal lip facing towards bearing, press inner seal (a) using long end of mandrel
(b) (91-31108) into bearing carrier (c) until mandrel shoulder (d) bottoms out on bear-
ing carrier.

dd
aa

cc

51881
a - Inner Seal
b - Mandrel (91-31108)
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Mandrel Shoulder

4. With seal lip facing towards mandrel, press outer seal (a) using short end of mandrel
(b) (91-31108) into bearing carrier (c) until mandrel shoulder (d) bottoms out on bear-
ing carrier.

bb

dd
aa

cc

51881
a - Outer Seal
b - Mandrel (91-31108)
c - Bearing Carrier
d - Mandrel Shoulder

5. Lubricate both seal lips with 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-33

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

REVERSE GEAR AND BEARING CUP ADAPTOR REASSEMBLY

1. With reverse gear teeth facing down, use mandrel (91-86943) to press propeller shaft
needle bearing (NUMBERS/LETTERS UP) into reverse gear until short shoulder on
mandrel bottoms on reverse gear.
NOTE: If gear housing has been replaced or inspection determines that reverse gear
bearing adapter must be replaced, assemble and install as follows:
2. Place reverse gear roller bearing (NUMBER/LETTERS UP) in press. Using suitable
mandrel, press bearing cup adapter onto reverse gear bearing.

b
d ea
cc
fb

aa
gc
51883
a - Reverse Gear Teeth
b - Mandrel (91-86943)
c - Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing
d - Shoulder
e - Mandrel
f - Bearing Cup Adapter
g - Reverse Gear Roller Bearing

IMPORTANT: The appearance of the forward and reverse gear is almost identical.
There are two ways to distinguish between the reverse and forward gears. The re-
verse gear has a shorter hub and it has a smaller inner diameter needle bearing
bore.
d

aa b 50885

a - Reverse Gear
b - Forward Gear
c - Shorter Length Hub
d - Smaller Diameter Bearing Bore

Page 6B-34 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Reverse Gear Bearing Adaptor Assembly

INSTALLATION
NOTE: If the reverse gear, reverse gear adaptor, large thrust bearing, or bearing race in
the gear housing were not replaced, install the same shim(s) (or the same thickness of
shim(s)) that were taken out when adaptor was removed. If the reverse gear, reverse gear
adaptor, large thrust bearing, bearing race, or gear housing were replaced, install 0.008
in. (0.51 mm) of shims.
NOTE: If backlash has already been checked and it has determined that it needs to be
adjusted, (see Checking Reverse Gear Backlash), adding 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) shims will
reduce the gear backlash by approximately 0.001 in. (0.025 mm). Subtracting 0.001 in.
(0.025 mm) shims will increase backlash by approximately the same amount.

Example 1 (if backlash is too high)

Backlash checks: 0.045 in. (1.14 mm)

(subtract) middle
of 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)
specification:
You get: 0.020 in. (0.51 mm)

add this quantity of shims:

Example 2 (if backlash is too low)

middle of specification: 0.025 in. (0.64 mm)

Backlash checks: 0.009 in. (0.23 mm)

(subtract) You get: 0.016 in. (0.41 mm)

subtract this quantity of shims:

1. Lubricate the bore into which the reverse gear bearing adaptor is to be installed with
Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant.
2. Place the shim(s) into reverse bore of gear housing.
3. Position the bearing adaptor in the gear housing.

aa

bb

55099

a - Bearing Adaptor
b - Shims

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-35

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

4. Position the reverse gear (without the thrust race or thrust bearing) into the gear hous-
ing and into the adaptor.
5. Install PILOT RING (91-18603) over DRIVER TOOL (91-18605) and seat pilot ring in
gearcase against inner ledge. Thread RETAINER (91-18604) into bearing carrier
threads. Install SCREW (10-18602) into retainer and gently tighten screw against
driver tool while holding retainer securely. Continue to apply pressure against driver
rod until reverse gear/bearing cup adaptor JUST SEATS in gearcase. DO NOT
OVER-SEAT the adaptor as the reverse gear bearing will be damaged. As bearing
adaptor begins to seat, the effort required to turn screw will increase considerably.

d
e ba

c
b
fe
cd
55100

a - Reverse Gear d - Inner Ledge

b - Pilot Ring (91-18603) e - Retainer (91-18604)
c - Driver Tool (91-18605) f - Screw (10-18602)
6. After reverse bearing adaptor is seated, remove screw, retainer, driver tool, pilot ring
and reverse gear. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to thrust bearing and
install thrust race and bearing onto bearing adaptor.
7. Reinstall reverse gear into bearing adaptor.

a d
a

f e
b

c g
55101 55102

a - Thrust Bearing e - Thrust Bearing

b - Thrust Washer f - Thrust Washer (under
c - Bearing Adaptor thrust bearing)
d - Reverse Gear g - Bearing Adaptor

Page 6B-36 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Driveshaft and Pinion Gear

REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant on l.D. of driveshaft ta-
pered bearing.
2. Thread a used pinion nut onto end of driveshaft. Leave approximately 1/16 in. (1.6
mm) of nut threads exposed. Driveshaft threads MUST NOT extend beyond nut or
thread damage could result while pressing.
3. Place bearing over driveshaft.
4. Using an old driveshaft bearing inner race or other suitable mandrel (which applies
pressing force on center bearing race only), press bearing onto shaft until seated.

aa

b
b

cc
d
d
ee

50064
a - Used Pinion Nut
b - Driveshaft
c - Tapered Bearing
d - Old Bearing Inner Race
e - Universal Puller Plate

5. Position pinion gear in gear housing below driveshaft bore with teeth of pinion gear
meshed with teeth of reverse gear.
6. Insert driveshaft into driveshaft bore while holding pinion gear. Rotate driveshaft to
align and engage driveshaft splines with pinion gear splines. Continue to insert drive-
shaft into gear housing until driveshaft tapered bearing is against bearing race.
7. Apply Loctite 271 to threads of pinion gear nut and install flat washer and nut on drive-
shaft with flat side of nut away from pinion gear.
8. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into gear housing. If shim(s) were lost or
are not reusable (damaged), start with approximately 0.010 in. (0.254 mm).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-37

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

9. Install bearing race and bearing retainer.

dd

cc

b
a
51880
a - Shim(s)
b - Bearing Race
c - Bearing Retainer (Word “OFF” must be visible); Torque to 100 lb. ft.
(135.5 Nm)
d - Bearing Retainer Tool (91-43506)

10. Use a socket and breaker bar to hold pinion nut (pad area where flex handle will con-
tact gear housing while torquing nut).
11. Place Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1) over crankshaft end of driveshaft.
Torque pinion nut to 75 Ib. ft. (101.5 Nm).

cc
bb aa

aa

cc

d
a - Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-34377A1)
b - Torque Wrench; Torque Nut to 75 lb. ft. (101.5 Nm)
c - Socket
d - Breaker Bar

IMPORTANT: Wipe any excess Loctite from pinion nut and pinion gear.

Page 6B-38 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Pinion Gear Depth

DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any change in shim thickness.
IMPORTANT: Reverse gear assembly must be installed in gear housing when
checking pinion gear depth or an inaccurate measurement will be obtained.
1. Clean gear housing bearing carrier shoulder.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) over driveshaft in sequence shown.
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) may also be used. Follow instructions pro-
vided with tool for proper installation.
hh

gg g

ee

ff

cc

bb

aa
a - Adaptor
b - Bearing
c - Washer
d - Spring
e - Nut; thread nut all the way onto bolt
f - Bolt
g - Set Screw
h - Sleeve; holes in sleeve must align with set screws

3. Align adaptor on driveshaft bearing pocket ledge.

4. With tool installed over driveshaft, tighten both set screws securely, making certain
to align sleeve holes to allow set screws to pass thru.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-39

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

5. Measure distance (a) and increase that distance by 1 in. (25.4 mm) by turning bottom
nut away from top nut.

1 in. (25.4 mm)

aa ba

cb
51870
a - Distance
b - Adaptor
c - Ledge

6. Turn driveshaft clockwise 2 or more turns to seat driveshaft bearings.

7. Insert Pinion Gear Locating Tool* (91-74776) into gear housing until it bottoms out on
bearing carrier Shoulder.
*Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2) can be used. Use flat #7 and disc #2. Follow
instructions supplied with tool.
8. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler gauge thru access slot in pinion gear
shimming tool.
9. Clearance between shimming tool and pinion gear should be 0.025 in. (0.64 mm).
10. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool on driveshaft for “Determining
Forward Gear Backlash,” following.
11. If clearance is not correct, add (or subtract) shims at location shown to raise (or lower)
pinion gear.
When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut and retorque pinion
nut.

cc b
d
aa

cc
aa

24643
a - Pinion Gear Shimming Tool (91-74776 or 91-12349A2)
b - Feeler Gauge
c - Obtain 0.025 in. (0.64 mm) Clearance between Shimming Tool and Pinion
Gear
d - Add or Subtract Shim(s) Here

Page 6B-40 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) should remain installed on driveshaft after
setting pinion gear depth as it is required to properly check forward gear and reverse gear
backlash.
Reverse Gear
DETERMINING REVERSE GEAR BACKLASH
NOTE: Reverse gear backlash is adjustable using shims; it can be checked as follows:
1. Install Driver Tool (91-18605) into reverse gear assembly.
2. Slide Pilot Ring (91-18603) over driver tool and seat pilot ring against inner ledge in
gear case.
3. Thread Retainer (91-18604) into gear case cover nut threads.
4. Torque Screw (91-18602) to 45 Ib. in. (5 Nm) against driver tool.

d
b

ee aa
c
51884
a - Driver Tool (91-18605)
b - Pilot Ring (91-18603)
c - Inner Ledge
d - Retainer (91-18604)
e - Screw (91-18602) [Torque to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm)]

5. Thread stud adapter [from Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1)] all the way onto stud.
6. Install: Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
7. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on Backlash Indicator Tool, if gear
ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on Backlash Indicator
Tool, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear).
8. Lightly turn driveshaft back-and-forth (no movement should occur at propeller shaft).

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-41

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

9. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which should be 0.030 in. to 0.050 in.
(0.76 mm to 1.27 mm).
dd f

cc
ee
a

51880
a - Stud Adaptor (from 91-14311A1)
b - Stud
c - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
d - Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
f - Dial Indicator Pointer

NOTE: If reverse gear backlash is not within specifications, then gear case is not properly
assembled or component(s) within gear case are excessively worn and must be replaced
before returning gear case to service.
10. Remove Driver Tool, Pilot Ring, Retainer and Screw from gear case.
Forward Gear
DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH
1. Install a load washer (12-37429) over a 44-93003 propeller shaft so that it seats
against the REAR shoulder of the clutch spline teeth.
bb

a cc 55088

a - Load Washer (12-37429)

b - Shoulder
c - Propeller Shaft (44-93003)

Page 6B-42 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

2. Assemble BEARING CARRIER, BEARING ADAPTOR, THRUST WASHER,

THRUST BEARING, and FORWARD GEAR onto propeller shaft.
3. Position shim against shoulder in gear case.
e c
ga

h
b
a
f d b 55103 55104
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Bearing Adaptor
c - Thrust Washer
d - Thrust Bearing
e - Forward Gear
f - Shim (PLACE IN GEARCASE FIRST)
g - Shoulder
h - Shim
4. Insert entire propeller assembly into gear case.
5. Install tab washer and cover nut. Torque cover nut to 100 Ib. ft. (135.5 N m) to seat
forward gear assembly in gear case.
NOTE: Drill a 3/8 in. (22.2 mm) diameter hole through the side (PROPELLER NUT END)
of a 5-1/2 in. x 1-1/2 in. (139.7 mm x 38.1 mm) long piece of PVC pipe. A screwdriver may
be inserted thru pipe into propeller shaft splines to prevent PVC pipe from turning while
tightening retaining nut.
6. Install a 5-1/2 in. x 1-1/2 in. (139.7 mm x 38.1 mm) long piece of PVC pipe (obtain local-
ly) over propeller shaft and secure it against the bearing carrier with a flat washer and
nut.

a
d f h

g
c
b e j k
i 51882
a - Prop Nut f - Bearing Carrier
b - Flat Washer g - Prop Shaft
c - PVC Pipe [5 in. x 2 in. h - Bearing Adaptor
(127 mm x 50.8 mm)] i - Shim
d - Cover Nut j - Forward Gear
e - Tab Washer k - Load Washer
90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-43
LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

7. Tighten nut to 45 lb. in. (5 Nm). This will seat the forward gear against the forward
thrust bearing and tends to hold the propeller shaft from moving when measuring
backlash.
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool (91-44307A1) should still be installed from having previous-
ly been used to determine pinion gear depth and reverse gear backlash. If it is not still
installed on gear case, refer to “DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH,” previously, for
proper installation procedure.
8. With the proper preload applied to the propeller shaft and the driveshaft, rotate the
driveshaft clockwise 5 to 10 complete revolutions. This will seat the forward gear and
upper driveshaft bearings and thus provide the most accurate backlash readings.
9. If not previously installed:
a. Thread stud adaptor [from bearing preload tool (91-44307A1) all the way onto
stud.
b. Install: Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
10. Position dial indicator pointer on line marked “1” on BACKLASH INDICATOR TOOL,
if gear ratio is 1.87:1 (15 teeth on pinion gear), or on line marked “2” on BACKLASH
INDICATOR TOOL, if gear ratio is 2:1 (14 teeth on pinion gear).
dd f

ee cc
aa

51880
a - Stud Adaptor (from 91-44307A1)
b - Stud
c - Backlash Indicator Tool (91-78473)
d - Dial Indicator Holder (91-89897)
e - Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
f - Dial Indicator Pointer

11. Gently rock driveshaft back and forth to determine forward gear backlash.
175 and 200 HP models with 1.87:1 Ratio = 0.018 in. to 0.027 in. (0.46 mm - 0.69 mm)
backlash.
135 and 150 HP models with 2.00:1 Ratio = 0.015 in. to 0.022 in. (0.38 mm - 0.56 mm)
backlash.

Page 6B-44 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

12. If backlash is less than the specifications, then a larger shim should be installed. Con-
versely, if the backlash indicated is greater than specifications, then a smaller shim
should be installed.
NOTE: By adding or subtracting 0.002 in. (0.051 mm) shim, the backlash will change ap-
proximately 0.002 in. (0.051 mm).

a
a

51882
a - Shim

13. If forward gear backlash is within specifications, then Bearing Preload Tool, Dial Indi-
cator, Backlash Indicator Tool/Dial Indicator Holder, PVC pipe, forward gear assem-
bly, bearing adaptor, bearing carrier and test propeller shaft can all be removed from
the gear case.
Propeller Shaft/Forward Gear Bearing Adapter/Bearing Carrier
REASSEMBLY
1. Position sliding clutch onto propeller shaft. “GROOVED RINGS” are for manufactur-
ing purposes only and may be positioned towards either gear. Cross pin hole and det-
ent hole in sliding clutch must line up with cross pin slot and detent notch in propeller
shaft.

a d
d
f

b
e
c gg 51913

a - Sliding Clutch
b - Propeller Shaft
c - Grooved Rings
d - Cross Pin Hole
e - Detent Hole
f - Cross Pin Slot
g - Detent Notches

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-45

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

2. Place a small amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Lubricant on actuator rod and
install cam follower.
b aa

a - Actuator Rod
b - Cam Follower
3. Slide clutch actuator assembly into propeller shaft. Align cross pin slot in actuator rod
with cross pin slot in clutch/propeller shaft.
aa bb d c ee

51875
a - Cam Follower
b - Clutch Actuator Rod
c - Propeller Shaft
d - Cross Pin Slot
e - Clutch/Propeller Shaft
4. Insert cross pin through sliding clutch, propeller shaft and actuator rod forcing cross
pin tool out.
a

51875
a - Cross Pin
5. Apply a small amount of 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to the rounded end of det-
ent pin. Position detent pin in detent pin hole of sliding clutch with rounded end of pin
toward propeller shaft.
a bb

51879
a - Detent Pin
b - Detent Pin Hole
c - Sliding Clutch

Page 6B-46 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

6. Install cross pin retaining spring onto sliding clutch as follows:

IMPORTANT: DO NOT over-stretch retaining spring when installing onto sliding
clutch.
a. Install spring.
(1.) Spirally wrap spring into groove on sliding clutch.
(2.) Position spring in groove so that straight end of spring is against the side of
groove.
7. Place gear housing in a soft jaw vise with the driveshaft in a vertical position.
8. Coat cam pocket of cam follower with 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant .
9. Place shift cam into cam pocket of cam follower with numbered side of cam facing up.
10. Slide propeller shaft assembly into reverse gear assembly.

a
b

c eb da
55095 55096
a - Cam Pocket
b - Cam Follower
c - Shift Cam
d - Shift Cam (Position as Shown)
e - Gear Housing
11. Apply a light coat of 2-4-C with Teflon to the threads of the shift shaft bushing.
12. Insert shift shaft down shift shaft hole in gear housing and into shift cam. It may be
necessary to rotate shift shaft back-and-forth slightly in order for splines of shift shaft
to match up with splines of shift cam. Thread bushing into position, but do not tighten
down at this time.

b
b

51867
a - Shift Shaft Bushing
b - Shift Shaft

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-47

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

13. Install appropriate spacer shim into the gear housing.

14. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to to thrust bearing and install thrust
bearing and thrust race onto forward gear bearing adaptor.

dc

a cb

ba

55220
50782
a - Shim
b - Bearing Adaptor
c - Thrust Washer
d - Thrust Bearing

15. Insert Forward Gear Installation Tool (91-815850) into forward gear/bearing adaptor
assembly.
16. Install tool with adaptor assembly over propeller shaft and into gear housing. Applying
downward pressure to bearing adaptor, remove installation tool from assembly.

ca

55221
55202
a - Forward Gear Installation Tool (91-815850)
b - Forward Gear/Bearing Adaptor Assembly
c - Forward Gear Bearing Adaptor

Page 6B-48 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

17. Install thrust race on top of bearing adaptor.

18. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to small thrust bearing and install bear-
ing on thrust race.

b
a

55107 55108
a - Thrust Race
b - Thrust Bearing

19. Install thrust collar with its STEPPED SIDE DOWN toward the small thrust bearing.

20. Pull up slightly on the propeller shaft to gain access to the groove on the shaft for the
keepers. Install the 2 keepers into the groove and lower the propeller shaft.

ca

aa ec

b
d

55109 55110
a - Thrust Collar
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Propeller Shaft
d - Keepers (2)
e - Thrust Collar

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-49

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

21. Install second thrust collar with its stepped side UP.
22. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to the second thrust bearing and install
it on top of the second thrust collar.

b
a
a
c
b

55112

a - Thrust Collar
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Thrust Collar

23. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to to second small thrust bearing race
and install race to the surface inside of the bearing carrier.
24. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to bearing carrier O-ring. Install
O-ring onto bearing adaptor.

ca

bb
50779 55113
a - Thrust Race
b - Bearing Carrier Race Surface
c - O-ring

Page 6B-50 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

25. Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to:

a. Outer diameter of bearing carrier which contacts gear case.
b. Space between carrier oil seals.
26. Apply Quicksilver Super Duty Gear Lubricant to bearing carrier needle bearing.
27. Install bearing carrier into gear housing.
28. Verify bearing carrier keyway is aligned with gear housing keyway and install bearing
carrier key.
29. Place tab washer against bearing carrier.

a
b
aa

51885

55114
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Tab Washer

30. Apply 2-4-C with Teflon to threads of cover nut and install cover nut in gear housing.
Verify that the word “OFF” and arrow are visible.
NOTE: Before torquing bearing carrier cover nut, gear case should either be mounted in
a stand specifically designed for holding gear cases or bolted to a driveshaft housing to
avoid possible damage to the gear case.
31. Using Cover Nut Tool (91-61069), torque cover nut to 210 Ib. ft. (285 Nm).

a b

51911
a - Retainer Nut Tool (91-61069)
b - Retainer Nut

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-51

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

32. Bend one lock tab of tab washer into cover nut (only one will align).
33. Bend remaining tabs of tab washer toward front of gear housing.
34. Use Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107) and torque shift shaft bushing to 50 Ib. ft. (68
Nm).

aa

bb

51882
a - Shift Shaft Bushing Tool (91-31107)
b - Shift Shaft Bushing
Water Pump
REASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION
1. Install oil seals into water pump base, as follows:
a. Place water pump base on a press.
b. Just before installing each seal apply Loctite 271 on outside diameter of oil seal.
c. With a suitable mandrel, press the smaller diameter oil seal into pump base with
lip of oil seal toward impeller side of base.
d. With a suitable mandrel, press the larger diameter oil seal into pump base with lip
of oil seal toward gear housing side of base.
e. Wipe any excess Loctite from oil seals and water pump base.
2. Install O-ring into O-ring groove of water pump base. Lubricate O-ring and oil seals
with 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.

aa

c
b
51869
a - Mandrel
b - Oil Seal (Smaller OD)
c - O-Ring Groove

Page 6B-52 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

3. Install divider block if removed. Use RTV Sealer to seal seams between divider block
and gear housing.
4. Install a new water pump base gasket and install water pump base.

dc

a
b
cb 51866

51878
a - Divider Block c - Gasket
b - Water Pump Base d - Hole (MUST be positioned as shown)

5. Install the following in order: Pump base to face plate gasket, face plate to pump cover
gasket. Gaskets and face plate are indexed by dowel pin location and must be in-
stalled correctly.

b
b
cc

51868
a - Gasket (Water Pump Base to Face Plate)
b - Face Plate
c - Gasket (Face Plate to Water Pump Cover)

6. Place impeller drive key on flat of driveshaft. Hold key on driveshaft with a small
amount of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant.
IMPORTANT: When completing gear housing repair that requires removal of water
pump impeller, it is recommended that the impeller be replaced. If it is necessary
to reuse the impeller, DO NOT install in reverse to original rotation or premature
impeller failure will occur. Original rotation is clockwise.

CAUTION
A visual inspection of impeller drive key MUST BE made to determine that drive
key is on flat of driveshaft after impeller is installed. If key has moved off flat of
driveshaft, repeat Steps 6 and 7.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-53

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

7. Slide impeller down driveshaft to impeller drive key. Align drive key with keyway in the
center hub of impeller, and slide impeller over drive key.
8. If removed, install new water pump insert into pump cover as follows:
a. Apply Quicksilver Perfect Seal to water pump insert area of pump cover.
b. Install water pump insert into pump cover, being sure that tab on insert enters re-
cess in pump cover.
c. Wipe any excess Quicksilver Perfect Seal from insert and cover.
NOTE: If 2 holes were drilled in top of water pump cover to aid in removal of insert, fill holes
with RTV Sealer or equivalent. Allow to cure 24 hours prior to operating engine.
9. Install water tube seal into pump cover. Plastic side of seal goes into cover first.
10. Reinstall water tube guide into water pump cover.
11. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant to inside of water
pump insert.
12. Position assembled water pump cover over driveshaft and lower over water pump
studs. Rotate driveshaft in a clockwise direction (viewed from top), while pushing
down on pump cover to ease impeller entry into cover.
13. Install water pump cover retainer washers, nuts and bolt.

CAUTION
DO NOT over-torque nuts and bolt, as this could cause cover to crack during op-
eration.
14. Torque water pump nuts to 50 Ib. in. (6.0 Nm), and water pump bolt to 35 Ib. in. (4 Nm).
15. Install centrifugal slinger over driveshaft and down against pump cover.

c
51874
a - Water Tube Guide
b - Water Tube Seal
c - Nuts, Bolts and Washers

Page 6B-54 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Gear Lubricant Filling Instructions

1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill” and “Vent” screws and gear housing.
2. Install new gaskets on “Fill” and “Vent” screws.
IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing “Vent”
screw, or gear housing cannot be filled because of trapped air. Fill gear housing
ONLY when housing is in a vertical position.
3. Slowly fill housing thru “Fill” hole with Quicksilver Super Duty Lower Unit Lubricant un-
til lubricant flows out of “Vent” hole and no air bubbles are visible.
4. Install “Vent” screw into “Vent” hole.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT lose more than one fluid ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while
reinstalling “Fill” screw.
5. 5. Remove grease tube (or hose) from “Fill” hole and quickly install “Fill” screw into
“Fill” hole.
Installing Gear Housing to Driveshaft Housing
WARNING
Disconnect high tension leads from spark plugs and remove spark plugs from
engine before installing gear housing onto driveshaft housing.
1. Tilt engine to full up position and engage the tilt lock lever.
2. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto driveshaft
splines.

CAUTION
DO NOT allow lubricant on top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant, that is trapped in
clearance space, will not allow driveshaft to fully engage with crankshaft. Subse-
quently, tightening the gear housing nuts (while excess lubricant is on top of dri-
veshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and damage either or both the power-
head and gear housing. Top of driveshaft is to be wiped free of lubricant.
3. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lubricant onto shift shaft
splines. (DO NOT allow lubricant on top of shift shaft.)
4. Apply a thin bead of G.E. Silicone Sealer against the top of divider block.
5. Insert trim tab bolt into hole in rear of gear housing to driveshaft housing machined
surface.
6. Shift gear housing into forward gear and place guide block anchor pin into forward
gear position.
Counter Rotation Outboard
Reverse Gear Forward Gear

a
a - Guide Block Anchor Pin

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-55

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

7. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into driveshaft housing.
NOTE: If, while performing Step 8, the driveshaft splines will not align with crankshaft
splines, place a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear
housing is being pushed toward driveshaft housing.
8. Move gear housing up toward driveshaft housing while aligning shift shaft splines and
water tube with water tube guide (in water pump cover).
9. Place flat washers onto studs (located on either side of driveshaft housing). Start a
nut (a) on these studs and tighten finger-tight.
10. Start bolt (b) at rear of gear housing inside trim tab recess. DO NOT tighten bolt at this
time.
11. Recheck shift shaft spline engagement and correct if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not force gear case up into place with attaching nuts.
12. Evenly tighten 2 nuts (a) which were started in Step 9. Torque to listing in “Torque
Specifications,” preceding.
13. After 2 nuts (located on either side of driveshaft housing) are tightened, check shift
operation as follows:
a. Place guide block anchor pin into forward gear position while turning prop shaft.
Rotate flywheel clockwise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate clock-
wise.
b. Place guide block anchor pin into NEUTRAL position. Propeller shaft should ro-
tate freely clockwise/counterclockwise.
c. Place guide block anchor pin into REVERSE gear position. Rotate flywheel clock-
wise (viewed from top); propeller shaft should rotate counterclockwise.
IMPORTANT: If shifting operation is not as described, preceding, the gear housing
must be removed and the cause corrected.
14. Install washers and nuts (c) onto studs (located on bottom center of anti-cavitation
plate). Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.

a
d

51873 51866

15. Install special flat washer and nut (d) on stud at leading edge of driveshaft housing.
Torque to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
16. Torque bolt (started in Step 10) to listing in “Torque Specifications,” preceding.
17. Install trim tab, adjust to position in which it had previously been installed, and tighten
bolt (e) securely.
18. Install plastic cap into trim tab bolt opening at rear edge of driveshaft housing.

Page 6B-56 90-883728 JULY 2001

 LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Propeller Installation
WARNING
When installing or removing propeller, because of the engine’s ease in starting,
VERIFY that the remote control is in NEUTRAL position and that the key switch
is “OFF.” Place a block of wood between the anti-cavitation plate and propeller
to prevent accidental starting and to protect hands from propeller blades while
removing or installing nut.
1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat the propeller shaft splines with
one of the following Quicksilver products:
-- Anti-Corrosion Grease
-- Special Lubricant 101
-- 2-4-C Marine Lubricant
-- Perfect Seal
2. Place forward thrust hub over propeller shaft with shoulder side toward propeller.
3. Place propeller on propeller shaft and slide it up against thrust hub.
4. Place continuity washer (if equipped) onto shoulder of rear thrust hub.
5. Place rear thrust hub, tab washer and propeller nut on propeller shaft.
6. Thread propeller nut onto propeller shaft until nut is recessed into tab washer.
7. After propeller nut is recessed into tab washer, tighten nut securely [minimum of 55
Ib. ft. (74.5 Nm) torque].
8. Bend 3 of the tabs of tab washer down in grooves of rear thrust hub to secure propeller
nut. (If tab washer tabs do not align with slots, continue to tighten propeller nut to ob-
tain alignment. DO NOT loosen nut to align tabs.)

c
aa
e d

bb f
d 51916

a - Forward Thrust Hub d - Rear Thrust Hub

b - Propeller Shaft e - Tab Washer
c - Continuity Washer (If f - Propeller Nut
Equipped)

CAUTION
DO NOT misinterpret propeller shaft movement with propeller movement. If pro-
peller and propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft, this is normal; however,
propeller should not move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft.
9. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer (Steps 7 and
8, preceding). Propeller should be checked periodically for tightness, particularly if a
stainless steel propeller is used.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 6B-57

LEFT HAND NON-RATCHETING

Speedometer Tube Installation

1. Route speedometer tube from gearcase around lower yoke and push into junction.
Junction should be secured to yoke with sta-strap.
2. Route speedometer tube from swivel tube around lower yoke and push into junction.
After insertion of speedometer tubes into junction, pull on each tube to verify that they
are locked into junction. If tube pulls out, reinsert into junction.

a
c

d
57736 d 57735

a - Speedometer Tube from Gearcase

b - Junction
c - Sta-strap
d - Speedometer Tube from Swivel Tube

Page 6B-58 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Section 7
Table of Contents
Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
(92876A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching
Single Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Opposite Side Routed Steering Cables and
Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation Attaching Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
(92876A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Dual Cable - Single Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Ride Guide Steering Attachment Extension
Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit Installation . . . . . 7-4 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Steering Cable Mounting Tube Installation . . . . . 7-5 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Installing Steering Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Transom Mounted Ride Guide Attaching Kit
Coupler Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Installation (73770A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Installing Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Attaching Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation Clevis Attaching Kit Installation (A-70599A5) . . . . . 7-32
(92876A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Dual Cable - Dual Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation

(92876A10)
Single Cable
Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering
7
cable and remote control cables.
IMPORTANT: Steering cable and remote control cables must be the correct length,
sharp bends on too-short cables result in “kinks”; too-long cables require unnec-
essary bends and/or loops. Both conditions place extra stress on the cables and
will reduce the performance of the steering system.
INSTALLING RIDE GUIDE CABLE TO OUTBOARD TILT TUBE
IMPORTANT: Before installing steering cable in tilt tube, lubricate entire cable end
with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon.
NOTE: Ride Guide steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional
lubrication at initial installation.
1. Lubricate seal (a) inside of outboard tilt tube and entire cable end (b) with Quicksilver
2-4-C with Teflon.
2. Insert steering cable end thru outboard tilt tube and secure steering cable to tilt tube
with steering cable attaching nut (c), as shown. Torque nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m).

aa

c
b
28160
57833

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-1

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING LINK ROD INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT: The steering link rod that connects the steering cable to the engine
must be fastened using special washer head bolt (“a” - Part Number 10-849838) and
self locking nuts (“b” & “c” - Part Number 11-826709113). These locknuts must nev-
er be replaced with common nuts (non locking) as they will work loose and vibrate
off freeing the link rod to disengage.

WARNING
Disengagement of a steering link rod can result in the boat taking a full, sudden,
sharp turn. This potentially violent action can cause occupants to be thrown
overboard exposing them to serious injury or death.
3. Assemble steering link rod to steering cable with two flat washers (d) and nylon insert
locknut (“b” - Part Number 11-826709113). Tighten locknut (b) until it seats, then back
nut off 1/4 turn.
4. Production Outboards - Assemble steering link rod to engine with special washer
head bolt (“a” - Part Number 10-849838) and nylon insert locknut (“c” - Part Number
11-826709113). First torque bolt (a) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut (c) to 20
lb. ft. (27 N·m).
High Performance Outboards - An access hole is provided through the bottom cowl
to ease installation of the link rod connecting bolt. Remove the BACK plug for installa-
tion and reinstall after installation.

aa

bb

c
57834

WARNING
After installation is complete (and before operating outboard), check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) and at
all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.

Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals spe-
cified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifica-
tions.

Page 7-2 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional
lubrication at initial installation.

WARNING
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable hous-
ing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock
of cable could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate tran-
som end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C with Teflon. Lubricate
exposed portion of cable end (b) with 2-4-C with Teflon.
4. Lubricate pivot point (c) of steering link rod and ball joint (d) of link rod with SAE 30
Weight Oil.
5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should
be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering
mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lu-
bricate with 2-4-C with Teflon.

a b
a c

57834

Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation

(92876A8)
Dual Cable - Single Outboard
WARNING
Quicksilver Super Ride-Guide Steering (dual cables) MUST BE USED with this at-
taching kit. Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system
failure.
Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering
cables and remote control cables.
IMPORTANT: Steering cables and remote control cables MUST BE THE CORRECT
LENGTH, sharp bends on too-short cables result in “kinks”; too-long cables re-
quire unnecessary bends and/or loops. Both conditions place extra stress on the
cables and will reduce the performance of the steering system.

CAUTION
With this kit installed, the upper (outboard) mounting bolts MUST BE installed so
that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom, as illustrated. Failure
to install upper mounting bolts, as shown in illustration, could result in interfer-
ence between steering cable nut and ends of mounting bolts when outboard is
tilted up.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-3

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

CAUTION
Marine sealer must be used on shanks of bolts to make a water-tight installation.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use an impact driver when tightening transom bolts.
Apply marine sealer to shanks of mounting bolts (not threads) and secure outboard to
transom with 4 bolts, flat washers and locknuts, as shown. Be sure that installation is wa-
ter-tight.
Install upper bolts so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom.

Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit Installation

IMPORTANT: Both gear racks or rotary steering heads must be installed so that
both steering cables will be routed together on the same side of the boat and will
push-and-pull together.
1. Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with
Super Ride-Guide Kit.
2. Make sure that both gear racks or rotary steering heads are installed so that both
steering cables are routed together down starboard side of boat and will
push-and-pull together.

a
bb b cc
a - Gear Rack
b - Steering Cables
c - Rotary Steering Heads

Page 7-4 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Steering Cable Mounting Tube Installation

IMPORTANT: Spacers (b) must be installed between outboard swivel bracket and
mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to provide proper spacing be-
tween steering cables.
Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube on to swivel bracket of out-
board.
b

a
c

c 28163
a - Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Spacer (2)
c - Locking Retainer (2)
d - Bolts (4) - 7/8 in. (22 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), then Bend
Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt

WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to outboard swivel
bracket to prevent bolts from turning out.
Install steering cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2
locking tab washers. Verify longer threaded end of tube is toward starboard side of boat.
Temporarily adjust tube so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same dis-
tance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time.

d
b

c a
51891
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward
Starboard Side of Boat)
b - Mounting Bracket
c - Locking Tab Washers (2)
d - Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-5

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Installing Steering Cables

IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of outboard tilt tube, inside of steering cable mount-
ing tube and rubber O-ring seal (located in outboard tilt tube) with Quicksilver 2-4-C
with Teflon before installing steering cables.
Lubricate inside of outboard tilt tube and inside of steering cable mounting tube with
Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon. Verify rubber O-ring seal (a) (located in outboard tilt tube)
is lubricated.

51890

Insert steering cable ends (a) thru outboard tilt tube (b) and cable mounting tube (c).
Thread steering cable attaching nuts (d) on to tubes hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nuts only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
b
d a

c
51891
Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in. (16 mm) from end of mounting
tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable.
5/8″(16 mm)

a c d e
51890

Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a).

a e 51890

Page 7-6 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Coupler Installation
WARNING
Locknuts must be used with bolts to secure steering cables to coupler. Failure
to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure.
Slide coupler (a) onto steering cable ends and secure each steering cable to coupler with
bolt (b) and locknut (c) as shown. Tighten to a torque of 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).

b c

a b
51888
Installing Link Rod
WARNING
Steering link rod MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering
coupler, using special washer head bolt (10-849838) and two nylon insert lock-
nuts (11-826709113), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert
locknuts MUST BE tightened as specified.
Lubricate hole in steering coupler, with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon. Assemble steering
link rod to steering coupler, using 2 flat washers (one each side of coupler) and nylon in-
sert locknut. Tighten locknut until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 Ib. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque],
then back nut off 1/4 turn.
Lubricate ball joint in steering link rod with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rod to outboard
steering arm, using special washer head bolt (10-849838) provided and nylon insert lock-
nut as shown. Torque special bolt to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknut to 20 Ib. ft. (27
Nm).

e
b

f
a d 28172
a - Steering Coupler
b - Steering Link Rod
c - Flat Washer (2)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5
Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn
e - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-849838) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
f - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-7

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING SYSTEM TENSION ADJUSTMENT

IMPORTANT: After this dual steering cable attachment kit is installed, there must
be proper tension in forward mounted steering cable tor this attachment kit to oper-
ate properly. Not enough tension will cause slack (or play) in steering system. Too
much tension will cause steering cables to bind. Perform the following steps to ad-
just for correct tension.
Loosen adjustment nuts and pull steering cable mounting tube (by hand) away from end
of steering cable (to remove slack in steering system). Tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket and check system for slack (play.) If steering system is too tight, read-
just tube toward end of steering cable or, if too much slack (play) exists in system, readjust
tube away from end of steering cable. Tighten nuts against mounting bracket and read-
just, if necessary.
b

c a d
51887

a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube

b - Adjustment Nuts
c - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System
d - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System
After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket, to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against
flat on each adjustment nut.

c 51887
c a
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut)
Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5
Nm).

a 51889

a - Cable Attaching Nut

b - “V” Groove
NOTE: Cable attaching nuts with a “V” groove around the outer circumference of the nut
are self locking and do not require locking sleeves.

Page 7-8 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

WARNING
After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals spe-
cified, following:

Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)

*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifica-
tions.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional
lubrication at initial installation.

WARNING
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable hous-
ing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock
could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate tran-
som end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C with Teflon. Lubricate
exposed portion of cable ends (b) with 2-4-C with Teflon.
4. Lubricate pivot point (c) of steering link rod and ball joint (d) of link rod/steering coupler
with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should
be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering
mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lu-
bricate with 2-4-C with Teflon.

d
b
c

a a
28170

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-9

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Ride Guide Steering Cable/Attaching Kit Installation

(92876A9)
Dual Cable - Dual Outboard
WARNING
Quicksilver Super Ride-Guide Steering (dual cables) MUST BE USED with this at-
taching kit. Failure to adhere to this requirement could result in steering system
failure.
Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering cable
and remote control cables.
IMPORTANT: Steering cable and remote control cables MUST BE THE CORRECT
LENGTH, sharp bends on too-short cables result in “kinks”; too-long cables re-
quire unnecessary bends and/or loops. Both conditions place extra stress on the
cables and reduce the performance of the steering system.
Installation Requirements
IMPORTANT: The distance from each outboard’s centerline to the side of transom
opening MUST BE a minimum of 16 in. (406 mm).
This kit contains all necessary parts to connect both outboards to Ride-Guide Steering
Cables for 23-1/2 in. thru 27-1/2 in. (597 mm thru 699 mm) outboard centerline spacing.
If outboard centerline distance is other then specified, refer to end of this instruction man-
ual for optional extension couplers.
DETERMINE ROUTING OF STEERING CABLES
Use “1” or “2”, following, to route steering cables:
1. Parallel cable routing: Cables routed together down starboard side of boat Refer to
“Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation,” immediately
following.
2. Opposite side cable routing: One cable routed down starboard side of boat and one
cable routed down port side of boat. Refer to “Opposite Side Routed Steering
Cables and Attaching Kit Installation,” located on page 18 of this instruction manu-
al.

CAUTION
With this kit installed, the upper (outboard) mounting bolts MUST BE installed so
that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom, as illustrated. Failure
to install upper mounting bolts, as shown in illustration, could result in interfer-
ence between steering cable nut and ends of mounting bolts when outboard is
tilted up.

Install upper bolts so that hex head end of bolts is on the inside of boat transom.

Page 7-10 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Parallel Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation

(Both Steering Cables Routed Together Down Starboard Side of Boat)
SUPER RIDE-GUIDE STEERING KIT INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: Steering cable must be installed into tilt tube of port outboard before
outboard is mounted on boat transom.
Both gear racks or rotary steering heads must be installed so that both steering
cables will be routed together on the same side of the boat and will push-and-pull
together.
1. Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with
Super Ride-Guide Kit.
2. Make sure that both gear racks or rotary steering heads are installed so that both
steering cables are routed together and will push-and-pull together.

a
b b a
a - Straight Rack (Left); Rotary Steering (Right)
b - Steering Cables (Install so that Both Cables Will Push and Pull Together)
STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION STARBOARD OUTBOARD
IMPORTANT: Mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube MUST BE secured
to outboard swivel bracket, using 5/8 in. (16 mm) long bolts supplied with this dual
cable - dual outboard attaching kit.
Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, onto swivel bracket of star-
board outboard.

c
c
b

a 28164
a - Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Locking Retainers (2)
c - Bolts (4) - 5/8 in. (16 mm ) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), then Bend
Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube to outboard swivel
bracket, to prevent bolts from turning out.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-11

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Install steering cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2
locking tab washers. Be sure longer threaded end of tube is toward starboard side of boat.
Temporarily adjust tube, so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same dis-
tance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time.
d
b

a 51891
c
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward
Starboard Side of Boat)
b - Mounting Bracket
c - Locking Tab Washers (2)
d - Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer)

IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube with 2-4-C with Te-
flon before installing steering cable.
Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube (starboard outboard) with 2-4-C with Te-
flon.
Insert steering cable end (a) thru cable mounting tube (b) and thread steering cable at-
taching nut (c) onto tube hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
a

c b 51887

Page 7-12 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in. (16 mm) from end of mounting
tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable.
5/8 in. (16 mm)

a c d e 51890

Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a).

a e 51890

STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - PORT OUTBOARD

IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal lo-
cated inside tilt tube with 2-4-C with Teflon, before installing steering cable.
Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal (a) with 2-4-C with Te-
flon.

51890
Insert steering cable end (b) thru tilt tube (c) of port outboard and thread steering cable
attaching nut (d) onto tilt tube hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nuts only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
b

d
d c
51887

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-13

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING LINK ROD INSTALLATION

WARNING
Steering link rods MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering
cable end, using special washer head bolt (10-849838) and two nylon insert lock-
nuts (11-826709113), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert
locknuts MUST BE tightened as specified.
e c

f a

d 50061

a
b

c c

e e
a a

b b
d f d f
28166

a - Flat Washer (2 Each Link Rod)

b - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque Until it Seats [DO NOT Exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5
Nm) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn
c - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-849838) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
e - Steering Link Rod
f - Steering Cable End

Lubricate holes in ends of steering cables, with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon Marine Lu-
bricant. Assemble steering link rods to steering cable ends of each outboard, using flat
washers and nylon insert locknuts. Tighten locknuts until they seat [DO NOT exceed 120
Ib. in. (13.5 Nm) of torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn.
Lubricate ball joints in steering link rods with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rods to out-
board steering arms, using special washer head bolts (10-849838) provided and nylon
insert locknuts as shown. Torque special bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm) then torque locknuts
to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).

Page 7-14 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING ARM EXTENSION BRACKET INSTALLATION

Secure a steering arm extension bracket to each outboard’s steering arm.
b
d
d

c c

51889
a - Steering Arm (Port Outboard Shown)
b - Extension Bracket
c - Locking Retainer (2 Each Bracket)
d - Bolts (2 Each Bracket) 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Long - Torque to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm),
Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up Against Flats on Each Bolt

WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures extension bracket to outboard steering arm to prevent bolts from turning
out.
STEERING COUPLER ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Position outboards so that they are facing straight forward. (Distance between threaded
hole centers of steering arm extensions MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft centerlines.)
Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C with Teflon and slide sleeves on steering
coupler.
Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering eyes.
Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye.
Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance between hole centers of steer-
ing eye ball joints is equal to distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm ex-
tensions. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of equal length and threads MUST
NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm).
c d e b a b d c

50061
a - Coupler
b - Rubber Sleeve
c - Steering Eye
d - Rubber Bushing
e - Jam Nut

WARNING
Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum.
Thread length of steering eye is 3-1/2 in. (89 mm), so exposed thread must not
extend out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). Failure to adhere to this re-
quirement could result in steering system failure.

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-15

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Lubricate ball joint in steering eyes, with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering arm extension brackets, using
special washer head bolts (10-849838) provided and nylon insert locknuts as shown.
IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening spe-
cial washer head bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance between
centers of special washer head bolts MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft center lines, for proper steering. It adjustment is necessary, temporarily re-
move special washer head bolt/locknut from one steering eye and turn eye in or out
to correct alignment.
Torque special washer head bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft.
(27 Nm).

WARNING
Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum, and
jam nut must be tightened against coupler to prevent coupler from turning.
Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 N·m).
Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of steering eyes and position rub-
ber bushings and rubber sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes.

f a f

g g 28167

f
c

g h
d b d
c
h h

f
f c e a 50061
a - Coupler
b - Rubber Sleeve
c - Steering Eye
d - Rubber Bushing
e - Jam Nut - Torque (Against Coupler) to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
f - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-849838) - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
g - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
h - Steering Arm Extension Bracket

Page 7-16 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING SYSTEM TENSION ADJUSTMENT (PARALLEL ROUTED STEERING CABLES)

IMPORTANT: For proper operation of this dual cable - dual outboard steering instal-
lation, there MUST BE proper tension in the steering system. NOT ENOUGH ten-
sion will cause slack (play) in steering system. TOO MUCH tension will cause steer-
ing cables to bind. Perform the following steps to correctly adjust tension.
Loosen adjustment nuts and pull steering cable mounting tube (by hand) away from end
of steering cable (to remove slack in steering system). Tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket and check system for slack (play). If steering system is too tight, read-
just tube toward end of steering cable or, if too much slack (play) exists in system, readjust
tube away from end of steering cable. Tighten nuts against mounting bracket and read-
just, if necessary.
a b

c d
51887
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts
c - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System
d - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System
After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket, to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against
a flat on each nut.
bb

51887
c c a
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut)
Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5
Nm).

a
51887

a - Cable Attaching Nut

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-17

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

WARNING
After installation is complete (and before operating outboard(s), check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab Adjustment”, following.
Opposite Side Routed Steering Cables and Attaching Kit Installation
(One Cable Routed down Starboard Side of Boat and One Cable Routed down Port
Side of Boat)
SUPER RIDE-GUIDE STEERING KIT INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT: Steering cable must be installed into tilt tube of port outboard before
outboard is mounted on boat transom.
Install Super Ride-Guide Steering Kit in accordance with instructions included with Super
Ride-Guide Kit.
STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - STARBOARD OUTBOARD
IMPORTANT: Mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube MUST BE secured
to outboard swivel bracket, using 5/8 in. (16 mm) long bolts supplied with this dual
cable - dual outboard attaching kit.
Secure mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, onto swivel bracket of star-
board outboard.

d d
c

28164
b a
a - Mounting Bracket for Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - “J” Clip - Supplied with Outboard
c - Locking Retainers (2)
d - Bolts (4) - 5/8 in. (16 mm) Long - Torque to 100 lb. in. (11.5 Nm), Then Bend
Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up and Against Flats on Each Bolt.

WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures mounting bracket for steering cable mounting tube, to prevent bolts
from turning out.
Install Steering Cable mounting tube into mounting bracket with 2 adjusting nuts and 2
locking tab washers. Verify longer threaded end of tube is toward center of boat transom.

Page 7-18 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Temporarily adjust tube, so that longer threaded end of tube extends out the same dis-
tance as the outboard tilt tube. Do not tighten adjustment nuts at this time.

b d

51891
a
c
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube (End of Tube with Longer Threads Toward
Center of Boat Transom)
b - Mounting Bracket
c - Locking Tab Washers (2)
d - Adjustment Nuts (Flats of Nuts Facing Toward Locking Tab Washer)

IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of steering mounting tube with 2-4-C with Teflon be-
fore installing steering cable.
Lubricate inside of steering cable mounting tube (starboard outboard) with 2-4-C with Te-
flon.
Insert steering cable end (a) (steering cable routed down port side of boat) thru cable
mounting tube (b) and thread steering cable attaching nut (c) onto tube hand tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have
been made.
a

b c
51887
Place a mark (a) on steering cable mounting tube (b) 5/8 in (16 mm) from end of mounting
tube. Slide plastic spacer (c), O-ring (d) and cap (e) over steering cable.
5/8″(16 mm)

e d c b
51890

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-19

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Thread cap (e) onto steering cable mounting tube, up to mark (a).

a
51888
STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION - PORT OUTBOARD
IMPORTANT: Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal lo-
cated inside tilt tube with 2-4-C with Teflon, before installing steering cable.
Lubricate inside of port outboard’s tilt tube and rubber O-ring seal (a) with 2-4-C with Te-
flon.

51890
Insert steering cable end (b) (steering cable routed down starboard side of boat) thru tilt
tube (c) of port outboard and thread steering cable attaching nut (d) onto tilt tube hand
tight.
NOTE: Torque steering cable attaching nut only after final steering adjustments have
been made.

d b

c
51887

STEERING LINK ROD INSTALLATION

WARNING
Steering link rods MUST BE secured between outboard steering arm and steering
cable end, using special washer head bolt (10-849838) and two nylon insert lock-
nuts (11-826709113), as shown. Both special washer head bolt and nylon insert
locknuts MUST BE tightened as specified.
Lubricate holes in ends of steering cables, with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon. Assemble
steering link rods to steering cable ends of each outboard, using flat washers and nylon
insert locknuts. Tighten locknuts until they seat [DO NOT exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5 Nm) of
torque], then back nut off 1/4 turn.

Page 7-20 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Lubricate ball joints in steering link rods with SAE 30W Motor Oil. Secure link rods to out-
board steering arms, using special washer head bolts (10-8849838) provided and nylon
insert locknuts as shown. Torque special bolts to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) then torque locknuts
to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
e c

e
f a

d 50061

a
b

e c c
a e
a

d d
f f b
b
28165
a - Flat Washer (2 Each Link Rod)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque Until it Seats [DO NOT Exceed 120 lb. in. (13.5
Nm) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn
c - Special Washer Head Bolt (10-849838) - Torque to 20 lb.ft. (27 Nm)
d - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
e - Steering Link Rod
f - Steering Cable End

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-21

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING ARM EXTENSION BRACKET INSTALLATION

Secure a steering arm extension bracket to each outboard’s steering arm.
b

d d

c c

51889
a - Steering Arm (Port Outboard Shown)
b - Extension Bracket
c - Locking Retainer (2 Each Bracket)
d - Bolts (2 Each Bracket) 1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Long - Torque to 23 lb. ft. (31 Nm),
Then Bend Corner Tabs of Locking Retainers Up Against Flats on Each Bolt
WARNING
Locking retainer corner tabs, MUST BE bent up and against flats on each bolt that
secures extension bracket to outboard steering arm, to prevent bolts from turn-
ing out.
STEERING COUPLER ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Position outboards so that they are facing straight forward. (Distance between threaded
hole centers of steering arm extensions MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft centerlines.)
Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C with Teflon and slide sleeves on steering
coupler.
Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering eyes.
Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye.
Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance between hole centers of steer-
ing eye ball joints is equal to distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm ex-
tensions. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of equal length and threads MUST
NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm).
c d e b a b d c

50061
a - Coupler
b - Rubber Sleeve
c - Steering Eye
d - Rubber Bushing
e - Jam Nut
WARNING
Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum.
Thread length of steering eye is 3-1/2 in. (89 mm), so exposed thread must not
extend out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70 mm). Failure to adhere to this re-
quirement could result in steering system failure.

Page 7-22 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Lubricate ball joint in steering eyes with SAE 30W Motor Oil.
Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering arm extension brackets, using
special washer head bolts (10-849838) provided and nylon insert locknuts, as shown.
IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening spe-
cial washer head bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance between
centers of special washer head bolts MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft center lines, for proper steering. If adjustment is necessary, temporarily re-
move special washer head bolt/locknut from one steering eye and turn eye in or out
to correct alignment.
Torque special washer head bolts to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm), then torque locknuts to 20 Ib. ft.
(27 Nm).

WARNING
Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4 in. (19 mm) minimum, and
jam nut must be tightened against coupler to prevent coupler from turning.
Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of steering eyes and position rub-
ber bushings and rubber sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes.

f f
a

g g 28174

ff
cc

g h 50061
d b d
c
h h
f
f
c e a 50061

a - Coupler f - Special Washer Head Bolt

b - Rubber Sleeve (10-849838) - Torque to 20 lb.ft.
c - Steering Eye (27 Nm)
d - Rubber Bushing g - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque to
e - Jam Nut - Torque 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)
(Against Coupler) to 20 h - Steering Arm Extension Bracket
lb. ft. (27 Nm)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-23

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

STEERING SYSTEM TENSION ADJUSTMENT (PARALLEL ROUTED STEERING CABLES)

IMPORTANT: For proper operation of this dual cable - dual outboard steering instal-
lation, there MUST BE proper tension in the steering system. NOT ENOUGH ten-
sion will cause slack (play) in steering system. TOO MUCH tension will cause steer-
ing cables to bind. Perform the following steps to correctly adjust tension.
Loosen adjustment nuts and pull steering cable mounting tube (by hand) away from end
of steering cable (to remove slack in steering system). Tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket and check system for slack (play). If steering system is too tight, read-
just tube toward end of steering cable or, if too much slack (play) exists in system, readjust
tube away from end of steering cable. Tighten nuts against mounting bracket and read-
just, if necessary.

a
b
d c 51887
a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube
b - Adjustment Nuts
c - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Remove Slack from Steering System
d - Adjust Tube in This Direction to Reduce Tension from Steering System

After steering system tension is adjusted correctly, tighten adjustment nuts against
mounting bracket to a torque of 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm) and bend a tab lock washer against
a flat on each nut.

c c a 51887

a - Steering Cable Mounting Tube

b - Adjustment Nuts; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)
c - Tab Lock Washer (Bend Against Flat on Each Adjustment Nut)
Tighten steering cable attaching nuts of each steering cable to a torque of 35 Ib. ft.
(47.5 Nm).
NOTE: Cable attaching nuts with a “V” groove around outer circumference are self locking
and do not require locking sleeves.

WARNING
After installation is complete [and before operating outboard(s)], check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab Adjustment,” following.

Page 7-24 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Trim Tab Adjustment

DUAL OUTBOARD - COUNTER ROTATION
INSTALLATION
1. Shift outboard into neutral and make sure ignition key is at “OFF” position.
2. Remove plastic cap from rear of driveshaft housing and loosen bolt and trim tab.
3. Position trim tabs of both outboards straight to rear of outboard, so that tabs are
aligned with gear housing centerline.
4. Tighten both trim tab bolts securely and replace plastic caps. No further adjustment
will be required.
DUAL OUTBOARD - NON COUNTER ROTATION INSTALLATION
1. Check trim tab position as follows:
IMPORTANT: Initial trim tab setting for both outboards should be straight to rear
of outboard, so that tabs are aligned with gear housing center line. Refer to “If nec-
essary, adjust trim tab as follows,” following.
a. Operate boat at normal cruise throttle setting and adjust trim to optimum setting.
b. If boat pulls to the right (starboard), trailing edge of trim tab must be moved to the
right (when viewing outboard from behind). If boat pulls to the left (port), trailing
edge of trim tab must be moved to the left.
2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows:
a. Shift outboard into NEUTRAL and make sure ignition key is at “OFF” position.
b. Remove plastic cap from rear of driveshaft housing and loosen bolt and trim tab.
IMPORTANT: Trim tabs MUST BE set in the same position on both outboards.
c. If boat pulls to the right, adjust trailing edges of both trim tabs to the right. If boat
pulls to the left, adjust trailing edges of both trim tabs to the left.
d. Tighten both trim tab bolts securely and replace plastic caps.
e. Operate boat per “Check trim tab position as follows,” preceding, to check trim
tab setting. Readjust trim tabs, if necessary.
Ride Guide Steering Attachment Extension Couplers
Listed below are typical couplers available. Refer to the current Quicksilver Accessory
Guide for specific coupler lengths and part numbers.
Outboard Center Line Distance Required Coupler(s) Between Steering Eyes
22-1/2 in. thru 24-1/2 in. 12″ (305 mm) Coupler
(572 mm thru 622 mm)
23-1/2 in. thru 27-1/2 in. 15″ (381 mm) Coupler (Supplied with this kit)
(597 mm thru 699 mm)
26-1/2 in. thru 30-1/2 in. 18″ (457 mm) Coupler
(673 mm thru 755 mm)
30 in. thru 34 in. 9″ (229 mm) Coupler and 12″ (305 mm) Coupler
(763 mm thru 864 mm) (Connected together with coupler link rod)
33 in. thru 37 in. 12″ (305 mm) Coupler and 12″ (305 mm) Coupler
(838 mm thru 940 mm) (Connected together with coupler link rod)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-25

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

WARNING
When 2 couplers are connected together with coupler link rod, a lock washer
must be used on each side of coupler link rod, and link rod must be torqued to
20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm) into end of each coupler.
a b a

51890
c
a - Couplers Connected Together
b - Lock washers
c - Coupler Link Rod [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm) into End of Each Coupler]

Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals spe-
cified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear. Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifica-
tions.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the factory and require no additional
lubrication at initial installation.

WARNING
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable hous-
ing before lubricating cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock
of cable could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end) fully retracted, lubricate tran-
som end of steering cables thru grease fittings (a) with 2-4-C with Teflon. Lubricate
exposed portion of cable ends (b) with 2-4-C with Teflon.
4. Lubricate pivot points (c) of steering link rods and ball joints (d) of link rods/steering
coupler with SAE 30W Motor Oil.

Page 7-26 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly (rotary or straight rack) should
be performed once each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever steering
mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lu-
bricate with 2-4-C w/Teflon.

d d
a c c

a b
a b a
28168

Lubrication Points for Parallel Cable Routing Installations

d d

c
c

b a a a a b
28175

Lubrication Points for Opposite Side Cable Routing Installations

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-27

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Transom Mounted Ride Guide Attaching Kit Installation

(73770A1)
Attaching Kit Installation
1. Lubricate both holes in pivot block (Figure 1) with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon.
2. Place pivot block on pivot spacer and secure to transom bracket with 3/8 in. x 2-1/2
in. (9.5 mm x 63.5 mm) bolt, flat washer and locknut, as shown in Figure 1. Torque
locknut to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
a b h
i

f
k c g
d
l

j e
Figure 1
a - Ride-Guide Cable
b - Ride-Guide Yoke
c - Pivot Block
d - Pivot Spacer
e - 15 in. (381 mm) (Centerline of Attaching Kit Pivot to Centerline of Outboard)
f - Pivot Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)]
g - Outboard Steering Arm
h - “Clevis Kit”
i - Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)]
j - Bolt [3/8 in. x 2-1/2 in. (9.5 mm x 63.5 mm)]
k - Flat Washer
l - Transom Bracket

Page 7-28 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

3. Place Ride-Guide yoke on pivot block and secure with 7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in.
(11.1 mm x 44.5 mm) bolt and locknut, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. Torque
locknut to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm), then back off 1/4-turn.
g ff

bb
cc

ee
Figure 2
a - Transom Backing Plate
b - Bolt [5/16 in. x 3-1/4 in. (7.9 mm x 82.5 mm)]
c - Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)]
d - Ride-Guide Yoke Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)] Then
Back Off 1/4-Turn
e - 2-3/8 in. (60.3 mm) Maximum Transom Thickness
f - Bolt [7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in. (11.1 mm x 44.5 mm)]
g - Ride-Guide Yoke

4. Install one cable tube jam nut onto steering cable tube. Place tab washer over
Ride-Guide yoke, then insert cable tube thru tab washer and yoke. Install second
cable tube jam nut onto cable tube but do not tighten at this time. (Figure 3)
5. Position transom attaching kit on transom as shown:
a. Determine centerline of outboard, then measure 15 in. (38.1 cm) over from this
centerline and draw a vertical line on transom. (Figure 1)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-29

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

b. Position attaching kit on transom so that transom bracket is centered on the 15

in. (38.1 mm) (Figure 1) at a height where the center of Ride-Guide yoke is even
with, or not more than 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) above top edge of transom. (Figure 3)

f h j
aa e
e
f
i
k
c

g
b
dd
Figure 3
a - Ride-Guide Yoke
b - 0 in. to 1/2 in. (0 mm to 12.8 mm) (Center of Ride-Guide Yoke to Top of Tran-
som
c - Top of Transom
d - Transom Bracket
e - Cable Tube Jam Nuts [ Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)]
f - Tab Washer
g - After Jam Nuts Are Torqued to Specification, Bend Locking Tabs against Nuts
h - Cable Guide Tube
i - Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Nut [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 Nm)]
j - “Clevis Kit”
k - Clevis Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)]

NOTE: When drilling thru transom, be sure that holes are drilled perpendicular to tran-
som.
6. With attaching kit positioned as outlined preceding, use 3 holes in transom bracket
as a guide and drill three 11/32 in. (8.7 mm) holes thru transom.
7. Use a marine-type sealer on three 5/16 in. x 3-1/4in. (7.9mm x 82.6mm) bolts. Secure
attaching kit to transom, using transom backing plate, 3 bolts (with sealer) and 3 lock-
nuts, installed as shown in Figure 2. Torque lock nuts to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm).
STEERING CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate steering cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon.
2. Install steering cable thru steering cable tube and secure to cable tube with cable at-
taching nut. (Figure 3) Do not tighten cable attaching nut at this time.
3. Attach Ride-Guide cable to outboard steering arm, using the proper “Clevis Kit.” In-
stallation instructions for clevis are with “Clevis Kit.”
4. Adjust 2 large jam nuts on cable tube of attaching kit, so that steering wheel is in nor-
mal straight-driving position with outboard in straight-running position. Torque each
jam nut to 35 Ib. ft. (47.5 Nm), then bend a side of tab washer against flat of each jam
nut. (Figure 3)
5. Torque Ride-Guide cable attaching nut (which secures cable to guide tube) to 35 Ib.
ft. (47.5 Nm). (Figure 3)

Page 7-30 90-883728 JULY 2001

 ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

WARNING
After installation is completed (and before operating outboard), check that boat
will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full range (left and right) at all
tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Maintenance Instructions
Lubrication and maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed
at intervals specified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”

CAUTION
Core of steering cable must be fully retracted into cable housing when lubricating
cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of cable could occur.
1. Lubricate outboard end of Ride-Guide steering cable (thru grease fitting - if equipped
- next to cable attaching nut) with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon.
NOTE: Ride-Guide steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional
lubrication at initial installation.
2. Lubricate all steering system pivot points (and exposed portion of steering cable core)
with Quicksilver 2-4-C with Teflon. Lubricate at intervals specified preceding.
3. Carefully check steering system components for wear (at intervals specified, preced-
ing). Replace worn parts.
4. Check steering system fasteners (at intervals specified, preceding) to be sure that
they are torqued to correct specifications. (Figures 1, 2 and 3)

90-883728 JULY 2001 Page 7-31

ATTACHMENTS / CONTROL LINKAGE

Clevis Attaching Kit Installation (A-70599A5)

NOTE: This kit is used to attach Ride-Guide cable to outboard steering arm ONLY when
“Transom Mounted Ride-Guide Attaching Kit” is being used. If Ride-Guide cable is
installed thru outboard tilt tube, then “Steering Link Rod” must be used.
Installation Instructions
1. Install clevis to steering cable as shown.
2. Lubricate 3/8 in. x 1-3/8 in. (9.5 mm x 34.9 mm) bolt (area without threads) with 2-4-C
with Teflon, then secure clevis to steering cable with this bolt and a locknut. Torque
locknut (item “d”) to 10 Ib. ft. (13.5 Nm).
a e
b
f
g
h
i
j
c d
a - Clevis
b - Steering Cable
c - Bolt [3/8 in. x 1-3/8 in. (9.5 mm x 34.9 mm)]
d - Clevis to Steering Cable Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 Nm)]
e - Bolt [3/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. (9.5 mm x 31.8 mm)] [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)]
f - Thin Washer [1/16 in. (1.6 mm) Thick]
g - Spacer
h - Thick Washer [1/8 in. (3.2 mm) Thick]
i - Engine Steering Arm
j - Clevis to Engine Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 Nm)]
3. Lubricate spacer (supplied with this kit) with 2-4-C with Teflon.
4. Attach clevis to top of outboard steering arm with a 3/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. (9.5 mm x 31.8
mm) bolt, thin washer, spacer, thick washer (thick washer must be installed between
clevis and steering arm) and locknut, as shown. Torque bolt (item “e”) to 20 Ib. ft. (27
Nm), then torque locknut (item “j”) to 20 Ib. ft. (27 Nm).
Maintenance Instructions
Lubrication and maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed
at intervals specified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days (whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days (whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Severe Service.”
1. Carefully check steering system components (at intervals specified, preceding) for
wear. Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners (at intervals specified, preceding) to be sure that
they are torqued to correct specifications.
3. Lubricate clevis pivot points with a drop of light oil. Lubricate at intervals specified, pre-
ceding.

Page 7-32 90-883728 JULY 2001

 COLOR DIAGRAMS

COLOR DIAGRAMS
Table of Contents
150/175/200 EFI 2002 Model Year Typical SmartCraft Dual Outboard Installation
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-3 2002 Model Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-9
Typical SmartCraft System Tachometer & System 150/175/200 EFI 2002 Model Year
Speedometer Installation with System Link Gauges Oil & Fuel Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-11
2002 Model Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-5 150/175/200 EFI 2002 Model Year
Typical SmartCraft System Monitor/Tachometer Water Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-13
Installation with System Link Gauges
2002 Model Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8-7

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-1

COLOR DIAGRAMS

Notes:

Page 8-2 90-884294 OCTOBER 2001

 COLOR DIAGRAMS

150/175/200 EFI
WIRING DIAGRAM
2002 MODEL YEAR

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-3

150/175/200 EFI 2002 Model Year
1. ECM 35. Cowl Mounted Trim Switch
2. Top ECM Connector 36. To Remote Control Trim Switch
3. Middle ECM Connector 37. 12 Volt Accessory Power
4. Bottom ECM Connector 38. To Analog Temperature Gauge
5. Ignition Coils 39. Detonation Sensor - Port Head
6. Ignition Coil Harness Connection 40. Detonation Sensor - Starboard Head
7. Fuel Injectors 41. Engine Harness
8. Analog Head Temperature Sender - Port Head 42. 10-Pin SmartCraft Harness (Gauges)
9. Oil Pump 43. DDT Data Port
10. MAP Sensor 44. 8-Pin SmartCraft Harness (Boat Sensors)
11. Block Pressure Sensor
12. Water Sensor
13. Shift Switch
14. Digital Air Temperature Sensor
15. Digital Temperature Sensor - Starboard Head
16. Digital Temperature Sensor - Port Head
17. Yellow Identifier - 2.5 Liter Only
18. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
19. Crank Position Sensor (CPS)
20. Accessories 15 Ampere Fuse
21. Fuel System & Oil Pump 20 Ampere Fuse
22. Main Power Relay, Remote Control Harness &
Power Trim Circuit 20 Ampere Fuse
23. Ignition Coils 20 Ampere Fuse
24. Low Oil Switch
25. Starter Solenoid
26. Centrifugal Bendix Starter Motor (Early 2002
Models)
27. Solenoid Driven Bendix Starter Motor (Late
2002 Models)
28. 60 Ampere Alternator
29. Main Power Relay
30. Electric Fuel Pump
31. Trim Down Relay
32. Trim Up Relay
33. To Trim Pump
34. To 12 Volt Battery
 19
27 31 32
26 25

6
9 14 15 16 28
5 7 24
11
12 13 20 22 29
1 2 25
10 18

21 23
3 4

3
1

2
5 6 8
30
6 33
1 9 17 1
2
3
4
1 5
34
6
7
8 17
9
10
11

2
12
13
35
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 37 36
21
22
23 38
8 16 24 24

1 9 17 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
39
8
9
10

3 11
12
13
14
15
40
16
17
18
19
20
21
22 4
3 5

8 16 24
23
24
2 6 41
8
1 7

1
2
1 12 22 3
4
5
6
7
8
9 42
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4 17
18 43
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28 44
29
30
11 21 32 31
32
59138
 COLOR DIAGRAMS

TYPICAL SMARTCRAFT
SYSTEM TACHOMETER &
SYSTEM SPEEDOMETER
INSTALLATION
WITH SYSTEM LINK GAUGES
2002 MODEL YEAR

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-5

Typical SmartCraft System Tachometer & System Speedometer
with System Link Gauges 2002 Model Year
1. 8-Pin Digital Sensor Harness Extension, Connect 27. Analog Tachometer Harness (Not Used on CAN
to 8-Pin SmartCraft Harness on Engine Installation)
2. Digital Speedometer Sensor 28. Warning Horn
3. Digital Trim Sender 29. Analog Temperature Gauge Connection
4. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Harness Con- 30. Paddle Wheel/Lake/Sea Water Temperature
nects to Data Buss 10-Pin CAN Harness on En- Sender
gine
31. 4-Pin Digital Sensor Harness Connection to
5. Yellow Identifier Marking Resistor End of CAN Paddle Wheel
Harness
32. Digital Connections to Oil Sender
6. Resistors within CAN Harness (120Ω 1/4W 5%)
33. Digital Connections to Fuel Sender
7. Weather Proof Cap on Un-Used Junction Box Ter-
34. Connection for Analog Trim Sender
minals
35. Connection to Trim Relays
8. Resistor Cap in Junction Box Terminal
36. Connection for Analog Temperature Sender
9. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Harness Con-
nects to Junction Box 37. Remote Control Harness Connects to Engine Har-
ness
10. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Harness Con-
nection to Junction Box and System Speedometer 38. 6-pin Digital Sensor Harness
11. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Harness Con-
nection to Junction Box and System Tachometer
12. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
13. System Speedometer
14. Connections for GPS
15. System Tachometer
16. Connections for Auxiliary Warning Horn for Depth
Sensor
17. System Link Series Connection
18. 2-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Fuel, Temperature,
Trim etc.)
19. System Link Series Connection
20. 2-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Fuel, Temperature,
Trim etc.)
21. Plugged Series Connection for Additional System
Link Gauges
22. 4000 Series Mechanical Panel Control (MPC
4000)
23. Connections for Lanyard Stop Switch
24. Connection for Power Trim Switch
25. Connections for Neutral Start Safety Switch
26. Ignition Key Switch
 18 20

19

13 16 21
12

15 22

14 17

7 7
10

8
5 9 25

24
6 2
4 3 11 23

26
37

34
35
36 29 C B
38 27
D E A

31
1 28
30 59265

33 32
 COLOR DIAGRAMS

TYPICAL SMARTCRAFT
SYSTEM MONITOR/TACHOMETER
INSTALLATION
WITH SYSTEM LINK GAUGES
2002 MODEL YEAR

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-7

Typical SmartCraft System Monitor/Tachometer with System
Link Gauges 2002 Model Year
1. 8-Pin Digital Sensor Harness Extension, Connect 27. 4-Pin Digital Sensor Harness Connection to
to 8-Pin SmartCraft Harness on Engine Paddle Wheel
2. Digital Speedometer Sensor 28. Digital Connections to Oil Sender
3. Digital Trim Sender 29. Digital Connections to Fuel Sender
4. 6-pin Digital Sensor Harness
5. Connection for Analog Temperature Sender
6. Connection to Trim Relays
7. Connection for Analog Trim Sender
8. Remote Control Harness Connects to Engine Har-
ness
9. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Harness Con-
nects to Data Buss 10-Pin CAN Harness on En-
gine
10. Resistors within CAN Harness (120Ω 1/4W 5%)
11. Connections for Auxiliary Warning Horn for Depth
Sensor
12. Yellow Identifiers Marking Resistor End of CAN
Harness
13. Either System Monitor or System Tachometer is
Used. If System Tachometer is Used, Tachometer
Link Gauge is not Used
14. System Link Series Connection
15. 3-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Tachometer and
Speedometer)
16. 2-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Fuel, Temperature,
Trim etc.)
17. Plugged Series Connection for Additional System
Link Gauges
18. 4000 Series Mechanical Panel Control (MPC
4000)
19. Connections for Lanyard Stop Switch
20. Connection for Power Trim Switch
21. Connections for Neutral Start Safety Switch
22. Ignition Key Switch
23. Analog Tachometer Harness (Not Used on CAN
Installation)
24. Warning Horn
25. Analog Temperature Gauge Connection
26. Paddle Wheel/Lake/Sea Water Temperature
Sender
 13

17

14 14 14

16 16

15 15

18
14

12

10

11 21
12

20
2 9
3 19

10 22

8
7
6
5 C B
25 23
D E A

4 27
1 26 24
59266

29 28
 COLOR DIAGRAMS

TYPICAL SMARTCRAFT
DUAL OUTBOARD
INSTALLATION
2002 MODEL YEAR

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-9

Typical SmartCraft Dual Outboard Installation 2002 MY
1. 8-Pin Harness from Port Outboard 28. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection
from System Tachometer Starboard Outboard to
2. Digital Sensor Harness Extension Port Outboard
Junction Box
3. Digital Speedometer Sensor Port Outboard
29. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Junction Box
4. Digital Trim Sender Port Outboard
30. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection
5. Digital Sensor Harness Extension Port Outboard from Junction Box to Port Outboard 10-Pin Data
to 6-pin Digital Sensor Harness Buss CAN Harness
6. 6-pin Digital Sensor Harness Port Outboard (Only 31. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection
if Duel Fuel and Oil Tanks are Used) from Junction Box to Starboard Outboard 10-Pin
7. Digital Connections for Fuel Sender Data Buss CAN Harness

8. Digital connections for Oil Sender 32. Resistor in Port CAN Harness (120Ω 1/4W 5%)

9. Weather Proof Cap for 6-Pin Harness 33. Yellow Resistor Identifier on Harness End

10. Weather Proof Cap for System Link Gauges 34. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection
from Junction Box to Port Outboard 10-Pin Data
11. 2-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Fuel, Temp, Trim, Buss CAN Harness
etc.) Port Outboard
35. 10-Pin Data Buss CAN Harness Port Outboard
12. System Tachometer Port Outboard
36. 3-Pin Data Buss CAN Connection for Power
13. System Speedometer
37. Resistor in Port CAN Harness (120Ω 1/4W 5%)
14. System Tachometer Starboard Outboard
38. Yellow Resistor Identifier on Harness End
15. System Link Series Connections Port Outboard
39. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection
16. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection to from Junction Box to Starboard Outboard 10-Pin
System Tachometer Port Outboard Data Buss CAN Harness
17. Connections for Auxiliary Warning Horn for Depth 40. 10-Pin Data Buss CAN Harness Starboard Out-
Sensor board
18. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor 41. 3-Pin Data Buss CAN Connection for Power, Must
19. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection to be Disconnected and Capped on Dual Installation
System Speedometer 42. Digital Trim Sender Starboard Outboard
20. Connections for GPS 43. Digital Speedometer Sensor Starboard Outboard
21. Connections for Auxiliary Warning Horn for Depth 44. 8-Pin Harness from Starboard Outboard
Sensor
45. Digital Sensor Harness Extension Starboard Out-
22. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection to board
System Tachometer Starboard Outboard
46. Digital Sensor Harness Extension Starboard Out-
23. System Link Series Connections Starboard Out- board to 6-pin Digital Sensor Harness
board
47. 6-pin Digital Sensor Harness Starboard Outboard
24. 2-1/4 in. System Link Gauges (Fuel, Temp, Trim,
etc.) Starboard Outboard 48. Digital Connections for Fuel Sender

25. Weather Proof Cap for System Link Gauges 49. Digital connections for Oil Sender

26. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection 50. 4-Pin Digital Sensor Harness Connection to
from System Tachometer Port Outboard to Junc- Paddle Wheel
tion Box 51. Paddle Wheel/Lake/Sea Water Temperature
27. 10-Pin Control Area Network (CAN) Connection Sender
from System Speedometer to Junction Box 52. Weather Proof Cap for Junction Box Terminal
 15 23

10 25

12
13 14

11 24

18
7 8
1 2
5 6 17 21

15 23
20
16 19 22
9

35 34
30
26

32 27
36 33
52
31
28

41

40 38 37
39
29
42

43

50 51
46 47
44 45 49
48 59276
 COLOR DIAGRAMS

150/175/200 EFI
OIL & FUEL FLOW DIAGRAM
2002 MODEL YEAR

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-11

150/175/200 EFI Oil & Fuel Flow 2002 Model Year
1. Fuel inlet from primer bulb
2. Engine Pulse Fuel Pump
3. Fuel line to Water Separating Fuel Filter - 2-8 psi (14-55 kPa)
4. Water Separating Fuel Filter in Vapor Separator Tank (VST) Assembly
5. Fuel outlet from Needle and Seat
6. Fuel Level Float in VST
7. Pulse Pressure from Cylinder Block
8. On-Board Oil Tank
9. Check Valve in Outlet Hose from Oil Tank
10. Outboard Oil Tank
11. Oil Inlet Hose to Electronic Oil Pump
12. Electronic Oil Pump
13. Oil Outlet Hose from Oil Pump to VST
14. Oil is Mixed with Gas in VST
15. Gas/Oil Mixture is Drawn into High Pressure Fuel Pump
16. Fuel Drain
17. High Pressure Fuel Pump
18. Schrader Valve
19. Fuel Passage to Fuel Regulator
20. Fuel Regulator
21. Ambient Air Pressure
22. Fuel Blow-Off from Fuel Regulator to VST
23. In-Line Fuel Filter
24. High Pressure Fuel Line to Reed Valve Plate Assembly
25. Reed Valve Plate Assembly
26. Fuel Rail Assembly
27. Fuel Injectors
 21
20

19
24
22

23
3

18

10 14
2

12 17 27
5 26
4
6

16
28
15

1
25
13 11

58847
 COLOR DIAGRAMS

150/175/200 EFI
WATER FLOW DIAGRAM
2002 MODEL YEAR

90-883728 MAY 2001 Page 8-13

150/175/200 EFI Water Flow 2002 Model Year
1. Water Inlet
2. Water Pump
3. Wall of Water - If water level height is insufficient, water pump may draw in air resulting in an overheated
engine
4. Water Tube
5. Main Water Feed to Powerhead from Water Tube
6. Water by-pass prevents air/steam pockets at top of powerhead
7. Cylinder Head Cover - Removed from head for illustration, normally part of head casting
8. Thermostats (2) 143° F (61.7° C) - If stuck closed, engine will overheat at low speed. If stuck open,
engine will not warm up at idle speed.
9. Poppet Valve - Controls water flow at high RPM. If poppet valve is stuck open at low RPM, the engine
will not reach proper operating temperature (run cold) and will run rough at idle
10. Primary water discharge into driveshaft housing.
11. Water Dump Holes for exhaust cooling (2 each) 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) - if holes are plugged, tuner pipe
will melt and bearing carrier prop shaft seals will be damaged.
12. Water Pressure Sensor
13. Check Valve for powerhead flush
14. Water passing through thermostats dump into adaptor plate, then discharges down the exhaust.
15. Tell-Tale Outlet
16. Excess water from wall of of water around exhaust bucket exits around anodes.
17. Water Exits with Exhaust Discharge
 8

6 10

11
9

4
3 2

5 17

16 58063

12 14

15

13